# Classes: Help Center > How every part of Classes (classes.bg) works: screens, buttons, fields, rules and steps, for schools and parents. Every section has a stable id and URL you can cite. Search: https://www.classes.bg/api/help/search?lang=en&q=… · One node: https://www.classes.bg/api/help/nodes/{id}?lang=en · Bulgarian: https://www.classes.bg/bg/help/llms.txt ## Getting started id: getting-started · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started For: schools, parents Signing up, logging in, roles, and finding your way around Classes on the web and in the mobile app. ### Signing up, logging in and logging out id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login For: parents, schools · In the app: / How to get into Classes for the first time or again, and how to log out. What it does: Gives you secure access to your schools, groups, payments and children. The same login works in the browser and in the mobile app. How it works: Every page in Classes needs you to be logged in. If you open an address while logged out, Classes sends you to the secure login page and then brings you back to exactly where you were heading, for example an invite link you received. The first time you log in, you go through a short registration: consents, personal details and, if you want, details of your children. The rest of Classes stays closed until you finish it. In the browser you stay logged in on that device, so you don't have to enter your details every time. In the mobile app the login screen opens in your phone's browser and always asks for your details, even if you are already logged in to Classes in that browser. If the Terms or the Privacy Policy change, the next time you log in you have to accept them again before you continue. Steps: 1. Open Classes or the link you received. 2. On the login page, enter your details or choose to log in with Google or Apple. 3. If this is your first time, complete the registration. 4. Classes takes you to the page you were trying to open, or to the start screen. Notes: - If you log in with Google or Apple, your name is taken from that account and the name fields are not shown during registration. - In a phone browser you may first be offered the mobile app. Press Continue to login to carry on in the browser. - Being returned to the link you opened works within the same browser tab. If you close the tab during registration, open the link again. FAQ: Q: Do I need a separate account for the mobile app? A: No. It is the same account, log in to the app with the same details you use in the browser. Q: I got an invite link but have to sign up first. Will I lose the link? A: No. Classes remembers the link and brings you back to it after you log in and register, as long as you stay in the same browser tab. #### Redirecting to login screen in the app id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login#getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page type: page · label: "Redirecting to login" The first screen of the mobile app when you are not logged in. What it does: Opens the secure login screen for you, without you having to look for a button. How it works: The screen counts down up to 3 seconds and then opens the login page in your phone's browser on its own. Above the card it says "Secure sign in", and the "Preparing secure redirect" box shows a countdown and a progress bar. Once you log in you are returned to the app. If nothing opens, press Log in. Below the button it says "Still here? Tap Log in and we will try again." Notes: - This screen only appears in the mobile app. In the browser the login page opens straight away. ##### Log in button id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.login-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login#getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.login-button type: button · label: "Log in" Opens the login screen straight away. What it does: Lets you skip the countdown, or try again if the login screen did not open. How it works: Stops the countdown and opens the login page in your phone's browser. ##### Light or dark theme button id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.theme-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login#getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.theme-button type: button · label: "Switch to dark theme" Changes the app theme before you log in. What it does: Lets you pick a light or dark look before you are logged in. How it works: The moon button switches to the dark theme ("Switch to dark theme") and the sun button to the light one ("Switch to light theme"). The choice is remembered on the device and still applies after you log in. ##### Change language button id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.language-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login#getting-started.sign-up-and-login.app-login-page.language-button type: button · label: "Change language" Switches the app between Bulgarian and English before you log in. What it does: Lets you read the screen in the language that suits you. How it works: The button shows the language you will switch to, EN or BG. Pressing it changes the language straight away. #### Logout button id: getting-started.sign-up-and-login.logout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/sign-up-and-login#getting-started.sign-up-and-login.logout type: button · label: "Logout" Logs you out of your account on this device. What it does: Ends your session, so the next person who opens Classes on the device has to log in with their own details. How it works: The button is at the bottom of the side menu. It is also in your profile (My Profile → Account, as Sign out), in the top bar during registration, and on the "We could not load your profile" screen (as Log out). After pressing it you are logged out and have to log in again the next time you open Classes. Notes: - On small screens during registration the button is just an icon, without text. ### Registration on first login id: getting-started.onboarding · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding For: parents, schools · In the app: / The short registration you fill in the first time you log in: consents, personal details and your children's details. What it does: Creates your Classes profile so you can join schools, pay online and receive notifications. If you are a parent, this is also where you add your children so you can enrol them in groups. How it works: Registration opens automatically the first time you log in and replaces everything else until you finish it. It has up to three steps: Let's Get Started: you accept the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy Policy. Personal Information: name, phone, date of birth (phone and date are optional) and whether you are a Parent or an Individual. Children Information: only if you chose Parent. At the end you confirm you are not a robot and your profile is created. Classes refreshes your access and takes you to the page you were trying to open, or to the start screen. If you opened a link from a school that has already added you as a member, some fields arrive filled in by that school, check them. When you finish, the group memberships, children and history the school entered are moved to your new profile. Steps: 1. Tick I agree to the Terms and Conditions and I agree to the Privacy Policy, then press Next. 2. Fill in your personal details and choose Parent or Individual. 3. If you chose Parent, press Next, fill in each child's details and tick the consent for your children's data. 4. Press Complete. 5. In the Verify You're Human window, tick the check and press Verify. Notes: - Registration always uses the light theme while you fill it in. You can change the language and log out from the top bar. - If this account is already registered, the server refuses a second registration and shows an error message. - You can change these details later from My Profile: except your date of birth. FAQ: Q: I chose Individual but I have children. Can I add them later? A: Yes. Open **My Profile** → **General Data** and add them in the **Children** section. Q: Why can't I see the name fields? A: When you log in with Google or Apple, Classes takes your name from that account and doesn't ask for it again. Q: Can I go back a step? A: Yes, with **Previous**. What you entered is kept until you close the page. #### Registration top bar id: getting-started.onboarding.top-bar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.top-bar type: section The bar with the language and logout buttons that sits above every step. What it does: Lets you change the language or log out without finishing registration. How it works: It stays visible while you scroll. Below it are the logo, the welcome text and the progress bar. ##### Language button id: getting-started.onboarding.top-bar.language · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.top-bar.language type: button · label: "Български" Switches registration between Bulgarian and English. What it does: Lets you fill in registration in the language you understand best. How it works: The button shows the language you will switch to: Български when you are in English, and English when you are in Bulgarian. Fields you already filled in are kept. On small screens only the icon is shown. ##### Logout button id: getting-started.onboarding.top-bar.logout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.top-bar.logout type: button · label: "Logout" Logs you out without finishing registration. What it does: Useful if you logged in with the wrong account or want to finish later. How it works: Logs you out. Nothing you filled in is saved, registration starts from the beginning the next time you log in. On small screens only the icon is shown. #### Progress bar id: getting-started.onboarding.progress · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.progress type: status · label: "Step {{current}} of {{total}}" Shows which registration step you are on. What it does: Gives you an idea of how much is left. How it works: Above the bar you see the step number and a percentage. While your profile is being created the bar turns green and shows 100%. #### Let's Get Started step id: getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step type: section · label: "Let's Get Started" The first step, where you accept the terms of use. What it does: Collects your required consents before you enter any personal details. How it works: There are three checkboxes. The first two are required and marked with an asterisk. The third, for marketing emails, is optional. Next stays disabled until both required boxes are ticked. ##### I agree to the Terms and Conditions checkbox id: getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.terms · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.terms type: checkbox · label: "I agree to the Terms and Conditions" Required consent to the Classes Terms and Conditions. What it does: You can't use Classes without it. How it works: Required. Your consent is saved to your profile, together with the version of the document, when you finish registration. Below the checkbox, the View Terms link opens the document in a new tab. ##### I agree to the Privacy Policy checkbox id: getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.privacy · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.privacy type: checkbox · label: "I agree to the Privacy Policy" Required consent to how Classes handles your personal data. What it does: Confirms you know how your data is used. How it works: Required, and saved to your profile with the version of the document. The View Privacy Policy link opens the document in a new tab. ##### I would like to receive marketing emails and updates checkbox id: getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.marketing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.marketing type: checkbox · label: "I would like to receive marketing emails and updates" Optional consent to marketing emails. What it does: Lets Classes email you about news and updates. How it works: Optional, you can continue without it. If you tick it, the consent is saved to your profile. ##### Next button id: getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.next · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.welcome-step.next type: button · label: "Next" Takes you to the Personal Information step. What it does: Keeps your choices and moves registration on. How it works: Only active when both required checkboxes are ticked. #### Personal Information step id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step type: section · label: "Personal Information" The step where you enter your own details. What it does: Builds the core of your profile, this is how schools you join see you. How it works: Only the name is required, the phone and date of birth are optional. Errors appear under the field as you type. Finally you choose whether you are a Parent or an Individual: that decides whether there is a children step. ##### Details filled in by the school notice id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.prefill-notice · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.prefill-notice type: message · label: "Please check these details, {{org}} filled them in for you" A yellow box saying some fields were filled in by a school. What it does: Reminds you to check what the school entered for you, because from now on this is your profile. How it works: It only appears if you opened a join link from a school that added you as a member before you had an account, and the school entered at least one of the fields. Below the title it explains that your organisation created this membership and you should correct anything that is wrong. Only fields you haven't typed yourself are filled: first name, last name, phone and date of birth. Each of them is marked with a yellow line and the text "Filled in by your organization, please check". If you log in with Google or Apple, the name from that account takes priority over the school's. Notes: - Children are not filled in here. If the school entered them, they are moved to your profile automatically when you finish, don't add them again, or you will have duplicates. - If the link is no longer active, the form is empty and nothing is moved, but registration still completes normally. ##### First Name field id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.first-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.first-name type: field · label: "First Name" Your first name. What it does: This is how schools and teachers see you. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "First name is required!" - Under 2 characters: "First name must be at least 2 characters!" - Over 50 characters: "First name must be at most 50 characters!" - Not shown if you log in with Google or Apple, the name comes from that account. ##### Last Name field id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.last-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.last-name type: field · label: "Last Name" Your surname. What it does: Together with your first name it tells you apart from people with the same name. How it works: Required during registration, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "Last name is required!" - Under 2 characters: "Last name must be at least 2 characters!" - Over 50 characters: "Last name must be at most 50 characters!" - Not shown if you log in with Google or Apple. ##### Phone Number field id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.phone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.phone type: field · label: "Phone Number" A phone number schools can reach you on. What it does: Gives the schools you join a quick way to contact you. How it works: Optional. If you fill it in, it must be between 7 and 20 characters. Only digits and the + sign can be typed, anything else is ignored. Notes: - Under 7 characters: "Phone number must be at least 7 digits!" - Over 20 characters: "Phone number must be at most 20 digits!" - Wrong format: "Please enter a valid phone number!" ##### Birth Date field id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.birth-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.birth-date type: field · label: "Birth Date" Your date of birth. What it does: Confirms you are old enough to have your own profile. How it works: Optional. If you pick a date, the calendar only allows dates after 1 January 1900 and no later than 14 years before today. Notes: - Too early: "Birth date must be after January 1, 1900!" - Too recent: a minimum-age message is shown. - Your date of birth can't be changed or added later from your profile, so check it carefully. ##### I am a choice id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.user-type · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.user-type type: select · label: "I am a" Choose whether you are a parent or signing up just for yourself. What it does: Decides whether registration asks you about children. How it works: You must pick one of the two tiles: Parent: after this step you add your children. The button at the bottom becomes Next. Individual: registration ends after this step. The button at the bottom becomes Complete. The chosen tile is highlighted. Notes: - The form won't continue until you choose. - The choice doesn't lock you in, as an Individual you can still add children later from your profile. ##### Previous button id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.previous · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.previous type: button · label: "Previous" Takes you back to the Let's Get Started step. What it does: Lets you change your consents. How it works: Disabled while your profile is being created. ##### Next / Complete button id: getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.next-or-complete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.personal-step.next-or-complete type: button · label: "Complete" Moves on to children or finishes registration. What it does: Checks the fields and takes you to the next action. How it works: If you chose Parent, the button reads Next and opens the Children Information step. If you chose Individual, it reads Complete and opens the Verify You're Human window. While your profile is being created it reads "Completing..." and is disabled. #### Children Information step id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step type: section · label: "Children Information" The step where parents add their children. What it does: Creates profiles for your children so you can enrol them in groups and pay for them. How it works: Only shown if you chose Parent. You start with one empty Child 1 card. You can add up to 5 children. For each child only the first and last name are required, while the school, date of birth and additional information are optional. The consent checkbox is required too. Notes: - If your school already entered your children and you came through its link, don't add them here, they are moved over automatically. ##### Child card id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card type: card · label: "Child {{number}}" The details for one child. What it does: Holds what a school needs to know about the child when enrolling. How it works: Each child has its own numbered card. It has two required fields (the names) and three optional ones: school, date of birth and additional information. ###### Child's First Name field id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.first-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.first-name type: field · label: "Child's First Name" The child's first name. What it does: How the school recognises the child in groups and attendance. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "Child's first name is required!" - Under 2 characters: "Child's first name must be at least 2 characters!" - Over 50 characters: "Child's first name must be at most 50 characters!" ###### Child's Last Name field id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.last-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.last-name type: field · label: "Child's Last Name" The child's surname. What it does: Helps tell apart children with the same first name. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "Child's last name is required!" - Under 2 characters: "Child's last name must be at least 2 characters!" - Over 50 characters: "Child's last name must be at most 50 characters!" ###### School Name field id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.school-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.school-name type: field · label: "School Name" The school or kindergarten the child attends. What it does: Gives the school extra information about the child. How it works: Optional. If you fill it in, it must be between 2 and 100 characters. Later, on your profile, it is shown as Education Institution. Notes: - Under 2 characters: "School name must be at least 2 characters!" - Over 100 characters: "School name must be at most 100 characters!" ###### Child's Birth Date field id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.birth-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.birth-date type: field · label: "Child's Birth Date" The child's date of birth. What it does: Lets schools check whether the child suits a group. How it works: Optional. If you pick a date, during registration the child must be between 2 and 18 years old, the calendar only offers those dates. Notes: - Younger than 2: "Child must be at least 2 years old!" - Older than 18: "Child must be at most 18 years old!" - You can add a child under 2 later from your profile, where there is no lower limit. ###### Additional information field id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.additional-info · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.additional-info type: field · label: "Additional information" A note about the child for the organisers. What it does: Lets you tell the organisers something important about the child, for example allergies, who picks them up or preferences. How it works: Optional. The field is tucked behind the Add information link, so it stays out of the way if you have nothing to add. When you open it you see a text box with a character counter. At most 200 characters are allowed. Remove information clears what you wrote and hides the field. Notes: - Over 200 characters: "Additional information can be at most 200 characters." - You can add or change it later from your profile. ###### Remove button id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.remove · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.child-card.remove type: button · label: "Remove" Removes this child's card. What it does: Lets you drop a child you added by mistake. How it works: Only shown when there is more than one child. The card is removed straight away, without confirmation. On small screens only the bin icon is shown. ##### Add Another Child button id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.add-child · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.add-child type: button · label: "Add Another Child" Adds a new empty child card. What it does: Lets you register several children at once. How it works: Each press adds one card. When you reach 5 children the button disappears and "Maximum of 5 children reached" is shown instead. ##### Children's data consent checkbox id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.parental-consent · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.parental-consent type: checkbox · label: "I consent to provide my children's data and understand it will be used to manage their activities and communication." Required parental consent for your children's data. What it does: Confirms that, as a parent, you allow your children's data to be used in Classes. How it works: Required. Complete stays disabled until it is ticked. ##### Previous button id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.previous · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.previous type: button · label: "Previous" Takes you back to Personal Information. What it does: Lets you fix your personal details. How it works: What you entered for your children is kept while you stay on the page. Disabled while your profile is being created. ##### Complete button id: getting-started.onboarding.children-step.complete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.children-step.complete type: button · label: "Complete" Finishes registration with your children's details. What it does: Checks every field and opens the last check before your profile is created. How it works: Disabled until the children's data consent is ticked, or while the last attempt showed field errors. Opens the Verify You're Human window. While your profile is being created it reads "Completing...". #### Verify You're Human window id: getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal type: modal · label: "Verify You're Human" The last check before your profile is created. What it does: Protects Classes from automated fake sign-ups. How it works: Opens after Complete. Tick the "I'm not a robot" check, and solve the picture puzzle if asked. Only then does Verify become active. After you press it the button reads "Verifying..." and your profile is created. The server checks the result again. If the check fails, an error message is shown and you need to try again. Notes: - If the check expired before you pressed Verify, tick it again. ##### Verify button id: getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal.verify · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal.verify type: button · label: "Verify" Sends your registration. What it does: Creates your Classes profile. How it works: Only active after the "I'm not a robot" check succeeds. While creation runs it reads "Verifying..." and can't be pressed again. ##### Cancel button id: getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/onboarding#getting-started.onboarding.verify-modal.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the window without sending your registration. What it does: Takes you back to the form if you want to change something. How it works: Resets the check, you have to pass it again next time. Doesn't work while your profile is being created. ### Where Classes opens after you log in id: getting-started.where-you-land · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/where-you-land For: parents, schools · In the app: / Which page you see first when you log in or open Classes. What it does: Takes you straight to where you most likely want to be: the link you opened, or your school's calendar. How it works: Classes checks in this order: You opened a specific link (an invite, a group, a school page): you go there, even if you had to log in and register first. You opened the start address and you have a school. You go to the calendar of the chosen school (the school you used last on this device, otherwise the first one you run, or the first one where you are a user). If you are an owner or have the Manage events and their sessions permission, this is the admin Calendar; otherwise, the Calendar on the school's page. You have no school at all: you go to the school search page, where you can look for one. The same page opens from Search organisations in the school picker. The next time you open Classes, it sends you straight to the page it worked out last time and then checks it still fits, redirecting you if your permissions or schools changed. Notes: - If the link you opened is broken or no longer leads anywhere, you see the start screen instead. - When you open Classes directly on a specific page, for example from a browser bookmark, that page opens without any redirect. - The logo in the menu also leads to the start address, so it takes you back to the calendar of the chosen school. FAQ: Q: Why do I see a school's calendar after logging in instead of the list of schools? A: Because you have at least one school. Classes opens the calendar of the one you picked so you see upcoming sessions straight away. You find other schools with **Search organisations**, and you switch between your schools from the school picker at the top of the menu. ### Side menu id: getting-started.navigation · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation For: parents, schools The main Classes menu: choosing a school, the pages of the chosen school, notifications, your profile and logout. What it does: Keeps everything you reach for often in one place: switching between your schools, the pages of the chosen school, notifications and your profile. How it works: On a computer the menu sits on the left and can be collapsed to icons. On a phone it is hidden and opens with the Open menu button at the top left, or by swiping right from the left edge of the screen. The menu is always about one school, the one chosen at the top. What you see under it depends on your role in that school: if you run it (as owner or staff), you see Admin Actions, the pages for managing the school; if you are a user in it, you see its pages: Calendar, Announcements, Payments, Lessons and Groups; if you are not in any group of the school yet, you only see Groups. At the bottom are the Account section with My Profile and Logout, and a box with your picture, name and email that carries the notifications bell. Notes: - On a phone the menu closes by itself when you open a page. It also closes with the X button, by tapping outside it, by swiping left or with the Escape key. - On a computer the collapsed state isn't remembered, after a reload the menu is expanded. - The chosen school is remembered on this device, even after you close the browser. When you open a link to a school's page, the menu switches to that school. #### Classes logo id: getting-started.navigation.logo · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.logo type: link The logo at the top of the menu. What it does: A quick way back to the start. How it works: Takes you to the start address, from where Classes sends you to the calendar of the chosen school or, if you don't have a school yet, to the school search. When the menu is collapsed the logo is hidden. #### Collapse and expand menu button id: getting-started.navigation.collapse · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.collapse type: button · label: "Collapse sidebar" Collapses the menu to icons or expands it again. What it does: Frees up screen space for the content. How it works: On a computer the arrows button collapses the menu ("Collapse sidebar") or expands it ("Expand sidebar"). In a collapsed menu the text appears when you hover over an icon, and counters become small badges on the icon's corner. On a phone the button is an X ("Close sidebar") that closes the menu. #### School picker id: getting-started.navigation.org-picker · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.org-picker type: menu · label: "Organisation picker" The button at the top of the menu with the logo and name of the chosen school. What it does: Lets you switch between your schools, create a new school or search for another one. How it works: Under the school's name it says Switch organisation. Pressing it opens a list of your schools, split in two: My organisations, the schools you run, tagged Administrator (owner) or Staff; Organisations I attend, the schools where you are a user. The chosen school has a check mark. When you pick another one, the whole menu under the button changes to it. If you are on a school's page at that moment, the page of the new school opens. The list closes with the Escape key or by tapping outside it. If you don't have any schools yet, the list reads "You have no organisations yet." Notes: - At first the last school you used is chosen. If there isn't one, the first school you run is chosen, otherwise the first one where you are a user. ##### Organisation settings id: getting-started.navigation.org-picker.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.org-picker.settings type: menu-item · label: "Organisation settings" · permissions: Organization.Edit, Events.Manage Opens the settings of the chosen school. What it does: Takes you to the school's settings: profile, rooms, event colours and more. How it works: Only shown if you run the chosen school and are its owner or have the Edit organisation profile or Manage events and their sessions permission. The settings aren't in the list of admin actions, they open only from here. ##### New organisation id: getting-started.navigation.org-picker.create · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.org-picker.create type: menu-item · label: "New organisation" Opens the page for creating a school. What it does: Lets you create your own school in Classes. How it works: Always near the bottom of the list. It takes you to the page for creating a school. ##### Search organisations id: getting-started.navigation.org-picker.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.org-picker.search type: menu-item · label: "Search organisations" Opens the school search. What it does: Lets you find a new school and join it. How it works: Always near the bottom of the list. It takes you to the school search page. #### School pages for users id: getting-started.navigation.member-nav · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.member-nav type: section The rows under the school picker when you are a user in the school rather than running it. What it does: Open the school pages you use every day in one press. How it works: The rows are the same as the tabs of the school's page: Calendar and Announcements are shown if you are in at least one group of the school; Payments and Lessons are also for users in at least one group; Groups is always shown, even if you are not in any group yet. The row of the page you are on is highlighted. School owners and staff don't see these rows, they see Admin Actions instead. ##### Payments and the choices counter id: getting-started.navigation.member-nav.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.member-nav.payments type: menu-item · label: "Payments" Opens your payments in the school. What it does: Shows with a number how many choices you still have to make. How it works: The number next to the row is the count of choices (for example, of a plan option) the school has offered you that you haven't made yet. Above 99 it shows "99+". When there is nothing to choose, there is no number. In a collapsed menu the number is a small badge on the icon's corner. #### Admin Actions section id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions type: section · label: "Admin Actions" The pages for managing the chosen school. What it does: Takes owners and staff to the school's calendar, attendance, groups, users, finance, announcements and help. How it works: Only shown if you run the chosen school, as owner or staff. The rows open the admin area for exactly that school. Which rows you see depends on your permissions: some are for every staff member, others need a specific permission. A row you have no permission for is simply missing. ##### Calendar (admin) id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.calendar type: menu-item · label: "Calendar" · permissions: Events.Manage Opens the calendar for managing classes. What it does: Takes you to scheduling events and classes. How it works: Shown if you are the owner or have the Manage events and their sessions permission. ##### Attendance id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.attendance type: menu-item · label: "Attendance" Opens the school's attendance. What it does: Takes you to marking attendance. How it works: Shown to every owner and staff member of the school. ##### Groups (admin) id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.groups type: menu-item · label: "Groups" · permissions: Groups.Manage Opens managing the school's groups. What it does: Takes you to creating, editing and deleting groups. How it works: Shown if you are the owner or have the Manage groups permission. ##### Users and the requests counter id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.users · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.users type: menu-item · label: "Users" Opens the school's user list. What it does: Shows with a number how many join requests are waiting for a decision. How it works: Shown to every owner and staff member. The number next to it is the count of pending group join requests across all schools you manage. If you are staff with access to certain groups only, only their requests are counted. Above 99 it shows "99+". With no pending requests there is no number. ##### Finance id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.income · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.income type: menu-item · label: "Finance" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Opens the school's finance. What it does: Takes you to the school's charges, payments and plans. How it works: Shown if you are the owner or have the View financials permission. ##### Announcements (admin) id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.announcements type: menu-item · label: "Announcements" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Opens the school's announcements. What it does: Takes you to publishing and managing announcements for users. How it works: Shown if you are the owner or have the Publish announcements permission. ##### Help desk and the replies counter id: getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.help · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.admin-actions.help type: menu-item · label: "Help desk" Opens the school's tickets with the Classes team. What it does: Shows with a number how many replies from the Classes team you haven't opened yet. How it works: Shown to every owner and staff member, no permission is needed. The number next to it is the count of unread replies from the team across the school's tickets. When the team replies or resolves a ticket, you also get a notification. #### Account section in the menu id: getting-started.navigation.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.settings type: section · label: "Account" The bottom part of the menu with your profile and logout, and the notifications bell. What it does: Keeps your personal things and logout in one place. How it works: Always at the bottom of the menu, under the school's pages. Language and theme are no longer in the menu, you change them from your profile (My Profile → Language and Theme). ##### Notifications bell and the unread counter id: getting-started.navigation.settings.notifications · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.settings.notifications type: button · label: "Notifications" The bell on the right of the box with your picture and name at the bottom of the menu. What it does: Shows with a number how many new notifications you have and opens them for viewing. How it works: The number on the bell is the count of unread items among your latest 20 notifications. Above 99 it shows "99+". Pressing it opens or closes the Notifications panel. In a collapsed menu on a computer the bell isn't visible, expand the menu to use it. On a phone the number also shows on the Open menu button, because the bell is inside the menu. Notes: - The counter only looks at your latest 20 notifications, so with many unread it can show fewer. ###### Notifications panel id: getting-started.navigation.settings.notifications.panel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.settings.notifications.panel type: drawer · label: "Notifications" The list of your latest 20 notifications. What it does: Lets you read what happened in your schools and groups. How it works: On a computer it opens next to the menu; on a phone, in the lower half of the menu. Each notification has a title, text and a date. Unread ones are tinted, with a bold title and a dot in front of it. As soon as you open the panel, the visible unread notifications are marked as read and the counter goes down. While the panel is open the list refreshes every 20 seconds; while it is closed, every minute. The arrow button in the top right corner closes it. Some notifications lead to a page: for example, a reply from the Classes team opens the ticket in Help desk, and a notice that a plan choice was offered to you opens the school's payments. Such notifications are buttons, pressing one closes the panel and opens the page. Notes: - With no notifications the panel reads "You have no new notifications." - Notifications without a linked page only describe what happened. - You choose which kinds of notifications you get from My Profile → Notifications. ##### My Profile id: getting-started.navigation.settings.my-profile · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.settings.my-profile type: menu-item · label: "My Profile" Opens your profile. What it does: Takes you to your personal details, children, payments and settings. How it works: Opens your profile. On a computer you first see General Data; on a phone, a list of the sections. The row is highlighted while you are on your profile. ##### Logout id: getting-started.navigation.settings.logout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.settings.logout type: menu-item · label: "Logout" Logs you out. What it does: Ends your session on this device. How it works: Logs you out straight away, without confirmation. The next time you open Classes you have to log in again. #### Your picture, name and email id: getting-started.navigation.account-footer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/navigation#getting-started.navigation.account-footer type: card The box at the bottom of the menu that shows which account you are logged in with. What it does: Lets you quickly check you are in the right account and open your profile. How it works: The picture comes from the account you logged in with. Pressing the picture or the name opens your profile. On the right is the notifications bell. When the menu is collapsed only the picture is shown. ### Top buttons on phones id: getting-started.mobile-header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-header For: parents, schools The round buttons at the top of the screen on phones and tablets: the menu and the page's quick actions. What it does: Gives you the menu and the most important actions of the page without taking space from the content. How it works: Shown on narrow screens, in a phone browser and in the mobile app. It isn't there on a computer, where the menu sits on the left. It isn't a bar, but a few translucent round buttons floating over the page. The page scrolls underneath them and they don't hide. The menu button is always on the left, and on the right some pages show their own quick buttons, for example the calendar and the admin pages. #### Open menu button id: getting-started.mobile-header.open-menu · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-header#getting-started.mobile-header.open-menu type: button · label: "Open menu" The round three-line button at the top left. What it does: Opens the side menu with the school picker, the school's pages, your profile and notifications. How it works: The menu slides in from the left over the page. Swiping right from the left edge of the screen does the same. If you have unread notifications, their count shows as a badge on the button, and the bell is inside the menu. #### Page quick buttons id: getting-started.mobile-header.page-actions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-header#getting-started.mobile-header.page-actions type: button The round buttons on the right that some pages show. What it does: Give you the page's most common actions in one tap. How it works: Each page decides which buttons to show. For example, the school's calendar shows Filters (with a number when filters are on) and, if you may manage events, Add Event. On a computer the same actions are in the bar above the content. Pages without such actions show only the menu button. ### Bottom bar on phones id: getting-started.mobile-tab-bar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-tab-bar For: parents, schools The bar with up to four buttons at the bottom of the screen on phones, for the most used pages of the chosen school. What it does: Lets you move between the school's main pages in one tap, without opening the menu. How it works: Shown only on phones and tablets, on a computer the pages are in the menu on the left. The bar shows the first four pages you can open for the chosen school: If you run the school: Calendar, then Announcements (or Attendance if you may not publish announcements), then Groups (or Users if you may not manage groups), then Finance. A page you have no permission for is skipped and not replaced by another one. If you are a user: Calendar, Announcements, Lessons and Payments. Groups stays in the menu. If you are not in any group yet: only Groups. The current page is highlighted. Users carries a badge with the number of pending join requests. Everything else is in the menu, which opens from the Open menu button at the top. ### Language and theme id: getting-started.language-and-theme · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/language-and-theme For: parents, schools How to switch Classes between Bulgarian and English, and between the light and dark theme. What it does: Lets you use Classes in the language that suits you and with the look that is easier on your eyes. How it works: Language. Classes is available in Bulgarian and English. On first opening it uses your browser or phone language if it is one of the two, otherwise Bulgarian. You can change it from: My Profile → Language: choose Bulgarian or English. The language changes straight away and is saved to your account, you don't have to save; the top bar during registration, and the login screen in the app. When you open your profile, Classes switches to the language saved on your account if it is currently in the other one. Theme. My Profile → Theme: choose Light or Dark. The look changes straight away. The choice is kept on the device, not on your account, another phone or computer may use a different theme. You can also change the theme on the login screen in the app. Notes: - Language and theme are no longer buttons in the side menu, they are in your profile. - During registration Classes always uses the light theme. - If the theme or language resets after you clear your browser data, choose them again. FAQ: Q: I changed the language, but on my other device Classes is in the other language. Why? A: Each device remembers the language it last used. Open **My Profile** on the other device, Classes will switch to the language saved on your account. ### The mobile app id: getting-started.mobile-app · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app For: parents, schools The Classes phone app, the offer to open it from the browser, and returning to it after a payment. What it does: Gives you Classes as an app on your phone, faster, with phone notifications, and with the same account as in the browser. How it works: The app has the same pages as the website and uses the same account. Anything you do in one shows up in the other. If you open Classes in the browser on an iPhone, iPad or Android phone, Classes offers to continue in the app, before login with a separate screen, and after login with a panel at the bottom of the screen. This only happens when the app is available in the App Store and Google Play. The first time you open the app, your phone asks whether Classes may send you notifications. If you allow it, notifications arrive on your phone. If the App Store or Google Play has a newer version of the app, the old version shows an Update required screen and doesn't open until you update. Notes: - The offer to open the app isn't shown on a computer or inside the app itself. - If you declined phone notifications, you can allow them later in your phone's settings for the Classes app. FAQ: Q: Do I need a new account for the app? A: No. Log in with the same details you use in the browser. Q: I pressed Open app but it sent me to the store. Why? A: The app didn't open within about a second and a half, usually because it isn't installed. Classes sends you to the App Store or Google Play so you can download it. Q: My app shows "Update required". What do I do? A: Press **Update now**. The button opens the Classes page in the App Store or Google Play, where you update the app. Once updated, it opens normally. The check runs on launch and every time you return to the app, so it is enough to open it again. #### Get the best experience in our app panel id: getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner type: drawer · label: "Get the best experience in our app" A panel at the bottom of the screen offering to open Classes in the app. What it does: Lets you continue in the app on the same page you are on in the browser. How it works: Shown when you are logged in and browsing Classes in a phone browser. Below the title it says "Open Classes in the app for a faster, smoother experience." If you decline, it isn't shown again for 7 days on that device, neither the panel nor the pre-login screen. ##### Open app button id: getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.open-app · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.open-app type: button · label: "Open app" Opens the same page in the app. What it does: Moves you from the browser to the app without losing your place. How it works: If the app is installed it opens on the page you were on. If nothing opens within about a second and a half, Classes sends you to the App Store or Google Play. ##### Download app button id: getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.download-app · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.download-app type: button · label: "Download app" Opens your phone's app store. What it does: Takes you straight to the Classes page in the store so you can install it. How it works: On iPhone and iPad it opens the App Store; on Android, Google Play. ##### Continue on web button id: getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.continue-on-web · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.open-in-app-banner.continue-on-web type: button · label: "Continue on web" Closes the panel and keeps you in the browser. What it does: Lets you use Classes in the browser without the app. How it works: The panel closes and isn't shown for 7 days on that device. The X button in the panel's top right corner does the same. #### Pre-login screen on phones id: getting-started.mobile-app.pre-login-screen · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.pre-login-screen type: page · label: "Get the best experience in our app" The screen you see in a phone browser before you log in. What it does: Lets you choose the app before being sent to login in the browser. How it works: It has the same title and text as the panel after login, and three buttons: Open app, Download app and Continue to login. The last one opens the login page in the browser and hides the offer for 7 days on that device. #### Taking you back to the app page id: getting-started.mobile-app.return-to-app · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.return-to-app type: page · label: "Taking you back to the app" A browser page that returns you to the app after an outside step, such as an online payment. What it does: Brings you back to the right place in the app once you have finished something in the browser. How it works: It opens by itself after steps that go through the browser, for example paying by card from the app. The page tries once to open the app on its own. If the app doesn't open, it says "You're all set. If the app doesn't open automatically, use the button below." and offers two buttons: Return to app: tries again to open the app on the right page. Continue in the browser: opens the same page in the browser. Notes: - The page doesn't require login and shows no personal data. #### Phone notifications permission id: getting-started.mobile-app.push-permission · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.push-permission type: notification Your phone asking whether Classes may send you notifications. What it does: Lets you get notifications on your phone even when the app is closed. How it works: It appears in the mobile app after you log in. If you allow it, the phone is registered for Classes notifications. If the app is open when a notification arrives, it is shown as a short message at the top of the screen. Which kinds of notifications you get is set in My Profile → Notifications. #### Update required screen id: getting-started.mobile-app.force-update · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/mobile-app#getting-started.mobile-app.force-update type: page · label: "Update required" The screen that stops an outdated version of the mobile app. What it does: Stops you from using an old version of the app that might not work with the current Classes. How it works: Shown in the app when the store has a newer version, any newer version is mandatory. The screen says a new version is available and has an Update now button that opens the app's page in the App Store or Google Play. There is no way to close the screen or get around it until you update. The check runs on launch and every time you return to the app. On Android, Google Play may also offer its own full-screen update. If the phone is offline or the store doesn't answer, the app opens normally. Notes: - In the browser this screen is never shown. ### Error pages and messages id: getting-started.error-pages · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages For: parents, schools What the error screens in Classes mean and what to do when you see one. What it does: Explains what happened and gives you a quick way out, back to the start, a reload or another try. How it works: Classes shows different screens depending on the problem: 404: the page doesn't exist. 500: something in Classes broke while you were browsing. We could not load your profile: Classes can't fetch your profile, usually because of the connection or an expired session. An error message at the top of the screen, the server refused a specific action. If the problem keeps happening, contact the Classes team at the email shown on the page. #### 404 - The page can't be found page id: getting-started.error-pages.not-found · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages#getting-started.error-pages.not-found type: page · label: "The page can't be found" Shown when an address doesn't lead to a page in Classes. What it does: Tells you what you were looking for doesn't exist and takes you back to the start. How it works: Above the message it says "Oops!". It appears for a mistyped or outdated address, and when you open the profile of a user who doesn't exist or can't be loaded. The Go to homepage link takes you to the start. Notes: - If you got here from a link someone sent you, ask them to check it. #### Something went wrong page (500) id: getting-started.error-pages.internal-error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages#getting-started.error-pages.internal-error type: page · label: "Something went wrong" Shown when a page in Classes hits an unexpected error. What it does: Saves you from a blank screen and gives you a way to carry on. How it works: It shows a large "500", the title "Something went wrong" and a line with a contact email. The menu stays visible so you can go elsewhere. Go to homepage: takes you to the start. Refresh page: reloads the page; often that is enough. #### We could not load your profile screen id: getting-started.error-pages.profile-load-error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages#getting-started.error-pages.profile-load-error type: page · label: "We could not load your profile" Shown instead of Classes when your profile can't be loaded after login. What it does: Doesn't send you back to registration, it lets you try again or log in afresh. How it works: Usually the cause is a temporary connection problem or an expired session. Your profile is not lost. Try again: loads your profile again. Log out: logs you out; then log in again. This helps when your session has expired and retrying keeps failing. Notes: - If the screen keeps appearing, write to the email given in the text. #### Candidate Data Required window id: getting-started.error-pages.registration-required · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages#getting-started.error-pages.registration-required type: modal · label: "Candidate Data Required" A window that blocks school pages if your profile isn't filled in. What it does: Tells you that you need a completed profile before browsing or creating schools. How it works: It can appear on the school search page, on a school page or when creating a school, if your account hasn't finished registration. The Become Candidate button opens your profile. Closing the window takes you back to the start. Notes: - You normally don't see this window, because registration on first login is required. If it does appear, log out and log in again, Classes will take you to registration. #### Error message after an action id: getting-started.error-pages.error-message · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/getting-started/error-pages#getting-started.error-pages.error-message type: message A red pop-up message when an action fails. What it does: Tells you why the server refused what you tried, for example an invalid field or an action you aren't allowed to do. How it works: It appears briefly at the top of the screen. The text comes straight from the server and is sometimes in English even when Classes is in Bulgarian. Nothing is saved, fix what it points out and try again. Notes: - If your permissions in a school change while you are on the page, Classes updates what you can see without a reload. ## Profile & settings id: account · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account For: schools, parents Your personal details, your children, language, notifications and deleting your account. ### Your profile id: account.profile-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/profile-page For: parents, schools · In the app: /users/:userId The page with your personal details, children, payments and settings, and what someone else's profile looks like. What it does: Brings everything about you in Classes into one place: who you are, who your children are, what you have paid and how you want to be notified. How it works: Open your profile from My Profile in the menu, or by pressing your picture and name at the bottom of the menu. Your own profile is one place for settings, arranged in groups: Profile (General Data and Payment History), Preferences (Language and Theme), Notifications and Account. On a computer the sections are in a menu on the left, and the chosen one opens on the right, General Data at first. On a phone you first see a list of the sections, each with its current value, and every section opens on its own screen with a Profile link to go back. When you open someone else's profile, for example, school staff opening it from the user list, you only see their name, personal details and children, with no editing. Notes: - If the profile doesn't exist or can't be loaded, you see "404 - The page can't be found". - If you open a section such as Payment History or a setting on someone else's profile, Classes sends you back to that person's profile. - The old Active Plans and Requested Invoices sections are no longer in the profile. Old links to them open your profile, and your plans and charges are in the Payments tab of each school's page. #### Profile menu id: account.profile-page.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/profile-page#account.profile-page.tabs type: menu The sections of your profile, arranged in groups. What it does: Lets you switch between personal details, payments and settings. How it works: On a computer it is the menu on the left, the active section is highlighted. On a phone it is the list you see first. Each section has its own address, so you can bookmark it. On someone else's profile there is no menu. ##### General Data tab id: account.profile-page.tabs.general-data · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/profile-page#account.profile-page.tabs.general-data type: tab · label: "General Data" The main section with your name, contacts and children. What it does: Shows your personal information and children and lets you edit them. How it works: It has two sections one under the other: Personal Information and Children. It opens by default on a computer. ##### Payment History tab id: account.profile-page.tabs.payment-history · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/profile-page#account.profile-page.tabs.payment-history type: tab · label: "Payment History" All your payments to schools, in one place. What it does: Lets you check when and what you paid. How it works: A list of all payments from all your schools and children, newest first, with no filters to pick. Each row shows what the payment was for, the date, the payment method, the amount and, for a completed payment, a View Receipt button. The child's and the school's names show only when you have children or more than one school. Only visible on your own profile. See the paying for classes section for details. #### Name and picture box id: account.profile-page.header-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/profile-page#account.profile-page.header-card type: card The box with picture, name and email at the top of the profile. What it does: Shows at a glance whose profile this is. How it works: On your own profile the box sits above the menu (on a phone, above the list of sections): the picture is the one from the account you log in with, and your email is under the name. On someone else's profile the box is at the top of the page, there is a circle with their initials instead of a picture, and the country only shows if it is filled in. Notes: - Your picture and email can't be changed in Classes, they come from the account you log in with. ### Changing your personal information id: account.personal-information · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information For: parents, schools · In the app: /users/:userId How to edit your name and phone in your profile. What it does: Lets you keep your details accurate so schools can recognise and contact you. How it works: The Personal Information section is in My Profile → General Data. It shows your first name, last name and phone. An empty field shows as a dash. Press Edit to turn the values into fields. You save with Save Changes or cancel with Cancel. The server checks the changes. If something is wrong, an error message appears at the top of the screen and the old data stays. Steps: 1. Open My Profile → General Data. 2. In the Personal Information section press Edit. 3. Change the fields. 4. Press Save Changes. Notes: - Your date of birth, country and email can't be changed from here. - The form closes right after Save Changes. If the change is rejected, you will see the old values and an error message. - On someone else's profile the section is read-only and the Edit button is missing. FAQ: Q: How do I change my date of birth? A: You can't in the profile, the date is only entered during registration, where it is optional. Q: How do I change my email? A: Your email comes from the account you log in with and isn't edited in Classes. #### Personal Information section id: account.personal-information.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section type: section · label: "Personal Information" The box with your core details on **General Data**. What it does: Shows the details schools see you by and lets you change them. How it works: Fields are laid out two per row. In edit mode each one becomes a text field with its name as a hint. ##### Edit button id: account.personal-information.section.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.edit type: button · label: "Edit" Opens your personal information for editing. What it does: Turns the values into fields you can change. How it works: Only visible on your own profile. While you edit, Save Changes and Cancel take its place. ###### Save Changes button id: account.personal-information.section.edit.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.edit.save type: button · label: "Save Changes" Saves the changes to your personal information. What it does: Updates your profile with the new details. How it works: Closes the form and sends the changes. On success the new values show straight away. On a phone it is just a tick icon. ###### Cancel button id: account.personal-information.section.edit.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.edit.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the form without saving. What it does: Discards everything you typed. How it works: Returns the fields to the last saved values. On a phone it is just an X icon. ##### First Name field id: account.personal-information.section.first-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.first-name type: field · label: "First Name" Your first name. What it does: This is how schools and teachers see you. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Checked when you save. Notes: - In the Bulgarian interface this field is labelled „Потребител“, but it holds your first name. ##### Last Name field id: account.personal-information.section.last-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.last-name type: field · label: "Last Name" Your surname. What it does: Helps tell you apart from people with the same name. How it works: Can be left empty. If filled in, it must be between 2 and 50 characters. ##### Phone field id: account.personal-information.section.phone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/personal-information#account.personal-information.section.phone type: field · label: "Phone" The phone number schools can reach you on. What it does: Gives your schools an up-to-date way to contact you. How it works: Optional. If filled in, it must be between 7 and 20 characters. Checked on save. ### Managing children on your profile id: account.children · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children For: parents · In the app: /users/:userId How to add, change or remove a child from your profile. What it does: The children on your profile are the ones you can enrol in groups and see payments for. Here you keep their details up to date and can leave a note for the organisers. How it works: The Children section is in My Profile → General Data, under the personal information. Below the title it says "The children you enrol in groups and pay for." Each child is a row with a circle of initials and the name, and below it the school and date of birth if filled in, and the additional information if there is any. The Add Child button opens an empty form under the list. The pencil icon (Edit) on the child's row turns it into a form. The bin icon (Delete) removes the child after confirmation. On a computer the two icons appear when you hover over the row. Only one form can be open at a time, starting a new addition closes editing and the other way round. Steps: 1. Open My Profile → General Data. 2. In the Children section press Add Child. 3. Fill in First Name and Last Name, and optionally Education Institution, Date of Birth and Additional information. 4. Press Save Changes. Notes: - Only the first and last name are required. The education institution, date of birth and additional information are optional. - A child with payments or charges can't be deleted, the server refuses and shows an error message. - There is no limit on the number of children in your profile. The limit of 5 only applies during registration. - Other people who open your profile see the Children section only if you have children added, and can't change it. FAQ: Q: Why can't I delete a child? A: Because there are payments or charges for them in some school. Those records have to stay linked to the child. Q: My child turned 18. What happens? A: If you filled in a date of birth, it has to be within the last 18 years. If you try to edit a child who is already 18 or older, the form won't accept the date. Q: Where do I write about my child's allergies? A: In the child's **Additional information**. The school's organisers can see this note. #### Children section id: account.children.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section type: section · label: "Children" The list of your children on **General Data**. What it does: Shows every child on your profile and the actions for them. How it works: If you have no children added, it reads "No children added yet." Next to the title there is a counter with the number of children. On someone else's profile without children the section isn't shown. ##### Add Child button id: account.children.section.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add type: button · label: "Add Child" Opens the form for a new child. What it does: Lets you add a child you didn't enter during registration. How it works: It sits under the list of children. Only visible on your own profile, and it is hidden while the add form is open. ###### New child form id: account.children.section.add.form · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form type: section The five fields for the new child's details. What it does: Collects what schools need so you can enrol the child. How it works: Only the first and last name are required. Errors appear under the field as you type. Save Changes adds the child and closes the form. Cancel closes the form and clears the fields. ###### First Name field id: account.children.section.add.form.first-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.first-name type: field · label: "First Name" The child's first name. What it does: How the school recognises the child. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "First name is required." - Under 2 characters: "First name must be at least 2 characters." - Over 50 characters: "First name must be at most 50 characters." ###### Last Name field id: account.children.section.add.form.last-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.last-name type: field · label: "Last Name" The child's surname. What it does: Helps tell apart children with the same name. How it works: Required, between 2 and 50 characters. Notes: - Empty: "Last name is required." - Under 2 characters: "Last name must be at least 2 characters." - Over 50 characters: "Last name must be at most 50 characters." ###### Education Institution field id: account.children.section.add.form.education-institution · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.education-institution type: field · label: "Education Institution" The child's school or kindergarten. What it does: Gives the school extra information about the child. How it works: Optional. If you fill it in, it must be between 2 and 100 characters. Notes: - Under 2 characters: "Education institution must be at least 2 characters." - Over 100 characters: "Education institution must be at most 100 characters." ###### Date of Birth field id: account.children.section.add.form.date-of-birth · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.date-of-birth type: field · label: "Date of Birth" The child's date of birth. What it does: Lets schools check whether the child suits a group. How it works: Optional. If you pick a date, the child must be under 18 and the date can't be in the future. The calendar only offers dates between 18 years ago and today. Notes: - Future date: "Date of birth cannot be in the future." - 18 or older: "Child must be younger than 18 years old." ###### Additional information field id: account.children.section.add.form.additional-info · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.additional-info type: field · label: "Additional information" A note about the child for the organisers. What it does: Lets you tell the organisers something important about the child, for example allergies, who picks them up or preferences. How it works: Optional. The field is tucked behind the Add information link. When you open it you see a text box with a character counter, at most 200 characters. Remove information clears what you wrote and hides the field. The information you filled in shows under the child's name in the list. Notes: - Over 200 characters: "Additional information can be at most 200 characters." ###### Save Changes button id: account.children.section.add.form.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.save type: button · label: "Save Changes" Adds the child to your profile. What it does: Saves the new child so you can enrol them in groups. How it works: Checks the fields. On success the child appears in the list and the form closes. If the server refuses, the form stays open and an error message shows at the top. On a phone it is just a tick icon. ###### Cancel button id: account.children.section.add.form.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.add.form.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the form without adding a child. What it does: Abandons adding. How it works: Clears the fields and closes the form. On a phone it is just an X icon. ##### Child row id: account.children.section.child-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.child-card type: card One child's details on your profile. What it does: Shows what schools know about the child and gives you the buttons to change it. How it works: Shows a circle with the initials, the child's name, and below it the school and date of birth if filled in, and the additional information if there is any. On your own profile the Edit and Delete icons are on the right. ###### Edit button id: account.children.section.child-card.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.child-card.edit type: button · label: "Edit" Turns the child's card into a form. What it does: Lets you fix the child's details. How it works: Opens the same four fields with the current values and the same rules as when adding. Save Changes saves and closes the form; Cancel restores the old values. Opening it closes the add form if it is open. ###### Delete button (bin) id: account.children.section.child-card.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.child-card.delete type: button · label: "Delete" Removes the child from your profile. What it does: Lets you remove a child added by mistake or no longer needed. How it works: Opens a confirmation window. The child is only removed after you confirm. Notes: - If the child has payments or charges, deletion is refused and an error message shows at the top. ###### Delete window (confirmation) id: account.children.section.child-card.delete.confirm · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/children#account.children.section.child-card.delete.confirm type: modal · label: "Are you sure you want to delete this child?" Confirmation before the child is removed. What it does: Protects you from deleting by accident. How it works: Yes, delete removes the child, while the request runs the button is disabled. On success the window closes and the card disappears. Cancel closes the window with no change. ### Profile settings id: account.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings For: parents, schools · In the app: /users/:userId/settings The settings sections of your profile: language, theme, notifications and account. What it does: Lets you pick the language and theme of Classes, which notifications you get, log out and delete your account. How it works: Open My Profile. The settings are in the groups Preferences (Language and Theme), Notifications and Account. They are only visible on your own profile. Language and Theme apply the moment you pick them, you don't have to save. Notifications are saved separately: as soon as you change a switch, an Unsaved changes bar with Discard and Save buttons appears at the bottom. Account holds Sign out and the danger zone for deleting your account. Steps: 1. Open My Profile. 2. Choose Language, Theme, Notifications or Account. 3. For notifications, change the switches and press Save. Notes: - When you open your profile, Classes switches to the language saved on your account if it is currently in the other one. - If you leave the page without saving the notification changes, they are lost. #### Language section id: account.settings.language · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.language type: section · label: "Language" The choice of your account language. What it does: Decides which language Classes is in for you. How it works: Below the title it says "Choose the language used across the app." There are two rows, Bulgarian and English. The selected one is marked. Pressing a row changes the language of Classes straight away and saves it to your account. If saving fails, the language goes back to the previous one. By default an account is set to Bulgarian. Notes: - You can also change the language from the top bar during registration and on the login screen in the app. ##### Bulgarian row id: account.settings.language.bulgarian · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.language.bulgarian type: button · label: "Bulgarian" Selects Bulgarian. What it does: Classes is in Bulgarian. How it works: Marked when selected. Applied straight away. ##### English row id: account.settings.language.english · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.language.english type: button · label: "English" Selects English. What it does: Classes is in English. How it works: Marked when selected. Applied straight away. #### Theme section id: account.settings.theme · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.theme type: section · label: "Theme" The choice between a light and a dark look. What it does: Decides how Classes looks on this device. How it works: Below the title it says "How the app looks on this device." There are two rows, Light and Dark. The look changes straight away. The choice is kept on the device, not on your account. ##### Light row id: account.settings.theme.light · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.theme.light type: button · label: "Light" Switches to the light look. What it does: Classes has a light background. How it works: Marked when selected. Applied straight away. ##### Dark row id: account.settings.theme.dark · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.theme.dark type: button · label: "Dark" Switches to the dark look. What it does: Classes has a dark background, easier on the eyes in the evening. How it works: Marked when selected. Applied straight away. #### Save button for notifications id: account.settings.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.save type: button · label: "Save" Saves your notification changes. What it does: Makes the chosen switches stick to your account on every device. How it works: It sits in the Unsaved changes bar that appears at the bottom as soon as you change a switch in Notifications. It is disabled while saving is in progress. Next to it is Discard, which returns the switches to what was last saved. Language and theme don't go through it, they apply straight away. #### Account section id: account.settings.account · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.account type: section · label: "Account" Signing out and deleting the account. What it does: Keeps the actions for your session and for the account itself. How it works: Below the title it says "Your session on this device, and the account itself." On a computer it is a section of its own; on a phone the rows are right in the list of sections. It has the Sign out row and, in a separate red box Danger Zone, the Delete Account button. ##### Sign out row id: account.settings.account.logout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/settings#account.settings.account.logout type: button · label: "Sign out" Logs you out of your account on this device. What it does: Ends your session, so the next person who opens Classes has to log in with their own details. How it works: Below the name it says "End your session on this device." You are logged out straight away, without confirmation. ### Which notifications you get id: account.notification-preferences · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences For: parents, schools · In the app: /users/:userId/settings/notifications How to switch the individual kinds of notifications on or off in **Notifications** on your profile. What it does: Lets you get only the notifications you care about, for example, stop session reminders but keep new charge notifications. How it works: All notifications are on by default. Each kind has its own switch with a short description. The kinds are arranged in groups, and each group also has a master switch next to its title: it is on while at least one kind in it is on, switching it off turns every kind in the group off, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. When you switch a kind off, Classes stops sending it to you: it doesn't show up in the Notifications panel, doesn't arrive as a phone notification and isn't sent by email. Notifications you already received stay. Changes aren't saved straight away. As soon as you change a switch, an Unsaved changes bar with Discard and Save buttons appears at the bottom of the screen. Save stores the changes on your account and they apply on every device, while Discard returns the switches to what was last saved. On a phone, the Notifications row in the list of sections shows how many kinds are on, for example "5 of 9". Steps: 1. Open My Profile → Notifications. 2. Switch off or on the notifications you want to change. 3. Press Save. Notes: - The Organizer Notifications section is only shown if you own or work for a school. - If school staff manually send a reminder for a class, it reaches you even if reminders are off. - If you leave the page without pressing Save, your changes are lost. - If you don't get notifications on your phone, check that you allowed notifications for the Classes app in your phone's settings. FAQ: Q: I switched a notification off, but I still get something similar. Why? A: Check that you pressed **Save**. If it is a class reminder, school staff may have sent it manually, such reminders always reach you. #### Notifications section id: account.notification-preferences.member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member type: section · label: "Notifications" The notifications you get as a school member or parent. What it does: Lets you decide which events in your schools and groups you want to hear about. How it works: Below the title it says "Choose which notifications you'd like to receive." The section is always shown and has five groups: Announcements, Classes & Events, Groups & Membership, Payments and Organization. ##### Announcements group id: account.notification-preferences.member.announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.announcements type: card · label: "Announcements" Notifications about announcements in your schools and groups. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "New Announcements", "Comments on Your Announcements". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### New Announcements toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.announcements.new-announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.announcements.new-announcements type: toggle · label: "New Announcements" New announcements posted in your groups or organizations. What it does: You find out straight away when a school or group you belong to posts an announcement. How it works: Below the name it says "New announcements posted in your groups or organizations." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Comments on Your Announcements toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.announcements.announcement-comments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.announcements.announcement-comments type: toggle · label: "Comments on Your Announcements" Someone commented on an announcement you posted. What it does: You find out when someone replies to an announcement you posted. How it works: Below the name it says "Someone commented on an announcement you posted." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Classes & Events group id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events type: card · label: "Classes & Events" Notifications about your class schedule. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "New Classes Scheduled", "Class Cancellations", "Removed Classes", "Class Reschedules", "Upcoming Class Reminders", "Published Lessons", "Shared Notes". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### New Classes Scheduled toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.event-scheduled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.event-scheduled type: toggle · label: "New Classes Scheduled" A new class or event has been scheduled. What it does: You hear about a new session or event in your groups without checking the calendar. How it works: Below the name it says "A new class or event has been scheduled." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Class Cancellations toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-cancellations · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-cancellations type: toggle · label: "Class Cancellations" A class you're enrolled in was cancelled or reinstated. What it does: You learn in time that a session was cancelled or is back on. How it works: Below the name it says "A class you're enrolled in was cancelled or reinstated." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Removed Classes toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.event-removed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.event-removed type: toggle · label: "Removed Classes" A class you're signed up for was removed from the schedule. What it does: You find out that a class you are signed up for is no longer on the schedule. How it works: Below the name it says "A class you're signed up for was removed from the schedule." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Class Reschedules toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-reschedules · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-reschedules type: toggle · label: "Class Reschedules" A class you're enrolled in was moved to a new time. What it does: You learn when a session moves to another day or time. How it works: Below the name it says "A class you're enrolled in was moved to a new time." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Upcoming Class Reminders toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-reminders · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.class-reminders type: toggle · label: "Upcoming Class Reminders" Reminders before your upcoming classes start. What it does: Reminds you a day and an hour before a class, so you don't miss it. How it works: Below the name it says "Reminders before your upcoming classes start." On by default. The change is saved with Save. Notes: - You get the automatic reminder unless you answered that you won't come. If school staff manually send a reminder for a specific class, it reaches you even if this notification is off. ###### Published Lessons toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.lesson-published · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.lesson-published type: toggle · label: "Published Lessons" A lesson was published for one of your classes. What it does: You find out when a lesson with materials is published for one of your classes. How it works: Below the name it says "A lesson was published for one of your classes." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Shared Notes toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.note-shared · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.classes-and-events.note-shared type: toggle · label: "Shared Notes" A staff member shared a note on your profile. What it does: You find out when a staff member has shared a note with you on your profile. How it works: Below the name it says "A staff member shared a note on your profile." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Groups & Membership group id: account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership type: card · label: "Groups & Membership" Notifications about your group membership. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Join Request Approved", "Join Request Declined", "Added to a Group", "Removed from a Group". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Join Request Approved toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.join-approved · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.join-approved type: toggle · label: "Join Request Approved" Your request to join a group was approved. What it does: You learn you were accepted into a group you asked to join. How it works: Below the name it says "Your request to join a group was approved." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Join Request Declined toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.join-declined · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.join-declined type: toggle · label: "Join Request Declined" Your request to join a group was declined. What it does: You learn your request to join a group was declined. How it works: Below the name it says "Your request to join a group was declined." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Added to a Group toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.added-to-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.added-to-group type: toggle · label: "Added to a Group" You were added to a group. What it does: You learn when a school adds you straight into a group. How it works: Below the name it says "You were added to a group." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Removed from a Group toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.removed-from-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.groups-and-membership.removed-from-group type: toggle · label: "Removed from a Group" You were removed from a group. What it does: You learn when a school removes you from a group. How it works: Below the name it says "You were removed from a group." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Payments group id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments type: card · label: "Payments" Notifications about charges, payments and plan choices. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "New Charges", "Recorded Payments", "Charge Due Reminders", "Charge Waived", "Pack Renewal Reminders", "Plan Choices". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### New Charges toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-issued · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-issued type: toggle · label: "New Charges" You've been billed a new charge. What it does: You learn a school has issued you a new charge to pay. How it works: Below the name it says "You've been billed a new charge." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Recorded Payments toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.payment-recorded · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.payment-recorded type: toggle · label: "Recorded Payments" Your organization marked one of your charges as paid in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: You get confirmation when the school records your cash or bank payment. How it works: Below the name it says "Your organization marked one of your charges as paid in cash or by bank transfer." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Charge Due Reminders toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-due-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-due-reminder type: toggle · label: "Charge Due Reminders" Reminders for overdue charges and charges that are due soon. What it does: Reminds you about charges that are nearly due and about overdue charges, so you don't fall behind. How it works: Below the name it says "Reminders for overdue charges and charges that are due soon." On by default. The change is saved with Save. Notes: - For an overdue charge you automatically get at most three reminders, one each evening after the due date. A reminder sent manually by the school always reaches you. ###### Charge Waived toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-waived · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.charge-waived type: toggle · label: "Charge Waived" A charge of yours was waived by the organization. What it does: You learn the school waived a charge and you no longer owe it. How it works: Below the name it says "A charge of yours was waived by the organization." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Pack Renewal Reminders toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.pack-renewal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.pack-renewal type: toggle · label: "Pack Renewal Reminders" A class pack is out of credits or expiring soon. What it does: Reminds you when your class pack has run out or is about to expire. How it works: Below the name it says "A class pack is out of credits or expiring soon." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Plan Choices toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.payments.plan-choice-opened · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.payments.plan-choice-opened type: toggle · label: "Plan Choices" A plan choice was opened for you, or you were reminded to pick. What it does: You find out when the school offers you a choice between plan options or reminds you to pick. How it works: Below the name it says "A plan choice was opened for you, or you were reminded to pick." On by default. The change is saved with Save. Notes: - The notification opens your payments in the school, where you make the choice. ##### Organization group id: account.notification-preferences.member.organization · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.organization type: card · label: "Organization" Notifications for when you are assigned as staff or your staff permissions change. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Staff Assignments", "Permission Changes". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Staff Assignments toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.organization.staff-assigned · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.organization.staff-assigned type: toggle · label: "Staff Assignments" You were assigned as staff to an organization or group. What it does: You find out when you are added as staff to a school or group. How it works: Below the name it says "You were assigned as staff to an organization or group." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Permission Changes toggle id: account.notification-preferences.member.organization.permissions-changed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.member.organization.permissions-changed type: toggle · label: "Permission Changes" Your staff permissions in an organization were changed. What it does: You find out when your staff permissions or group access in a school were changed. How it works: Below the name it says "Your staff permissions in an organization were changed." On by default. The change is saved with Save. #### Organizer Notifications section id: account.notification-preferences.organizer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer type: section · label: "Organizer Notifications" The notifications about the schools you own or work for. What it does: Lets owners and staff choose what they hear about their school. How it works: Below the title it says "Notifications related to organizations you own or work for." Only shown if you own or work for at least one school. It has the Classes & Events, Groups & Membership, Payments, Organization and Support groups. The settings apply to all your schools at once. ##### Classes & Events group id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.classes-and-events · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.classes-and-events type: card · label: "Classes & Events" Notifications about users' attendance answers. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Sign-up Changes". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Sign-up Changes toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.classes-and-events.attendance-changed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.classes-and-events.attendance-changed type: toggle · label: "Sign-up Changes" A member confirmed or declined attending a class. What it does: You see who is coming when a user confirms or declines attending a class. How it works: Below the name it says "A member confirmed or declined attending a class." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Groups & Membership group id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.groups-and-membership · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.groups-and-membership type: card · label: "Groups & Membership" Notifications about requests to your school's groups. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "New Join Requests". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### New Join Requests toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.groups-and-membership.join-request-created · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.groups-and-membership.join-request-created type: toggle · label: "New Join Requests" Someone requested to join one of your groups. What it does: You find out straight away when someone asks to join one of your school's groups. How it works: Below the name it says "Someone requested to join one of your groups." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Payments group id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments type: card · label: "Payments" Notifications about your school's payments, plans and payment account. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Charge Payments", "Payment Account Issues", "Plans Picked". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Charge Payments toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.charge-paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.charge-paid type: toggle · label: "Charge Payments" A candidate paid a charge from your organization. What it does: You find out when a member pays a charge to your school. How it works: Below the name it says "A candidate paid a charge from your organization." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Payment Account Issues toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.payment-account-issue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.payment-account-issue type: toggle · label: "Payment Account Issues" An issue with your organization's payment account needs attention. What it does: Warns you when the school's payment account has a problem that could stop online payments. How it works: Below the name it says "An issue with your organization's payment account needs attention." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Plans Picked toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.plan-choice-made · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.payments.plan-choice-made type: toggle · label: "Plans Picked" A member picked or switched a plan. What it does: You find out when a user picks or switches a plan option. How it works: Below the name it says "A member picked or switched a plan." On by default. The change is saved with Save. Notes: - It goes to staff with the Manage payment plans permission who have access to the plan's first group. For a plan for the whole organisation, every staff member with that permission gets it. ##### Organization group id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.organization · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.organization type: card · label: "Organization" Notifications about the schools you own. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Organization Created". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Organization Created toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.organization.organization-created · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.organization.organization-created type: toggle · label: "Organization Created" Confirmation when you create a new organization. What it does: Confirms that your new school has been created. How it works: Below the name it says "Confirmation when you create a new organization." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ##### Support group id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.support · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.support type: card · label: "Support" Notifications about the school's tickets with the Classes team. What it does: Lets you switch every notification in this group on or off at once, or each one separately. How it works: Contains: "Classes Team Replies", "Resolved Help Desk Tickets". The switch next to the group title is on while at least one notification in it is on. Switching it off turns them all off at once, and switching it on when they are all off turns them all on. The change is saved with Save. ###### Classes Team Replies toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.support.ticket-replied · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.support.ticket-replied type: toggle · label: "Classes Team Replies" The Classes team replied to one of your help desk tickets. What it does: You find out when the Classes team replies to one of the school's tickets in the Help desk. How it works: Below the name it says "The Classes team replied to one of your help desk tickets." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ###### Resolved Help Desk Tickets toggle id: account.notification-preferences.organizer.support.ticket-resolved · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/notification-preferences#account.notification-preferences.organizer.support.ticket-resolved type: toggle · label: "Resolved Help Desk Tickets" One of your help desk tickets was marked as resolved. What it does: You find out when the Classes team marks one of the school's tickets as resolved. How it works: Below the name it says "One of your help desk tickets was marked as resolved." On by default. The change is saved with Save. ### Deleting your account id: account.delete-account · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/delete-account For: parents, schools · In the app: /users/:userId/settings/account How to permanently delete your Classes account and what you lose when you do. What it does: Permanently removes your profile, your personal data, your children and every group enrolment. Use it when you will no longer use Classes. How it works: Deleting lives in the Danger Zone box in the Account section of your profile (My Profile → Account). It takes two confirmations so it can't happen by accident: first you see what will be removed, then you have to type the word DELETE. Once it finishes you are logged out automatically. Along with your profile, your children, group memberships, posts and friendships are removed, and if you are staff at a school, your access to it too. The account you log in with is deleted as well. It cannot be undone. Steps: 1. Open My Profile and choose Account. 2. In the Danger Zone box press the Delete Account button. 3. Read what will be removed and press I understand, continue. 4. Type DELETE in the box. 5. Press Permanently delete my account. Notes: - The word must match exactly, in capitals and in the language the app is currently in. If the app is in Bulgarian, the word is ИЗТРИЙ. - The final delete button stays disabled until the word matches. FAQ: Q: Can I restore my account after deleting it? A: No. Your profile, children and group enrolments can't be brought back. If you later log in again with the same Google or Apple account, you go through registration again as a new user, your old enrolments don't come back, but your payment history stays linked to the account. Q: What if deleting fails? A: The window shows "Something went wrong. Please try again." and your account is left unchanged. Try again in a moment. #### Danger Zone box id: account.delete-account.danger-zone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/delete-account#account.delete-account.danger-zone type: section · label: "Danger Zone" The red box in the Account section where you delete your account. What it does: Keeps the one action that can't be undone apart from the other settings, so you don't press it by accident. How it works: It sits below the Sign out row in the Account section. Below the title it says "Once you delete your account, there is no going back. Please be certain." and it contains only the Delete Account button. ##### Delete Account button id: account.delete-account.danger-zone.delete-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/delete-account#account.delete-account.danger-zone.delete-button type: button · label: "Delete Account" Opens the window for deleting your account. What it does: Starts deletion. Pressing it on its own deletes nothing. How it works: Opens the Delete Account window, where you have to confirm twice. ###### Delete Account window id: account.delete-account.danger-zone.delete-button.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/account/delete-account#account.delete-account.danger-zone.delete-button.modal type: modal · label: "Delete Account" The two-step confirmation before your account is deleted. What it does: Shows you what you will lose and makes you confirm explicitly before it deletes the account. How it works: Step 1 shows "This action cannot be undone." and lists what is removed: your profile and personal information, all group enrolments and memberships, your payment history and invoices. Press I understand, continue or Cancel. Step 2 asks you to type DELETE. The Permanently delete my account button only becomes active then. Go back returns you to step 1. While deletion runs the button reads "Deleting...". Closing the window resets both steps. ## Find & join id: find-and-join · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join For: parents Finding a school, browsing its groups and enrolling yourself or your child. ### Finding a school id: find-and-join.school-search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search For: parents · In the app: /organisations The page for searching for a new school by name. What it does: Lets you find a school by its name, so you can browse its groups and enrol. How it works: The page is only for finding a new school. Schools you or your children already attend, and the ones you run, are not here: you reach them from the school picker at the top of the side menu. To open the page, tap the selected school at the top of the side menu (under its name it reads "Switch organisation") and choose Search organisations. If you are not in any school yet, the app brings you straight here after you log in. Without a search the page shows the message "All classes & organisations are private". Results only appear once you have searched for something. Search only finds active schools whose name contains what you typed. Capital letters don't matter and spaces at the start or end are ignored. Results are shown 6 per page. Steps: 1. Tap the selected school at the top of the side menu and choose Search organisations. 2. Type the school's name, or part of it, into Search Classes. 3. Press the Search Classes button or the Enter key. 4. Tap the school's card to open its page. Notes: - If the school sent you an invite link, it is quicker to open that link directly, it takes you straight to the group. - A school that is currently inactive does not appear in search results. - The schools you attend are in the school picker under Organisations I attend, and the ones you run under My organisations. FAQ: Q: Why can't I find the school I'm looking for? A: Search only shows active schools and matches against their name. Check the spelling or try a shorter part of the name. If the school sent you an invite link, use that instead. Q: Where are the schools I am already enrolled in? A: Not on this page. Tap the selected school at the top of the side menu: under **Organisations I attend** are the schools where you or one of your children is a member of a group. If your request is still waiting for approval, the school won't appear there until it is approved. #### Search organisations item id: find-and-join.school-search.picker-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.picker-link type: menu-item · label: "Search organisations" Opens the page for searching schools. What it does: Takes you to the search from anywhere in the app. How it works: It is in the menu that opens when you tap the selected school at the top of the side menu. Next to it is New organisation, and above them are your schools in two groups: My organisations and Organisations I attend. #### Search Classes field id: find-and-join.school-search.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.search type: search · label: "Search Classes" Searches active schools by name. What it does: Finds a school you don't attend yet so you can browse its groups. How it works: Type the name or part of it and press the Search Classes button or Enter. Search ignores capitalisation and any spaces at the start or end. Only active schools are shown. Submitting an empty box clears the results. Every new search starts from the first page. ##### Results pagination id: find-and-join.school-search.search.pagination · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.search.pagination type: other Paging through search results, 6 per page. What it does: Lets you see every school found when there are more than 6. How it works: On a computer, below the results it reads "Showing X to Y of Z results", with arrows and page numbers on the right; when there are many pages some numbers are replaced by "...". On a phone there are two buttons instead, previous and next page. The current page is kept in the address, so you can come back to it. #### "All classes & organisations are private" message id: find-and-join.school-search.private-hint · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.private-hint type: message · label: "All classes & organisations are private" Shown until you've searched for something. What it does: Explains how to reach a school. How it works: Under the message it reads "Access is invitation-only. You can search by the exact name of a class or organisation, or follow the invite link that was shared with you." and shows two tags: "Search by name" and "Use your invite link". The message disappears once you search. #### School card id: find-and-join.school-search.school-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.school-card type: card A short preview of one school in the results. What it does: Helps you recognise a school at a glance and open its page. How it works: The card shows the school's banner and logo, its name, a short description and how many members it has. The whole card is a link, tapping it opens the school's page. #### Candidate Data Required window id: find-and-join.school-search.candidate-required · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-search#find-and-join.school-search.candidate-required type: modal · label: "Candidate Data Required" Appears if your profile isn't filled in yet. What it does: Keeps you out of school pages until you complete your personal details, because you can't enrol without them. How it works: The window shows over the schools page and over every school's page. The Become Candidate button takes you to your profile to fill in your details. Closing the window takes you back to the home page. ### The school's page id: find-and-join.school-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId What you see on a school's page as a member or as a visitor. What it does: This is the way into everything about one school: its groups, the schedule, announcements, lessons and your payments to it. How it works: At the top is the school's header, and the school's pages are tabs. Which tabs you see depends on whether you are a member of the school. You are a member when you or one of your children belongs to at least one group. A visitor (not a member yet) only sees Groups, to browse the groups and enrol. A member sees Calendar, Announcements, Payments, Lessons and Groups. The tabs are in the side menu under the selected school. On a phone the main tabs are also in the bottom bar; for members Groups opens from the side menu. A tab bar under the header is only shown to the school's staff. When you open a school you land on the first tab you can access: Calendar for a member, Groups for a visitor. The notifications about a choice open Payments directly. A number appears next to Payments when there is a choice waiting for you. If the school has uploaded a contract, members have to accept it before using its pages. If the school can't be loaded, you are taken back to the page for finding a school. Notes: - The school's settings are only for its staff and live in the admin area, not among the school's tabs. Members don't see them. - Staff who can edit the school see a Manage link in its header that leads to its settings. FAQ: Q: Why do I only see the Groups tab? A: The other tabs are for members. Once you or your child is accepted into one of the school's groups, **Calendar**, **Announcements**, **Payments** and **Lessons** appear too. #### School header id: find-and-join.school-page.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.header type: section The school's banner, logo, name and short description. What it does: Shows you which school you are in and how many people are enrolled. How it works: On a computer you see the banner, logo, name, short description and the number of members. On a phone the header is more compact: just the logo, name and short description. The header is read-only: the name, description and banner are changed in the admin area. ##### Manage link id: find-and-join.school-page.header.manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.header.manage type: link · label: "Manage" · permissions: Organization.Edit, Events.Manage, Groups.Manage Takes staff to the school's settings. What it does: Gives staff a quick way to managing the school. How it works: Only visible on a computer and only to staff who can edit the school or manage events or groups (the owner always sees it). Opens the school's settings in the admin area. #### School tabs id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs type: menu The row of tabs below the header. What it does: Lets you switch between the parts of the school you can access. How it works: The tabs are rows in the side menu under the selected school. On a phone the main tabs are also fixed to the bottom of the screen (for members without Groups, which is in the side menu). The tab bar under the header is only for the school's staff. Only the tabs you can access are shown. ##### Calendar tab id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs.calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs.calendar type: tab · label: "Calendar" The school's schedule of sessions and events. What it does: Shows when and where the sessions that concern you take place. How it works: Only visible to members. A member sees the events whose audience includes them, for example those for the groups they or their child belong to. When you have a choice you haven't made yet, a window with it also opens here. ##### Announcements tab id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs.announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs.announcements type: tab · label: "Announcements" The messages the school publishes. What it does: Keeps the school's news and messages in one place. How it works: Only visible to the school's members and staff. ##### Payments tab id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs.payments type: tab · label: "Payments" The choices waiting for you, what you owe the school and which plans and packs you have there. What it does: Shows the choices to make, your pending charges with the school, the plans you are on and the credits left in your packs. How it works: Only visible to members, even an owner or staff member enrolled as a member sees their own charges here, not the school's finances. A number next to the tab's name shows how many choices are waiting for an answer. The tab shows even when the school doesn't accept online payments; the Pay button isn't shown then. ##### Lessons tab id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs.lessons · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs.lessons type: tab · label: "Lessons" Published write-ups from sessions and notes shared with you. What it does: Lets you read what was covered in sessions and what teachers have shared with you or your child. How it works: Only visible to members. If you enrolled yourself and children, there are buttons above the list to pick the person, Me and your children's names. Each lesson is a card with a title, date, group and number of attachments; cancelled sessions carry a Cancelled label. Shared notes are alongside (above the list on a phone). If the school hasn't switched lessons on, you see "Lessons aren't enabled for this class yet." ##### Groups tab id: find-and-join.school-page.tabs.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.tabs.groups type: tab · label: "Groups" All of the school's groups and the ones you belong to. What it does: This is where you pick a group, look at it and enrol. How it works: Visible to everyone, including visitors who aren't members yet. #### Class Inactive window id: find-and-join.school-page.disabled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-page#find-and-join.school-page.disabled type: modal · label: "Class Inactive" Appears when the school is locked. What it does: Tells you the school can't be used right now. How it works: The school stays locked until its subscription is paid. The window has no close button, the only button, Go back, takes you to the page for finding a school. Group pages in an inactive school don't open either. Notes: - This has nothing to do with your own payments to the school. If you think it's a mistake, contact the school or us at the email shown in the window. ### The school's Groups tab id: find-and-join.groups-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/groups The list of the school's groups, your groups first, the rest below. What it does: Helps you find the group you need, see which groups you and your children already belong to, and open a group to enrol. How it works: As a member or a visitor you see all of the school's groups, public and private. Groups that you or one of your children belong to come first, under My Groups. The rest are under Other Groups (or simply Groups if you don't belong to any yet). If the school sorts its groups into categories, the other groups are arranged in folders, one per category, plus Uncategorised for groups without one. Folders open in place and several can be open at once. Which folders are open is kept in the page address, so the browser's Back button closes the last one you opened, and a link to the page opens it the same way. Each group is a card. Press View Group to see the details and enrol. Steps: 1. Open the school and choose the Groups tab. 2. If the groups are in folders, tap a folder to open it. 3. Find the group and press View Group. Notes: - A private group is still listed, but joining it needs approval from an admin. - Groups are not created, edited or deleted from this tab. Staff allowed to manage groups see a Manage link that takes them to group management. #### My Groups section id: find-and-join.groups-tab.my-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.my-groups type: section · label: "My Groups" The groups you or your children are enrolled in. What it does: Puts the groups you already attend at the top so you don't have to look for them. How it works: Only shown if you belong to at least one group. The number of groups is next to the heading. Groups here are not in folders, even if the school uses categories. #### Other Groups section id: find-and-join.groups-tab.other-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.other-groups type: section · label: "Other Groups" The school's groups you don't belong to yet. What it does: Shows you what else the school offers. How it works: The heading reads Other Groups when you also have groups of your own, and Groups when you don't belong to any yet. The number of groups is next to the heading. ##### Category folder id: find-and-join.groups-tab.other-groups.folder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.other-groups.folder type: card One category of groups that opens and closes in place. What it does: Organises a school's many groups so you find the one you want more easily. How it works: The folder shows the category name and how many groups it holds. Tap it to open or close it. An empty category is marked Empty and can't be opened. Groups without a category are in the Uncategorised folder, which only appears when there are such groups. Folders only exist if the school has created categories. #### Manage link id: find-and-join.groups-tab.manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.manage type: link · label: "Manage" · permissions: Groups.Manage Takes staff to group management. What it does: Gives staff a quick way from the list to managing groups. How it works: Only visible to staff allowed to manage groups, at the top next to the Expand all button. Opens the groups page in the admin area. Members and visitors do not see it. #### Expand all button id: find-and-join.groups-tab.expand-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.expand-all type: button · label: "Expand all" Opens or closes every folder at once. What it does: Lets you see every group at once or go back to a short list of categories. How it works: Shown at the top right only when there is at least one folder with groups. When every folder is open, the button becomes Collapse all and closes them. On a phone only the icon is shown. #### Group card id: find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card type: card A short preview of one group in the list. What it does: Shows the key facts about a group so you can decide whether to open it. How it works: The card shows the group's name, which of your family are enrolled in it, whether it is public or private, the start of its description and who runs it. Tapping the name or View Group opens the group's page. ##### Enrolment labels id: find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.enrollment-chips · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.enrollment-chips type: badge · label: "You" Show who in your family is enrolled in the group. What it does: Tells you at a glance whom you enrolled, yourself or a child. How it works: A green You label means you are enrolled. A blue label with a first name means that child is enrolled. If the child's name can't be loaded, the label reads Kid. Labels only appear when someone in your family is a member of the group. ##### Public / Private label id: find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.visibility type: badge · label: "Public" Shows whether you join straight away or after approval. What it does: Prepares you for what happens when you enrol. How it works: Public: you join straight away, no approval needed. Private: you send a request that an admin has to approve. ##### Group admin id: find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.admin · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.admin type: section · label: "Group Admin" Who runs the group. What it does: Shows who is behind the group and whom to ask about it. How it works: The first admin is shown with name and picture; any others appear as small circles beside them, with their name shown on hover. Tapping a name or picture opens that person's profile. ##### View Group button id: find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.view · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.group-card.view type: button · label: "View Group" Opens the group's page. What it does: Takes you to where you see the full description and can enrol. How it works: Opens the group's page within the same school. Pressing it does not enrol you. #### No active groups yet message id: find-and-join.groups-tab.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/groups-tab#find-and-join.groups-tab.empty type: message · label: "No active groups yet" Shown when the school has no groups yet. What it does: Explains why there is nothing to enrol in. How it works: Members are enrolled into groups, so a school without groups can't take anyone in yet. Try again later or contact the school. Staff who manage groups also see a hint to create the first group and a Manage link. ### The group's page id: find-and-join.group-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/groups/:groupId The group's description, who runs it and how to enrol yourself or your child. What it does: This is where you learn what the group is about and enrol in it, straight away if it is public, or with a request if it is private. How it works: The page shows the group's name and description, who in your family is enrolled, its admins and the school it belongs to. The enrol button stays visible while there is still someone to enrol. On a phone it is under the description. Public group: press Join Group and you become a member immediately. Private group: press Request to Join. The group's admins are notified of the request. When they approve or decline it, you get a notification saying so. If you have children added to your profile, the button opens a window where you choose whom to enrol; the children come first, and enrolling yourself is behind a separate link. Once you are a member, the school may automatically issue a charge for the group's plans. If the school accepts online payments, members also see a Plans section with their plans and packs. Steps: 1. Open the group from the school's Groups tab. 2. Read the description and check whether the group is Public or Private. 3. Press Join Group or Request to Join. 4. If you have children in your profile, choose in the window whom you are enrolling and press the button on their row. Notes: - Staff who manage the group do not see the enrol button. They see a Manage link to group management in the admin area. - The group's member list and requests are not on this page, staff manage them in the admin area. - If the school is inactive, the group page doesn't open and you are sent back to the school's page. - A declined request doesn't stop you from requesting again. FAQ: Q: I sent a request. When will I be accepted? A: When a group admin approves it. Until then the button is replaced by **Request Pending**. You'll get a notification when the request is approved or declined. Q: How do I leave a group? A: There is no leave button on the group page. Contact the school, its admins can remove you from the group. #### Description section id: find-and-join.group-page.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.description type: section · label: "Description" The group's full description, written by the school. What it does: Tells you what the group is for, who it is for and what to expect. How it works: The text is exactly as the school entered it. Below it, in the same card, are your family's enrolments, the admins and the link to the school. ##### Your Enrollment section id: find-and-join.group-page.description.your-enrollment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.description.your-enrollment type: section · label: "Your Enrollment" Who in your family is a member of this group. What it does: Confirms that enrolment went through, and for whom. How it works: Shows a You label if you are enrolled and a label with the first name of each enrolled child (or Kid if the name can't be loaded). Only shown if someone in your family is a member and you are not school staff. ##### Group Admin section id: find-and-join.group-page.description.admins · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.description.admins type: section · label: "Group Admin" The people who run the group. What it does: Shows you who is responsible for the group. How it works: The heading reads Group Admin for one person and Group Admins for more. The first is shown larger, the rest are listed below. Tapping a person opens their profile. ##### Class link id: find-and-join.group-page.description.school-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.description.school-link type: link · label: "Class" A link to the school the group belongs to. What it does: Takes you back to the school's page. How it works: Shows the school's logo, name and short description. Only visible on a computer. #### Private / Public label id: find-and-join.group-page.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.visibility type: badge · label: "Private" Shows how you get into the group. What it does: Tells you in advance whether you become a member straight away or wait for approval. How it works: Public: pressing Join Group makes you a member immediately. Private: pressing Request to Join sends a request for approval. The label sits above the enrol button and disappears with it once everyone in your family is already a member. #### Join Group / Request to Join button id: find-and-join.group-page.join-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.join-button type: button · label: "Join Group" Enrols you or your child in the group. What it does: Starts enrolment, directly for a public group or with a request for a private one. How it works: The wording depends on the group and your family: Join Group: public group; you become a member immediately. Request to Join: private group; a request is sent. Manage Membership: you have children in your profile and someone in your family is already enrolled or waiting for approval. If you have no children in your profile, the button enrols you directly and disappears once you are a member or your request has been sent. If you have children, it opens the Select Who to Enroll window and stays visible until you and all your children are members or waiting for approval. Once every child is enrolled or waiting, the button turns into a quieter outlined one, so you don't enrol yourself by mistake. Notes: - School staff don't see this button. ##### Select Who to Enroll window id: find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrollment-dialog · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrollment-dialog type: modal · label: "Select Who to Enroll" Choosing whether to enrol one of your children, or yourself. What it does: Lets you enrol each family member separately, without enrolling the wrong person. How it works: The children come first, each on a separate row: the name, with Kid below it. Above them it reads "Tap the child who will attend this class." On the right of each row is one of: a Join Group or Request to Join button, press it to enrol that child; a Member label, the child is already a member; a Pending label with a clock, the request for that child is waiting for approval and can't be sent again. Enrolling yourself is hidden behind the link "I am the one attending, not my child". It opens a warning ("Careful: this enrolls you, the parent, as a participant in the group. Your kids do not need you to be a member..."), a card with your name and a tick box "I understand, I will attend the classes myself." The button to enrol you (Enrol myself or Request a place for myself) only unlocks after the tick; "Choose a child instead" takes you back. If you are already a member or waiting for approval, your row is shown straight away under "You". After each enrolment a green message appears ("Enrolled successfully." or "Request sent. The organiser will review it, you don't need to do anything else.") with a Done button. Each row is enrolled separately. Close the window with the X button, the Escape key or by tapping outside it. ###### Request status id: find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrollment-dialog.request-status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrollment-dialog.request-status type: status · label: "Pending" Where the request for each person in a private group stands. What it does: Shows whom you are waiting on approval for, and for whom you can send a request. How it works: Pending: the request was sent and is waiting for an admin. The button for that person is hidden. Member: the request was approved and the person is a member. A declined request, the row shows the Request to Join button again so you can try again. Someone who was a member and was removed can also send a new request. ##### Enrolled and pending labels id: find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrolled-chips · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.join-button.enrolled-chips type: badge · label: "You are enrolled" Below the button, who in your family is already enrolled or waiting for approval. What it does: Reminds you whom you have already enrolled while you enrol the rest. How it works: They appear under Manage Membership when you have children in your profile and someone is already a member or waiting for approval: You are enrolled for you, and the first name of each enrolled child (or Kid enrolled if the name can't be loaded). A yellow label with a clock, such as "You · Pending" or "[name] · Pending", means that person's request is waiting. When there are pending requests, the text "Waiting for the organiser to approve. You don't need to do anything else." appears under the labels. #### Request Pending status id: find-and-join.group-page.request-pending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.request-pending type: status · label: "Request Pending" Your request for a private group is waiting for approval. What it does: Confirms the request was received, so you don't send it again. How it works: Shown in place of the button when you have no children in your profile and your request for a private group has been sent. It stays until an admin approves or declines it. If you have children, each request's status is shown in the Select Who to Enroll window. #### Plans section id: find-and-join.group-page.plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-page#find-and-join.group-page.plans type: section · label: "Plans" Your plans and packs related to this group. What it does: Shows what you pay for the group and where to pay. How it works: Only visible to members, and only if the school accepts online payments. It shows this group's plans that you or your children are on, plus all your packs at the school. If you have neither plans nor packs, the section is hidden. Charges on plans can be paid from here with Pay €… (only on the group page), and all your unpaid charges are also under To pay in the Payments tab. ### Joining with a group invite link id: find-and-join.group-invite-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link For: parents · In the app: /join/:token What happens when you open an invite link the school sent you. What it does: The link takes you straight to a specific group without searching and lets you enrol yourself or your child with one press. How it works: You need to be logged in. If you aren't, you are asked to log in first and then brought back to the invite. The page shows which group and school you are invited to and what will happen when you join: if the group is public, or the link was created for direct joining, you become a member immediately, even if the group is private; if the group is private and the link requires approval, a request is filed that an admin has to approve. Below that you choose who is joining and press the button. One submission uses up one use of the link, however many people you selected. People who are already members are skipped, and no new request is filed for someone whose request is already pending. When you become a member directly you get a notification that you were added to the group. When a request is filed, the group's admins are notified. Steps: 1. Open the invite link. 2. Log in if you are asked to. 3. Check the group and school name. 4. Choose who is joining, your child, several children or yourself. 5. Press the join button. 6. Press Go to Group to open the group. Notes: - If the link is single-use, it stops working for everyone else after your submission. - The school can give a link an expiry date and a limited number of uses. FAQ: Q: The link says it has already been used. What now? A: Ask the group admin for a new link. A link can only be used as many times as the school allowed. Q: I enrolled myself instead of my child. How do I fix it? A: Open the group and enrol your child from the **Select Who to Enroll** window. To have yourself removed, contact the school. #### You have been invited to join card id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.invite-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.invite-card type: section · label: "You have been invited to join" Which group and school the invite is for. What it does: Lets you check it is the right group before you enrol. How it works: Shows the group name, the school name, whether the group is Public or Private, what will happen when you join, and the group description if there is one. ##### What happens when you join id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.invite-card.outcome · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.invite-card.outcome type: message · label: "Joining adds you immediately, no approval needed." A line saying whether you join straight away or a request is filed. What it does: Warns you up front whether you'll need to wait for approval. How it works: "Joining adds you immediately, no approval needed.": a public group or a direct-join link. "This group is private, joining files a request awaiting admin approval.": a private group with an approval link. #### Choosing who is joining id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.who-is-joining · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.who-is-joining type: select Pick the child or children who will attend the group, or yourself. What it does: Makes sure the right person is enrolled in the group. How it works: What you see depends on your profile: No children in your profile: it reads You are joining, with your name and "You (adult participant)". There is nothing to choose. One child: it reads Your child is joining and the child is selected in advance. Several children: it reads Which child is joining? and nobody is selected. Tap each child who will attend. Tapping a person's whole card selects or deselects them. Selecting a child always removes you from the selection, a child and you can't be enrolled in the same submission. ##### I am the one attending, not my child button id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.who-is-joining.switch-to-self · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.who-is-joining.switch-to-self type: button · label: "I am the one attending, not my child" Enrols you instead of your child. What it does: Lets an adult with children in their profile enrol themselves when they are the participant. How it works: Opens a panel with the warning "Careful: this enrols you as the participant. Your child will not be added to the class." and a card with your name. Tap the card to select yourself. Until you do, you can go back with Enrol [name] instead or Choose a child instead. #### Join button id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.join-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.join-button type: button · label: "Enrol [name]" Submits the enrolment for the selected people. What it does: Enrols the selected people or files a request for them, and uses up one use of the link. How it works: The wording names who you are enrolling, so you can catch a mistake at the last moment: Enrol [name] / Request a place for [name]: one child is selected; Enrol myself / Request a place for myself: you selected yourself and have children in your profile; Join Group / Request to Join: in every other case. While nobody is selected the button is inactive and below it reads "Tap a name above to continue." #### Link usage hints id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.usage-hints · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.usage-hints type: message Short notes above the button about how many times the link can be used. What it does: Warn you when one submission uses up the link. How it works: "This link works only once, make sure the right person is selected before you continue.": the link is single-use. "Everyone selected joins together in this one submission.": you selected more than one person. "N uses left": the link has a limited number of uses. #### You're in! / Request sent message id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.result · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.result type: message · label: "You're in!" The result after you press the button. What it does: Tells you whether you are now a member or waiting for approval. How it works: You're in!: "You have joined [group]." You are now a member. Request sent: "[group] is a private group, your request is waiting for admin approval." The Go to Group button opens the group's page. #### This invite link doesn't work message id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.invalid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.invalid type: message · label: "This invite link doesn't work" The link can't be recognised. What it does: Tells you the link is wrong and gives you a way out. How it works: Shown when the link is mistyped or no longer exists. The Browse Classes button takes you to the schools page. Ask the group admin for a new link. #### This invite link is no longer usable message id: find-and-join.group-invite-link.inactive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/group-invite-link#find-and-join.group-invite-link.inactive type: status · label: "This invite link is no longer usable" The link is recognised but no longer active. What it does: Explains why the link stopped working, instead of letting you press a button that would fail. How it works: The reason is one of: Used, "This link has already been used." Its allowed number of uses is used up. Expired, "This link has expired." Its validity period has passed. Revoked, "This link was revoked by the group admin." The Go to Group button opens the group's page, where you can enrol the usual way. ### Linking a membership the school set up id: find-and-join.member-join-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link For: parents · In the app: /member-join/:token How to link your account to the membership the school has already entered for you. What it does: When the school enrolled you itself, with your name, your children and your groups, the link lets you take that membership over into your own account, together with the groups, children and payment history. How it works: The school sends you a personal join link. When you open it you see the name you are registered under, the school, the groups and the children on the membership. Press This is me, join. Linking moves the membership's groups, children, charges and payment history onto your account, and the membership the school created no longer exists separately. If you don't have an account yet, you sign up first. When you fill in your personal details, the fields are prefilled with what the school has on record, review and correct them. Your registration is linked to the membership as soon as you create your profile. If you already have an account, your profile needs to be completed before you can use the link. Steps: 1. Open the link the school sent you. 2. Log in or sign up if asked. 3. Check the name, school, groups and children. 4. Press This is me, join. 5. Press Go to organisation to open the school. Notes: - The link is personal, only use it if the name on the page is yours. - If the school creates a new link for the same membership, the old one stops working. FAQ: Q: The link says "Already claimed", but I didn't use it. A: The membership is already linked to another account. Contact the school's organiser. Q: The details on the page are wrong. What should I do? A: The details were entered by the school. If you are signing up now, you can correct them while filling in your profile. If you already have an account, you can change them in your profile after linking. #### You were invited as card id: find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card type: section · label: "You were invited as" The membership the school created for you. What it does: Lets you check that the membership really is yours before linking it. How it works: Shows the name you are registered under and the school. Below, it explains that joining links your account to the membership and that your groups, children and payment history move onto your account. ##### Details entered by the school warning id: find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.admin-filled-warning · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.admin-filled-warning type: message A yellow message saying the name and details came from the school. What it does: Reminds you that you didn't enter these details and may need to correct them. How it works: It says the school set up the membership on your behalf, so the name and details are what it had on record, and that you can review and correct them in the next step. ##### Your groups list id: find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.groups type: list · label: "Your groups" The groups the school enrolled you in. What it does: Shows which groups you will be in once you link your account. How it works: Each group is a label with its name. The list only shows if the membership has groups. ##### Kids on this membership list id: find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.kids · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.membership-card.kids type: list · label: "Kids on this membership" The children the school entered on your membership. What it does: Shows which children will be added to your profile. How it works: Each child is a label with their name. After linking, the children appear in your profile along with their enrolments. #### This is me, join button id: find-and-join.member-join-link.join-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.join-button type: button · label: "This is me, join" Links the membership to your account. What it does: Moves the membership's groups, children, charges and payment history onto your account. How it works: While linking runs the button shows a spinner. On success you see You're in!: "Your account is now linked to your membership in [school].": and a Go to organisation button. If your profile isn't completed yet, linking doesn't go through. #### When the link doesn't work id: find-and-join.member-join-link.link-states · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/member-join-link#find-and-join.member-join-link.link-states type: status The three reasons a join link can't be used. What it does: Explains why you can't link and what to do. How it works: This link doesn't work: the link is invalid or has been replaced by a newer one. Ask the organiser for a fresh link. Already claimed: the membership is already linked to another account. If that wasn't you, contact the organiser. Membership archived: the organiser archived the membership, so the link no longer works. In each case the Browse Classes button takes you to the schools page. ### Windows you must answer before you continue id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts For: schools, parents Updated terms, a school contract and a choice: the order they appear in and how to get past them. What it does: Explains why a window with no close button may appear when you log in, and the order such windows appear in. How it works: There are three kinds of window that ask for an answer. They do not stack on top of each other but appear one after another, in this order: Updated Classes terms. Shown everywhere in the app when the Terms of Service and/or Privacy Policy have changed since you last agreed. The school's contract. Shown on the pages of a school that has uploaded a contract you haven't accepted yet (see "Accepting the school's contract"). The choice the school is waiting for. Opens in the school's calendar (see "Choosing an option the school offers"). This window has a Later button. While an earlier window is open, the next ones wait and appear once you have accepted it. Notes: - The terms and contract windows have no X button and don't close when you tap outside them. - The terms are accepted once for each new version. FAQ: Q: I can't close the terms window. What do I do? A: Read the changed documents through the links in the window, tick the box next to each one and press **Accept and continue**. If you don't want to accept them, the only other option is to leave your account with **Log out**. Q: Why do I get one window first and another after it? A: The windows appear in order: first the updated Classes terms, then the school's contract, then the choice. The next one appears after you have finished with the previous one. #### We updated our terms window id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts#find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms type: modal · label: "We updated our terms" Asks you to accept the changed Terms of Service and/or Privacy Policy. What it does: Records your new agreement so you can keep using Classes. How it works: Under the title it reads that the Terms of Service and/or Privacy Policy have changed and that to keep using Classes you need to read the new version and accept it. Only the documents that changed are shown, each with a tick box, a link to read it and its version number. The window has no X button. ##### View Terms / View Privacy Policy link id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.view · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts#find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.view type: link · label: "View Terms" Opens the document to read. What it does: Lets you read what you are accepting. How it works: Opens the document in a new browser tab. Next to the link it reads "Version N". ##### "I have read and accept…" tick boxes id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.agree · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts#find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.agree type: checkbox · label: "I have read and accept the Terms of Service." You confirm each changed document separately. What it does: Unlocks the accept button. How it works: Each changed document has a tick box: "I have read and accept the Terms of Service." and/or "I have read and accept the Privacy Policy." Until all are ticked, Accept and continue is inactive. ##### Accept and continue button id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.accept · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts#find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.accept type: button · label: "Accept and continue" Records your agreement. What it does: Closes the window and takes you back into the app. How it works: Records the acceptance of the new versions. If saving fails, you see "Could not save your acceptance. Please try again.", the ticks are cleared and you need to tick them again. ##### Log out button id: find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.logout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/blocking-prompts#find-and-join.blocking-prompts.terms.logout type: button · label: "Log out" Logs you out without accepting. What it does: The only way out for someone who doesn't want to accept. How it works: Sits under the accept button. It records no agreement. Until you accept, you can't use the app. ### Enrolling a child or yourself id: find-and-join.enrol-child-or-yourself · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/enrol-child-or-yourself For: parents How Classes tells enrolling your child apart from enrolling yourself. What it does: Lets a parent enrol their children from their own account, and an adult participant enrol themselves, without the two getting mixed up. How it works: Children don't need an account of their own. You add them to your profile in the Children section with Add Child. A child only needs a first and last name; the education institution and date of birth are optional (if you give a date, the child must be under 18). You can also add Additional information for the organisers (allergies, who picks the child up and so on), up to 200 characters. From then on each child and you are separate participants: each is enrolled in a group separately and has their own enrolments, requests, lessons and charges. Where you choose whom to enrol On a group page, if you have children, the enrol button opens the Select Who to Enroll window. The children come first, each on a separate row. Enrolling yourself is hidden behind the link "I am the one attending, not my child" and needs a tick, so it can't happen by accident. With an invite link, with one child, the child is selected in advance; with several, you pick which ones. Enrolling yourself is tucked behind I am the one attending, not my child so it can't happen by accident. How you can tell who is enrolled On group cards and on the group page, enrolled people are marked with labels: You for you and the first name of each child. People waiting for approval have a yellow "Pending" label. Who pays Charges for a child are held on your account, but kept separate for that child. Only you, as the account holder, can pay them. In the school's Payments tab you see charges and plans separately for yourself and for each child, and in Payment History in your profile all payments, with the child's name next to each. Steps: 1. Add your child to your profile in the Children section with Add Child. 2. Open the group and press the enrol button. 3. In the Select Who to Enroll window, press the button on your child's row. Notes: - If you enrol yourself by mistake, there is no leave button in the group, contact the school. - In a private group, a request is filed and approved separately for each child. FAQ: Q: Does my child need their own account? A: No. Add your child to your profile and enrol them from your account. Q: Can I enrol two children at once? A: With an invite link, yes: tap each child and submit once. On a group page you enrol each child with the button on their row. ### Accepting the school's contract id: find-and-join.school-contract · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId Why a school asks you to accept a contract and what happens if you decline for now. What it does: Some schools upload a contract their members must read and accept. Accepting it gives you access to the school's pages. How it works: The window appears when you open a school where you or your child is a member, if the school has uploaded a contract you haven't accepted yet. It covers every tab of the school and its group pages, until you accept, you can't use them. The school's owner and visitors who aren't members yet don't see it. If you first have to accept the updated Classes terms, those are shown before the contract. The contract is shown inside the window, page by page, and you can scroll through it. If it can't be drawn, a built-in document preview is used instead, and you can always download it. Tick "I have read the contract and accept it." and press Accept. Acceptance is recorded for your account and also covers your children at that school. If the school uploads a new version, the window appears again, worded as an updated contract. Steps: 1. Read the contract in the window, or download it with Download. 2. Tick "I have read the contract and accept it." 3. Press Accept. Notes: - The window has no X button. If you aren't ready, press Not now, back to my schools: you'll be asked again the next time you open the school. - If the document doesn't display in the window, download it with Download and open it on your device. FAQ: Q: I accepted the contract. Why is it asking again? A: The school uploaded a new version of the contract. Read it and accept it to continue. Q: An error said the contract changed. A: The school updated the contract while the window was open. The new version has been loaded, read it, tick the box again and press **Accept**. #### Accept the contract of [school] window id: find-and-join.school-contract.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract#find-and-join.school-contract.modal type: modal · label: "Accept the contract of [school]" The blocking window for accepting the contract. What it does: Shows you the contract and records that you accepted it. How it works: At the top it reads "To keep using [school], you need to read and accept the organisation's contract." or, if you accepted an earlier version, "[school] has updated its contract. To continue, read the new version and accept it." Below is the document itself, the file name and the version number (Version N). ##### Download link id: find-and-join.school-contract.modal.download · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract#find-and-join.school-contract.modal.download type: link · label: "Download" Downloads a copy of the contract. What it does: Lets you keep the contract, or read it if it doesn't display in the window. How it works: It sits on the right below the document. Downloading does not accept the contract. If the document can't be displayed in the window, this is how you read it. ##### I have read the contract and accept it checkbox id: find-and-join.school-contract.modal.agree · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract#find-and-join.school-contract.modal.agree type: checkbox · label: "I have read the contract and accept it." Confirms you have read the contract. What it does: Unlocks the Accept button. How it works: Until it is ticked, Accept is inactive. If accepting fails, the tick is cleared and you need to tick it again. ##### Accept button id: find-and-join.school-contract.modal.accept · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract#find-and-join.school-contract.modal.accept type: button · label: "Accept" Accepts the version of the contract shown. What it does: Records your acceptance and closes the window so you can use the school. How it works: Exactly the version you are looking at is accepted. If the school has uploaded a new one in the meantime, you see "The contract changed in the meantime. We loaded the new version, please read and accept it." For any other error you see "Could not accept the contract. Please try again." ##### Not now, back to my schools button id: find-and-join.school-contract.modal.not-now · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/find-and-join/school-contract#find-and-join.school-contract.modal.not-now type: button · label: "Not now, back to my schools" Leaves the school without accepting the contract. What it does: Makes sure you're never stuck if you aren't ready to accept. How it works: Takes you to the page for finding a school. Nothing is recorded, the next time you open the school the window shows again. Your group memberships don't change. ## Payments and plans id: paying · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying For: parents What you owe, paying online, your active plans, payment history and invoices. ### The school's Payments tab id: paying.payments-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/payments The choices the school is waiting for, what you owe, and which plans and packs you have there, in one place. What it does: Shows the choices still waiting for your answer, your pending charges (and lets you pay them online), and your plans and the credits left in your packs. How it works: The tab is only visible to the school's members (you or one of your children is in at least one group) and shows only your own charges, not the school's finances. On a computer it is in the side menu under the selected school, on a phone it is in the bottom bar. When there is a choice you haven't made yet, a number next to Payments counts them. The page has three parts, from top to bottom: Your choices: the choices the school asks you to make. Only shown when there is something to choose. To pay: every unpaid charge, ordered by due date. My plans: the plans you are on and your packs across all of the school's groups. The section is folded and its heading has a line under it such as "2 plans · 1 awaiting payment"; tap the heading to open it. If you have children in your profile, charges and plans are split by person: yours first (Myself), then each child's, each under a heading with their name. People with nothing to show are skipped. If the school doesn't accept online payments, charges and plans are still shown, but the Pay button isn't shown in To pay and the plan cards read "Online payments unavailable". Steps: 1. Open the school and choose the Payments tab. 2. Find the charge under To pay. 3. Press Pay and complete the payment on the online payment page. Notes: - A charge disappears from the list once the payment is confirmed. - Paid, cancelled and waived charges aren't shown here. You'll find paid ones in Payment History in your profile (My Profile). - If the school changed the amount of a charge or gave you a discount, the reason is shown under it. FAQ: Q: I can't see the Pay button. Why? A: The school hasn't set up online payments. The plan cards read "Online payments unavailable", and hovering shows "This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured." Contact the school to pay another way. Q: Where did the Requested Invoices and Active Plans tabs of my profile go? A: They are no longer in the profile. Unpaid charges are under **To pay** and your plans and packs under **My plans**, both in the school's **Payments** tab. What you have paid is in **Payment History** in your profile. Q: There is a number next to Payments. What does it mean? A: The school is waiting for you to make a choice. Open the tab and pick a variant under **Your choices**. #### Your choices section id: paying.payments-tab.choices · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.choices type: section · label: "Your choices" The choices the school asks you to make. What it does: Brings together the variants the school wants you to choose between. How it works: Shown at the top of the tab, only when there is a choice you can still make. Under the heading it reads that the school is asking you to choose a variant and that, once confirmed, the choice is final. How to make the choice is described in "Choosing an option the school offers". #### Number next to Payments id: paying.payments-tab.choices-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.choices-badge type: badge Shows how many choices you haven't made yet. What it does: Warns you that the school is waiting for an answer, without opening the tab. How it works: A small number appears next to Payments in the side menu and in the school's tab bar (on a phone in the corner of the button in the bottom bar). Every choice without a confirmed variant that is still accepting answers is counted, separately for you and for each child. The number disappears once the choice is made or closed. #### To pay section id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices type: section · label: "To pay" Every unpaid charge with the school. What it does: Shows you exactly what you owe and by when. How it works: It holds every charge that is still pending, for you and for your children. Each person's charges are ordered by due date. If you have children in your profile, each person's charges sit under their name. ##### Charge card id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card type: card One unpaid charge with its reason, amount and due date. What it does: Tells you what the charge is for and lets you pay it. How it works: The title is the charge's description or, if there isn't one, the name of the plan it came from. If there is neither, it reads Charge. The plan's description may appear below the title. ###### Overdue label id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.overdue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.overdue type: badge · label: "Overdue" The charge's due date has passed. What it does: Singles out charges that should already have been paid. How it works: The red label sits above the title when the due date is in the past. Once the date has passed you also get an overdue notification, at most three times per charge, once a day over the first days after the due date. ###### Amount field id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.amount type: field · label: "Amount" How much the charge is, in euro. What it does: Shows the exact amount you will pay. How it works: This is the amount asked for on the online payment page. If the school gave you a discount or changed the amount, the regular price is shown crossed out next to it. The reason is written under the card: "Reason for the price change: …" for a discount, or "Reason the amount was changed: …" when the school edited the charge's amount by hand. ###### Due field id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.due · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.due type: field · label: "Due" When the charge must be paid by. What it does: Helps you pay on time. How it works: After this date the charge is marked Overdue. You can still pay after the due date. ###### Pay button id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.pay · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.charge-card.pay type: button · label: "Pay" Opens the online payment page for the charge. What it does: Lets you pay the charge by card. How it works: Takes you to a secure online payment page (in the mobile app it opens in a browser over the app). After a successful payment you return to Payment History in your profile. If you cancel, you return to the Payments tab. If the school doesn't accept online payments, the button isn't shown at all. ##### No pending invoices message id: paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.pending-invoices.empty type: message · label: "No pending invoices" You don't owe the school anything right now. What it does: Confirms you have no unpaid charges. How it works: Shown when neither you nor your children have pending charges with this school. #### My plans section id: paying.payments-tab.plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payments-tab#paying.payments-tab.plans type: section · label: "My plans" Your plans and packs across all of the school's groups. What it does: Shows what you pay for at the school and how many credits are left in your packs. How it works: It holds the plans from all of the school's groups that you or your children are on, and your packs under My packs. The section stays folded until you tap its heading; under it you read how many plans you have and how many of them are awaiting payment. If you have neither plans nor packs, the section is hidden. A plan with a pending charge is paid from To pay, and its card says the amount is due. ### Choosing an option the school offers id: paying.choices · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/payments How you choose a variant when the school asks for a choice, and what happens after you confirm. What it does: When the school offers several variants to choose between, you choose and confirm yourself, without getting in touch with the school. The confirmed variant is recorded for you straight away and, if it has a price, a charge is issued for it. How it works: What a choice is. The school can offer a set of variants (each variant is a plan) under one name. The choice is "one variant", "up to a number of variants" or "as many as you like". Above the variants it reads which: "Choose one variant", "Choose up to N variants" or "Choose the variants you want". Who sees it. You see a choice if you or your child is in at least one of the groups it is offered to, or if the school offered it to the whole school. If you have children in your profile, the choice is made separately for each child (under "For [name]") and you don't choose for yourself. If you have no children, the choice is for you. How to choose. Choosing has two steps, and nothing is recorded by the first tap: Tap a variant. When only one can be chosen the variants have round marks, otherwise square ones. Each variant shows its price, how often it is paid and, for a pack, how many classes it includes per period. A panel "You're choosing" appears under the variants with your pick and the total. Press Confirm choice to record it, or Cancel to back out. Once confirmed, the choice is final. You can't change or undo it. The card shows "Your choice is confirmed and can't be changed." and a Contact the school link. Only the school can change your choice. If the school chose for you, it reads "Set by the school." When the choice allows more variants and you haven't reached the limit, it reads "You can pick N more variants." and you can confirm more. The charge. If the variant has a price, confirming issues a charge to you, which is not paid automatically. It appears under To pay in the Payments tab, and under the chosen variant it reads that an amount is due. Paying is a separate step, you are not sent to payment straight away. The confirmed variant also appears under My plans with a "You picked this" label. Deadline. New choices have no deadline: they accept answers until the school closes them. Older choices, however, may still carry a deadline set earlier. Then, next to the choice, it reads "choose by [date]" (the whole day is included), and in the last 48 hours the label turns red: "closes in N hours". After such a deadline, or when the school closes the choice, you can no longer choose: the choice disappears from Your choices, while variants you already confirmed stay. Notifications and reminders. When the school opens a choice for you, or reminds you that you haven't chosen yet, you get a "Plan Choices" notification that opens the Payments tab. A number next to Payments also counts the choices waiting. When you open the school's calendar and have a choice to make, it also appears in a window. Steps: 1. Open the school and choose the Payments tab. 2. Under Your choices, tap a variant (for each child separately, if you have children). 3. Check your pick in the "You're choosing" panel. 4. Press Confirm choice. 5. If there is a charge, pay it from To pay. Notes: - You can't change a confirmed choice yourself. If you made a mistake, contact the school. - Only choices you can still make are shown. The ones you have made are under My plans. - You can turn these notifications off in the notification settings of your profile. FAQ: Q: Can I change or undo my choice? A: No. After **Confirm choice** the choice is final and only the school can change it. Use **Contact the school**. Q: Did I pay when I confirmed the choice? A: No. Confirming issues a charge if the variant has a price. You pay it separately from **To pay**. Q: The choice disappeared from "Your choices". Why? A: Either you made the choice (the confirmed variant is under **My plans**), or the deadline passed, or the school closed the choice, or you reached the limit of variants. If you think it's a mistake, contact the school. Q: I can't see the choice I was told about. A: A choice is only shown to members of the groups it is offered to, and only while it accepts answers. Also check that you have the right school selected. #### Choice card id: paying.choices.card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card type: card One choice with its variants, deadline and your decisions. What it does: Gathers everything about one choice: what you have to choose, by when, and what you have already chosen. How it works: The card has the name of the choice, a line saying how many variants you may pick and, if there is a deadline, a label with it. If the choice is for several people (you and children, or several children), there is a separate "For [name]" block for each. While someone has no confirmed variant, the card has a brighter outline. ##### "Choose one variant" instruction id: paying.choices.card.prompt · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.prompt type: message · label: "Choose one variant · Choose up to N variants · Choose the variants you want" How many variants you can choose. What it does: Tells you how many variants you are expected to choose. How it works: Three possible lines: "Choose one variant", "Choose up to N variants" and "Choose the variants you want". It shows while someone on the card has no confirmed variant. Under the variants it reads "Pick a variant, then confirm it." ##### Choice deadline label id: paying.choices.card.deadline · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.deadline type: badge · label: "choose by [date]" When you can choose until. What it does: Warns you before the choice closes. How it works: Only on older choices that still carry a deadline. Shows "choose by [date]", with the whole day included. In the last 48 hours the label is red and reads "closes in N hours". It is not shown if the choice has no deadline (new choices have none), or once everyone on the card has chosen. After the deadline the choice closes. ##### Variant to choose id: paying.choices.card.variant · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.variant type: card One variant with its name, description and price. What it does: Shows what you get and what it costs before you choose. How it works: The whole card is one button: tapping it selects it, tapping again deselects it. It shows the name, the description, the price and how often it is paid ("One-off" or "Every N days, weeks or months"), and for a pack also "N classes per period". If the school gave you a discount, the regular price is crossed out and the reason is written below. You can't pick more variants than allowed. ##### "You're choosing" panel id: paying.choices.card.confirm-panel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.confirm-panel type: section · label: "You're choosing" A review of your pick before you confirm it. What it does: Gives you a last chance to check the choice and the amount. How it works: Appears after you tap a variant. It shows the names of the chosen variants and the total, plus a note that once confirmed the choice can't be changed and that only the school can change it. ###### Confirm choice button id: paying.choices.card.confirm-panel.confirm · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.confirm-panel.confirm type: button · label: "Confirm choice" Records the choice for good. What it does: Records the chosen variant for you and issues a charge if it has a price. How it works: After you press it the choice is recorded for the person it is for and the card turns to its locked state. If the variant has a price you see a message that your charge is in "To pay", otherwise that the choice is confirmed. It does not take you to payment. The school is notified of your choice. ###### Cancel button id: paying.choices.card.confirm-panel.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.confirm-panel.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Backs out of the pick before it is confirmed. What it does: Takes you back to the variants without recording anything. How it works: Clears what you tapped. Nothing is recorded or charged. It only works before Confirm choice. ##### Confirmed choice id: paying.choices.card.locked · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.locked type: status · label: "Your choice is confirmed and can't be changed." The choice is made and locked. What it does: Shows what you chose and who can change it. How it works: In a green panel "Your choice" (or "Your choices") the confirmed variants appear with a padlock. Under them it reads "Your choice is confirmed and can't be changed.", or "Set by the school." if the school set it. Next to the text is a Contact the school link: it opens an email to the school's owner or, if there is no email, the school's page. ###### Contact the school link id: paying.choices.card.locked.contact · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.locked.contact type: link · label: "Contact the school" A way to ask for a change to a confirmed choice. What it does: Leads you to the school, the only one who can change the choice. How it works: Opens an email to the school's owner. If the school has no email, it leads to the school's page. ##### "Amount due" note id: paying.choices.card.awaiting-payment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.card.awaiting-payment type: message · label: "€… due" Shows how much you owe for the chosen variant. What it does: Reminds you that the confirmed choice has an unpaid charge. How it works: Sits under the confirmed variant until its charge is paid and points you to To pay. It disappears after payment. #### Other plans section id: paying.choices.other-plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.other-plans type: section · label: "Other plans" Plans you can join or leave, outside a named choice. What it does: Gives you the freedom to join a plan the school opened for self-service. How it works: Plans the school opened for people to join themselves that are not part of a choice. Each person has their own block (for a child it reads "For [name]"). Plans you are already on come first, under "My choices", and the rest are in a foldable "Other options" folder with a count. Here Pick records straight away, with no confirmation step, and shows a message. The label on a plan tells how you got on it: "You picked this", "Added by the school" or "Via your group". ##### Pick button id: paying.choices.other-plans.pick · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.other-plans.pick type: button · label: "Pick" Puts you on the plan straight away. What it does: Puts you on the plan without a further confirmation. How it works: Puts you (or your child) on the plan and issues a charge if it has a price, which you see under To pay. The plan must be open and the school must offer it to your groups. ##### Unpick button id: paying.choices.other-plans.unpick · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.other-plans.unpick type: button · label: "Unpick" Takes you off the plan. What it does: Lets you leave a plan that is outside a choice. How it works: Takes you off the plan, whoever put you there (you, the school or your group). If the plan has an unpaid charge, you are first asked "Unpick this plan?": the unpaid charge will be cancelled, while anything already paid stays paid, with no refund. You confirm with Unpick. With no unpaid charge it happens at once. A confirmed variant in a choice can't be unpicked. #### You have a choice to make window id: paying.choices.arrival-prompt · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.arrival-prompt type: modal · label: "You have a choice to make" A window with the choice that opens when you enter the school's calendar. What it does: Puts the choice in front of you where members usually land. How it works: When you open the school's calendar and have a choice you haven't made yet, a window opens with the choice itself, which you can make right there. The Later button closes it until the next session; a new choice brings it back. After you confirm, the window is titled "Choice made" with the text "Thank you! Your choice is confirmed." and shows the locked choice. Done closes it, and when there is a charge to pay, Go to payment also appears and takes you to the Payments tab. The window waits: you first have to accept the updated Classes terms and the school's contract, if there are any. ##### Later button id: paying.choices.arrival-prompt.later · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.arrival-prompt.later type: button · label: "Later" Closes the window without choosing. What it does: Lets you come back to the choice later. How it works: Closes the window until the next session. The choice stays under Your choices and the number next to Payments stays. A new choice from the school opens the window again. ##### Go to payment button id: paying.choices.arrival-prompt.go-to-payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/choices#paying.choices.arrival-prompt.go-to-payments type: button · label: "Go to payment" Takes you to the Payments tab. What it does: Makes it easy to pay the charge for the choice you just confirmed. How it works: Only shown once the choice is made and there is a charge to pay. Closes the window and opens the Payments tab, where the charge is under To pay. It does not start a payment by itself. ### Plans and packs id: paying.plans-and-packs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/payments How the plans you pay for work, how a pack gets its credits and how they are used. What it does: Shows your price on each plan, what you owe on it and how many visits are left in your packs. How it works: The school sets up plans and decides who is on them. You only see plans that you or your children are on: usually those of the groups you belong to, plans the school added you to, and ones you picked yourself (see "Choosing an option the school offers"). There are three kinds of plan: Recurring: a subscription. The school issues a charge automatically every period; you pay the charge that was issued. One-off: paid once, for example a kit or event fee. Pack: a set number of visits (credits) per period. Like a recurring plan, it is billed every period: you pay the period's charge and that gives you the period's credits. The credits are valid until the next period is due. Plans appear in the My plans section of the school's Payments tab (plans from all groups) and in the Plans section of a group page (that group's plans only). If you have children in your profile, plans and packs are split by person. Paying. An unpaid charge on a plan is paid from To pay in the Payments tab; the plan's card reads that an amount is due. On a group page the card has a Pay €… button for the same thing. Only a one-off plan is "bought" from its card: pressing the button creates a charge and opens the online payment page. If you pay, the charge becomes paid. If you cancel, the charge stays pending. How credits are used. When the school marks you as attended at a session that counts towards packs, one credit is used. If the attendance mark is removed, the credit comes back. A pack for the session's group is used first, then a pack valid across the whole school, starting with the one that expires soonest. If you have no suitable pack, the visit is recorded as owed and deducted automatically from the next pack you get. Steps: 1. Open the school's Payments tab and open My plans, or open the group page. 2. Find the plan or pack. 3. If there is an unpaid charge, pay it from To pay (or with Pay €… on the group page). 4. Complete the payment on the online payment page. Notes: - If the school doesn't accept online payments, the cards read "Online payments unavailable" instead of a button. On a group page the Plans section isn't shown at all. - Three days before a pack's credits expire, or when they run out, you get a one-time notification to renew it. Renewing isn't something you buy: the next period's charge gives you new credits. - The price on the card is your personal price. If the school gave you a discount, the regular price is shown crossed out next to it, with the reason under it. FAQ: Q: I cancelled the payment. Why do I owe a charge now? A: When you buy a one-off plan, the charge is created before the payment page opens. If you cancel, it stays pending. You can pay it later from **To pay**. Q: How many credits do I have left? A: Look at the pack card under **My packs** (inside **My plans** in the **Payments** tab), it shows how many credits are left out of the total. Q: How do I buy a pack? A: A pack isn't bought from its card. It is billed every period like a recurring plan: once you pay the period's charge from **To pay**, you get that period's credits. Q: Why can't I see a plan the school offers? A: You only see active plans that the school has put you or your child on. Contact the school if you think you should be on it. #### Split by person id: paying.plans-and-packs.person-sections · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.person-sections type: section · label: "Myself" Each family member's plans and packs, separately. What it does: Makes it clear which plan and which pack belongs to whom. How it works: If you have children in your profile, each person's plans have a heading: Myself for you and each child's full name. A person with no plans or packs is skipped. Without children there are no headings. #### Plan card id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card type: card One plan with its kind, price, description and what you can do with it. What it does: Shows everything important about the plan and where to pay for it. How it works: At the top are the plan's name and kind, then the price and description. At the bottom of the card is a button or a status, depending on the kind of plan, whether you owe anything on it and whether the school accepts online payments. If you joined the plan yourself, a "You picked this" label sits next to its kind. ##### Plan kind label id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.type · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.type type: badge · label: "Recurring" Shows whether the plan is a subscription, a one-off payment or a pack. What it does: Tells you how you'll pay for the plan. How it works: Recurring: a charge is issued automatically every period. One-off: paid once, sometimes with a limit on how many you can buy. Pack: a number of visits per period; it is billed every period and paying the charge gives you the period's credits. ##### Plan price id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.price · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.price type: other Your price on the plan, in euro. What it does: Shows what you will pay, including any discount the school gave you. How it works: If your personal price differs from the regular one, the regular price is shown crossed out next to it, and the line "Reason for the price change: …" sits under the price. A recurring plan shows / month after the price, a pack shows / N classes. A pack also shows "N credits per period · valid until the next period is due" below the description. If a one-off plan has a due date, it shows "Due [date]". ##### Only N left for you warning id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.low-stock · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.low-stock type: badge · label: "Only N left for you" You can only buy a few more of this one-off plan. What it does: Warns you that you are close to the purchase limit. How it works: The school can limit how many of a one-off plan each person may buy. The limit is personal, other people's purchases don't affect it. The warning shows when you have between 1 and 5 left. Pending (not yet paid) purchases count too. ##### Pay €… button id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.pay-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.pay-button type: button · label: "Pay €…" Pays a pending charge on the plan, or buys the one-off plan. What it does: Opens the online payment page. How it works: The button is on the group page. In the Payments tab there is no such button: there the card reads that an amount is due and you pay from To pay. The button does one of two things: If you have a pending charge on the plan: it pays that charge, and the amount on the button is the charge amount. If the charge has its own description, different from the plan's, it is shown above the button, and if the school changed its amount by hand the reason is shown too. Otherwise, on a one-off plan: it buys one at your price. A charge is created before the payment page opens. Recurring plans and packs have no buy button: their charges arrive on their own. After a successful payment you return to Payment History in your profile; if you cancel, you return to where you started. If the school doesn't accept online payments, the button is replaced by "Online payments unavailable". ##### "Amount due" note id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.due-in-list · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.due-in-list type: message · label: "€… due" Says there is an unpaid charge on the plan and where to pay it. What it does: Saves you from looking for a pay button on the card. How it works: In the Payments tab, instead of a button, the plan reads the amount due and points to To pay. The charge is paid from there. ##### "Online payments unavailable" note id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.payments-unavailable · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.payments-unavailable type: message · label: "Online payments unavailable" The school doesn't accept online payments. What it does: Explains why the card has no pay button. How it works: Shown in place of the button when the school has no online payments set up. Hovering over the note shows "This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured." Contact the school to pay another way. ##### Plan status id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.state type: status What shows in place of the button when there is nothing to pay. What it does: Tells you why you can't pay on the plan right now. How it works: Billed automatically each period: a recurring plan or pack with no pending charge. The school will issue the next charge itself. Purchased: a one-off plan without a quantity limit that you have already paid for. Sold out: a one-off plan you have bought the maximum allowed number of. ##### You picked this label id: paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.self-picked · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.plan-card.self-picked type: badge · label: "You picked this" Shows that you joined the plan yourself. What it does: Tells plans you picked apart from plans the school put you on. How it works: Shown next to the plan's kind if you (or a parent on behalf of a child) picked the plan. Plans the school or your group added you to do not have this label. #### My packs section id: paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs type: section · label: "My packs" Your packs at the school and the credits left in them. What it does: Shows how many visits you have left and until when. How it works: Shows all of the person's packs at the school, from any group, except expired ones. They are ordered by expiry date, the one expiring soonest first. If you have owed visits, they appear here as a separate card. ##### Pack card id: paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.pack-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.pack-card type: card · label: "Purchased" One period's credits with the credits left and the dates. What it does: Shows how much of the credits you have used and until when they are valid. How it works: Shows the plan name (or Pack if the plan is no longer available), its description, "X / Y credits left", "Purchased [date]" and "Expires [date]". The credits appear as soon as the period's charge is paid and expire when the next period falls due. ###### Pack status id: paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.pack-card.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.pack-card.status type: status · label: "Active" Whether the credits can still be used. What it does: Tells you whether your visits will be deducted from this pack. How it works: Active: it has credits left and hasn't expired; it will be used at your next visit. Exhausted: every credit has been used. If the school removes an attendance mark and the credit is returned, the pack becomes active again, as long as it hasn't expired. Expired: its time has passed; unused credits can't be used. Expired packs aren't shown in the list. ##### Visits owed card id: paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.visits-owed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/plans-and-packs#paying.plans-and-packs.my-packs.visits-owed type: card · label: "Visits owed" Visits marked when there was no pack to deduct them from. What it does: Shows how many visits you owe so the next pack doesn't surprise you. How it works: Shows "N visits attended without a pack" and "These are deducted automatically from the next pack you buy." When a pack's charge is paid, the owed visits are taken out of the new credits, as far as they go. The card disappears once you owe nothing. ### Paying a charge online id: paying.paying-online · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online For: parents How to pay a charge by card, what happens afterwards and what if the payment fails. What it does: Lets you pay your charges with the school by card from your phone or computer, without going in person. How it works: Where charges come from. The school can issue a charge by hand, automatically each period on a recurring plan or a pack, or when you join a group that has a plan. A charge is also created when you join a plan yourself, confirm a variant in a choice, or buy a one-off plan. For every new charge you get a new-charge notification. How to pay. Press Pay on the charge under To pay in the school's Payments tab. A secure online payment page opens where you enter your card details, they are entered with the payment provider, not in Classes. In the mobile app the page opens in a browser over the app, and after paying you are taken back to the app. After paying. Once the payment is confirmed, the charge becomes paid, leaves To pay and the payment appears in Payment History in your profile. Confirmation comes from the payment provider, so it can take a few seconds. The school is notified that you paid. Who can pay. Only the account holder the charge was issued to, including charges for their children. Only a pending charge can be paid, and only if the school accepts online payments; otherwise the Pay button isn't shown. Steps: 1. Open the school's Payments tab. 2. Under To pay, press Pay on the charge. 3. Enter your card details on the payment page and confirm. 4. Check the payment in Payment History in your profile. Notes: - If you don't see the Pay button, the school hasn't set up online payments: "This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured." - If something goes wrong while opening the payment page, an error message is shown. - The school can mark a charge as paid in cash or by bank transfer, you then don't need to pay online. You get a notification that the payment was recorded. FAQ: Q: My payment didn't go through. What happens to the charge? A: The charge stays pending and you can try again with **Pay**. A failed attempt doesn't take any money. Q: I closed the payment page without paying. A: Nothing was paid and the charge stays pending. You go back to where you started and can pay later. Q: I paid, but the charge still shows as pending. A: Confirmation from the payment provider can be slightly delayed. Refresh the page after a few seconds. If the charge is still there, contact the school. Q: Can I get a refund? A: Classes has no refund button. Contact the school directly. Q: Will I be reminded about an unpaid charge? A: Yes. Once a charge is past its due date you get an overdue notification, once a day over the first three days after the due date, at most three times per charge. The school can also send you a reminder itself. #### Charge states id: paying.paying-online.charge-status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online#paying.paying-online.charge-status type: status What each state a charge can be in means. What it does: Helps you understand why a charge does or doesn't show in your lists. How it works: Pending, the charge has been issued and not paid. Only pending charges appear in To pay, and only they can be paid. Paid, the payment was confirmed online, or the school marked it paid in cash or by bank transfer. The payment shows in Payment History. Cancelled, the school cancelled the charge. You don't owe it and it disappears from your lists. Waived, the school let the charge go. You don't owe it and you get a notification that it was waived. If the school recorded a cash or bank payment by mistake and reverses it, the charge becomes pending again. A payment made online can't be reversed that way. #### Payment attempt outcome id: paying.paying-online.payment-outcome · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online#paying.paying-online.payment-outcome type: status What happens with each online payment attempt. What it does: Explains the difference between a successful, a failed and an abandoned payment. How it works: Completed, the money was taken. The charge becomes paid and you can open the receipt from Payment History. Failed, the card was declined or the payment didn't go through. The charge stays pending and you can try again. Abandoned, you closed the page or cancelled. No payment is created and the charge stays pending. #### Payment notifications id: paying.paying-online.notifications · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online#paying.paying-online.notifications type: notification The notifications you get about your charges, payments, choices and packs. What it does: Keeps you informed without checking by hand. How it works: New charge, the school issued you a charge, with the amount. Overdue charge, the charge has become overdue; sent once a day over the first three days after the due date, at most three times per charge. Payment recorded, the school marked a cash or bank transfer payment of yours as paid. It is not sent for a card payment you made yourself. Charge waived, the school let the charge go. Choose an option, the school opened a choice for you or reminds you to choose (the "Plan Choices" notification in your settings). It opens the Payments tab. Renew your pack, your pack's credits expire within three days or have run out; sent once per pack, and it means the next period's charge will give you new credits. The school can also send you a reminder about a pending charge. Which notifications you get is set in your profile. #### "This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured." message id: paying.paying-online.payments-unavailable · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online#paying.paying-online.payments-unavailable type: message · label: "This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured." The school doesn't accept online payments. What it does: Explains why you can't pay online. How it works: Shown when you hover over the "Online payments unavailable" note on a plan card. Under To pay the Pay button is simply not shown for the same reason. Charges and plans stay visible but can't be paid online until the school sets up online payments. Ask the school how to pay. #### Taking you back to the app page id: paying.paying-online.return-to-app · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/paying-online#paying.paying-online.return-to-app type: page · label: "Taking you back to the app" The page that returns you to the mobile app after paying. What it does: Reopens the app once the payment in the browser is done. How it works: After paying from the mobile app, the browser tries to open the app automatically. If it doesn't, press Return to app or Continue in the browser. ### Paying for your children id: paying.billing-scope · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/billing-scope For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/payments Who pays for a child, and how you see each person's charges, plans and payments separately. What it does: Lets a parent track and pay each child's charges, plans and packs separately, from their own account. How it works: Who pays for a child. Children don't have their own account, so everything issued for them is held on your account, but separately for each child. Only you can pay those charges. Each child's prices, plans and packs are separate from yours. How you see them. In the school's Payments tab, charges (To pay) and plans (My plans) are split by person: yours first (Myself), then each child's, each under a heading with their name. Nothing has to be selected first: everyone is shown at once. People with nothing to show are skipped. Choices are per child. When the school offers a choice and you have children in your profile, the choice is made separately for each child, not for you. If you have no children, it is for you. History. In Payment History in your profile, the payments for all schools and all children are in one combined list, and each payment shows the child's name. Steps: 1. Open the school and choose the Payments tab. 2. Find the heading with the child's name. 3. Pay their charge from To pay. Notes: - If you can't see the child's charges, check that the child is in a group of this school and that the right school is selected in the side menu. - If you have no children in your profile, there are no headings with names. FAQ: Q: Can the other parent pay our child's charge? A: A charge can only be paid online from the account the child is registered on. Q: I can't see my child's charges. A: A child's charges are in the school's **Payments** tab, under a heading with their name. Check that the child is in a group of this school and that you selected the right school in the side menu. ### Payment History id: paying.payment-history · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history For: parents · In the app: /users/:userId/settings/payment-history The section in your profile with every payment to your schools and its receipt. What it does: Shows what, when, to which school and how you paid, and lets you open the receipt for an online payment. How it works: Open My Profile from the side menu and choose Payment History. The section is only visible in your own profile. You also land here automatically after a successful online payment. Under the heading it reads "Everything you have paid, newest first." There is nothing to choose: one combined list holds your payments to every school that you or your children belong to, from newest to oldest. The history includes online payments and payments the school recorded as paid in cash or by bank transfer. Failed online payment attempts are recorded here too, but they have no View Receipt. Steps: 1. Open My Profile from the side menu. 2. Choose Payment History. 3. Find the payment in the list. 4. Press the View Receipt icon on the payment you want a receipt for. Notes: - If you've just paid and the payment isn't showing yet, wait a few seconds and refresh, confirmation from the payment provider can be delayed. - Receipts come from the online payment provider. For cash or bank transfer payments a receipt may not be available. - Unpaid charges aren't here, they are under To pay in the school's Payments tab. FAQ: Q: How do I get a receipt? A: Press the **View Receipt** icon on the payment. The receipt opens in a new browser tab (in the mobile app, in a browser over the app), where you can save or print it. Q: Where did the Organisation and For filters go? A: They are gone. The list shows everything at once. When you have children, each payment shows the child's name, and when you belong to more than one school, the school's name too. #### Payment row id: paying.payment-history.payment-row · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history#paying.payment-history.payment-row type: card One payment with its reason, method, amount and date. What it does: Shows the details of one payment. How it works: The title is the payment's description or the name of the plan it was for; if there is neither, it reads Charge. The plan's description may appear below it. Underneath are the date and, where it helps tell payments apart, whom and where it was for: the child's name (when you have children), the school's name (when you belong to more than one) and a label if the plan covers the whole school. For a plan payment there is also a link with the group name that opens the group; if the plan spans several groups, there is a link for each one you can see. On the right are the method, the amount and the receipt icon. ##### Whole organisation label id: paying.payment-history.payment-row.whole-organisation · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history#paying.payment-history.payment-row.whole-organisation type: badge · label: "Whole organisation" The plan behind the payment covers the whole school. What it does: Hints that the payment isn't for a single group. How it works: Shown when the plan is not tied to a particular group but covers the whole school. ##### Payment method label id: paying.payment-history.payment-row.method · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history#paying.payment-history.payment-row.method type: badge · label: "Online" How the payment was made. What it does: Tells online payments apart from ones the school recorded by hand. How it works: Online: paid by card on the online payment page. Cash: the school recorded a cash payment. Bank transfer: the school recorded a bank transfer. ##### View Receipt icon id: paying.payment-history.payment-row.view-receipt · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history#paying.payment-history.payment-row.view-receipt type: button · label: "View Receipt" Opens the receipt for the payment. What it does: Gives you proof of what you paid. How it works: A small icon at the right of the row, with the tooltip "View Receipt". Only shown for completed payments; for the others the spot is empty. The receipt is fetched from the online payment provider and opens in a new browser tab. While it loads the icon spins. If no receipt is available, an error message is shown. #### No payment history yet message id: paying.payment-history.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/paying/payment-history#paying.payment-history.empty type: message · label: "No payment history yet" There are no payments to show. What it does: Confirms there is nothing to show yet. How it works: Shown when you have no payments to any school. If you do not belong to any school, it reads "You're not a member of any organisation yet." instead. ## Setting up your school id: school-setup · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup For: schools Creating a school, subscription, profile, categories, rooms, online payments and contract. ### Creating a school id: school-setup.create-school · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school For: schools · In the app: /organisations/create How to create your school in Classes, name, summary, description, banner and logo. What it does: Creates your school's page and makes you its owner. From there you create groups, invite members and staff, and set up payments. How it works: The Class Details form opens from New organisation in the organisation picker at the top of the side menu. No field is required: anything you leave empty is saved exactly as its hint shows, including the sample banner and logo. If you type your own text, it has to fit each field's length limits. When you press Create Class the school is created straight away as active, you become its owner and you are taken to its page. The owner always holds every permission in the school. Until the school has at least one group, nobody can be added or invited, so your first step after creating it is to make a group. To create a school your profile needs its candidate details filled in. Steps: 1. Open the organisation picker at the top of the menu and press New organisation. 2. Optionally press the banner to pick your own picture and adjust it in the crop window. 3. Optionally press the round logo and pick your own picture. 4. Fill in Name, Summary and Description, or leave them with the values shown. 5. Press Create Class. Notes: - If you see the Candidate Data Required window instead of the form, fill in your details first using Become Candidate. - You can change everything later from Settings, in the Profile section, with Edit profile. - There is no subscription or plan step while creating a school. FAQ: Q: Do I have to fill in everything to create a school? A: No. Empty fields are saved with the default values shown, and the banner and logo with the sample pictures. You can change them at any time. Q: What should I do right after creating it? A: Create at least one group from the **Groups** tab. Members are enrolled into groups, so without one you can't invite or add anyone. #### Candidate Data Required window id: school-setup.create-school.candidate-required · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.candidate-required type: modal · label: "Candidate Data Required" Appears when your profile doesn't have candidate details yet. What it does: Stops you before the form, because school pages require a completed profile. How it works: The Become Candidate button takes you to your profile to fill in the details. Closing the window takes you back to the home page. #### Class Details heading id: school-setup.create-school.heading · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.heading type: section · label: "Class Details" The top of the form, with a short note on how empty fields work. What it does: Reminds you that you can leave fields empty and still get a complete page. How it works: Below the heading it reads “Fill in the details below to set up your class page.” and “Anything you leave empty is saved exactly as shown, including the banner and logo.” #### Banner and logo id: school-setup.create-school.media · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.media type: section The top card of the form, where you pick the school's cover and logo. What it does: Sets how the school looks in lists and in its header. How it works: The banner fills the card's width and the round logo sits at its bottom-left corner. Below them are size hints: Banner: 1500 × 300px and Logo: 1 × 1. If either picture has a problem, the error is shown under the card. ##### Banner field id: school-setup.create-school.media.banner · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.media.banner type: field · label: "Banner" The wide cover at the top of the school's page. What it does: Lets you use your own picture instead of the sample one. How it works: Optional, if you pick nothing, the sample picture shown is saved. Press the banner, choose a file and adjust it in the crop window at a 5:1 ratio (like 1500 × 300 px). Only JPG and PNG files under 5 MB are allowed. ###### Default badge id: school-setup.create-school.media.banner.default-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.media.banner.default-badge type: badge · label: "Default" Shows the banner is still the sample one. What it does: Tells you that you are about to save the sample picture. How it works: Sits in the banner's top-left corner until you pick your own picture, then disappears. ##### Logo field id: school-setup.create-school.media.logo · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.media.logo type: field · label: "Logo" The round picture that represents the school throughout the app. What it does: Helps members recognise the school in the side menu and in lists. How it works: Optional, if you pick nothing, the sample logo is saved. Press the circle, choose a file and fit it into a square frame in the crop window. Only JPG and PNG files under 4 MB are allowed. #### Name field id: school-setup.create-school.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.name type: field · label: "Name" The school's name as everyone will see it. What it does: Members find and recognise the school by it, in search, in the side menu and in its header. How it works: Optional: if left empty the school is called My School. If you type a name, it must be 3 to 50 characters. #### Summary field id: school-setup.create-school.summary · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.summary type: field · label: "Summary" One line under the name saying what the school does. What it does: Gives people a quick idea of the school without opening its page. How it works: Optional: if left empty, “Classes for all ages and levels” is saved. If you type text, it must be 3 to 100 characters. It shows under the name in the header and on the school's card. #### Description field id: school-setup.create-school.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.description type: field · label: "Description" A longer text about the school. What it does: Tells members more about your school. How it works: Optional: if left empty, the sample text from the hint is saved. If you type text, it must be 3 to 100 characters. On the school's card it is shown when there is no summary. #### Create Class button id: school-setup.create-school.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/create-school#school-setup.create-school.submit type: button · label: "Create Class" Creates the school with the details you entered. What it does: Finishes creation and makes you the new school's owner. How it works: While the school is being created the button is disabled and shows a spinner. On success it takes you to the new school's page. If a field breaks its limits, the error shows under it and nothing is created. ### My schools id: school-setup.my-schools · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/my-schools For: schools · In the app: /organisations Where you find the schools you manage or attend, and how you create a new one. What it does: Gathers every school you have access to in one place, so you can open one or create a new one from any page. How it works: Schools are in the organisation picker at the top of the side menu. Press it to see two lists: My organisations (the schools you created or work in as staff, tagged "Administrator" or "Staff") and Organisations I attend (the schools where you or your children are). A school in the first list is not repeated in the second. Pressing a school picks it: for one you manage, the side menu shows the admin dashboard; for one you attend, the attendee menu. Below the lists are New organisation, which leads to the form for creating a school, and Search organisations, which opens the search. Search is only for schools that are not yours yet, by exact name or through an invite link. If you have no schools yet, the menu says "You have no organisations yet." Notes: - An inactive school still appears in your own list, but it doesn't come up in search for other people. #### My organisations list id: school-setup.my-schools.mine · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/my-schools#school-setup.my-schools.mine type: list · label: "My organisations" The schools you manage, in the organisation picker. What it does: Gives you one-press access to every school you created or work in. How it works: Under the school's name it says "Administrator" if you are the owner, or "Staff". Each school is listed once, even if you are both owner and employee. Picking it shows the admin dashboard in the menu. #### Organisations I attend list id: school-setup.my-schools.attending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/my-schools#school-setup.my-schools.attending type: list · label: "Organisations I attend" The schools where you or your children are users. What it does: Keeps the schools you are a customer of apart from the ones you manage. How it works: Schools already in My organisations are not repeated here. Picking a school shows the attendee menu: calendar, announcements, payments, lessons and groups. #### New organisation button id: school-setup.my-schools.create · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/my-schools#school-setup.my-schools.create type: menu-item · label: "New organisation" Opens the form for a new school. What it does: Starts creating a new school that you will own. How it works: It is at the bottom of the organisation picker and leads to the Class Details form. The new school appears in My organisations straight away. #### Search organisations button id: school-setup.my-schools.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/my-schools#school-setup.my-schools.search type: menu-item · label: "Search organisations" Opens the school search. What it does: Helps you find a school you're not part of yet. How it works: All schools are private: you search by the exact name or follow the link you were given. The search shows cards for the schools that match. ### School profile id: school-setup.school-profile · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings · permissions: Organization.Edit The school header and how the name, summary, description, banner and logo are changed from the settings. What it does: Lets you keep the school's look up to date, what users see when they open it. How it works: The header of the school's page shows the banner, logo, name, summary and the number of members. It is read-only. On a phone there is a compact bar with the logo, name and summary at the top instead. Under the header on a wide screen there is a bar with the school's sections: Calendar, Announcements, Payments, Lessons and Groups, shown only to the owner and employees. Other users reach the same sections from the side menu. Everyone only sees the sections that concern them. The profile is edited in Settings, in the Profile section. At the top, under What members see, is the preview of the banner, logo, name, summary and description. Edit profile opens the Update Class window, where you change the texts and can replace the banner or logo. A picture you don't replace stays as it is. Changes show immediately after saving. View public page takes you to the school's page. Editing needs the Edit organisation profile permission (the owner always has it). Steps: 1. Open the organisation picker at the top of the side menu and press Organisation settings. 2. Choose Profile and press Edit profile. 3. Change the fields you want. For a new picture press the banner or the logo and adjust the photo. 4. Press Update class. Notes: - The Manage button in the header of the school's page (for the owner and some employees) takes you to the school's settings. - If you don't see the Profile section, you don't have the Edit organisation profile permission. #### School header id: school-setup.school-profile.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header type: section The banner, logo, name, summary and member count at the top of the school. What it does: Introduces the school to anyone who opens it. How it works: The members number shows the school's users. The header is read-only. On a phone there is a compact bar with the logo, name and summary instead of the full header. ##### Manage button id: school-setup.school-profile.header.manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.manage type: link · label: "Manage" Leads from the school's page to its settings. What it does: A quick way to the settings when you are looking at the school. How it works: It shows next to the member count, only for the owner and for employees who may edit the profile, manage events or manage groups. It is not shown on a phone, where the header is compact. ##### Edit profile button id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit type: button · label: "Edit profile" · permissions: Organization.Edit Opens the window for changing the school profile. What it does: Starts editing the school's name, texts and pictures. How it works: It is in Settings, in the Profile section, under the preview. It shows with the Edit organisation profile permission (the owner always has it). It opens the Update Class window. ###### Update Class window id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal type: modal · label: "Update Class" The form where you change the school's details. What it does: Gathers all of the school's editable details in one place. How it works: It opens with the current values. Closing it without saving discards the changes. The text fields here are required, unlike the creation form, you can't leave them empty. ###### Banner field id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.banner · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.banner type: field · label: "Banner" Replacing the school's cover. What it does: Replaces the current banner with a new picture. How it works: Optional, if you don't pick a new picture, the current banner stays. Press the banner, choose a JPG or PNG under 5 MB and fit it at a 5:1 ratio. ###### Logo id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.logo · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.logo type: field Replacing the school's round logo. What it does: Replaces the current logo with a new picture. How it works: The circle at the banner's bottom-left corner. Optional, if you don't pick a new picture, the current logo stays. Choose a JPG or PNG under 4 MB and fit it into a square frame. ###### Class Name field id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.name type: field · label: "Class Name" The school's name. What it does: Renames the school everywhere in the app. How it works: Required, 3 to 50 characters. ###### Summary field id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.summary · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.summary type: field · label: "Summary" The short line under the school's name. What it does: Says in one sentence what the school does. How it works: Required, 3 to 100 characters. ###### Description field id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.description type: field · label: "Description" The longer text about the school. What it does: Gives members more information about the school. How it works: Required, 3 to 100 characters. ###### Update class button id: school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-profile#school-setup.school-profile.header.edit.modal.submit type: button · label: "Update class" Saves the profile changes. What it does: Applies the new details and closes the window. How it works: While saving, the button is disabled. On success the window closes and the header updates. If a field breaks its limits, the error shows under it. ### Cropping the banner and logo id: school-setup.image-crop · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/image-crop For: schools The window where you adjust the picture for the banner or logo before saving it. What it does: Makes sure the school's banner and logo always have the right shape, without editing the photo in another program. How it works: It opens as soon as you pick a file for the banner or logo, while creating a school or in the Update Class window. The frame has a fixed shape: wide 5:1 for the banner and square for the logo. Drag the photo to choose which part fits the frame, and use the zoom slider (up to three times). Apply puts the cropped picture into the form, while Cancel or the X close the window without changing anything. The cropped picture is saved as a JPG. It is only uploaded when you save the whole form. Steps: 1. Press the banner or logo in the form and choose a photo. 2. Drag the photo until the part you want sits inside the frame. 3. Zoom in with the slider if needed. 4. Press Apply. Notes: - This window's title and buttons are currently shown in English, Adjust, Cancel and Apply: whatever the app language. - If you cancel, you can pick the same file again. #### Crop area id: school-setup.image-crop.area · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/image-crop#school-setup.image-crop.area type: other The photo with the frame that decides what is saved. What it does: Shows exactly which part of the photo becomes the banner or logo. How it works: Drag the photo. The frame's shape doesn't change: 5:1 for a banner, square for a logo. #### Zoom slider id: school-setup.image-crop.zoom · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/image-crop#school-setup.image-crop.zoom type: other Zooms the photo in or out inside the frame. What it does: Lets you take a smaller part of the photo, for example just the logo from a bigger image. How it works: From normal size up to three times zoom. #### Apply button id: school-setup.image-crop.apply · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/image-crop#school-setup.image-crop.apply type: button · label: "Apply" Accepts the cropped picture. What it does: Puts the cropped image into the form as the new banner or logo. How it works: Closes the window and updates the preview in the form. Nothing is uploaded until you save the form. #### Cancel button id: school-setup.image-crop.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/image-crop#school-setup.image-crop.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the window without changing the picture. What it does: Discards the chosen photo. How it works: The banner or logo in the form stays as it was. ### School settings id: school-setup.settings-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings · permissions: Organization.Edit, Events.Manage Where the owner and some employees set up the profile, contract, rooms, colours, attendance answers, online payments and beta updates. What it does: Keeps the school's rarely changed settings in one place, apart from everyday work. How it works: Settings is a page in the admin dashboard. You open it from the organisation picker at the top of the side menu with Organisation settings (or with the Manage button at the top of the school's page). The owner sees it, and so do employees with the Edit organisation profile or Manage events and their sessions permission. Ordinary users don't have it. The page is split into four groups, with these sections: Organisation: Profile and Member contract; Scheduling: Rooms, Event colours and Attendance answers; Payments: Online payments with Stripe; Advanced: Beta updates. Which sections you see depends on your permissions: Profile needs Edit organisation profile, Rooms and Event colours need Manage events and their sessions, and the contract, attendance answers, Stripe and beta updates are owner-only. Sections you have no permission for are not shown. On a wide screen there is a menu of sections on the left and the open section on the right. On a phone you first see a list of the sections, each with a short status (for example "Attached" or "Connected"), and pressing one opens it full screen with a link back to Settings. Steps: 1. Open the organisation picker at the top of the side menu and pick the school. 2. Press Organisation settings. 3. Choose the section you want to change. Notes: - If you don't see Organisation settings, you have neither permission. Ask the owner to give you Edit organisation profile or Manage events and their sessions. - Old links to a "Settings" tab on the school's page send you here. That tab is no longer in the school page's tab bar. - Group categories are no longer here. They are managed from the Groups page of the dashboard, with the Categories button. FAQ: Q: Where are the school settings? A: In the organisation picker at the top of the side menu, press "Organisation settings". It shows for the owner and for employees who may edit the organisation profile or manage events. Q: Why don't I see all the sections? A: Each section only shows to people with the permission it needs. The contract, attendance answers, Stripe and beta updates are owner-only. #### Organisation settings button id: school-setup.settings-tab.entry · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.entry type: menu-item · label: "Organisation settings" · permissions: Organization.Edit, Events.Manage Opens the settings of the picked school. What it does: Takes you to the school's settings page. How it works: It is in the organisation picker menu, below the lists of schools. It shows for the owner and for employees with the Edit organisation profile or Manage events and their sessions permission. It opens the settings of the school you picked. #### Manage button on the school page id: school-setup.settings-tab.manage-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.manage-link type: link · label: "Manage" The button at the top of the school's page that leads to the settings. What it does: Saves you the trip through the menu when you are looking at the school's page. How it works: It shows next to the member count, only for the owner and for employees who may edit the profile, manage events or manage groups. It leads to the settings of that school. #### Profile section id: school-setup.settings-tab.profile · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.profile type: section · label: "Profile" · permissions: Organization.Edit How the school looks to users, and how to edit its profile. What it does: Shows the banner, logo, name, short and long description the way users see them, and leads to editing them. How it works: At the top, under What members see, is the preview. Below it are Edit profile, which opens the Update Class window, and View public page. See the article on the school profile. #### Member contract section id: school-setup.settings-tab.contract · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.contract type: section · label: "Member contract" The document members must accept to use the school. What it does: Lets you ask for agreement to your terms. How it works: Only the owner sees the section and can upload, replace or remove the contract. #### Rooms section id: school-setup.settings-tab.rooms · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.rooms type: section · label: "Rooms" · permissions: Events.Manage The list of spaces where sessions take place. What it does: Gives calendar events a choice of real rooms instead of free text. How it works: You add, rename and remove rooms. The section shows with the Manage events and their sessions permission. #### Event colours section id: school-setup.settings-tab.event-colors · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.event-colors type: section · label: "Event colours" · permissions: Events.Manage The school's own colours for calendar events. What it does: Holds the palette you pick from when creating an event. How it works: Needs Manage events and their sessions. See the separate article on event colours. #### Attendance answers section id: school-setup.settings-tab.member-sign-up · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.member-sign-up type: section · label: "Attendance answers" Whether users mark "Attending / Not attending" themselves, and until when. What it does: Controls the rule for users' answers before a session. How it works: Owner only. See the separate article on attendance answers. #### Online payments with Stripe section id: school-setup.settings-tab.stripe · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.stripe type: section · label: "Online payments with Stripe" Connecting a payment account so members can pay online. What it does: Turns on online payments for the school. How it works: Only the owner sees the section and can connect Stripe. #### Beta updates section id: school-setup.settings-tab.beta · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/settings-tab#school-setup.settings-tab.beta type: section · label: "Beta updates" A switch for new features before their official release. What it does: Gives the whole school access to features in beta. How it works: Only the owner sees the section and can turn beta updates on or off. ### Group categories id: school-setup.group-categories · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups · permissions: Groups.Manage How to sort the school's groups into folders by category, for example by sport or age. What it does: When you have many groups, categories split them into folders so users and staff find the right group quickly. How it works: Categories are managed from the Groups page of the admin dashboard with the Categories button, which opens the Group categories window. The page and the window are for people with the Manage groups permission (the owner always has it). Categories are no longer in Settings. Once the school has at least one category, groups are shown in folders, one per category, in the order set in the window. Groups with no category go into an Uncategorised folder, which only appears when such groups exist. A school with no categories shows its groups as a plain list. The folders also show on the Groups tab of the school's page. You choose a group's category in the Category field when creating or editing the group. Each group is in at most one category. Steps: 1. Open Groups in the Admin Actions section of the menu. 2. Press Categories. 3. In the window, type the name in the Category name box. 4. Press Add or Enter. 5. Put groups into the category using the Category field in each group's edit window. Notes: - Category names must be unique in the school, regardless of capital letters. Trying a duplicate shows “That didn't work. The name may already be in use.” - A name can be up to 100 characters. Spaces at the start and end are removed. - If you add the name of a removed category again, it is restored and groups still filed under it return to its folder. FAQ: Q: What happens to the groups when I delete a category? A: The groups are not deleted. They become uncategorised and show in the **Uncategorised** folder. Q: Can I put one group in two categories? A: No. Each group is in at most one category. #### Group categories window id: school-setup.group-categories.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section type: section · label: "Group categories" The school's category list and its controls. What it does: Shows every category in the order they appear in the group folders. How it works: The window is titled Group categories, and under the title it says "Folders that sort your groups on the groups page." Grey placeholder rows show while the list loads. ##### “No categories yet.” message id: school-setup.group-categories.section.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.empty type: message · label: "No categories yet." Shown when the school has no categories. What it does: Tells you groups are shown without folders. How it works: It disappears once you add the first category. ##### Category row id: school-setup.group-categories.section.row · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.row type: list One category with its actions. What it does: Lets you change or remove the category. How it works: On a computer the icons appear when you point at the row; on a phone they are always visible. ###### Move up and Move down buttons id: school-setup.group-categories.section.row.move · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.row.move type: button · label: "Move up" The arrows that change the order of categories. What it does: Sets the order of folders on the Groups tab, for example your main discipline at the top. How it works: Each press swaps the category with its neighbour. The up arrow is disabled for the first category and the down arrow for the last. The new order is saved immediately. ###### Rename button id: school-setup.group-categories.section.row.rename · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.row.rename type: button · label: "Rename" The pencil icon for changing the category's name. What it does: Renames the category, and every group in it stays in it. How it works: The row turns into a box with the current name. Confirm with the Save tick or Enter, cancel with the Cancel X or Escape. An empty name isn't saved. On success it shows “Category renamed.” ###### Delete button id: school-setup.group-categories.section.row.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.row.delete type: button · label: "Delete" The bin icon for removing the category. What it does: Removes the folder without deleting its groups. How it works: The row first asks “Remove “”?” with Delete and Cancel buttons. After you confirm, the category's groups become uncategorised and it shows “Category removed. Its groups are now uncategorised.” ##### Category name box and Add button id: school-setup.group-categories.section.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/group-categories#school-setup.group-categories.section.add type: field · label: "Category name" Creates a new category. What it does: Adds a new folder for groups. How it works: Type a name and press Add or Enter. The button is disabled while the box is empty. The new category is added at the bottom of the order. On success it shows “Category added.” ### Rooms id: school-setup.rooms · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/rooms For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/rooms · permissions: Events.Manage How to enter the school's rooms and spaces so you can pick them for sessions in the calendar. What it does: Creates a shared list of places where sessions take place. Calendar events pick a room from this list instead of free text, so the schedule can be viewed and grouped by room. How it works: Rooms are managed in the Rooms section of Settings, in the Scheduling group. The section only shows with the Manage events and their sessions permission (the owner always has it), and with it you add, rename and remove rooms. Names are unique in the school regardless of capital letters and can be up to 100 characters. Removing a room doesn't change events already held in it. If you later add a room with the same name, the removed room is restored and events pointing to it have a room again. Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. In the Rooms section type the name in the Room name box. 3. Press Add or Enter. Notes: - A duplicate name or another error shows “That didn't work. The name may already be in use.” - Unlike categories, rooms have no manual order. #### Rooms section id: school-setup.rooms.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/rooms#school-setup.rooms.section type: section · label: "Rooms" The school's room list and its controls. What it does: Shows every active room. How it works: A counter sits next to the heading. With no rooms it reads “No rooms yet.” ##### Rename button id: school-setup.rooms.section.rename · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/rooms#school-setup.rooms.section.rename type: button · label: "Rename" · permissions: Events.Manage The pencil icon next to the room. What it does: Changes the room's name wherever it is used. How it works: The row becomes a text box. Confirm with Save or Enter, cancel with Cancel or Escape. On success it shows “Room renamed.” On a computer the icons appear when you point at the row. ##### Delete button id: school-setup.rooms.section.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/rooms#school-setup.rooms.section.delete type: button · label: "Delete" · permissions: Events.Manage The bin icon next to the room. What it does: Removes the room from the list you pick from. How it works: The row asks “Remove “”?” with Delete and Cancel. After you confirm it shows “Room removed.” Events already in that room are not changed. ##### Room name box and Add button id: school-setup.rooms.section.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/rooms#school-setup.rooms.section.add type: field · label: "Room name" · permissions: Events.Manage Adds a new room. What it does: Creates a new room you can pick for an event. How it works: Type a name and press Add or Enter. The button is disabled while the box is empty. On success it shows “Room added.” ### Event colours id: school-setup.event-colors · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/event-colors For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/event-colors · permissions: Events.Manage How the school adds its own colours, offered first when creating an event. What it does: Lets you colour the calendar with your school's own colours, for example one per programme or room, instead of picking only from the built-in ones. How it works: The colours are in the Event colours section of Settings, in the Scheduling group. The section shows with the Manage events and their sessions permission. The colours you add are offered first when creating an event, in the order you added them. Each added colour takes the place of one built-in colour, so the row of colours does not get longer. An event keeps the colour it was given: if you later remove the colour from the list, events already created do not change. You can have at most 30 colours. A colour looks like #A1B2C3 (six characters, with or without the #) and is saved in capital letters. Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. Choose Event colours. 3. Pick a colour with the circle or type its code, for example #A1B2C3. 4. Press Add. Notes: - If the code is not valid it says "Enter a hex colour like #A1B2C3." and Add is disabled. - You cannot add a colour that is already built in ("That colour is already one of the built-in ones.") or already in the list ("That colour is already in the list."). FAQ: Q: Do events already created change colour if I remove a colour? A: No. Events keep their colour. Removing only takes it off the list offered for a new event. #### New colour field and Add button id: school-setup.event-colors.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/event-colors#school-setup.event-colors.add type: field · label: "Add" · permissions: Events.Manage Adds a new colour to the school's palette. What it does: This is how you create your own colour for events. How it works: The round field on the left opens a colour picker, and next to it you can type the code. Enter works too. The Add button is disabled while the colour is invalid, built in or already added, and a hint under the field says why. On success you see "Colour added." #### Remove button on a colour id: school-setup.event-colors.remove · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/event-colors#school-setup.event-colors.remove type: button · permissions: Events.Manage The small X on each colour that takes it off the palette. What it does: Removes a colour you no longer use. How it works: On a computer the X appears when you point at the colour, on a phone it is always visible. It takes effect straight away, with no confirmation, and shows "Colour removed." Events already created keep their colour. With no custom colours it says "No custom colours yet." ### Attendance answers from users id: school-setup.member-sign-up · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-sign-up For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/member-sign-up How the owner decides whether users mark "Attending / Not attending" for a session themselves, and until when. What it does: Gives you control over whether users say beforehand if they are coming, and how long before the session that answer gets locked. How it works: The rule is in the Attendance answers section of Settings, in the Scheduling group. Only the owner sees and changes it, because it applies to every user of the school. Each change is saved straight away and shows "Attendance answer settings saved." The Members can mark their attendance switch (Allowed or Off) turns the possibility on or off entirely. When it is off, users see "Attendance is marked by the organisation." at the session. The Lock answers before the session list sets how long they can set or change their answer: Until the session starts, or 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 1 day or 2 days before it. It starts at 1 hour. The list is disabled while the switch is off. Staff can always mark on behalf of users and the rule does not limit them. A session that has already taken place is always locked. Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. Choose Attendance answers. 3. Turn Members can mark their attendance on or off. 4. Pick in Lock answers before the session how long they can answer. Notes: - If you are not the owner, you don't see this section. - Users see when their answer gets locked: "Sign-up is locked 1 hour before the event." FAQ: Q: Can parents change their answer at the last minute? A: Only until the chosen deadline. After it the answer is locked for users, but staff can change it for them. #### Members can mark their attendance switch id: school-setup.member-sign-up.toggle · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-sign-up#school-setup.member-sign-up.toggle type: toggle · label: "Members can mark their attendance" Turns self-service attendance answers on or off. What it does: Decides whether users can say beforehand if they are coming at all. How it works: Under it, it says Allowed or Off. It only works for the owner and is disabled while the change is saving. When it is off, users see "Attendance is marked by the organisation." and the team marks attendance. #### Lock answers before the session choice id: school-setup.member-sign-up.cutoff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-sign-up#school-setup.member-sign-up.cutoff type: select · label: "Lock answers before the session" How long before the session users can still set or change their answer. What it does: Gives the team time to know who is coming before the session starts. How it works: Pick one row: Until the session starts, "30 minutes before", "1 hour before", "2 hours before", "6 hours before", "12 hours before", "1 day before" or "2 days before". After that point users can no longer set or change their answer, while staff always can. The choice is saved straight away. It is disabled while the switch is off. ### Online payments with Stripe id: school-setup.online-payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/online-payments For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/stripe How the owner connects Stripe so members can pay charges and plans online. What it does: Connects the school to a Stripe payment account so members' online payments go straight to you. Without Stripe connected, members can't pay online. How it works: Connecting lives in the Online payments with Stripe section of Settings, in the Payments group, and is done once. The section only shows to the owner, so only the owner can connect Stripe. The first time you press Connect Stripe, a Stripe account is created for the school and Stripe's page opens in your browser. There you fill in what Stripe asks for, such as a bank account and identity documents. When you finish, or the link expires, Stripe sends you back to the app. If you didn't finish, press the button again, you continue with the same account. The school counts as connected once Stripe has enabled both charges and payouts. Then the Connected badge replaces Not connected and the button disappears. Until the school is connected, members' pay buttons are disabled with the note “This organisation doesn't have an online payment method configured.”, and the Plans section on a group page is hidden. Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. In the Online payments with Stripe section press Connect Stripe. 3. Fill in the details Stripe asks for on the page that opens. 4. Come back to the app and check that the Connected badge shows. Notes: - If Stripe later stops charges or payouts for a connected school, the owner gets an “action needed” notification (the Payment Account Issues type). - The Stripe fees, Terms and stripe.com links open Stripe's website outside the app. FAQ: Q: Why can't members pay online? A: Most likely Stripe isn't connected or isn't finished. Check whether **Settings** shows the **Connected** badge. If not, the owner has to press **Connect Stripe** and complete Stripe's steps. Q: Can a staff member connect Stripe? A: No. Connecting a payment account is available only to the school's owner. #### Connected badge id: school-setup.online-payments.connected · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/online-payments#school-setup.online-payments.connected type: badge · label: "Connected" Shows online payments are switched on. What it does: Confirms members can pay online. How it works: Appears once Stripe has enabled both charges and payouts for the school. #### Connect Stripe button id: school-setup.online-payments.connect · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/online-payments#school-setup.online-payments.connect type: button · label: "Connect Stripe" Opens the Stripe account setup. What it does: Starts or continues connecting the school to Stripe. How it works: Only the owner sees it, and only while the school isn't connected. While the link is being prepared the button is disabled and shows a spinner. Stripe's page opens outside the app. #### Stripe fees, Terms and stripe.com links id: school-setup.online-payments.links · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/online-payments#school-setup.online-payments.links type: link · label: "Stripe fees" Stripe's public pages about its fees, terms and company. What it does: Let you check what Stripe costs and what you agree to before connecting an account. How it works: They sit at the bottom of the section and open Stripe's website outside the app. ### Member contract id: school-setup.member-contract · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/contract How the owner attaches a contract or terms that members must accept before using the school. What it does: Lets you ask every member for explicit agreement to the school's terms, and keep a record of who accepted which version. How it works: The contract is managed in the Member contract section of Settings, in the Organisation group. The section only shows to the owner, so only the owner can upload, replace and remove the contract. Upload a PDF or plain-text file up to 10 MB. Every upload is a new version. From then on every member, anyone enrolled in at least one group, themselves or through a child, sees an Accept the contract of window the next time they open any page of the school. They can't use the school until they read the document, tick “I have read the contract and accept it.” and press Accept. The “Not now, back to my schools” button takes them back to their school list. If the user also still has to accept the Classes terms, those come first and the school's contract follows. The owner never has to accept. When you replace the contract, every member has to accept the new version, earlier agreements stay on record but no longer count. When you remove the contract, members have nothing to accept, and agreements already given are kept. Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. In the Member contract section press Upload contract. 3. Choose a PDF or .txt file up to 10 MB. 4. Wait for “Contract uploaded. Members will be asked to accept it on their next visit.” Notes: - Word documents are not accepted, because the contract is shown inside the app: a PDF is shown page by page and a text file in a frame. - You can see whether a member accepted in that member's side panel under Users: the Contract section with an Up to date, Version N pending or Missing label. - If a member has the contract open and you replace it in the meantime, accepting shows them that the contract changed and loads the new version. - A staff member who is also enrolled in a group has to accept the contract too. FAQ: Q: Do existing members have to accept a new contract? A: Yes. Every upload is a new version and every member, including existing ones, is asked to accept it on their next visit. Q: Do I lose the agreements if I remove the contract? A: No. Agreements already given stay on record. Members simply have nothing to accept until you upload a new contract. #### Attached / None badge id: school-setup.member-contract.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.status type: badge · label: "Attached" Shows whether the school has a contract. What it does: Tells you at a glance whether members have anything to accept. How it works: Green Attached when there is a contract, grey None when there isn't. #### Contract card id: school-setup.member-contract.document · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.document type: card The attached file with its version and last update date. What it does: Lets you see exactly which document members accept. How it works: It shows the file name (or Contract), Version N and “updated” with a date. Pressing it (Open) shows the document in a window inside the app with a Download button. If the document doesn't display, the window reads “If the document doesn't display here, download it.” #### Upload contract / Replace contract button id: school-setup.member-contract.upload · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.upload type: button · label: "Upload contract" Uploads a new contract or replaces the current one. What it does: Publishes a new version that every member has to accept. How it works: When a contract already exists the button reads Replace contract. Only PDF and .txt files are accepted, up to 10 MB and not empty. A wrong type shows “That file type is not allowed. Upload a PDF or plain-text document.”, a big file “The file must be 10 MB or smaller.”, and any other failure “Could not upload the contract.” A hint beside it reads “PDF or plain-text file up to 10 MB. Shown inside the app.” #### Remove button id: school-setup.member-contract.remove · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.remove type: button · label: "Remove" Removes the school's contract. What it does: Stops requiring members to accept a contract. How it works: Only shown when there is a contract. Opens a confirmation. ##### Remove the contract? window id: school-setup.member-contract.remove.confirm · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.remove.confirm type: modal · label: "Remove the contract?" Confirmation before removing the contract. What it does: Protects you from removing it by accident. How it works: It reads “Members will no longer have to accept a contract. Agreements already given stay on record.” Press Remove or Cancel. On success it shows “Contract removed. Members no longer have anything to accept.” If you upload a new contract later, it starts again at version 1. #### “Accept the contract of …” window (what members see) id: school-setup.member-contract.acceptance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/member-contract#school-setup.member-contract.acceptance type: modal · label: "Accept the contract of {{name}}" The mandatory step members see until they accept the current contract. What it does: Collects each member's explicit agreement to the current contract version. How it works: The window has no close button. It shows the document, the file name, Version N and a Download link. The text reads “To keep using , you need to read and accept the organisation's contract.”, or for a new version “ has updated its contract…”. Accept only becomes active after ticking “I have read the contract and accept it.” “Not now, back to my schools” leads to the school list. If accepting fails it shows “Could not accept the contract. Please try again.” ### Beta updates id: school-setup.beta-updates · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/beta-updates For: schools · In the app: /admin/settings/beta How the owner turns on new Classes features for the whole school before everyone else gets them. What it does: Gives your school early access to new features that are still being tested. How it works: The switch is in the Beta updates section of Settings, in the Advanced group. It applies to the whole school: every user and staff member sees the same app. The section only shows to the owner, so only the owner can flip it. The tag shows On or Off. The Currently in beta box lists what the switch turns on. Right now it says "Nothing is in beta right now.", because the new calendar is already for everyone and the switch changes nothing visible. When new features come up for testing, they will appear in this list. The change is saved immediately, it shows "Beta updates setting saved." or, on failure, "Could not save the beta updates setting." Steps: 1. Open Organisation settings from the organisation picker in the menu. 2. Choose Beta updates and turn the switch on. 3. Wait for the confirmation. Notes: - Beta features may change. If you don't like something, turn the switch off and the school goes back to the usual features. #### On / Off badge id: school-setup.beta-updates.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/beta-updates#school-setup.beta-updates.status type: badge · label: "On" Shows whether beta updates are on. What it does: Tells you at a glance which mode the school is in. How it works: Green On or grey Off. #### Enable beta updates switch id: school-setup.beta-updates.toggle · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/beta-updates#school-setup.beta-updates.toggle type: toggle · label: "Enable beta updates" Turns beta features on and off for the whole school. What it does: Changes what everyone in the school sees. How it works: Only active for the owner. It is disabled while the change is saving. #### Currently in beta list id: school-setup.beta-updates.features · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/beta-updates#school-setup.beta-updates.features type: list · label: "Currently in beta" The features the switch currently turns on. What it does: Tells you exactly what will change before you turn it on. How it works: The list is empty right now and says "Nothing is in beta right now." ### Inactive school id: school-setup.school-inactive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-inactive For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId What the “Class Inactive” window means and what to do when you see it. What it does: Locks the school until its subscription is paid. How it works: When the school is inactive, anyone who opens its page, the owner and staff included, sees the Class Inactive window. It can't be closed; its only button, Go back, leads to the school list. Group pages of an inactive school don't open either, they redirect to the school page. An inactive school doesn't come up in search for other people, but it still shows in the owner's and staff's own list. According to the window's message, the school is locked until the subscription is paid. If you believe this is a mistake, write to the email address shown in the window. Notes: - Newly created schools are active, a school doesn't start out inactive. FAQ: Q: Can members see the school while it is inactive? A: They can't use it, opening it shows them the same window and they can only go back. The school doesn't show in search. #### Class Inactive window id: school-setup.school-inactive.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-inactive#school-setup.school-inactive.modal type: modal · label: "Class Inactive" The blocking window over an inactive school's page. What it does: Stops the school being used and explains why. How it works: It reads “Class is locked until the subscription is payed. If you believe this is a mistake, please contact us on ”. There is no close button. ##### Go back button id: school-setup.school-inactive.modal.back · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/school-setup/school-inactive#school-setup.school-inactive.modal.back type: button · label: "Go back" Takes you back to the school list. What it does: The only way out of the locked page. How it works: Opens your schools page. ## Groups id: groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups For: schools Creating and managing groups, join requests, invite links and assigning teachers. ### Groups in the admin area id: groups.groups-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups · permissions: Groups.Manage The list of all the school's groups in the admin area, and where you create, edit and delete them. What it does: Shows the school's groups, the basic unit users are enrolled in, and gives the team a place to manage them. How it works: It opens from Groups under Admin Actions in the menu. It is only shown with the Manage groups permission; without it you are sent to Users. Groups aren't created, edited or deleted from the Groups tab of the school's page, that tab is only for browsing and enrolling. Each group is a card with the name (a link to managing the group), the visibility Private or Public, up to two lines of the description and the first assigned administrator. If more are assigned, "+N" appears next to it. A group with no staff member assigned is marked No administrator. The Manage button opens the group's page. The edit and delete icons only show if you can manage that exact group: the owner, for all groups, a staff member with Manage groups, only for the groups they are assigned to. Deleting is only offered for groups with no enrolled people and no pending requests. If the school has categories, groups are arranged in folders, one per category, plus Uncategorised for the rest. Above the list are the Categories, Expand all (or Collapse all) and New group buttons. On a phone they are round buttons at the top of the screen. Notes: - Until the school has at least one group, nobody can be added or invited to it. - Which folders are open is kept in the page address, the browser's Back button closes the last opened one, and a link to the page opens the same folders. - A staff member whose group access is Only their groups sees only the groups they are assigned to in the list. #### Categories button id: groups.groups-tab.categories · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.categories type: button · label: "Categories" · permissions: Groups.Manage Opens the window for managing the folders of groups. What it does: Lets you create, rename, reorder and delete the categories the groups are arranged by. How it works: Opens the Group categories window. Deleting a category doesn't delete its groups, they become uncategorised. See the group categories section for details. #### Expand all / Collapse all button id: groups.groups-tab.expand-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.expand-all type: button · label: "Expand all" Opens or closes every folder at once. What it does: Lets you scan every group across categories, or go back to a short list of folders. How it works: Only shown when there is at least one non-empty folder. When all are open, the button becomes Collapse all. On a phone it is a round button at the top. #### New group button id: groups.groups-tab.new-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.new-group type: button · label: "New group" · permissions: Groups.Manage Opens the window for creating a group. What it does: Starts creating a new group in the school. How it works: Only shown with Manage groups. On a phone it is a round button at the top. Opens the Create Group window. The same button is also in the page's empty state. #### Category folder id: groups.groups-tab.folder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.folder type: card A collapsible folder with the groups of one category. What it does: Groups the groups by category so you don't scroll a long list. How it works: Folders only show if the school has categories, in the order set in the Group categories window. Each shows its name and the number of groups (for example "3 groups") or Empty. An empty folder can't be opened. Pressing a folder opens or closes it; you can keep several open at once. #### Uncategorised folder id: groups.groups-tab.uncategorised · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.uncategorised type: card · label: "Uncategorised" The folder for groups that have no category. What it does: Collects the groups that have no category chosen. How it works: Always last and only shown when there is at least one group without a category. Groups from a deleted category land here too. #### Group card id: groups.groups-tab.card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card type: card A short overview of one group with its actions. What it does: Shows the essentials of the group and takes you to managing it. How it works: Contains the name (a link to the group), the visibility, up to two lines of the description and the first administrator. At the bottom are the Manage button and, when you have permission, the edit and delete icons. ##### Manage button id: groups.groups-tab.card.manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card.manage type: button · label: "Manage" · permissions: Groups.Manage Opens the group's management page. What it does: Takes you to the group's enrolled people, administrators and plans. How it works: Shown on every card. The group's name is a link to the same page. ##### No administrator label id: groups.groups-tab.card.no-admins · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card.no-admins type: status · label: "No administrator" Shows that no staff member is assigned to the group. What it does: Hints that nobody is responsible for the group. How it works: Replaces the administrator's name on the card. Staff are assigned to a group from the staff member's profile (see "Assigning staff to a group"). ##### Edit group button id: groups.groups-tab.card.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card.edit type: button · label: "Edit group" · permissions: Groups.Manage The pencil icon that opens the group editor. What it does: Lets you change the name, description, visibility and category. How it works: Shown to the owner and to staff with Manage groups who are assigned to this group. Opens the Edit Group window. You can do the same from the group's page. ##### Delete group button id: groups.groups-tab.card.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card.delete type: button · label: "Delete group" · permissions: Groups.Manage The red bin icon that deletes the group. What it does: Removes an empty group from the school. How it works: Only shown if you can edit the group and it has no members and no pending requests. It opens the Delete Group confirmation. ##### Private / Public visibility id: groups.groups-tab.card.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.card.visibility type: status · label: "Private" Shows how people join the group. What it does: Tells you whether joining needs approval. How it works: Private (padlock), joining only after approval. Public (globe), anyone can join immediately. #### No groups yet message id: groups.groups-tab.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/groups-tab#groups.groups-tab.empty type: message · label: "No groups yet" Shown when the school has no groups at all. What it does: Tells you that you need to create a group first. How it works: Under it there is an explanation that every organisation needs at least one group because users are enrolled into groups, and a New group button. ### Creating a group id: groups.create-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups · permissions: Groups.Manage How to create a new group in the school, name, description, admin, visibility and category. What it does: Creates a group you then enrol or invite members into. Members are always enrolled into a group, so every school needs at least one. How it works: You create a group from the New group button on the Groups page under Admin Actions. It needs the Manage groups permission. In the Create Group window you enter a name and description, pick the staff member who will be the group's admin, the visibility and (if the school has categories) the category. A new group is Private by default, joining needs your approval until you make it Public. After Finish the group shows up in the list straight away. The chosen staff member becomes its admin. Steps: 1. Open Groups under Admin Actions in the menu. 2. Press New group. 3. Fill in Name and Description. 4. Choose a staff member in Select an employee (if the school has only one, they are picked automatically). 5. Choose Private or Public under Group Visibility. 6. Optionally choose a Category. 7. Press Finish. Notes: - A staff member whose group access is Only their groups can only create a group with themselves as admin. - The description is also used as the group's short summary, there is no separate summary field. - The Category field is hidden if the school has no categories yet. FAQ: Q: What's the difference between a private and a public group? A: In a private group people send a request that you approve. In a public group anyone can join straight away, without approval. Q: Can I add more admins to the group? A: Yes. The owner can assign more staff to the group from **Employees** in the admin dashboard. #### Create Group window id: groups.create-group.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal type: modal · label: "Create Group" · permissions: Groups.Manage The form for a new group. What it does: Collects everything needed to create a group. How it works: Opens from New Group. Grey placeholder rows show while staff load. Closing it clears the form. ##### Name field id: groups.create-group.modal.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.name type: field · label: "Name" The group's name. What it does: Members and staff recognise the group by it. How it works: Required, 3 to 50 characters. Left empty it shows “Group name is required!” ##### Description field id: groups.create-group.modal.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.description type: field · label: "Description" A short text about the group, who it's for, when, what happens. What it does: Helps people choose the right group. How it works: Required, 3 to 300 characters. It shows on the group card (up to three lines) and on its page. ##### Select an employee field id: groups.create-group.modal.employee · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.employee type: select · label: "Select an employee" The staff member who will be the group's admin. What it does: Assigns the person in charge of the group when it is created. How it works: Required. The list holds the school's staff with name and country. If the school has only one staff member, Group Admin with their name shows instead of a dropdown. The server checks that the chosen person is staff of the school. ##### Group Visibility field id: groups.create-group.modal.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.visibility type: field · label: "Group Visibility" The choice between a private and a public group. What it does: Decides whether people join straight away or after your approval. How it works: Two option cards: Private: “Not listed publicly. People can only join once you approve them.” Selected by default. Public: “Anyone can find it and join immediately, without approval.” You can change it later from the group editor. ##### Category field id: groups.create-group.modal.category · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.category type: select · label: "Category" The folder the group will show in. What it does: Files the group into the right folder on the Groups tab. How it works: Optional. Only shown if the school has categories. Defaults to Uncategorised. ##### Finish button id: groups.create-group.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/create-group#groups.create-group.modal.submit type: button · label: "Finish" Creates the group. What it does: Saves the new group and closes the window. How it works: While the group is being created the button is disabled and shows a spinner. On success the group appears in the list. ### Editing a group id: groups.edit-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups · permissions: Groups.Manage How to change an existing group's name, description, visibility or category. What it does: Lets you keep a group's details up to date and switch it between private and public. How it works: Press the pencil icon (Edit group) on the group's card in Groups (under Admin Actions) or the Edit group button at the top of the group's page. The icon shows for the owner and for staff with the Manage groups permission who are assigned to that group. In the Edit Group window you can change Name, Description, Visibility and Category. After Save Changes the card and the group page update immediately. Switching from Private to Public means new people join straight away, without approval. Steps: 1. Open Groups under Admin Actions. 2. Press the pencil on the group's card. 3. Make your changes. 4. Press Save Changes. Notes: - The group admin isn't changed from this window, see “Assigning staff to a group”. - If you don't see the pencil, you either lack Manage groups or aren't assigned to the group. #### Edit Group window id: groups.edit-group.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal type: modal · label: "Edit Group" · permissions: Groups.Manage The form with the group's current details. What it does: Lets you change the group. How it works: Opens with the current values. Closing without saving discards the changes. ##### Name field id: groups.edit-group.modal.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal.name type: field · label: "Name" The group's name. What it does: Renames the group. How it works: Required, 3 to 50 characters. ##### Description field id: groups.edit-group.modal.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal.description type: field · label: "Description" The text about the group. What it does: Updates the information people see about the group. How it works: Required, 3 to 300 characters. ##### Visibility field id: groups.edit-group.modal.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal.visibility type: field · label: "Visibility" Private or public group. What it does: Changes how people join. How it works: Private: joining only after approval. Public: anyone joins immediately. ##### Category field id: groups.edit-group.modal.category · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal.category type: select · label: "Category" The group's folder. What it does: Moves the group to another category or leaves it uncategorised. How it works: Only shown if the school has categories. Uncategorised removes the category. ##### Save Changes button id: groups.edit-group.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/edit-group#groups.edit-group.modal.submit type: button · label: "Save Changes" Saves the group changes. What it does: Applies the new details and closes the window. How it works: While saving, the button is disabled and shows a spinner. ### Deleting a group id: groups.delete-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/delete-group For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups · permissions: Groups.Manage When you can delete a group, how it works, and why the delete button is sometimes missing. What it does: Permanently removes a group you no longer need, for example one created by mistake or left empty. How it works: You delete from the red bin icon (Delete Group) on the group card in Groups (under Admin Actions). It only shows when all three conditions are met: you have the Manage groups permission; you are the owner or assigned to that group (and, if your access is Only their groups, the group is one of yours); the group has no active members and no pending join requests. The server checks the same conditions and refuses to delete a group that has members or pending requests. The group's staff assignments, invite links and old requests are removed along with it. This cannot be undone. Steps: 1. Make sure the group has no enrolled people, remove them from Users in the admin dashboard. 2. Approve or decline every pending request for the group. 3. Open Groups under Admin Actions and press the bin on the group's card. 4. Confirm with Delete Group. Notes: - Former members who have already been removed from the group, and requests already approved or declined, don't block deletion. - If the bin doesn't appear right after you emptied the group, reload the page. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see the delete button for a group? A: The group has at least one member or pending request, or you aren't allowed to manage it. Remove the members, handle the requests, and check that you have **Manage groups** and are assigned to the group. Q: Can I restore a deleted group? A: No. Deleting is permanent. #### Delete group button id: groups.delete-group.button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/delete-group#groups.delete-group.button type: button · label: "Delete group" · permissions: Groups.Manage The red bin on the group card. What it does: Opens the delete confirmation. How it works: Pressing it on its own deletes nothing. It only shows for groups that can be deleted. ##### Delete Group window id: groups.delete-group.button.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/delete-group#groups.delete-group.button.modal type: modal · label: "Delete Group" The last confirmation before deleting. What it does: Protects you from deleting by accident. How it works: It reads “Delete ""? This group has no members and no pending requests. This cannot be undone.” Delete Group deletes the group and removes it from the list; while it runs the button is disabled. Cancel closes the window. ### Group management page id: groups.group-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page For: schools · In the app: /admin/groups/:groupId · permissions: Groups.Manage, Billing.ViewFinancials, Billing.ManagePlans What the owner and staff see on a group's management page: administrators, enrolled people, plans and an invite link. What it does: Brings everything about one group into one place so you can manage it: who runs it, who is enrolled and which payment plans cover it. How it works: It opens from Manage on the group's card in Groups (under Admin Actions) or from the Manage link on the group's public page. It needs the Manage groups permission; without it you are sent to Users. At the top there is an All groups link back to the list. At the top is the group's card: the name, the visibility (Private or Public) and category (or Uncategorised) labels and the description. If you can manage that exact group (the owner, or staff assigned to it), the Invite link and Edit group buttons are there too. Under it is a card with two tabs: Members and Administrators and coaches, each with its count. If you have Manage groups but aren't assigned to this group, you only see the Administrators and coaches tab. At the bottom is the Plans section, which you see with the View financials permission. Join requests aren't approved here, but in Users. Notes: - The group's public page is only for browsing and enrolling. The enrolled people, administrators and requests aren't on it. - Plan prices and settings are managed in Finance. From this page the plans can still be opened and edited if you have Manage payment plans. #### Invite link button id: groups.group-page.invite-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.invite-link type: button · label: "Invite link" · permissions: Groups.Manage Creates a join link for this group. What it does: Opens the join link window with this group already chosen. How it works: Shown to the owner and to staff with Manage groups who are assigned to the group. See the invite links section for the kinds of links. #### Members tab id: groups.group-page.members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.members type: table · label: "Members" · permissions: Groups.Manage Everyone enrolled in the group, adults and children. What it does: Shows who attends the group, who each child's parent is and how their payments stand. How it works: Next to the title is the total number of enrolled people. Above the list it says "The people enrolled in this group." and there is a Manage in Users link that opens Users filtered by this group. On a computer it is a table with a Member column and, for those who may see money, a Payments column; on a phone, a list of cards. Pressing a row opens the side panel with the person's details (for a child, the child's). 50 entries per page; with more pages there are arrows at the bottom and "current / total". When nobody is enrolled it says "No members yet!", and on an error, "Oops!" Notes: - The tab is only visible to the owner and to staff with Manage groups who are assigned to this group. ##### Kid label id: groups.group-page.members.kid-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.members.kid-badge type: badge · label: "Kid" Marks an enrolled person who is a child, with their age. What it does: Tells children from adults and shows their age. How it works: Sits next to the child's name and reads, for example, "Kid · 9 yo". Without a date of birth, no age is shown. Under the name it says "Parent: " or Unknown parent if the name can't be loaded. ##### Parent line under a child's name id: groups.group-page.members.parent · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.members.parent type: other The parent who enrolled the child. What it does: Shows who to contact for each child. How it works: The parent is no longer a separate column: under the child's name it says "Parent: ". The parent is opened from the child's panel. ##### Payments column id: groups.group-page.members.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.members.payments type: column · label: "Payments" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials How much each enrolled person owes and when they last paid. What it does: Gives you a quick view of who has outstanding amounts, without opening finance. How it works: Each row shows "Owes ", with "overdue" or "due " when there is something owed, or "Nothing owed". Under it says "Last: on " or "No payments yet". The column is only shown with the View financials permission. The "i" icon next to the title explains that the amounts are across every group you can see, not just this one. #### Administrators and coaches tab id: groups.group-page.admins · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.admins type: tab · label: "Administrators and coaches" The staff who run the group. What it does: Shows you who is responsible for the group. How it works: Next to the title is the number of staff. Under it says "The staff who run this group." When nobody is assigned, it says "Nobody runs this group yet." The owner can press a name to open the staff member's panel (groups and permissions) and sees a Manage in Employees link. For everyone else the names are just text. #### Plans section id: groups.group-page.plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.plans type: section · label: "Plans" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials, Billing.ManagePlans The payment plans that cover the group. What it does: Gives you a quick overview of what this group's users pay. How it works: Shown with the View financials permission. The rows are the same as in the plans list in Finance, arranged by plan category. Pressing a row opens the plan right here; editing it needs Manage payment plans. Archived plans aren't shown, disabled ones are dimmed and last. When there are no plans, it says "No plans available yet." ##### Manage in Finance link id: groups.group-page.plans.manage-in-income · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.plans.manage-in-income type: link · label: "Manage in Finance" Leads to where plans are created and changed. What it does: Opens Finance → Plans in the admin dashboard. How it works: Sits next to the Plans section title. ##### Plan row id: groups.group-page.plans.card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-page#groups.group-page.plans.card type: card One plan with its type, price and state. What it does: Shows briefly what the plan offers. How it works: Shows the name, the type (one-off, recurring or pack), the price per period, the credits for a pack, the number of people on the plan and badges for unusual states. A disabled plan is dimmer. ### Group join requests id: groups.join-requests · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/join-requests For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage How a join request for a private group comes about and where staff approve or decline it. What it does: Gives you control over who enters your private groups, nobody becomes a user before you approve them. How it works: Requests only exist for private groups, in public groups people join straight away. A request is sent when someone presses Request to Join on the group's page or opens an invite link of the Request type for a private group. A parent can send a request for themselves or for a child. A request for a child doesn't count as the parent's own request. As soon as a request arrives, the owner, staff with access to all groups and staff assigned to the group get a "New join request" notification (the New Join Requests type). The number of pending requests also shows next to Users in the menu. Requests are no longer shown on the group's page. You approve or decline them in the Pending Join Requests section of the Users page, with Approve and Decline buttons. You need the Manage members permission, and the group has to be within your reach. On approval the person (or child) becomes a user of the group, the enrolled count goes up and the group's Members list refreshes. If the group has plans that automatically include its users, the matching charges are issued to the new user straight away. The sender gets a "Request approved" or "Request declined" notification. Steps: 1. Open Users from the menu. 2. In Pending Join Requests find the person. 3. Press Approve or Decline under their name. Notes: - A group can't be deleted while it has pending requests. - The details of the requests table are in the section about users in the admin area. FAQ: Q: Why don't I see the requests for my group? A: Requests are in **Users**, not on the group's page. The section only shows when there are pending requests and you have **Manage members**. Q: Can someone enter a private group without approval? A: Yes, if they use an invite link of the **Direct** type: it adds the person straight away, even to a private group. #### “New join request” notification id: groups.join-requests.notification · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/join-requests#groups.join-requests.notification type: notification The notification staff get for a new request. What it does: Tells you straight away that someone is waiting for approval. How it works: It includes the requester's (or child's) name and the group name. The owner, staff with access to all groups and staff assigned to the group receive it. Staff limited to other groups don't. In notification settings the type is called New Join Requests. ### Group invite links id: groups.invite-links · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage How to generate a link people use to join a group, and how to limit or revoke it. What it does: Creates a link you send by message or email. Whoever opens it joins the group with a real account, without you adding them by hand. How it works: The Join Link button is on Users in the admin dashboard. You can also create a link from the group's page with the Invite link button, with that group already chosen; it is shown if you can manage that exact group. It shows when you have the Manage members permission and the school has at least one group. The server also only allows groups within your reach. In the Group Join Link window you choose a Group and a Link type: Request (default), public group: joins immediately; private group: files a join request you approve. Direct: joins immediately, without approval, even for a private group. Under Settings you can limit the Number of uses (default Unlimited) and Valid for (default No expiry). After Generate Link the link is shown with Copy and (where the device supports it) Share buttons. Every new link is separate, generating doesn't revoke older ones. All links for the group are under Links for this group, where you can copy or revoke active ones. The recipient has to log in. They see the group name, whether it is private or public, and what will happen. A parent chooses whether to enrol themselves or one or more children, one visit to the link uses up one use, however many children join together. Steps: 1. Open the admin dashboard and choose Users. 2. Press Join Link. 3. Choose the Group (with only one group it is picked automatically). 4. Choose the Link type. 5. Optionally open Settings and set Number of uses and Valid for. 6. Press Generate Link. 7. Press Copy or Share and send the link. Notes: - If the school has no groups, “Create your organisation's first group” shows instead of the button. The owner also sees a Create a group button. - A link with an end date is valid until the end of the chosen day. - A Direct link skips approval, keep it safe and only send it to people you trust. - A revoked, expired or used-up link shows the recipient that it can no longer be used and suggests asking for a new one. FAQ: Q: Does the old link stop working when I generate a new one? A: No. Each link is independent. If you want an old link to stop, revoke it with **Revoke** under **Links for this group**. Q: How many times can a link be used? A: As many as you set in **Number of uses**: **Unlimited**, **Single use**, **5 uses**, **10 uses** or **Custom** (at least 1). #### Join Link button id: groups.invite-links.button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button type: button · label: "Join Link" · permissions: Members.Manage Opens the window for generating a group link. What it does: Starts creating an invite link. How it works: It sits above the Users list. On a phone only the icon shows. Needs Manage members and at least one group in the school. ##### Group Join Link window id: groups.invite-links.button.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal type: modal · label: "Group Join Link" The form for a new link and the list of existing ones. What it does: Lets you create a link and manage the ones already created. How it works: At the top it reads “Generate a link that lets someone join a group directly. Share it by message or email.” Closing it resets every choice. ###### Group field id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.group type: select · label: "Group" The group the link leads to. What it does: Decides which group people join. How it works: Required, until you pick a group (Select a group), Generate Link is disabled. Changing the group hides a link already generated. ###### Link type field id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.link-type · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.link-type type: field · label: "Link type" The choice between **Request** and **Direct**. What it does: Decides whether people with the link go through approval. How it works: Request: “Public group: joins immediately. Private group: files a join request awaiting your approval.” Direct: “Joins immediately, bypassing approval, even for a private group.” With Direct a yellow warning shows, and for a private group, “This group is private. Anyone with this link still becomes a full member immediately, without your approval.” ###### Settings panel id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings type: section · label: "Settings" The collapsed panel with the link's limits. What it does: Lets you limit how many times and until when the link works. How it works: Closed by default, but its header shows the current choices, for example “Unlimited · No expiry”. It opens on its own if a value inside is invalid. ###### Number of uses field id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings.uses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings.uses type: field · label: "Number of uses" How many times the link can be used to join. What it does: Limits how many people or families can use the link. How it works: Choices: Unlimited, Single use, 5 uses, 10 uses and Custom. Custom shows a box starting at 25; enter a whole number of at least 1, otherwise it shows “Enter a number, at least 1.” One join uses one use, even if a parent enrols several children at once. ###### Valid for field id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings.expiry · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.settings.expiry type: field · label: "Valid for" Until when the link works. What it does: Stops the link automatically after a set time. How it works: Choices: No expiry, 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days and Custom date. Custom date shows a date picker starting 14 days ahead; the date must be in the future, otherwise it shows “Pick a date in the future.” The link is valid until the end of the last day. ###### Generate Link button id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.generate · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.generate type: button · label: "Generate Link" Creates the link with the chosen settings. What it does: Generates a new, independent link for the group. How it works: Disabled while no group is chosen or a value is invalid. On success the form is replaced by the Your link is ready! view. ###### Your link is ready! view id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.ready · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.ready type: section · label: "Your link is ready!" The finished link with copy and share buttons. What it does: Gives you the link to send and reminds you what it does. How it works: Below the heading are chips with the group, type, number of uses and validity. The link is in a box that selects itself when pressed. Copy copies it (briefly showing Copied!), Share opens the device's share menu, and Generate another link returns to the form. For a direct link the warning shows again. At the bottom is a hint, for example “This link works once, generate another for each person or family you invite.” ###### Links for this group list id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing type: list · label: "Links for this group" Every link generated for the chosen group. What it does: Lets you see which links still work and stop the ones you no longer need. How it works: Collapsed by default; the number of links is next to the heading. Newest first. Each row shows the state, a type icon (with the word Direct for direct links), “Created”, “Expires” or “Never expires”, and uses, “X of Y uses” or “N uses, unlimited”. With no links it reads “No links generated for this group yet.” ###### Link state id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.state type: status · label: "Active" Whether the link can still be used. What it does: Tells you whether the link works. How it works: Active: works. Used: all uses are spent (an unlimited link never becomes used). Expired: the end date has passed. Revoked: stopped by hand. A revoked link shows as Revoked even if its end date has also passed. ###### Copy button in the list id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.copy · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.copy type: button · label: "Copy" Copies an existing active link. What it does: Lets you send an existing link again. How it works: An icon shown only for active links. After copying it briefly turns into a tick. ###### Revoke button id: groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.revoke · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/invite-links#groups.invite-links.button.modal.existing.revoke type: button · label: "Revoke" · permissions: Members.Manage Stops an active link for good. What it does: Makes the link unusable, for example if it was sent to the wrong person. How it works: Only shown for active links and acts immediately, without confirmation. Revoking can't be undone, and people who already joined through the link stay in the group. ### Assigning staff to a group id: groups.group-staff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff For: schools · In the app: /admin How the owner assigns staff as group admins, and what that gives them. What it does: Decides who is in charge of each group. The assigned staff member shows as the group's Group Admin and, depending on their permissions, can manage it. How it works: Every group has at least one assigned staff member. The first is chosen when the group is created. The owner adds or removes more on the Users page, Employees sub-tab, in the staff member's side panel. The owner can also open the panel from the Administrators and coaches tab of the group's page. The Groups they administer section lists the staff member's groups as chips. Add a group from the Choose a group… field; to remove one press its chip, it gets struck through. Changes apply with Save Changes. What an assignment gives: with Manage groups, the staff member can edit and delete the group and sees Members on its management page (join requests are approved in Users); if their group access is Only their groups, they only see and manage the groups assigned to them. The assigned staff member gets a notification (the Staff Assignments type). Steps: 1. Open Users from the menu and choose the Employees sub-tab. 2. Press the staff member to open their panel. 3. Under Groups they administer, choose a group from Choose a group…. 4. To remove one, press the group's chip. 5. Press Save Changes. Notes: - Only the owner can assign staff to and remove them from groups. The Employees sub-tab is only visible to the owner. - Only someone who is already staff of the school can be assigned. - If you remove a group's last staff member, the owner automatically becomes its admin. - When access is Only their groups and the staff member has no groups, the panel warns: “No groups assigned yet, they won't see anything until you add one below.” FAQ: Q: A staff member with “Manage groups” can't edit the group. Why? A: For staff the permission only applies to the groups they are assigned to. Assign them to the group from **Employees**. #### Groups they administer section id: groups.group-staff.managed-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff#groups.group-staff.managed-groups type: section · label: "Groups they administer" The groups the staff member is assigned to, in their side panel. What it does: Lets you see and change the staff member's groups. How it works: It is in the staff member's panel under Employees. With no groups it reads No groups assigned. ##### Group chip id: groups.group-staff.managed-groups.chip · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff#groups.group-staff.managed-groups.chip type: badge One assigned group; pressing it marks it for removal. What it does: Lets you remove the staff member from the group. How it works: Pressing strikes the chip through; pressing again restores it. Below the chips it reads “Click a group badge to mark it for removal.” Newly added, not yet saved groups are removed directly when pressed. ##### Choose a group… field id: groups.group-staff.managed-groups.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff#groups.group-staff.managed-groups.add type: select · label: "Choose a group…" Adds the staff member to another group. What it does: Assigns the staff member as admin of the chosen group. How it works: The list holds the school's groups the staff member isn't assigned to yet. You can type to search; with no match it reads “No matching groups”. The chosen group appears as a chip and is saved with Save Changes. #### Save Changes button id: groups.group-staff.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff#groups.group-staff.save type: button · label: "Save Changes" Applies the changes to the staff member's groups. What it does: Adds and removes assignments in one go. How it works: On success it shows “Group assignments saved successfully.” and the panel closes. On failure, “Failed to save group assignments. Please try again.” Cancel closes the panel without changes. #### Staff assignment notification id: groups.group-staff.notification · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/groups/group-staff#groups.group-staff.notification type: notification The notification a staff member gets when assigned to a group. What it does: Tells the staff member they are now in charge of a new group. How it works: It includes the group name. In notification settings the type is called Staff Assignments. ## Calendar & lessons id: calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar For: schools, parents Schedule, events, recurring sessions, rooms, reminders and lessons. ### The school calendar id: calendar.calendar-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar The school's schedule, every session and event you are allowed to see, by month, week and day, and where staff manage it. What it does: Shows in one place when and where sessions take place. Parents and members see their groups' sessions and say whether they will attend. Staff plan and manage the schedule from the Calendar page of the admin dashboard. How it works: The calendar lives in two places. The Calendar tab on the school's page is for everyone: parents and members see their sessions and say whether they will attend, while the owner and staff see the schedule read-only. The tab is visible to the owner, to staff, and to anyone who (or whose child) is a member of at least one group in the school. It opens on the current month. The Calendar page in the admin dashboard is where the schedule is managed: sessions are added, changed, cancelled and deleted there. It appears in the sidebar under Admin Actions, only for staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission (the owner always has it). From the school's calendar those staff reach it with the Manage link. What the calendar contains depends on your role: a member sees only the sessions meant for them or their child plus the ones for the whole school; a staff member sees the sessions of the groups they have access to (see Who sees what in the calendar). The Filters button is available to every staff member, while the Add Event button is only in the admin calendar. Clicking a session opens its details window. Steps: 1. Open the school's page. 2. Choose the Calendar tab. 3. Change the view or move to another period with the controls above the calendar. 4. Click a session to see its details. Notes: - If you don't see the Calendar tab, you are not staff at the school and neither you nor a child on your profile is a member of one of its groups. - A cancelled session stays on the calendar but is marked as cancelled. - A staff member without the Manage events and their sessions permission has no Calendar page in the admin dashboard and sees the schedule only in the school's calendar. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see all of the school's sessions? A: Members only see sessions for their own groups and the ones for the whole school. A staff member limited to their own groups sees those groups' sessions unless they have the **See the whole calendar** permission. Also check whether a filter is on, the **Filters** button shows how many are active. Q: Where do I add a new session? A: On the **Calendar** page of the admin dashboard, with the **Add Event** button. The calendar on the school's page is view-only, from there you reach the admin one with the **Manage** link. #### Calendar tab id: calendar.calendar-tab.tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.tab type: tab · label: "Calendar" The tab on the school's page that holds the schedule. What it does: Takes you to the school's schedule. How it works: Shown to the owner, to staff and to group members (including parents whose child is in a group). The schedule in it is read-only for everyone, staff included. Whenever you switch between the school's tabs, the calendar reloads so it shows the latest changes. #### Calendar page in the admin dashboard id: calendar.calendar-tab.admin-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.admin-calendar type: link · label: "Calendar" · permissions: Events.Manage Where staff add, change, cancel and delete sessions. What it does: Keeps managing the schedule in one place, so there is no second, weaker place to edit from. How it works: It is in the sidebar under Admin Actions, first in the list. It is shown only to staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission (the owner always has it); without it the page sends you back to the dashboard. Here you have Filters, Add Event and the Rooms view, and clicking a session gives you buttons to change, cancel and delete it. On a phone the two buttons are circles at the top right of the screen. #### Manage link id: calendar.calendar-tab.manage-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.manage-link type: link · label: "Manage" · permissions: Events.Manage From the school's calendar it takes a staff member to the admin calendar. What it does: Shows where the schedule is managed when you are looking at the school's calendar. How it works: It sits above the calendar in the Calendar tab of the school's page and is only visible to staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission. It opens the Calendar page of the admin dashboard for the same school. #### Views and navigation id: calendar.calendar-tab.views · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.views type: section How to switch between month, week and day and move to another period. What it does: Lets you look at the schedule up close (a day), across a week or across the whole month. How it works: The calendar opens in the month view on today's date. The buttons are Month, Week, Day and Today, the arrows move backwards and forwards, and there is a field for jumping to a specific date. Staff in the admin calendar also get a Rooms view once the school has rooms. Hours show from 06:00 to 22:00 by default, and the grid widens if a session falls outside them. If you move to another day or view and then save, cancel or delete a session, the calendar stays where you were. #### Start and end of a session in the calendar id: calendar.calendar-tab.session-chips · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.session-chips type: other What is written on each session in the different views. What it does: Lets you see when a session ends without opening it. How it works: In the Week, Day and Rooms views each session shows its start and end time and its title, for example 13:30–15:00 Yoga. In the Month view it is just the start time and the title, plus the word “cancelled” on a cancelled session. In the all-day row it is the title alone. On a phone the month view also lists the day's sessions, with the time on its own line. #### Rooms view id: calendar.calendar-tab.rooms-view · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.rooms-view type: tab · label: "Rooms" A view in the admin calendar with one column per room for the selected day. What it does: Shows which rooms are busy and which are free during the day, so you can spread sessions across rooms. How it works: It exists only on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard, and only once the school has added at least one room in the organisation settings. For the selected day each room is a column, and sessions without a room are in the No room column. The school's calendar, members and parents don't get this view. Dragging across empty time in a room's column opens the new-session window with the date, time and that room filled in. Notes: - A session in a room that was later deleted shows in the No room column. #### Drag to create id: calendar.calendar-tab.drag-to-create · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.drag-to-create type: other · permissions: Events.Manage In the admin calendar, drag across empty time to start a new session. What it does: Saves typing the date and time, you point at the time right on the calendar. How it works: Works only on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard and only for staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission. Drag across empty time in the week or day view (or across days in the month view) and the Add Event window opens with the start and end dates and times filled in. In the month view the session starts at 09:00 and lasts 60 minutes. If the window is already open and you drag again, only the date, times and room change, everything else you have filled in stays. Notes: - Moving or resizing existing sessions by dragging is not switched on, change the time from the session window. #### Add Event button id: calendar.calendar-tab.add-event-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.add-event-button type: button · label: "Add Event" · permissions: Events.Manage Opens the window for creating a new session or event. What it does: Starts adding a new one-off or recurring session to the schedule. How it works: It exists only on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard, next to Filters, and is only visible to staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission (the owner always has it). On a phone it is the circle with a plus at the top right of the screen. Opens the three-step Add Event window, see Adding a session. #### Cancelled marker id: calendar.calendar-tab.cancelled-marker · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.cancelled-marker type: status · label: "Cancelled" What a cancelled session looks like in the calendar. What it does: Shows that the session won't take place without removing it from the schedule. How it works: A cancelled session stays on the calendar with a red background and a struck-through title, and in the month view the word “cancelled” is added after the title. When opened, the window says This event has been cancelled. A staff member with the Manage events and their sessions permission can reinstate it. #### Link to a specific session id: calendar.calendar-tab.deep-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/calendar-tab#calendar.calendar-tab.deep-link type: link A link that opens the calendar on the exact day with the session's window open. What it does: Takes you straight to a session without hunting for it in the month. How it works: The Open in calendar link on the Attendance page leads to the Calendar page of the admin dashboard, on the session's day, and opens its window. Once you close it, reloading the page doesn't open it again. The link follows the session even if its title or time has changed. The Calendar page needs the Manage events and their sessions permission, otherwise it sends you back to the dashboard. ### Filtering the calendar id: calendar.planner-filters · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar How staff narrow the calendar by group, room and teacher. What it does: Helps you see only the sessions you care about, for example one group's, one room's or one teacher's, in a busy schedule. How it works: The Filters button sits above the calendar (on the school's calendar and on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard) and is only visible to the owner and staff. On a phone it is the funnel circle at the top right of the screen, with the number of active filters. Members and parents have no filters, because their calendar is already limited to their own groups. Filters open in a Filter events window with three sections: Group, Room and Teacher. Choices within one section add up (two groups show both groups' sessions), while sections combine with each other (those two groups and only in the chosen room). A section with nothing picked doesn't filter anything. Filters apply straight away as you pick them. When you close the window (with Done, the close button or Escape), your choice is saved for you and for this school, so next time, even from another device, the calendar opens with the same filters. If you have never saved anything, the calendar opens unfiltered. Steps: 1. Press Filters above the calendar. 2. Pick one or more groups, rooms or teachers. 3. Press Done to go back to the calendar. Notes: - The calendar opens with the filters you saved for this school. A group, room or teacher that no longer exists is dropped. Press All in a section or Clear all filters to see everything, and close the window so it is saved. - A session for the whole school (no group) stays visible whichever teacher you pick. FAQ: Q: Why do I only see some of the sessions when I open the calendar? A: The calendar remembers the filters from the last time you closed the **Filters** window. Open it and press **All** in the section or **Clear all filters**, then close the window. #### Filters button id: calendar.planner-filters.button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button type: button · label: "Filters" Opens the filters window and shows how many filters are on. What it does: Gives access to the filters and reminds you when the calendar is filtered. How it works: A number appears next to the label as soon as any section has a choice, it counts the sections with a choice (at most 3). With no number you see every session you have access to. ##### Filter events window id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal type: modal · label: "Filter events" The window with the Group, Room and Teacher sections. What it does: Keeps all filters in one place. How it works: On a computer the window can be moved around; on a phone it opens from the bottom as a sheet. Each section is a row of buttons, press one to turn it on (a tick appears) and again to turn it off. Next to the section title you see how many are selected. A section with nothing to choose from isn't shown. ###### Group filter id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.group type: filter · label: "Group" Shows only the chosen groups' sessions. What it does: Narrows the calendar to one or several groups. How it works: Lists every group you can see in the calendar, plus No group: sessions for the whole school. You can combine them, for example one group and No group. A staff member limited to their own groups but holding the See the whole calendar permission sees every group of the school here. ###### Room filter id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.room · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.room type: filter · label: "Room" Shows only sessions in the chosen rooms. What it does: Helps you see how busy a room is, or which sessions still have no room. How it works: Only shown if the school has added rooms. Lists the rooms plus No room, which finds the sessions that don't have a room yet. ###### Teacher filter id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.teacher · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.teacher type: filter · label: "Teacher" Shows only the chosen teachers' sessions. What it does: Lets each staff member see their own schedule, and the owner see a particular coach's schedule. How it works: Lists the staff assigned to the groups in the calendar. A session with people set under Who leads this event matches only those people. A session with nobody set matches its groups' staff. Sessions for the whole school stay visible whatever you pick. ###### All button id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.all type: button · label: "All" Clears the choices in one section. What it does: Removes the filter from that section only. How it works: Every section starts with All. It is highlighted when the section has no choice, meaning it isn't filtering. Pressing it clears the choices in that section only. ###### Search… field in a section id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.search type: search · label: "Search…" Search by name inside a long section. What it does: Quickly finds a group, room or teacher when there are many. How it works: Appears in a section with 8 or more options. Shows only the buttons whose name contains what you type. With no match you see Nothing matches. Searching doesn't change what is selected. ###### Clear all filters button id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.clear · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.clear type: button · label: "Clear all filters" Removes every filter at once. What it does: Brings the calendar back to every session you are allowed to see. How it works: It is at the bottom of the window and disabled when no filter is on. Clears all three sections. ###### Done button id: calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.done · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/planner-filters#calendar.planner-filters.button.modal.done type: button · label: "Done" Closes the filters window. What it does: Takes you back to the calendar. How it works: Filters are already applied as you pick them. Done closes the window and saves your choice for next time. ### Adding a session id: calendar.create-event · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar · permissions: Events.Manage How a staff member creates a one-off or recurring session in the school's calendar, in three steps. What it does: Puts a class, practice, competition or other event in the schedule for certain groups, specific people or the whole school. The members it's for see it in their calendar and get a notification. How it works: You need the Manage events and their sessions permission (the owner always has it). The Add Event window opens from the Add Event button on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard or by dragging across empty time. Sessions can't be added from the calendar on the school's page. Creating takes three steps, shown at the top: Who: groups, specific people in them, or the whole school. When: date, times and whether it repeats. Details: who leads it, title, room, attendance limit, pack credits, description and colour. Next only becomes active once the step is filled in correctly. Back (or Cancel on the first step) takes you back. You can also click a step you have already passed in the bar at the top. After Add event you see Event created successfully!, the window closes and the session appears in the calendar. Everyone it is meant for gets a new-class-scheduled notification. Steps: 1. On the Calendar page of the admin dashboard press Add Event. 2. In the Who step choose a group (or several), specific people in it, or Whole organisation, then press Next. 3. In the When step set the date, start and end time, and choose under Schedule whether and how it repeats. Press Next. 4. In the Details step check the title and choose who leads it, the room, the attendance limit and the colour. 5. Press Add event. Notes: - You can create a session in the past, the start date isn't checked against today. - The attendance limit and the Counts toward packs setting can't be changed after creation. - The repeat pattern can't be changed later either. If you got the frequency or end date wrong, delete the series and create it again. - If you choose Has an attendance limit but leave the number empty, Add event creates nothing and a message under the field asks you to enter a maximum number of attendees (at least 1) or choose No attendance limit. - If creating fails you see Failed to create event. Please try again. and the window stays open with what you entered. - The system doesn't check whether the room or the teacher is already busy at the same time. FAQ: Q: How do I make a session for just one child in the group? A: In the **Who** step pick the group, then tap the child's name in the list under it. The session becomes for them only; tap more names to add them. Q: Why don't I see Whole organisation? A: A staff member with access only to their own groups can't create sessions for the whole school. Only the owner or a staff member with access to all groups can. #### Add Event window id: calendar.create-event.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal type: modal · label: "Add Event" The three-step window for creating a session. What it does: Walks you through everything a new session needs. How it works: On a computer the window can be moved and the calendar behind it stays usable. On a phone it opens from the bottom as a sheet you can pull up. Every time you open it, it starts on the first step with empty fields. ##### Step bar id: calendar.create-event.modal.stepper · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.stepper type: other · label: "1. Who · 2. When · 3. Details" Shows which step you are on and how many are left. What it does: Keeps you oriented and lets you jump back to an earlier step. How it works: The steps are Who, When and Details. Steps you have passed can be pressed to go back; later ones can't. The buttons at the bottom are Cancel or Back and Next, and on the last step Add event. ##### Who step id: calendar.create-event.modal.who · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.who type: section · label: "Who" Choosing who the session is for, groups, people in them, or the whole school. What it does: Decides who sees the session in their calendar, who can say they're attending and who gets notifications. How it works: If you lead exactly one group (or the school has only one group), it is pre-selected. Next becomes active once at least one group or Whole organisation is chosen. Chosen groups show as cards with a list of their people. A session for a group means it is for all of the group's current members. ###### My groups quick buttons id: calendar.create-event.modal.who.my-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.who.my-groups type: button · label: "My groups" The groups you lead, pickable with one tap. What it does: Saves looking for your own groups in the list. How it works: Shows the groups you are assigned to as staff that aren't picked yet. Tapping one adds it as a card. ###### Choose a group… dropdown id: calendar.create-event.modal.who.group-picker · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.who.group-picker type: select · label: "Choose a group…" A list of every group you can choose from. What it does: Adds a group to the session. How it works: Once a group is chosen, the label changes to Add another group. The list shows My groups first, then Other groups (or just Groups if you lead none). Each tap adds or removes one group and closes the list. A staff member limited to their own groups sees only those. If the school has no groups you see This organisation has no groups yet. ###### Chosen group card id: calendar.create-event.modal.who.group-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.who.group-card type: card The chosen group with the list of its people. What it does: Lets you make the session for the whole group or only for certain people. How it works: At first everyone is ticked and it says All {{count}} are included. Tap a person to make it only for them. The first tap on a person makes the session for them only; further taps add or remove people. The top shows {{count}} selected, and the card shows a {{count}} member(s) badge. Whole group resets it to everyone. Picking everyone one by one, or removing everyone, also turns it back into the whole group. If the group has no members it says This group has no members yet.; with only one member it says the event will apply to the whole group. The X button removes the group. Notes: - A parent and their child show as separate rows if both are members of the group. ###### Whole organisation option id: calendar.create-event.modal.who.everyone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.who.everyone type: button · label: "Whole organisation" Makes the session for every group and every member of the school. What it does: Suits school-wide events, a celebration, a parents' meeting, a day off. How it works: It says Every group and every member will see this event. Choosing it clears the chosen groups. Only shown to the owner and to staff with access to all groups. In the calendar such a session shows as For all groups. ##### When step id: calendar.create-event.modal.when · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when type: section · label: "When" The session's date, times and repeat pattern. What it does: Sets when the session takes place and how many times. How it works: Fields are checked when you press Next; if something is wrong you stay on the step and a message appears under the field. ###### From field (start date) id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.from-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.from-date type: field · label: "From" The date of the session, or of the first session in a series. What it does: Sets when the session starts. How it works: Required. Defaults to today. It may be in the past. With a weekly repeat, this date's weekday must be among the chosen days. Without a date you see From date is required! ###### Add end date button id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.end-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.end-date type: button · label: "Add end date" Adds an end date for a session that lasts several days. What it does: Allows a one-off event across several days, for example a camp or a competition. How it works: Only shown when Schedule is No occurrence. Opens a To field that can't be before the start date. The X removes the field. Turning on a repeat clears the end date, recurring sessions stay within one day. For a multi-day event the end time can be earlier than the start time. ###### Start Time field id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.start-time · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.start-time type: field · label: "Start Time" The session's start time. What it does: Sets what time the session begins. How it works: Required, in 24-hour HH:mm format. Defaults to a round hour about two hours from now. Every change fills the end time in automatically one hour later (unless the times came from dragging in the calendar). ###### End Time field id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.end-time · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.end-time type: field · label: "End Time" The session's end time. What it does: Sets when the session finishes. How it works: Required, in HH:mm format. For a one-day session it must be after the start time, otherwise you see End time must be after start time! ###### Schedule dropdown id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.schedule · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.schedule type: select · label: "Schedule" Whether and how often the session repeats. What it does: Turns one session into a series of sessions. How it works: Options: No occurrence: a single session (the default). Daily: every day until the end date. Weekly on …: every week; the day comes from the start date, but you can pick more days. Monthly on the …th: every month on the start date's day of the month. Once you pick a repeat, Repeat until appears with a suggested date about four weeks ahead. More on series in Recurring sessions. ###### Repeat on days id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.repeat-on · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.repeat-on type: field · label: "Repeat on" The weekdays a weekly session takes place on. What it does: Lets one series happen several times a week, for example Monday and Wednesday. How it works: Only shown for a weekly repeat. The seven buttons (Monday to Sunday) turn on and off with a tap. The start date's weekday is selected automatically and must stay selected, otherwise you see a message asking you to keep that day or move the start date. With no day at all you see Please select at least one day. If you change the start date to another weekday, that day is added automatically. ###### Repeat until field id: calendar.create-event.modal.when.repeat-until · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.when.repeat-until type: field · label: "Repeat until" The last date up to which sessions in the series are created. What it does: Sets how many sessions the series has without you counting them. How it works: Required for a repeat (otherwise Pick an end date) and can't be before the start date. The number of sessions is worked out from the dates and days. Below the field, On the calendar shows the result, for example 📅 12 × Weekly · until 30 November 2026. If no session falls in the range you see No sessions fall in that range. Pick a later date. and can't continue. Notes: - A series can have at most 10,000 sessions. ##### Details step id: calendar.create-event.modal.details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details type: section · label: "Details" Who leads it, title, room, limit, credits, description and colour. What it does: Completes the session with everything parents and staff see in its details. How it works: Everything here has sensible defaults, only the title is required, and it is filled in automatically. ###### Who leads this event section id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.led-by · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.led-by type: field · label: "Who leads this event" Choosing the staff who lead the session. What it does: Tells parents who the coach is and lets the calendar be filtered by teacher. How it works: You can choose from the staff assigned to the chosen groups; for a session for the whole school, from all staff. If you are among them, you are selected automatically. With only one possible person it says they will lead this event. With nobody, the section isn't shown. With several people tick one or more; the top shows {{count}} selected or Nobody assigned yet. It is optional and can be changed later. ###### Title field id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.title · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.title type: field · label: "Title" The session name everyone sees in the calendar. What it does: Says in a word what the session is. How it works: Required, 3 to 50 characters. Filled in automatically from your choice: the group name, the names of the chosen people (for example Ivan and Maria, or … and 2 more) or Session for everyone. As soon as you type your own, automatic filling stops. Error messages: Event title is required!, must be at least 3 symbols, must be at most 50 symbols. ###### Room selector id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.room · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.room type: select · label: "Room" The room the session takes place in. What it does: Tells everyone where the session is and enables the rooms view and room filter. How it works: Only shown if the school has added rooms (in Organisation settings). Defaults to No room, unless you dragged in a room's column. Optional. The room applies to the whole series and can be changed later. ###### Attendance limit section id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity type: section · label: "Attendance limit" Whether there is a maximum number of attendees and whether the session uses pack credits. What it does: Caps a session with few places and decides whether attendance counts against attendance packs. How it works: Neither setting can be changed after creation, they show as locked when editing. ###### No attendance limit option id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.unlimited · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.unlimited type: button · label: "No attendance limit" Anyone can attend, no cap. What it does: Doesn't limit how many people say they're attending. How it works: Selected by default. ###### Has an attendance limit option and Max attendees field id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.limited · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.limited type: button · label: "Has an attendance limit" Sets a maximum number of attendees. What it does: Stops sign-ups once the places run out. How it works: Shows a Max attendees field (e.g. 20), a whole number of at least 1. The limit applies to each individual session in the series. When the confirmed people for a session reach the limit, new Attending presses are refused; switching from attending to not attending is always possible. ###### Counts toward packs toggle id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.pack-credits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.capacity.pack-credits type: toggle · label: "Counts toward packs" Whether attending this session uses a credit from an attendance pack. What it does: Links the session to attendance packs, everyone marked attended uses one credit. How it works: Off by default. When on, each member marked attended uses one credit from their pack when attendance is finalised. Leave it off for events like concerts or rehearsals. It is independent of the limit, a session without a limit can still count toward packs. ###### Add description button and description field id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.description type: field · label: "Add description" Optional text for attendees. What it does: Gives parents and members extra information, what to bring, where to go in and so on. How it works: Press Add description to show the field (What should members know about this event?) and Hide description to hide it. Up to 500 characters. If you leave it empty, no description is shown in the session details. ###### Color picker id: calendar.create-event.modal.details.color · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.details.color type: field · label: "Color" The colour the session shows in on the calendar. What it does: Helps tell groups and kinds of sessions apart at a glance. How it works: Pick one of the circles. The school's own colours come first (each takes the place of one of the ten built-in pastel colours), then the remaining built-in ones; while the school has up to ten own colours, there are still ten circles. You can't pick a free colour from here: new colours are added in Organisation settings, in the Scheduling group, in the Event colours section (needs the Manage events and their sessions permission, up to 30 colours). The default is light lilac. Removing a colour from the list doesn't change sessions that already use it. ##### Add event button (save) id: calendar.create-event.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/create-event#calendar.create-event.modal.submit type: button · label: "Add event" Creates the session. What it does: Saves the session or series to the calendar and notifies attendees. How it works: Shown on the Details step. Disabled while saving or if the repeat in the When step is invalid. On success you see Event created successfully! and the window closes. Everyone the session is for gets a new-class-scheduled notification (unless they turned it off in their settings). ### Recurring sessions id: calendar.recurring-events · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/recurring-events For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar How session series work, frequency, count, individual sessions and changing just one or the whole series. What it does: Lets you put a whole season on the schedule in one go, for example every Tuesday and Thursday until the end of term, instead of each session separately. How it works: A recurring session is a series: one template (title, times, group, room, colour, limit) and many individual sessions on dates. The repeat is chosen at creation under Schedule: Daily: every day from the start date until Repeat until. Weekly on …: on the chosen weekdays; the start date's weekday is always among them. Monthly on the …th: on the same day of every month. The number of sessions is worked out from the dates (at most 10,000). Recurring sessions stay within one day, only a one-off event can span several days. What can change later The frequency, days and number of sessions can't be changed after creation. A single session can be moved to another date or time, get a different title, description or colour, be cancelled or be deleted. The other sessions are untouched. The whole series can get a new title, description, colour, room and times, or be moved. If you move the series by some days, the weekdays move by the same number of days (Monday and Wednesday become Tuesday and Thursday). Groups, people and leaders always apply to the whole series. The details of each session in a series say Repeats: …, for example Repeats: Weekly on Tuesday, Thursday. Notes: - A session that was changed on its own keeps its changes when you edit the whole series. - A series of a single session is shown as a one-off, there is no this-one or all choice for it. FAQ: Q: How do I change the weekdays of an existing series? A: The days can't be edited. You can move the whole series by some days (the days move with it) or delete the series and create a new one. Q: How do I extend a series past its end date? A: The number of sessions can't be increased. Create a new series that starts after the last session. #### Repeat options id: calendar.recurring-events.options · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/recurring-events#calendar.recurring-events.options type: list · label: "No occurrence · Daily · Weekly on … · Monthly on the …th" The four choices in the Schedule menu. What it does: Decide whether and how often the session repeats. How it works: In the weekly and monthly choices the day comes from the start date, change the date and the label updates. In the On the calendar summary the frequency is written as Daily, Weekly or Monthly. #### Repeats: … line id: calendar.recurring-events.repeats-summary · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/recurring-events#calendar.recurring-events.repeats-summary type: other · label: "Repeats: {{schedule}}" The repeat summary in a session's details. What it does: Tells you at a glance that the session is part of a series and when it repeats. How it works: Shown in the window of a session from a series with more than one session. The text is Daily, Weekly on … with the days, or Monthly on the …th. #### This session or all id: calendar.recurring-events.one-or-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/recurring-events#calendar.recurring-events.one-or-all type: other · permissions: Events.Manage The choice when editing, cancelling or deleting a session from a series. What it does: Lets you change one session without touching the rest, or all of them at once. How it works: Editing: the Edit This Event and Edit All Events buttons. If you changed the groups, people or leaders, Edit This Event is disabled, because those changes apply to the whole series. Cancelling: only the chosen session is cancelled (Cancel This Event). Deleting: Delete This Event removes one session, Delete All Events deletes the whole series. Details in Editing a session and Cancelling, reinstating and deleting. ### Session details id: calendar.event-details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar The window that opens when you click a session in the calendar, what it shows and what you can do there. What it does: Brings everything about one session together: when it is, who it's for, who leads it, which room, whether there is a limit and whether it uses credits. Parents say whether they're attending and read the lesson here; staff edit, cancel or go to attendance. How it works: Click a session in the calendar. The window opens in view mode, titled with the session's name. What's in it depends on your role: Parents and members see the details, their remaining credits (if the session uses credits), the Lesson & notes section and the Attending / Not Attending buttons. Staff see the details and the Mark attendance link. Those with the Manage events and their sessions permission see the edit, cancel and delete icons only on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard, not in the school's calendar. On a computer the window can be moved; on a phone it opens from the bottom as a sheet. The Escape key closes it too. Notes: - A session can also be opened from a link (for example Open in calendar on the Attendance page). - If the session is cancelled, the top says This event has been cancelled. and the attendance and edit buttons aren't shown. #### This event has been cancelled. banner id: calendar.event-details.cancelled-banner · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.cancelled-banner type: status · label: "This event has been cancelled." An orange strip at the top of a cancelled session's window. What it does: Explains why the attendance and edit buttons are missing. How it works: Shown to everyone. Staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission also see You can reinstate it via the cancel button above. #### Date and time id: calendar.event-details.date-time · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.date-time type: section When the session is, with a strip in its colour. What it does: Shows the date and times of this particular session. How it works: For a multi-day event the start and end dates are shown. If the session was moved on its own, the new date and time are shown. #### Edit, cancel and delete icons id: calendar.event-details.actions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.actions type: menu · permissions: Events.Manage The three icons next to the date: pencil, cancel sign and bin. What it does: Give access to changing, cancelling and deleting the session. How it works: Only visible on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard and only to staff with the Manage events and their sessions permission. Pencil (Edit Event), switches the window to the edit form. Missing on a cancelled session. Cancel sign (Cancel Event), opens the cancel confirmation or, on an already cancelled session, the reinstate one. Bin (Delete Event), opens the delete confirmation. #### Repeat and description id: calendar.event-details.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.description type: section The Repeats: … line and the session's description, when there are any. What it does: Tells you whether the session is part of a series and what attendees should know. How it works: Repeats: … only shows for sessions in a series. The description only shows if it was filled in. #### Who the session is for id: calendar.event-details.audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.audience type: card The cards of the groups the session is for, or For all groups. What it does: Shows who the session is for. How it works: Each group has a card with its name and below it Whole group or For: … with the names of the chosen people. If nobody is set to lead the session, the card also says Coach: … with the group's staff. A session for the whole school shows For all groups. #### Leader, room, limit and credits id: calendar.event-details.info-rows · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.info-rows type: list The rows showing who leads the session, the room, the attendance limit and whether it uses credits. What it does: Gives the practical information about the session. How it works: Led by …, if people are set under Who leads this event. The room name, only if one is set. No attendance limit or Max … attendees. Counts toward packs or Doesn't count toward packs. #### Your credits row id: calendar.event-details.my-credits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.my-credits type: badge · label: "You have {{count}} pack credits left" How many credits you have left, shown on sessions that use credits. What it does: Tells you before the session whether your attendance pack is still active. How it works: Only shown to members and only for sessions that count toward packs. A green row shows the total left across your active packs. With no active pack the row is yellow: You have no active pack, classes you attend are counted as visits owed and deducted from your next pack. #### Mark attendance link id: calendar.event-details.mark-attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.mark-attendance type: link · label: "Mark attendance" Opens the attendance panel for this session on top of the calendar. What it does: Lets you record who came straight from the calendar. How it works: Shown to the owner and staff (in both calendars), but not on a cancelled session. Opens, on top of the calendar, the same panel as on the Attendance page, where attendance is recorded and the lesson is written. The View on attendance page button at the top of the panel takes you to the Attendance page. For how to mark attendance, see the Attendance section of help. #### Lesson & notes section id: calendar.event-details.lesson · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/event-details#calendar.event-details.lesson type: section · label: "Lesson & notes" The published lesson and the notes shared with you for this session. What it does: Lets you read what was covered in the session without looking for it in the Lessons tab. How it works: Only shown to members and parents, and collapsed by default, tap it to load. It contains the lesson text and the attachments (tap a file to open it). Under Notes are the staff notes shared with your family. If no lesson is published it says No lesson has been shared for this session yet. You only see published lessons and only for sessions of groups that you or your child are members of. Staff don't see this section, they work with the lesson in Attendance. ### Saying you'll attend id: calendar.sign-up-for-session · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar How a parent or member says from the calendar whether they or their child will come to a session. What it does: Tells the school who is coming so it can prepare. When the session has a limit, a confirmed answer takes a spot. How it works: Open a session in the Calendar tab. At the bottom of the window there is a row for each person on your profile who can attend, with Attending and Not Attending buttons. For a group session, only the people in your family (you and/or your children) who are members of that group are shown. For a whole-school session, every child on your profile is shown; if you have no children added, you are. The pressed button turns green or red and the choice is saved straight away. You can change your answer but not clear it completely. If saving fails, the choice goes back to what it was. Answering locks before the start. How long before is up to the school (1 hour by default): the app then shows Sign-up is locked 1 hour before the event., and after the start This event has already taken place. The school can also switch this off entirely, and then the buttons are not shown. Steps: 1. Open the school's Calendar tab. 2. Click the session. 3. On the row with your name or your child's name, press Attending or Not Attending. Notes: - If the session has a limit and the places are taken, pressing Attending is refused. Saying you won't attend is always possible. - Answering is optional, the school records actual attendance separately. - You get reminders about the upcoming session even if you haven't answered. Only someone who pressed Not Attending for the session doesn't get them. - Staff don't see these buttons, they see the answers on the Attendance page. - On a cancelled session the buttons aren't shown. FAQ: Q: Why do I see Neither you nor your children are members of this group.? A: The session is for a group that nobody on your profile is currently a member of. If you think that's wrong, contact the school. Q: Why don't I see the **Attending** and **Not Attending** buttons? A: The school has switched off members marking their own attendance. On a cancelled session the buttons aren't shown either. Q: Why are the buttons disabled? A: The session is closer to its start than the time the school has set (1 hour by default) or has already started. The answer can no longer be changed. #### Attending button id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.attending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.attending type: button · label: "Attending" Says the person on this row will come. What it does: Confirms attendance and, if the session has a limit, takes a spot. How it works: Turns green when selected. Pressing it again does nothing. Refused if the session is full, cancelled or already too close to the start. #### Not Attending button id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.not-attending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.not-attending type: button · label: "Not Attending" Says the person on this row won't come. What it does: Lets the school know about an absence in advance. How it works: Turns red when selected. If everyone in your family has said they won't attend a session, you don't get notifications about it being cancelled or moved. #### Locked messages id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.lock-message · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.lock-message type: status · label: "Sign-up is locked {{count}} hours before the event." Explain why the attendance buttons are disabled. What it does: Tell you the answer can no longer be changed. How it works: When less than the time the school has set remains before the start, you see for example Sign-up is locked 1 hour before the event. The time is written in minutes, hours or days, depending on the school's setting. After the start time you see This event has already taken place. In both cases the buttons are disabled. #### This event has already taken place. message id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.past-locked · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.past-locked type: status · label: "This event has already taken place." Shown once the session has started. What it does: Explains why you can't change your answer after the start. How it works: After the session's start time the Attending and Not Attending buttons are disabled and this message appears below them. #### Neither you nor your children are members of this group. message id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.not-in-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.not-in-group type: status · label: "Neither you nor your children are members of this group." Shown instead of the buttons when nobody on your profile is in the session's group. What it does: Explains why you can't say whether you'll attend. How it works: Appears for a session for specific groups when neither you nor a child on your profile is a member of any of them. #### Members can mark their attendance toggle id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.school-setting · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.school-setting type: toggle · label: "Members can mark their attendance" The school setting that allows or stops members answering for themselves. What it does: Decides whether parents and members see the Attending and Not Attending buttons in the session window. How it works: It is in Organisation settings (opened from the school picker in the sidebar), in the Scheduling group, in the Attendance answers section. Only the school owner sees this section and can change it. The change saves straight away and applies to all sessions: when it is off, the buttons are not shown at all. It is on by default. #### Lock answers before the session id: calendar.sign-up-for-session.school-cutoff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/sign-up-for-session#calendar.sign-up-for-session.school-cutoff type: section · label: "Lock answers before the session" How long before the start members can no longer change their answer. What it does: Lets the school know the final head count before the session. How it works: In the same Attendance answers section you pick one option: Until the session starts, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 6 or 12 hours, 1 or 2 days before. The default is 1 hour before. After the chosen moment members can no longer set or change their answer, and the session window tells them sign-up is locked. The options are disabled while marking attendance is switched off. Your choice saves straight away. ### Editing a session id: calendar.edit-event · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar · permissions: Events.Manage How a staff member changes the time, date, group, leader, room, title or colour of one session or of the whole series. What it does: Keeps the schedule up to date, move a practice, change the room or add a child to a session, without creating it again. How it works: You need the Manage events and their sessions permission. Click the session on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard and press the pencil. The window switches to edit mode with two tabs, Main and Settings. Finally choose how to save: Edit This Event: changes only this session: date, start and end time, title, description and colour. If the date or time changes, attendees get a class-rescheduled notification. Edit All Events (series only), changes the whole series: title, description, colour, room and times; if you change the date, the whole series moves by the same number of days. No notification is sent for this change. Changes to groups, people and leaders always apply to the whole series. If you changed them, Edit This Event is disabled and a note explains that group changes apply to the entire series. Newly added groups or people get a notification about the session. The repeat pattern (frequency, days, count), the attendance limit and pack credits can't be edited. Steps: 1. Click the session in the calendar. 2. Press the pencil (Edit Event). 3. Make your changes in the Main and Settings tabs. 4. Press Edit This Event or Edit All Events. Notes: - The room applies to the whole series and is only saved with Edit All Events. A room change saved with Edit This Event isn't stored. - A cancelled session can't be edited, reinstate it first. - Back returns the window to view mode and discards unsaved changes. The same happens if you close the window and reopen it: it starts again from the preview. FAQ: Q: What happens to sessions changed individually if I edit all? A: A session that was moved or changed on its own keeps its changes. Q: How do I change a weekly repeat to daily? A: The repeat can't be edited. Delete the series with **Delete All Events** and create a new one. #### Back bar with cancel and delete icons id: calendar.edit-event.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.header type: section · label: "Back" The top bar of the edit form. What it does: Lets you return to the preview or cancel/delete the session straight from the form. How it works: Back resets the fields to the saved values and shows the preview. The cancel and delete icons open the matching confirmation in the preview. #### Main and Settings tabs id: calendar.edit-event.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs type: tab · label: "Main · Settings" The two tabs of the edit form. What it does: Split the fields into who-and-when and how. How it works: Main holds who the session is for, who leads it, the date and times and the colour. Settings holds the title, the room, the locked limit and the description. The form always opens on Main. ##### Who this event is for field id: calendar.edit-event.tabs.audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs.audience type: select · label: "Who this event is for" A dropdown with the session's groups and a list of their people. What it does: Lets you add or remove groups and limit the session to certain people. How it works: The dropdown shows All Groups (a session for the whole school), Choose groups… or N group(s) selected. In it you can pick All Groups (only if you have access to all groups) or add and remove groups one at a time. Each chosen group is a row with a Whole group or N member(s) badge. Tap the row to see its people and switch between Whole group and Specific members. Under Specific members tick people; Select all ticks everyone; with more than 6 people there is a Search members… field. Ticking everyone or nobody turns it back into the whole group. X removes the group. ##### Who leads this event section id: calendar.edit-event.tabs.led-by · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs.led-by type: field · label: "Who leads this event" The staff leading the series. What it does: Changes who leads the session. How it works: The choice is from the chosen groups' staff (all staff for a whole-school session). If you change the groups, people who are no longer eligible are removed automatically. The change applies to the whole series. ##### Date and times (From, Start Time, End Time) id: calendar.edit-event.tabs.date-time · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs.date-time type: field · label: "From · Start Time · End Time" The date and times of the session you opened. What it does: Moves the session to another day or time. How it works: The fields hold the opened session's date and times. With Edit This Event only it moves; with Edit All Events the whole series moves by the same number of days and takes the new times. A multi-day event also has a To field for the end date. The end time must be after the start time. ##### Colour id: calendar.edit-event.tabs.color · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs.color type: field · label: "Color" The session's colour in the calendar. What it does: Repaints the session or the whole series. How it works: The same colours as when creating: the school's own colours first, then the built-in ones. If the session has a colour that is no longer in the list, it is shown as selected. With Edit This Event only this session's colour changes, and only if you pick a different colour: otherwise the session keeps following the series colour. ##### Settings tab id: calendar.edit-event.tabs.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.tabs.settings type: section · label: "Settings" Title, room, locked limit and description. What it does: Holds the fields that describe the session. How it works: Title: 3 to 50 characters. Room: shown if the school has rooms. If the session's room was deleted it shows as Room no longer available until you choose another. Attendance limit: read-only, with a lock and the hint Can't be changed after the event is created; shows the limit and whether the session counts toward packs. Add description: reveals the description field (up to 500 characters). #### Edit This Event button id: calendar.edit-event.save-single · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.save-single type: button · label: "Edit This Event" Saves the changes only for the opened session. What it does: Allows a one-time change, say one practice earlier, without touching the series. How it works: Saves this session's date, times, title, description and colour. If the date or time moves, attendees get a class-rescheduled notification. Disabled if you changed a series' groups, people or leaders. For a one-off session it is the only button, and it also saves group changes. #### Edit All Events button id: calendar.edit-event.save-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/edit-event#calendar.edit-event.save-all type: button · label: "Edit All Events" Saves the changes for the whole series. What it does: Changes every session in the series at once. How it works: Only shown for a series. Saves the title, description, colour, room and times for the whole series and moves it if you changed the date. It also saves group and leader changes. Sessions changed individually keep their own changes. ### Cancelling, reinstating and deleting a session id: calendar.cancel-and-delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar · permissions: Events.Manage The difference between a cancelled and a deleted session, and how to do each. What it does: Lets you announce that a session won't take place (and bring it back), or remove a session or a whole series from the schedule. How it works: You need the Manage events and their sessions permission. Open the session on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard and press the cancel sign or the bin. The confirmation shows in the same window; Back returns to the preview. Cancelling: the session stays on the calendar, marked as cancelled, and can be reinstated. Attendees get a class-cancelled notification. A cancelled session's window no longer shows the attendance buttons or the Mark attendance link, and data already entered for it is kept. Deleting: the session disappears from the calendar at once, but you have 30 seconds to bring it back with the Undo button in the “…deleted” notice (it counts down). Only when the time runs out is the deletion sent, and then it is final. If you close or reload the page within those 30 seconds, the browser asks first, and if you leave anyway the session is not deleted. Delete This Event removes one session from a series. Attendees who hadn't said they won't come get a class-removed notification. Delete All Events (or Delete event for a one-off session) deletes the whole series. No notification is sent for this. Steps: 1. Click the session in the calendar. 2. Press the cancel sign to cancel it, or the bin to delete it. 3. Confirm with the button in the window. Notes: - Cancelling works on one session. To cancel several sessions of a series, cancel them one at a time. - If you want parents to know a session won't happen, cancel it rather than delete it, on cancellation they get a notification and see a cancelled session in their calendar. - Only a session from a series with more than one session can be deleted on its own. - The class-removed notification is sent only after the 30 seconds are up, not the moment you press the button. FAQ: Q: What's the difference between cancelling and deleting? A: A cancelled session stays visible as cancelled, can be reinstated and attendees are notified. A deleted session disappears, and you can only bring it back during the first 30 seconds with **Undo**. Q: I cancelled a session by mistake. How do I bring it back? A: Open the cancelled session, press the cancel sign and then **Reinstate Event**. Attendees get a class-reinstated notification. #### Cancel This Event button id: calendar.cancel-and-delete.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete#calendar.cancel-and-delete.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel This Event" Cancels the opened session. What it does: Marks this session as not taking place and notifies attendees. How it works: Above the button it says Do you really want to cancel this event? This action will notify all participants. (for a series it asks whether only this one or all, but only the opened session is cancelled). Everyone the session is for gets the notification, except those who said they won't attend. #### Reinstate Event button id: calendar.cancel-and-delete.reinstate · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete#calendar.cancel-and-delete.reinstate type: button · label: "Reinstate Event" Brings back a cancelled session. What it does: Undoes the cancellation, the session will take place again. How it works: Shown when you press the cancel sign on an already cancelled session, with the question Do you want to reinstate this cancelled event? Participants will be notified. Attendees get a class-reinstated notification. #### Delete This Event button id: calendar.cancel-and-delete.delete-single · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete#calendar.cancel-and-delete.delete-single type: button · label: "Delete This Event" Deletes one session from a series. What it does: Removes one date from the series without touching the rest. How it works: Shown for a series, with the question This is a recurring event. Do you want to delete only this occurrence or all recurring events? You can undo it within 30 seconds, after that it is final. Attendees who hadn't declined get a class-removed notification. #### Delete All Events and Delete event buttons id: calendar.cancel-and-delete.delete-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete#calendar.cancel-and-delete.delete-all type: button · label: "Delete All Events" Delete the whole series or the one-off session. What it does: Remove the session from the schedule (with 30 seconds to bring it back). How it works: For a series the button is Delete All Events and deletes every session in it. For a one-off session the question is Do you really want to delete this event? You can undo it for 30 seconds. and the button is the red Delete event. After the 30 seconds it is final and no notification is sent to attendees. #### Undo button in the deleted notice id: calendar.cancel-and-delete.undo · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/cancel-and-delete#calendar.cancel-and-delete.undo type: button · label: "Undo ({{seconds}}s)" · permissions: Events.Manage Brings back the session you just deleted while the countdown runs. What it does: Gives you 30 seconds to change your mind about deleting. How it works: After you confirm a delete, the window closes, the session leaves the calendar and a notice “…deleted” appears at the bottom with this button and a countdown in seconds. Press it to bring the session (or the whole series) back to the calendar unchanged. When the time runs out the button goes away and the deletion is final. Don't confuse it with Cancel Event, which announces that a session won't take place. ### Rooms in the calendar id: calendar.rooms · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/rooms For: schools · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar How sessions are linked to rooms and how to see how busy the rooms are. What it does: Helps you know where each session takes place, check which room is free and find sessions with no room. How it works: Rooms are added, renamed and deleted in Organisation settings (opened from the school picker in the sidebar), in the Scheduling group, in the Rooms section (see Setting up your school). Once there is at least one room, the calendar gains: a Room field when creating, and in the Settings tab when editing a session; a Room filter under Filters, including No room; on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard, a Rooms view with one column per room. The room shows in the session details when one is set. It applies to the whole series and can be changed later with Edit All Events. Notes: - The app doesn't check whether a room is already booked at the same time, two sessions can be in one room at once. Use the Rooms view or the filter to check. - If you delete a room, its sessions stay; when editing, their room shows as Room no longer available until you choose another, and in the Rooms view they are in the No room column. - Parents and members see the room name in the session details, but have no rooms view or room filter. FAQ: Q: Why don't I see the Room field? A: The school has no rooms yet. Add them under **Organisation settings** › **Rooms** (requires the **Manage events and their sessions** permission). #### Room field on a session id: calendar.rooms.picker · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/rooms#calendar.rooms.picker type: select · label: "Room" · permissions: Events.Manage Choosing a room when creating or editing. What it does: Links the session to a room. How it works: The options are No room and the school's rooms. Optional. You can only choose a room of your own school. #### Room no longer available option id: calendar.rooms.unavailable · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/rooms#calendar.rooms.unavailable type: status · label: "Room no longer available" Shown in place of a session's deleted room. What it does: Stops the room being cleared unnoticed when you save. How it works: Stays selected until you choose another room or No room. #### No room column id: calendar.rooms.no-room-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/rooms#calendar.rooms.no-room-column type: column · label: "No room" The column in the Rooms view for sessions without a room. What it does: Shows which of the day's sessions still have no room. How it works: Holds sessions with no room and those in deleted rooms. Dragging across empty time in it opens a new session with no room. ### Who sees what in the calendar id: calendar.who-sees-what · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/who-sees-what For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/calendar · permissions: Events.Manage, Visibility.PlannerOrganizationWide, Lessons.View, Lessons.Author, Notes.Author Which sessions members, parents and staff see, and which permissions unlock managing the schedule and lessons. What it does: Explains why different people see a different calendar and which permission a staff member needs to create sessions or lessons. How it works: Parents and members You see the Calendar tab if you or a child on your profile is an active member of at least one group. It contains: sessions for the whole school; sessions for groups that you or your child belong to; sessions for specific people only, only if you or your child are among them. You don't see filters, the add button or the Rooms view. The Lessons tab is also members-only. Staff The owner sees and can do everything. A staff member with access to all groups sees the whole calendar. A staff member limited to their own groups sees whole-school sessions and those that include at least one of their groups. With the See the whole calendar permission they see every session of the school, but can only change the ones for their groups. The calendar on the school's page is read-only for everyone, staff included. The schedule is managed on the Calendar page of the admin dashboard. What a staff member can do depends on their permissions: Manage events and their sessions: the Add Event button, editing, cancelling, reinstating and deleting sessions, sending reminders, managing rooms. View lessons: the Lesson tab in a session's panel on Attendance. Author lessons: writing, publishing and attaching files to a lesson. Author notes: adding and sharing member notes. Filters and the Mark attendance link are available to every staff member. Notes: - A staff member who is also a group member sees the calendar as staff, without the attendance buttons. - A staff member limited to their own groups can't create sessions for the whole school or for groups outside their own. - Staff permissions are set on the Employees page. FAQ: Q: A staff member can't add sessions. Why? A: They don't have the **Manage events and their sessions** permission. It is granted on the **Employees** page. Q: My child is in a group but I can't see one session. Why? A: The session is probably for specific people in the group only, and your child isn't one of them. #### Manage events and their sessions permission id: calendar.who-sees-what.manage-events · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/who-sees-what#calendar.who-sees-what.manage-events type: other · label: "Manage events and their sessions" · permissions: Events.Manage The permission to create, change, cancel and delete sessions. What it does: Gives a staff member full control of the schedule within the groups they can access. How it works: Unlocks Add Event, drag-to-create, the edit, cancel and delete icons, reminders to people who haven't answered, and managing rooms and event colours in Organisation settings. Only with this permission is the Calendar page in the admin dashboard visible. Without it a staff member sees the calendar and details read-only. #### See the whole calendar permission id: calendar.who-sees-what.planner-wide · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/who-sees-what#calendar.who-sees-what.planner-wide type: other · label: "See the whole calendar" · permissions: Visibility.PlannerOrganizationWide Lets a staff member limited to their own groups see every session of the school. What it does: Useful for a coach who needs to know the whole schedule (for example room use) without managing other groups. How it works: Only relevant for staff whose access is Only their groups. It widens visibility only, other groups' sessions stay read-only. The Group filter also lists every group. #### View lessons, Author lessons and Author notes permissions id: calendar.who-sees-what.lesson-permissions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/who-sees-what#calendar.who-sees-what.lesson-permissions type: other · label: "View lessons" · permissions: Lessons.View, Lessons.Author, Notes.Author The permissions that decide staff access to lessons and notes. What it does: Separate who only reads lessons from who writes and publishes them. How it works: View lessons: shows the Lesson tab in a session's panel (drafts included). Without it the tab isn't shown. Author lessons: allows writing, saving, publishing and attaching files. Without it the lesson is read-only. Author notes: allows adding and sharing member notes. #### Session lists for staff id: calendar.who-sees-what.sessions-list · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/who-sees-what#calendar.who-sees-what.sessions-list type: list How the Attendance page lists the school's sessions, today, upcoming and past. What it does: Gives staff a date-by-date list of the same sessions that are in the calendar. How it works: The Attendance page takes sessions from the calendar and groups them into today, upcoming and past, in pages. The list is available to all staff but narrowed to the groups the staff member can access. Every session is listed whether or not anyone answered, attendance was taken or a lesson exists. Recording attendance itself is covered in the Attendance section. ### Session notifications and reminders id: calendar.notifications-and-reminders · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/notifications-and-reminders For: schools, parents When Classes notifies parents and members about new, cancelled and moved sessions and lessons, and when it sends reminders. What it does: Keeps parents and members up to date with schedule changes without the school writing separate messages. How it works: Notifications appear in the app and, depending on the person's settings, can also arrive as a push notification or email. Automatic notifications New session (new class scheduled), on creation, to everyone the session is for. If you add groups or people when editing, only the newcomers are notified. Cancelled or reinstated session: to everyone the session is for, except people who said they won't attend. Moved session (class rescheduled), when you change the date or time with Edit This Event. Removed session (class removed), when one session of a series is deleted. Upcoming session reminder: for a timed session, roughly 24 hours and 1 hour before the start; for an all-day event, once, the evening before (18:00 school time). It goes to everyone the session is for, except people who pressed Not Attending: they don't need to have pressed Attending. Not sent for cancelled sessions. Times are counted in the school's local time. New lesson: when a lesson is published, to everyone who confirmed or was recorded in the session's attendance. Shared note: when a staff member shares a note about you or your child. Sign-up change: when a member confirms or declines attending, the school owner gets a notification. No notification changes made with Edit All Events (for example a new time for the whole series); deleting a whole series or a one-off session. Manual reminder On the Attendance page a staff member with the Manage events and their sessions permission can press Remind all N to remind everyone who hasn't yet said whether they're coming. You see Reminded N people. This reminder is sent even to people who turned off automatic reminders. Notes: - Parents can turn individual notification types off in their profile: Settings › Notifications › Classes & Events (Upcoming Class Reminders, Class Cancellations, New Classes Scheduled, Class Reschedules, Removed Classes, Published Lessons, Shared Notes). The school owner also has Sign-up Changes under Organizer Notifications. - If a parent isn't getting reminders, check whether they pressed Not Attending for the session and whether they turned off Upcoming Class Reminders. FAQ: Q: When do I get a reminder about practice? A: About a day and about an hour before the start, if the session is for you or your child, you haven't pressed **Not Attending** for it and haven't turned reminders off. You don't need to have pressed **Attending**. Q: I changed the time of the whole series. Were parents told? A: No, changes made with **Edit All Events** don't send a notification. Let them know with an announcement. #### Remind all button id: calendar.notifications-and-reminders.remind-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/notifications-and-reminders#calendar.notifications-and-reminders.remind-all type: button · label: "Remind all {{count}}" · permissions: Events.Manage Sends a reminder to everyone who hasn't answered for a session today. What it does: Nudges parents to confirm whether their child is coming. How it works: It is in the Sign-ups view of the Attendance page, in the column of people who haven't answered, and shows how many there are. The reminder goes to everyone on the session who pressed neither Attending nor Not Attending. On success: Reminded {{count}} people; on failure: Couldn't send the reminder. Try again. Requires the Manage events and their sessions permission. #### Upcoming session reminder id: calendar.notifications-and-reminders.class-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/notifications-and-reminders#calendar.notifications-and-reminders.class-reminder type: notification · label: "Upcoming Class Reminders" An automatic notification shortly before a session you are signed up for. What it does: Helps you not forget an upcoming session for you or your child. How it works: Sent about 24 hours and about 1 hour before the start of a timed session (for an all-day event, once, the evening before), unless you pressed Not Attending or the session is cancelled. You don't need to have pressed Attending. You can turn it off under Settings › Notifications. ### The Lessons tab for parents and members id: calendar.lessons-tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab For: parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/lessons Where parents and members read the school's published lessons, materials and shared notes. What it does: Brings together what was covered in sessions, the attached materials and the coach's notes about you or your child. How it works: The Lessons tab on the school's page is only visible to group members, you or a child on your profile. Staff who aren't members don't see it. The top says Published write-ups and shared notes for the classes you're on the roster for. If both you and children, or several children, are in groups, buttons above the list switch between them (Me, the children's names). The left side is the list of lessons, newest first; more load as you scroll. The right side (on a phone, above the list) is Shared notes. You only see published lessons, and only for sessions of groups the selected person is a member of, whether or not they were marked present. Drafts aren't shown. Steps: 1. Open the school's page and choose the Lessons tab. 2. If you have several children, pick the child with the buttons at the top. 3. Tap a lesson to read it and open its files. Notes: - If the school edits a lesson after publishing it, you see the latest version. - The same lesson can also be read from the calendar, in the session's Lesson & notes section. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see a lesson for yesterday's practice? A: The school hasn't published it yet, or the session isn't for the selected child's group. Check that the right child is selected at the top. #### Lessons tab id: calendar.lessons-tab.tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.tab type: tab · label: "Lessons" The lessons tab on the school's page. What it does: Takes you to the lessons and notes for your groups. How it works: Only shown if you or a child on your profile is a member of at least one of the school's groups. #### Me / child switcher id: calendar.lessons-tab.identity-switcher · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.identity-switcher type: filter · label: "Me" Buttons for choosing whose lessons and notes you see. What it does: Lets a parent with several children see each child's lessons separately. How it works: Only shown when there is more than one person: Me (if you are a group member yourself) and one button per child who is a group member. If a child's name can't be loaded, the button reads Child 1, Child 2 and so on. The first is selected by default. #### Lesson card id: calendar.lessons-tab.lesson-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.lesson-card type: card One row in the lessons list. What it does: Shows briefly which session the lesson belongs to. How it works: Contains the session title (or Untitled session), the group, the date and the number of attached files (3 files). If the session was cancelled there is a red Cancelled badge. Tap the card to open the lesson. ##### Lesson window id: calendar.lessons-tab.lesson-card.detail · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.lesson-card.detail type: modal The full lesson text and its attachments. What it does: Lets you read the lesson and download the materials. How it works: It is titled with the session's name. Below that it says Published …, then the lesson text and the Attachments list, tap a file to open or download it. If the lesson can't be shown it says This lesson hasn't been published yet. #### No lessons yet empty state id: calendar.lessons-tab.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.empty type: status · label: "No lessons yet" Shown when there are no published lessons for the selected person. What it does: Tells you the school hasn't published lessons for your groups yet. How it works: Below the title it says Published lesson write-ups for your classes will show up here. If lessons aren't enabled for the school, it says Lessons aren't enabled for this class yet. instead. #### Shared notes panel id: calendar.lessons-tab.shared-notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lessons-tab#calendar.lessons-tab.shared-notes type: section · label: "Shared notes" The notes the school's staff have shared about the selected person. What it does: Lets you read the coach's feedback, progress, advice, remarks. How it works: Each note shows its text and below it Shared by staff · date. You only see notes a staff member deliberately shared, their private notes stay hidden. With none it says No notes have been shared with you yet. When a note is shared you get a notification. ### Writing and publishing a lesson id: calendar.lesson-authoring · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Lessons.View, Lessons.Author How a staff member records what was covered in a session, attaches materials and publishes the lesson for parents. What it does: Gives parents and members a write-up of each session, topic, exercises, homework, together with files such as photos, video or documents. How it works: A lesson belongs to one specific session and is written on the Attendance page. Open the session (or press Mark attendance in the session window in the calendar) and choose the Lesson tab in the panel. A dot next to the tab shows its state: green, published, grey, draft. The Lesson tab is only visible to staff with the View lessons permission. Writing, attaching files and publishing require the Author lessons permission. Without it the lesson is read-only. A lesson goes through three states: No lesson yet → Draft (after the first save or uploaded file) → Published …. Only staff see a draft. After Publish the lesson is shown to parents and members and they get a new-lesson notification. Steps: 1. Open Attendance and click the session. 2. Choose the Lesson tab in the panel. 3. Write what you covered and press Create lesson (or Save). 4. Optionally upload files under Attachments. 5. Press Publish so parents can see it. Notes: - Publishing can't be undone. Changes to the text and files after publishing are visible to parents straight away, without a new notification. - Attendance doesn't have to be finalised before you publish a lesson. - If you click outside the panel while you have unsaved text, it doesn't close, save, or close it with the X. - Parents only see the lesson if they or their child are members of the session's group. FAQ: Q: Who is notified on publishing? A: Everyone who confirmed they're attending or was recorded in the session's attendance. Q: Can a lesson be just files? A: Yes. Upload a file without writing text, the lesson is created automatically. #### Lesson tab in the session panel id: calendar.lesson-authoring.tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.tab type: tab · label: "Lesson" · permissions: Lessons.View The tab next to **Attendance** in a session's panel. What it does: Opens the lesson for that session. How it works: Only shown with the View lessons permission. The dot next to the label is green for a published lesson and grey for a draft; no dot means there is no lesson yet. Opening another session returns the panel to Attendance. #### Lesson status badge id: calendar.lesson-authoring.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.status type: badge · label: "No lesson yet · Draft · Published …" Shows whether the lesson doesn't exist yet, is a draft or is published. What it does: Tells you whether parents can already see the lesson. How it works: No lesson yet: nothing saved. Draft: saved, but only staff can see it. Published … (green), parents can see it. #### Content field id: calendar.lesson-authoring.content · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.content type: field · label: "Content" · permissions: Lessons.Author The lesson text. What it does: Where you describe what was covered in the session. How it works: A large text box with the hint What did you cover today?. Below it: Saving creates the lesson for this session. Files alone are fine, uploading one creates it for you. (for a new lesson) or Saving updates the existing lesson. The button is Create lesson for a new lesson (disabled while the box is empty) and Save for an existing one, an existing lesson can be saved with empty text. Below the box you see Created … · Last updated …. Without the Author lessons permission the text is read-only, and with no lesson it says No lesson has been written for this session. #### Attachments section id: calendar.lesson-authoring.attachments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.attachments type: section · label: "Attachments" · permissions: Lessons.Author Uploading and removing lesson materials. What it does: Lets you share photos, video, slides and other files from the session. How it works: Press Click to upload a file and choose one file. Limits: Images, video, audio, documents, spreadsheets, presentations or archives · up to 10MB · 10 files max. Allowed types: images (JPEG, PNG, GIF, WebP, SVG, BMP, TIFF), documents (PDF, Word, TXT), spreadsheets (Excel, CSV), presentations (PowerPoint), archives (ZIP, RAR, 7z, GZIP, TAR), video (MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI, MKV, MPEG) and audio (MP3, M4A, WAV, OGG, WebM, AAC, FLAC). Errors: That file type isn't supported…, That file is over the 10MB limit., This lesson already has 10 attachments, the maximum allowed. If there is no lesson yet, uploading a file creates it automatically as a draft. Spaces in the file name are replaced with underscores. Files are listed under the button; tap a name to open it and the X (Remove attachment) to remove it. With no files it says No materials yet. Without the Author lessons permission files are visible but can't be uploaded or removed. #### Publish button id: calendar.lesson-authoring.publish · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.publish type: button · label: "Publish" · permissions: Lessons.Author Makes the lesson visible to parents and members. What it does: Shares the draft and notifies the session's participants. How it works: Only shown for a saved draft, next to the hint Notifies everyone confirmed or attending. After publishing the button disappears and the badge becomes Published …. People who confirmed attendance and those recorded in attendance are notified. Publishing again never sends a second notification. #### Authored by line id: calendar.lesson-authoring.author · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.author type: other · label: "Authored by {{name}}" Who last wrote the lesson. What it does: Shows the team who is responsible for the lesson. How it works: Shows the staff member who last created or saved the lesson text. #### Open in calendar link id: calendar.lesson-authoring.open-in-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/lesson-authoring#calendar.lesson-authoring.open-in-calendar type: link · label: "Open in calendar" Opens the panel's session in the calendar. What it does: Takes you to the session itself if you need to change its time or group, cancel or delete it. How it works: It is under the panel title. Opens the Calendar page of the admin dashboard on the session's day with the session window open. Shown when the panel was opened from the Attendance page. ### Member notes id: calendar.member-notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Notes.Author How staff write notes about a member or child and share them with parents. What it does: Lets a coach keep internal notes on each member's progress and share chosen ones with the family. How it works: Notes open from the Member notes icon next to a person's name in a session's panel on Attendance (this panel also opens from the calendar), and also from the Notes section in a user's details in the users list. If the person already has notes, the icon is highlighted. A Member notes panel opens with the person's name. Every new note starts as Staff only: visible only to staff. When you press Share, it becomes Shared and the parent or member sees it in the Lessons tab (Shared notes) and gets a note-shared notification. Each note shows its source, Lesson (written from a session that has a lesson) or Manual: plus the author and date. Newest first. Steps: 1. Open Attendance and click the session. 2. Next to the person's name, press the Member notes icon. 3. Write the note and press Add note. 4. To let the family see it, press Share on the note. Notes: - Adding and sharing require the Author notes permission. - Sharing can't be undone from this panel. - A note can be up to 5,000 characters. - If you click outside the panel while typing, it doesn't close and the text isn't lost. FAQ: Q: Do parents see all my notes? A: No. They only see notes you pressed **Share** on. The rest are **Staff only**. #### Member notes panel id: calendar.member-notes.panel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes#calendar.member-notes.panel type: drawer · label: "Member notes" The side panel with one person's notes. What it does: Shows all notes about the person and a box for a new one. How it works: The person's name is at the top, the notes in the middle (or No notes yet), and the new-note box at the bottom. Close it with the X. ##### Note box and Add note button id: calendar.member-notes.panel.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes#calendar.member-notes.panel.add type: field · label: "Add note" Writing a new note. What it does: Saves a note about the person. How it works: The box hint is Private by default, share it when you're ready., with Starts as staff only below it. The button is disabled while the box is empty. If the panel was opened from a session that has a lesson, the note gets the Lesson source. ##### Staff only and Shared badges id: calendar.member-notes.panel.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes#calendar.member-notes.panel.visibility type: badge · label: "Staff only · Shared" Show who can see the note. What it does: Tell you whether the family can see the note. How it works: Staff only (with a lock), only staff can see it. Shared: the parent or member can see it too. ##### Share button id: calendar.member-notes.panel.share · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes#calendar.member-notes.panel.share type: button · label: "Share" Shares the note with the family. What it does: Makes the note visible to the parent or member and notifies them. How it works: Only shown on Staff only notes. After pressing it the note becomes Shared and the button disappears. ##### Lesson and Manual badges id: calendar.member-notes.panel.source · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/calendar/member-notes#calendar.member-notes.panel.source type: badge · label: "Lesson · Manual" Where the note came from. What it does: Tells notes written against a lesson apart from the rest. How it works: Lesson: the note was added from a session that has a lesson. Manual: everything else. ## Announcements & feed id: communication · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication For: schools, parents School announcements, posts, comments and notifications. ### Announcements tab id: communication.announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/announcements The school's news feed: announcements to the whole school or to specific groups, with files, tags and comments. What it does: Keeps everything the school tells its members in one place, schedule changes, events, documents, photos. Here users read, mark as seen and comment, while staff publish from the Announcements page in the admin area. How it works: The Announcements tab is visible to the school owner, to employees and to anyone who is a member of at least one group in the school. Who sees which announcements: The owner and employees see every announcement in the school. An employee whose access is limited to certain groups sees whole-school announcements plus those for their groups. Members see whole-school announcements plus those aimed at groups they (or their child) belong to. Announcements are listed newest first, with pinned ones always on top. They load a few at a time as you scroll down. In the tab everyone, staff included, can only read, mark as seen and comment. Publishing, pinning, editing and deleting are on the Announcements page under Admin Actions, which you reach with the Manage button that staff with the Publish announcements permission see at the top of the tab. The admin page is the same feed, but with a New announcement button (on a phone, a round button at the top) and with pin, edit and delete buttons on every card. Steps: 1. Open the school from the sidebar. 2. Choose the Announcements tab. 3. Scroll down to load older announcements. 4. Optionally pick a group from the All groups filter to see only announcements for that group. Notes: - If you don't see the Announcements tab, you are not a member of any group in the school and not one of its employees. - On large screens pinned announcements sit in a column on the right; on phones and tablets they appear above the feed. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see an announcement someone told me about? A: It is probably aimed at a group that you or your child aren't in. Announcements for specific groups are only visible to members of those groups and to the school's staff. Q: Do I need to refresh to see a new announcement? A: New announcements show up the next time you open the tab. If notifications are on, you also get a notification when an announcement for you is published. #### Announcements tab in the school id: communication.announcements.tab · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.tab type: tab · label: "Announcements" The tab on the school page that holds announcements. What it does: Opens the school's announcement feed. How it works: It appears among the school's tabs only if you are its owner, an employee, or a member of at least one group. Otherwise the tab is not shown. #### Manage link in the tab id: communication.announcements.manage-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.manage-link type: link · label: "Manage" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Leads from the announcements tab to the management page in the admin area. What it does: Gives staff a quick way to publishing and managing announcements. How it works: It sits at the top right of the feed and is only shown to the owner and to staff with the Publish announcements permission. It opens Announcements in the admin area for this school. #### New announcement button id: communication.announcements.new-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.new-button type: button · label: "New announcement" · permissions: Announcements.Publish The button at the top of the Announcements page in the admin area that starts a new announcement. What it does: Opens the window for creating an announcement. How it works: It is on the Announcements page under Admin Actions, not in the school's tab. On a phone it is a round button at the top of the screen. Opens the Create announcement window. The page only opens with the Publish announcements permission. #### All groups filter id: communication.announcements.group-filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.group-filter type: filter · label: "All groups" Shows only announcements aimed at one chosen group. What it does: Helps you quickly find the announcements for a particular group, for example your child's group. How it works: Press the filter and pick one group. The feed and the pinned list then show only announcements aimed at that group, whole-school announcements are hidden while the filter is on. To clear it, choose All groups at the top of the list or press the selected group again. The owner and staff can pick any group in the school. Everyone else only sees the groups they belong to. When there are more than six groups, a Search groups box appears above the list. Notes: - If there are no groups to choose from, the filter is not shown at all. ##### Search groups box id: communication.announcements.group-filter.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.group-filter.search type: search · label: "Search groups" Finds a group by name in the filter list. What it does: Saves scrolling when the school has many groups. How it works: Only shown when there are more than six groups. It matches any part of the name, ignoring capitals. If nothing matches you see "No groups match your search." #### Announcement feed id: communication.announcements.feed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.feed type: list The list of announcements that loads bit by bit as you scroll. What it does: Shows the school's announcements you are allowed to see, newest first. How it works: Pinned announcements are on top, followed by the rest by publish date. A few announcements load at first; when you reach the end the next ones load. While loading you see grey placeholder cards. ##### "Scroll for more" message id: communication.announcements.feed.scroll-for-more · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.feed.scroll-for-more type: status · label: "Scroll for more" Shows that there are more announcements below. What it does: Tells you to keep scrolling. How it works: Appears at the end of the feed while there are announcements still to load. Scrolling to it loads the next ones. ##### "You're caught up." message id: communication.announcements.feed.caught-up · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.feed.caught-up type: status · label: "You're caught up." Shows you have reached the oldest announcement. What it does: Confirms there are no more announcements to load. How it works: Appears at the very end of the feed once every announcement you can see has loaded. It does not mean you have marked them as seen. #### Announcement card id: communication.announcements.card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card type: card One announcement in the feed, author, title, text, audience, tags, files and buttons. What it does: Shows the whole announcement right in the feed without opening it. How it works: At the top are the author's initials and name, plus a pin icon if the announcement is pinned. Then come the title, when it was published (how many minutes or hours ago; for announcements older than a week, the date) and the audience. The text keeps its line breaks, and website addresses in it become links that open in a new tab. Below the text are the tags, images and other files. At the bottom are the buttons: Mark as seen with the number of people who have seen it, for members; Comments with the number of comments, for everyone; Who's seen it: on the Announcements page in the admin area, for staff with the Publish announcements permission, instead of Mark as seen. There the pin, edit and delete buttons also appear at the top right of the card. ##### "Edited" label id: communication.announcements.card.edited · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.edited type: badge · label: "Edited {{time}}" Shows that the announcement was changed after publishing, and when. What it does: Lets readers know the content may differ from the original. How it works: Appears next to the publish time once the author saves changes to the announcement. It shows when the last edit was made. ##### "Everyone" or group-name audience label id: communication.announcements.card.audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.audience type: badge · label: "Everyone" Shows who the announcement is for, the whole school or specific groups. What it does: Tells you at a glance whether the announcement is for everyone or only certain groups. How it works: A whole-school announcement shows a grey Everyone label. An announcement for specific groups shows one label with each group's name. ##### Announcement tags id: communication.announcements.card.tags · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.tags type: badge Short words the author used to mark the topic of the announcement. What it does: Help you see what an announcement is about at a glance, for example "competition" or "fees". How it works: They appear as coloured labels below the text. The author adds and removes them when creating or editing. They are saved in lowercase. ##### Images in the announcement id: communication.announcements.card.images · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.images type: list The attached images, shown as a gallery in the card. What it does: Lets you look at the announcement's photos without downloading them. How it works: Up to three images are shown. If there are more, the third shows how many are left (for example "+2"). Press an image to open it full screen. ###### Image viewer id: communication.announcements.card.images.viewer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.images.viewer type: modal · label: "{{current}} of {{total}}" Shows the announcement's images full screen, one at a time. What it does: Lets you look through all the announcement's images at a large size. How it works: At the top you see the file name and which image you are on (for example "2 of 5"). Use Previous image and Next image or the ← and → keys to move between images; after the last one comes the first. Close it with Close image preview, the Esc key, or by pressing outside the image. ##### Files to download id: communication.announcements.card.files · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.card.files type: list The attached documents, video, audio, spreadsheets and archives in the announcement. What it does: Lets you download files the school shared, a schedule, a consent form or the rules, for example. How it works: Each file is on its own row with an icon for its type, its name and size. Press the row to download the file. #### "No announcements yet" empty feed id: communication.announcements.empty-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.empty-state type: status · label: "No announcements yet" What you see when the school has no announcements for you. What it does: Shows that there is nothing to read instead of a blank page. How it works: Below the heading it says "Published updates will appear here with their comments, seen count, and uploaded files." On the Announcements page in the admin area, staff with the Publish announcements permission also see the Create announcement button. ##### Create announcement button id: communication.announcements.empty-state.create · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.empty-state.create type: button · label: "Create announcement" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Opens the new-announcement window from the empty feed. What it does: Lets you publish the school's first announcement. How it works: Only shown on the Announcements page in the admin area, and only to staff with the Publish announcements permission. Opens the Create announcement window. ##### "No announcements match this filter" message id: communication.announcements.empty-state.filtered · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcements#communication.announcements.empty-state.filtered type: status · label: "No announcements match this filter" What you see when the chosen group has no announcements. What it does: Shows that the feed is empty because of the filter, not because there are no announcements at all. How it works: Appears when you have picked a group in the filter and no announcement is aimed at it. Choose another group or All groups to see everything again. ### Creating and editing an announcement id: communication.announcement-editor · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor For: schools · In the app: /admin/announcements · permissions: Announcements.Publish How to publish an announcement to the whole school or to specific groups, and how to change it later. What it does: Lets you tell the school's members something, with text, tags and up to 10 files, and choose exactly who sees it. Members it is meant for get a notification. How it works: To publish you need the Publish announcements permission. The school owner always has it. The window has a title and description (required), an audience, tags and files. When you press Publish announcement, the announcement appears at the top of the feed, just below pinned ones, and you see "Announcement published! Click to scroll to it." Who gets notified: every member of the chosen groups, or of all groups in the school if the audience is Entire organisation: except the author. Parents are notified for groups their child is enrolled in. People who turned off notifications for new announcements in their profile settings are not notified, but still see the announcement in the tab. Editing: only the person who published an announcement can edit it. Editing does not send a new notification, and the card gets an "Edited" label. Steps: 1. Open Announcements under Admin Actions in the menu. 2. Press New announcement. 3. Fill in Title and Description. 4. Under Audience, choose Entire organisation or Specific groups and pick the groups. 5. Optionally add Tags and attach files. 6. Press Publish announcement. Notes: - An employee whose access is limited to certain groups doesn't see Entire organisation and can only publish to their own groups. - If saving fails, the window stays open and an error message appears, nothing you typed is lost. FAQ: Q: Can I send an announcement to just one group? A: Yes. Under **Audience** choose **Specific groups** and tick the group. Only its members and the school's staff will see the announcement. Q: Why can't I edit an announcement a colleague published? A: Only the author can change an announcement's content, tags and files. If you try with someone else's announcement, you'll see an error message. Q: Does editing an announcement notify people again? A: No. A notification is only sent once, when the announcement is published. #### Create announcement window id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window type: modal · label: "Create announcement" The form where you write and publish a new announcement. What it does: Brings together everything an announcement is made of before you publish it. How it works: Opens from the New announcement button or from the Create announcement button in the empty feed on the Announcements page in the admin area. Title and Description are at the top, followed by the Audience, Tags and Files sections. The Cancel and Publish announcement buttons stay visible at the bottom even on a long form. The form starts empty every time you open the window. If you close it without publishing, what you typed is not kept. ##### Title field id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.title · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.title type: field · label: "Title" The announcement's short headline, shown to everyone in large type. What it does: Says in a few words what the announcement is about, it also shows in the pinned list and in notifications. How it works: Required. It must be between 2 and 75 characters. If it's empty, "Announcement title is required!" appears below the field. If it's shorter or longer than allowed, the announcement is not saved and an error message appears. Spaces at the start and end are removed. ##### Description field id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.description type: field · label: "Description" The main text of the announcement. What it does: Where you write the actual message, details, times, what children should bring and so on. How it works: Required. It must be between 10 and 2000 characters. If it's empty, "Announcement description is required!" appears. Line breaks are kept, and website addresses (starting with http://, https:// or www.) become links readers can open. ##### Audience section id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience type: section · label: "Audience" Where you choose whether the announcement is for the whole school or for specific groups. What it does: Decides who sees the announcement and who is notified about it. How it works: There are two options: Entire organisation and Specific groups. Entire organisation is selected by default, unless your access is limited to certain groups, then you only see Specific groups. ###### Entire organisation option id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.entire-organisation · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.entire-organisation type: button · label: "Entire organisation" The announcement is for everyone in the school. What it does: Sends the announcement to every member of every group in the school. How it works: Below the switch it says "Everyone in the organisation will see this announcement." Every member and employee of the school can see it, and members of all groups are notified. Only shown if your access covers all groups. ###### Specific groups option id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.specific-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.specific-groups type: button · label: "Specific groups" The announcement is only for the groups you choose. What it does: Lets you write only to the people the news concerns. How it works: Shows the Select groups picker. You must pick at least one group, otherwise publishing shows "Pick at least one group, or switch to entire organisation." Members of the chosen groups and the school's staff can see the announcement; only members of those groups are notified. ###### Select groups picker id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.group-picker · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.audience.group-picker type: select · label: "Select groups" A dropdown where you tick one or more groups. What it does: Chooses the groups the announcement is aimed at. How it works: Press the field to open the list of the school's groups and tick one or more. Selected groups appear below the field as labels with an × to remove them; the field itself shows the group name or how many are selected (for example "3 groups"). When there are more than six groups, a Search groups box is at the top. At the bottom of the list you see the number selected and a Clear button that removes them all. Close the list by pressing outside it or with Esc, this does not close the window itself. Notes: - If the school has no groups, the list says "This organisation doesn't have any groups yet." ##### Tags field id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.tags · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.tags type: field · label: "Tags" Optional keywords that mark the announcement's topic. What it does: Helps readers see quickly what the announcement is about. How it works: Optional. Type a word in the field that says "Add a tag and press Enter" and press Enter or a comma, the word becomes a tag. A tag is also added when you leave the field. A leading # is removed, and duplicate tags (ignoring capitals) are not added twice. To remove a tag, press the × next to it, or press Backspace in the empty field to remove the last one. Each tag can be up to 100 characters and is saved in lowercase. ##### Files section id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.files · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.files type: field · label: "Files" Attaching images, documents, video, audio, spreadsheets, presentations and archives. What it does: Lets you share files along with the announcement, a schedule, a consent form or competition photos, for example. How it works: Optional. Drag files onto the "Drag files here or click to browse" area, or press it to choose them. While you drag files over it, it says "Drop to attach". Limits: up to 10 files per announcement; up to 10 MB per file; allowed are images (JPG, PNG, GIF, WebP, SVG, BMP, TIFF), PDF, Word, plain text, Excel and CSV, PowerPoint, archives (ZIP, RAR, 7z, GZIP, TAR), video (MP4, WebM, MOV, AVI, MKV, MPEG) and audio (MP3, M4A, WAV, OGG, WebM, AAC, FLAC). Selected files are listed with their name, size and an × button to remove them, and the count appears next to the section title. Spaces in image file names are replaced with underscores. Notes: - On an error a message appears below the area: "You can attach a maximum of 10 files.", "File … exceeds the maximum allowed size of 10MB." or "File … has an unsupported format." When that happens none of the files you just picked are added, pick them again without the problem file. ##### Cancel button id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the window without publishing. What it does: Abandons the announcement. How it works: Closes the window. What you typed is not kept. The button is disabled while the announcement is being saved. ##### Publish announcement button id: communication.announcement-editor.create-window.publish · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.create-window.publish type: button · label: "Publish announcement" Publishes the announcement and notifies its audience. What it does: Makes the announcement visible to the chosen audience and sends notifications to its members. How it works: The title, description, audience and files are checked first. While uploading, the button reads "Saving...". On success the window closes, the announcement appears in the feed and "Announcement published! Click to scroll to it." pops up, press it to jump to the announcement. Members of the chosen groups (or of all groups for Entire organisation) are notified, except the author and anyone who turned off notifications for new announcements. #### Edit announcement button (pencil) id: communication.announcement-editor.edit-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.edit-button type: button · label: "Edit announcement" The pencil icon on the card that opens the announcement for changes. What it does: Lets you fix a mistake or change the audience, tags or files of an announcement that is already published. How it works: On the Announcements page in the admin area. Shown at the top of every card to staff with the Publish announcements permission. However, only the announcement's author can change its content, tags and files, trying on someone else's shows an error. Opens the Edit announcement window. ##### Edit announcement window id: communication.announcement-editor.edit-button.edit-window · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.edit-button.edit-window type: modal · label: "Edit announcement" The same form as for creating, filled in with the current announcement. What it does: Lets you change anything in the announcement without publishing it again. How it works: Title, Description, Audience, Tags and Files are filled in with the current values and follow the same rules as when creating. You can remove old files and add new ones, up to 10 files in total. Changing the audience immediately changes who can see the announcement, but does not notify the new recipients. ###### Save changes button id: communication.announcement-editor.edit-button.edit-window.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-editor#communication.announcement-editor.edit-button.edit-window.save type: button · label: "Save changes" Saves your changes to the announcement. What it does: Updates the announcement for everyone who can see it. How it works: While saving, the button reads "Saving...". On success the window closes, the card in the feed updates and gets the "Edited" label. No notifications are sent. ### Pinned announcements id: communication.pinned-announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/announcements How important announcements stay on top and visible in a separate Pinned section. What it does: Pinning keeps important announcements, rules, the season schedule, contacts, in front of everyone even when newer ones are published. How it works: Staff with the Publish announcements permission pin and unpin announcements with the pin icon on the card. A pinned announcement: always stays at the top of the feed, with a pin next to the author's name and a highlighted border; also appears in the Pinned section, in a column on the right on large screens, and above the feed on phones and tablets. Pinning sends no notifications and doesn't change who can see the announcement. Any staff member with the permission can pin and unpin announcements within the groups they have access to, not only the author. Pinning and unpinning are done from the Announcements page in the admin area. In the school's Announcements tab everyone sees the pinned announcements, but the pin buttons aren't shown, not even to staff. Steps: 1. Open Announcements under Admin Actions in the menu. 2. Press the Pin announcement icon at the top of the card. 3. To unpin, press Unpin announcement on the card or in the Pinned section. Notes: - If you have picked a group in the filter, the Pinned section also shows only the pinned announcements for that group. #### Pin announcement / Unpin announcement button id: communication.pinned-announcements.pin-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements#communication.pinned-announcements.pin-button type: button · label: "Pin announcement" · permissions: Announcements.Publish The pin icon on the card that pins or unpins the announcement. What it does: Moves the announcement to the top and into the Pinned section, or returns it to its place by date. How it works: Only shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission. On an unpinned announcement the icon is Pin announcement; on a pinned one it is coloured and labelled Unpin announcement. The button is disabled while the change saves. #### Pinned section id: communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements#communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section type: section · label: "Pinned" A short list of pinned announcements with a counter. What it does: Gives quick access to important announcements without hunting for them in the feed. How it works: Next to the Pinned heading is the number of pinned announcements. Press the heading to collapse or expand the section. On large screens the section is always in the right-hand column and stays visible as you scroll. On phones and tablets it sits above the feed and only appears when something is pinned. ##### Pinned announcement in the section id: communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.item · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements#communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.item type: card A shortened view of a pinned announcement. What it does: Shows briefly what the announcement is about and takes you to it in the feed. How it works: Shows the title, when it was published, the author, the first two lines of text and the tags. Press it to scroll the feed to the full announcement, if it hasn't loaded yet, the feed loads more until it finds it, then briefly highlights it. ###### Unpin announcement button in the section id: communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.item.unpin · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements#communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.item.unpin type: button · label: "Unpin announcement" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Unpins the announcement straight from the Pinned section. What it does: Removes the announcement from the pinned ones without finding its card in the feed. How it works: Only shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission. The announcement leaves the section and returns to its place by date in the feed. ##### "No pinned announcements" message id: communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/pinned-announcements#communication.pinned-announcements.pinned-section.empty type: status · label: "No pinned announcements" What the section shows when nothing is pinned. What it does: Explains what the section is for while it's empty. How it works: Below the heading it says "Pin important announcements to keep them visible here for all members." You only see it on large screens, on phones and tablets the empty section is hidden. ### Deleting an announcement id: communication.delete-announcement · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/delete-announcement For: schools · In the app: /admin/announcements · permissions: Announcements.Publish How to remove a published announcement from the school's feed. What it does: Removes the announcement for everyone, along with its comments, files and "seen" marks, when it was posted by mistake or is no longer relevant. How it works: The delete button (bin) is at the top of the card and is shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission. Only the announcement's author can actually delete it, trying on someone else's shows an error. You are asked to confirm first. Afterwards the announcement disappears from the feed and from the Pinned section. People who were already notified about it don't get another notification. The button is only on the Announcements page in the admin area, not in the school's tab. Steps: 1. Open Announcements under Admin Actions in the menu. 2. Press the Delete announcement bin icon at the top of the card. 3. In the Delete announcement window press Delete. Notes: - There is no way in the app to bring back a deleted announcement. If you only want to change it, use Edit announcement. #### Delete announcement button (bin) id: communication.delete-announcement.delete-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/delete-announcement#communication.delete-announcement.delete-button type: button · label: "Delete announcement" The bin icon on the card that starts deletion. What it does: Opens the delete confirmation. Pressing it alone deletes nothing. How it works: Shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission. It is disabled while the announcement is being deleted. ##### Delete announcement window id: communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/delete-announcement#communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal type: modal · label: "Delete announcement" The confirmation before the announcement is deleted. What it does: Protects against deleting by accident. How it works: Says "This will remove {{title}} from the announcement feed." with the announcement's name. Cancel closes the window with no change. Delete removes the announcement; while that happens the button reads "Deleting...", and on success the window closes. If the announcement was open with its comments, that window closes too. ###### Delete button in the confirmation id: communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal.confirm · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/delete-announcement#communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal.confirm type: button · label: "Delete" Removes the announcement for good. What it does: Carries out the deletion. How it works: Removes the announcement from the feed for everyone. If you are not its author, an error appears and the announcement stays. ###### Cancel button id: communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/delete-announcement#communication.delete-announcement.delete-button.modal.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel" Closes the window without deleting. What it does: Leaves the announcement unchanged. How it works: Closes the confirmation. Disabled while deletion is in progress. ### Marking as seen and "Who's seen it" id: communication.announcement-seen · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-seen For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/announcements How members confirm they've seen an announcement and how staff check who has seen it. What it does: Members press Mark as seen to let the school know they've read the announcement. Staff see a list of everyone who confirmed, useful for important messages like a time change or a required form. How it works: Marking is manual, just opening or scrolling past an announcement does not mark it as seen. For members: the Mark as seen button is at the bottom of the card and in the comments window. Next to it is the number of people who have already marked it. After you press it, it becomes Unsee: press it again if you marked it by mistake. Members of a group in the school and the owner can mark announcements. An employee who isn't in any group gets an error. For staff with the Publish announcements permission: in the school's Announcements tab they see the same button as everyone. On the Announcements page in the admin area, on the card they see Who's seen it instead, which opens the Seen by list. Steps: 1. Open the Announcements tab and read the announcement. 2. Press Mark as seen below it. FAQ: Q: Does the school know I opened an announcement if I don't press the button? A: No. The school only sees people who explicitly pressed **Mark as seen**. Q: Can I undo it? A: Yes. Press **Unsee** and you'll be removed from the seen list. #### Mark as seen / Unsee button id: communication.announcement-seen.mark-seen · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-seen#communication.announcement-seen.mark-seen type: button · label: "Mark as seen" Marks that you've seen the announcement and shows how many people have. What it does: Confirms to the school that you've read the announcement. How it works: On the card in the school's tab the button is shown to everyone; on the Announcements page in the admin area the card doesn't have it, and in the comments window it's shown to everyone. The number in the button is how many have marked it. After you press it, it becomes coloured and changes to Unsee. It's disabled while the change saves. #### Who's seen it button id: communication.announcement-seen.whos-seen-it · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-seen#communication.announcement-seen.whos-seen-it type: button · label: "Who's seen it" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Opens the list of people who marked the announcement as seen. What it does: Lets you check who has read the announcement. How it works: Shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission, on the card on the Announcements page in the admin area and in the comments window opened from there. Opens the Seen by window. ##### Seen by window id: communication.announcement-seen.whos-seen-it.seen-list · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-seen#communication.announcement-seen.whos-seen-it.seen-list type: modal · label: "Seen by" A list of the people who marked the announcement and when. What it does: Shows exactly who has confirmed seeing the announcement. How it works: The announcement's title is below the heading. Each row shows the person's name and how long ago they marked it; the earliest are at the top. People who later pressed Unsee are not listed. If nobody has marked it, it says "No data available." If the list fails to load: "Couldn't load seen list." Close with Close, Esc, or by pressing outside the window. ### Comments on an announcement id: communication.announcement-comments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments For: schools, parents · In the app: /organisations/:orgId/announcements How to open an announcement, read its comments and ask a question or reply. What it does: Comments let parents and students ask about an announcement, and let the school answer in one place, visible to everyone who can see the announcement. How it works: Press Comments below the announcement. A window opens with the full announcement and its comments below, oldest first. The box for a new comment is at the bottom. Who can comment: members of a group in the school and the owner. An employee who isn't in any group gets an error. Notification: when someone comments, the announcement's author is notified (unless the author is the one commenting). Deleting: only staff with the Publish announcements permission can delete comments, from the Announcements page in the admin area. Members can't delete a comment, not even their own. Steps: 1. Press Comments below the announcement. 2. Type in the Leave a comment box at the bottom. 3. Press the send button or Enter. Notes: - A comment can be up to 1000 characters. - If you want one of your comments removed, ask a staff member of the school to delete it. FAQ: Q: Who can see my comment? A: Everyone who can see the announcement, the school's staff and the members in the announcement's audience. Q: Can I edit a comment? A: No. Comments can't be edited once sent. #### Comments button id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button type: button · label: "Comments {{count}}" The button below the announcement with the comment count, which opens it with its comments. What it does: Opens the announcement in its own window where you read and write comments. How it works: Shown to everyone below every card. The number is the total number of comments. ##### Announcement and comments window id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window type: modal · label: "Comments" The full view of the announcement together with all its comments. What it does: Brings the announcement, reactions and the conversation about it together. How it works: At the top are the author, title, time and the Close button. Then come the audience, text, tags and files. Below them are Mark as seen (for everyone), the comment count, the file count and, for staff with the Publish announcements permission who open it from the Announcements page in the admin area, Who's seen it. The Comments section shows the count and the list. At first as many comments load as fit on screen; scrolling down loads more ("Scroll for more comments", "Loading...") until you see "All comments loaded." Close with Close, Esc, or by pressing outside the window. ###### Comment in the list id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment type: card A single comment with its author, time and text. What it does: Shows who wrote what and when. How it works: Each comment shows the author's initials and name, how long ago it was written, and the text. Website addresses in the text become links. Your own comments carry a You label. ###### Comment author card id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment.author-popover · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment.author-popover type: card · permissions: Announcements.Publish Brief information about the person who wrote the comment, children and groups. What it does: Helps staff quickly see which parent or student is asking, without leaving the announcement. How it works: Staff with the Publish announcements permission can press the author's name. A card opens with: Children: registered children with their school, or "No children registered"; Groups: the groups in the school this person belongs to, or "Not in any groups"; a View profile link to their profile. Press outside the card to close it. This is only available in the window opened from the Announcements page in the admin area. ###### Delete comment button id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment.delete type: button · label: "Delete comment" · permissions: Announcements.Publish The bin icon next to a comment that deletes it. What it does: Removes an inappropriate or unneeded comment. How it works: Only shown to staff with the Publish announcements permission, next to every comment. It deletes the comment straight away, with no extra confirmation, and lowers the comment count. The button is only in the window opened from the Announcements page in the admin area. ###### "No comments yet." message id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.no-comments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.no-comments type: status · label: "No comments yet." Shown when nobody has commented. What it does: Tells you that you can write the first comment. How it works: Appears in place of the list when the announcement has no comments. If comments can't be loaded, it says "Couldn't load comments." instead. ###### Leave a comment box id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment-field · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment-field type: field · label: "Leave a comment" The box at the bottom of the window for a new comment. What it does: Where you type your question or reply. How it works: It must contain at least one non-space character and can be up to 1000 characters. Send with the button next to it or Enter. Once sent, the comment is added at the bottom of the list and the box clears. What you typed is lost if you close the window before sending. ###### Send comment button id: communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment-field.send · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/announcement-comments#communication.announcement-comments.comments-button.window.comment-field.send type: button · label: "Send comment" Sends the comment. What it does: Posts your comment under the announcement. How it works: Disabled while the box is empty or the previous comment is still sending. If you aren't allowed to comment, an error message appears and the comment isn't added. The announcement's author is notified. ### Notifications panel id: communication.notifications-panel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel For: schools, parents The list of your latest notifications in the sidebar, new announcements, session changes, charges, requests and more. What it does: Keeps everything the platform has told you in one place so you don't miss a schedule change, a new charge or an answer to a request, in the browser and in the mobile app. How it works: The Notifications button is a bell on the right of the box with your picture and name at the bottom of the side menu. The number on it is how many notifications are unread. On a phone the number also shows on the Open menu button, because the bell is inside the menu. Pressing it opens a panel with your latest 20 notifications, newest first. As soon as the panel is open, the unread notifications shown are marked as read and the number disappears. The list refreshes by itself, every 20 seconds while the panel is open and every minute while it is closed. There are no push notifications in the browser, so new notifications show up here. You only get notifications for the kinds you haven't turned off in My Profile → Notifications. Turned-off ones don't appear in the panel either. Steps: 1. Open the side menu. 2. Press the Notifications bell in the box with your picture at the bottom. 3. Read the list. To close the panel, press the arrow next to the Notifications title. Notes: - Notifications without a linked page only describe the event. Some notifications, for example a reply from the Classes team to a ticket in Help desk and an offered plan choice, are buttons: pressing one closes the panel and opens the matching page. - The panel only shows the latest 20 notifications; older ones can't be reached from it. - The number on the button only counts the unread ones among the latest 20. Above 99 it shows "99+". - With the side menu collapsed on a computer, the bell isn't visible, expand the menu to use it. FAQ: Q: How do I stop a certain kind of notification? A: Open **My Profile** → **Notifications** and turn off the kinds you don't want. They stop both in the panel and as push notifications on your phone. Q: Can I delete a notification? A: No. Notifications can only be read; older ones drop out of the panel as new ones arrive. #### Notifications bell in the side menu id: communication.notifications-panel.button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel#communication.notifications-panel.button type: button · label: "Notifications" Opens and closes the notifications panel. What it does: Gives you access to your notifications from any page. How it works: It is on the right in the box with your picture and name at the bottom of the side menu. Press it once to open the panel and again to close it. ##### Unread notifications counter id: communication.notifications-panel.button.unread-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel#communication.notifications-panel.button.unread-badge type: badge The number on the Notifications button. What it does: Shows you have new notifications without opening the panel. How it works: Counts unread notifications among the latest 20. Above 99 it shows "99+". It disappears once you open the panel and the notifications are marked as read. With the sidebar collapsed it sits on the icon. #### Notification list panel id: communication.notifications-panel.panel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel#communication.notifications-panel.panel type: drawer · label: "Notifications" The slide-out panel with your latest 20 notifications. What it does: Shows your notifications, newest first. How it works: At the top is the Notifications heading and an arrow that closes the panel. Below are the notifications. Opening the panel marks the unread notifications shown as read. ##### Notification in the list id: communication.notifications-panel.panel.item · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel#communication.notifications-panel.panel.item type: notification One notification with a title, date and short text. What it does: Tells you briefly what happened, who published an announcement or which group accepted you, for example. How it works: Shows a title, a date (day, month and year) and a text with details. Unread notifications have a tinted background, a bold title and a dot in front of it. Pack renewal reminders have a wallet icon, and notifications from the Classes team a lifebuoy icon. A notification with a linked page, for example a reply to a ticket in Help desk or an offered plan choice, is a button: pressing it closes the panel and opens the page. The other notifications can't be pressed. ##### "You have no new notifications." message id: communication.notifications-panel.panel.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notifications-panel#communication.notifications-panel.panel.empty type: status · label: "You have no new notifications." Shown when you have no notifications at all. What it does: Confirms there's nothing to look at. How it works: Appears in the panel when your notification list is empty. ### Push notifications on your phone id: communication.push-notifications · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/push-notifications For: schools, parents How the Classes mobile app sends notifications to your phone and what to do if they don't arrive. What it does: Alerts you on your phone straight away, even when the app is closed, about new announcements, session changes, charges and other events, so you don't have to keep checking. How it works: Push notifications only work in the mobile app for iPhone and Android. There are none in the browser, there, new notifications show up in the Notifications panel. Turning them on: when you open the app while logged in, your phone asks whether to allow notifications from Classes. If you allow them, the phone is linked to your account and starts receiving notifications. What you receive: the same notifications that appear in the Notifications panel, minus the kinds you've turned off in Notifications in your profile. If the app is open, the notification shows as a short message at the top of the screen with its title and text. Tapping a notification opens the app. It doesn't take you straight to the announcement or session, open the relevant section or the Notifications panel. Steps: 1. Open the Classes mobile app and log in. 2. When your phone asks, allow notifications. 3. Optionally choose which kinds of notifications you want under My Profile → Notifications in your profile. Notes: - A push notification is only sent while it's still current. If it can't be delivered within a few minutes (for example, your phone is offline), it's dropped, but it stays in the in-app Notifications panel. - If you declined the permission, turn on notifications for Classes in your phone's settings and reopen the app. - Members added by the school without their own Classes account don't receive notifications. FAQ: Q: Why am I not getting notifications on my phone? A: Check that notifications for Classes are allowed in your phone's settings, that you've opened the app while logged in since then, and that the kind of notification isn't turned off under **My Profile** → **Notifications** in your profile. A notification that couldn't reach your phone within a few minutes isn't sent later, but it is in the **Notifications** panel. Q: Do I get push notifications in the browser? A: No. In the browser, new notifications only appear in the **Notifications** panel in the sidebar. #### Notification permission prompt id: communication.push-notifications.permission-prompt · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/push-notifications#communication.push-notifications.permission-prompt type: modal The phone's system question asking whether Classes may send notifications. What it does: Lets you choose whether to get push notifications at all. How it works: Shown by your phone when you open the app while logged in and haven't answered yet. If you allow it, the device is registered to your account. If you decline, no push notifications arrive, but the in-app Notifications panel keeps working. #### Push notification id: communication.push-notifications.push-message · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/push-notifications#communication.push-notifications.push-message type: notification The notification that appears on your lock screen or in your phone's notification centre. What it does: Tells you about something new without opening the app. How it works: It has a title and short text about what happened. The same notification is also kept in the Notifications panel. Tapping it opens the Classes app. #### Message while the app is open id: communication.push-notifications.in-app-message · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/push-notifications#communication.push-notifications.in-app-message type: message The short message at the top of the screen when a notification arrives while you're using the app. What it does: Shows the new notification without interrupting you. How it works: It contains the notification's title and text and disappears by itself after a few seconds. You can dismiss it by pressing it. ### Notification types id: communication.notification-types · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types For: schools, parents What each Classes notification means, when it's sent and who gets it. What it does: Explains what happened when you get a notification and why you in particular got it, for announcements, sessions, groups, charges and running the school. How it works: Every notification is saved in the Notifications panel and, if you use the mobile app and allowed notifications, is also sent as a push notification to your phone. Every kind can be turned off one by one in My Profile → Notifications. Staff kinds are in a separate Organizer Notifications part there. A turned-off kind appears neither in the panel nor on your phone. Members added by the school without their own Classes account don't receive notifications. A notification with a linked page, for example a reply to a ticket in Help desk or an offered plan choice, opens when pressed in the Notifications panel; the others only describe the event. Notes: - Notifications already sent don't disappear if you later turn their kind off in settings. FAQ: Q: Why did I get a notification about an announcement that isn't for my group? A: Whole-school announcements are sent to members of every group in the school. Check the announcement's audience label, **Everyone** means the whole school. Q: How do I stop notifications about new announcements? A: In your profile open **Notifications** and turn off **New Announcements**. Announcements still show in the **Announcements** tab. #### "New Announcements" notification id: communication.notification-types.announcement-published · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.announcement-published type: notification · label: "New Announcements" The school published a new announcement for you. What it does: You hear about school news straight away without checking the Announcements tab. How it works: Sent when an announcement is published, to every member of the groups in its audience, or of all groups in the school if it's for the whole school. Parents get it for their child's groups. The author isn't notified. Editing, pinning or changing the audience doesn't send another notification. #### "Comments on Your Announcements" notification id: communication.notification-types.announcement-commented · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.announcement-commented type: notification · label: "Comments on Your Announcements" Someone commented on an announcement you published. What it does: Lets you answer a parent's or student's question quickly. How it works: Only the announcement's author gets it, when someone else writes a comment. Your own comments don't send a notification. #### "New Classes Scheduled" notification id: communication.notification-types.event-scheduled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.event-scheduled type: notification · label: "New Classes Scheduled" The school scheduled a new session or event for you. What it does: You learn about new sessions as soon as they're added to the calendar. How it works: Sent to members of the groups the event is for. If the event is for the whole school, members of all groups get it. #### "Class Cancellations" notification id: communication.notification-types.occurrence-canceled-or-reinstated · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.occurrence-canceled-or-reinstated type: notification · label: "Class Cancellations" A session was cancelled or reinstated. What it does: You don't turn up for a cancelled session. How it works: Sent to the people the session is for when the school cancels or reinstates it. People who declined for every one of their sign-ups to that session don't get it. #### "Class Reschedules" notification id: communication.notification-types.occurrence-rescheduled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.occurrence-rescheduled type: notification · label: "Class Reschedules" A session moved to a different day or time. What it does: You know about the new time in advance. How it works: Sent to the people the session is for when the school changes its date or time. #### "Removed Classes" notification id: communication.notification-types.event-occurrence-removed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.event-occurrence-removed type: notification · label: "Removed Classes" A session was removed from the schedule. What it does: You know the session is no longer on the calendar. How it works: Sent to the people the session was for when the school removes it from the schedule. You can turn it off in My Profile → Notifications. #### "Upcoming Class Reminders" notification id: communication.notification-types.class-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.class-reminder type: notification · label: "Upcoming Class Reminders" A reminder that a session is coming up. What it does: You don't forget the session. How it works: Sent automatically about 24 hours and about 1 hour before the start of a timed class. For an all-day class it is sent once, the evening before, around 18:00 school time. Everyone the class is for gets it, except those who answered that they won't come. The times follow the school's local time. A staff member with the Manage events and their sessions permission can also send a manual reminder, it goes to people who haven't yet said whether they're coming, and it reaches them even if this kind is turned off. #### "Sign-up Changes" notification id: communication.notification-types.attendance-changed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.attendance-changed type: notification · label: "Sign-up Changes" A member answered whether they'll attend a session. What it does: The owner sees who's coming without opening the list. How it works: The school owner gets it when a member confirms, declines or changes their attendance answer. You can turn it off in My Profile → Notifications. #### "Published Lessons" notification id: communication.notification-types.lesson-published · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.lesson-published type: notification · label: "Published Lessons" A new lesson was published for one of your sessions. What it does: You know there are new materials from the session. How it works: Sent to the participants of the session the lesson was published for. You can turn it off in My Profile → Notifications. #### "New Join Requests" notification id: communication.notification-types.join-request-created · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.join-request-created type: notification · label: "New Join Requests" Someone asked to join one of your groups. What it does: You can approve or decline the request promptly. How it works: The owner, employees with access to all groups, and employees of that group get it. Employees limited to other groups don't. #### "Join Request Approved" notification id: communication.notification-types.join-request-approved · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.join-request-approved type: notification · label: "Join Request Approved" Your request to join a group was approved. What it does: You know you (or your child) are now in the group. How it works: The person who sent the request gets it when the school approves it. #### "Join Request Declined" notification id: communication.notification-types.join-request-declined · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.join-request-declined type: notification · label: "Join Request Declined" Your request to join a group was declined. What it does: You know the request wasn't accepted and can look for another group. How it works: The person who sent the request gets it when the school declines it. #### "Added to a Group" notification id: communication.notification-types.member-added-to-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.member-added-to-group type: notification · label: "Added to a Group" You (or your child) were added to a group. What it does: You know you're now part of the group. How it works: Sent when the school adds you to a group or when you join through an invite link. #### "Removed from a Group" notification id: communication.notification-types.member-removed-from-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.member-removed-from-group type: notification · label: "Removed from a Group" You (or your child) were removed from a group. What it does: You know you're no longer in the group. How it works: Sent when the school removes you from a group. #### "New Charges" notification id: communication.notification-types.charge-issued · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.charge-issued type: notification · label: "New Charges" The school billed you a new charge. What it does: You know you have something to pay. How it works: The member the charge is for gets it. The text includes the school and the amount. #### "Charge Due Reminders" notification id: communication.notification-types.charge-due-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.charge-due-reminder type: notification · label: "Charge Due Reminders" A reminder about a charge that is due soon or an overdue charge. What it does: You pay on time and avoid falling behind. How it works: Sent when a staff member with the Send payment reminders permission sends a reminder (before or after the due date), and automatically for an overdue charge: one reminder each evening around 18:00 Bulgarian time after the due date, at most three per charge. #### "Charge Waived" notification id: communication.notification-types.charge-waived · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.charge-waived type: notification · label: "Charge Waived" The school waived one of your charges. What it does: You know you don't owe that amount. How it works: The member the charge was for gets it. #### "Recorded Payments" notification id: communication.notification-types.charge-payment-recorded · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.charge-payment-recorded type: notification · label: "Recorded Payments" Your organization marked one of your charges as paid in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: You know the school recorded your payment and the amount is right. How it works: The user whose charge a school staff member marked as paid in cash or by bank transfer gets it. The text includes the school, the amount, what the charge was for and the method. It isn't sent for online payments, because then you completed the payment yourself. For a child's charge, the parent gets it. #### "Pack Renewal Reminders" notification id: communication.notification-types.pack-renewal-due · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.pack-renewal-due type: notification · label: "Pack Renewal Reminders" Your class pack is out of credits or expiring soon. What it does: You renew before you run out of sessions. How it works: Sent once per pack, when its credits run out or its end date approaches. In the Notifications panel it has a wallet icon. #### "Charge Payments" notification id: communication.notification-types.charge-paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.charge-paid type: notification · label: "Charge Payments" A member paid a charge to the school. What it does: You see incoming payments right away. How it works: The owner, employees with access to all groups and employees of the charge's group get it. If the charge isn't tied to a group, all staff get it. #### "Payment Account Issues" notification id: communication.notification-types.stripe-account-issue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.stripe-account-issue type: notification · label: "Payment Account Issues" The school's online payments are paused and action is needed. What it does: You find out in time that the school can't take online payments and fix it. How it works: The school owner gets it when the payment account can no longer accept payments or payouts. #### "Organization Created" notification id: communication.notification-types.organization-created · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.organization-created type: notification · label: "Organization Created" Confirmation that you created a new school. What it does: Confirms the school was created successfully. How it works: The owner gets it right after creating the school. #### "Plan Choices" notification id: communication.notification-types.plan-choice-opened · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.plan-choice-opened type: notification · label: "Plan Choices" A plan choice was opened for you, or you were reminded to pick. What it does: You find out you need to pick an option, and by when. How it works: The people a school offered a choice to get it, when the choice is opened and when the school reminds them. The title carries the name of the choice, and the text says how many options you may pick and, if there is one, by which date. Pressing it in the Notifications panel opens your payments in the school. #### "Staff Assignments" notification id: communication.notification-types.staff-assigned · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.staff-assigned type: notification · label: "Staff Assignments" You were assigned as staff to a school or group. What it does: You know you now have staff access. How it works: The person assigned as an employee of the school or as a teacher of a group gets it. #### "Plans Picked" notification id: communication.notification-types.plan-choice-made · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.plan-choice-made type: notification · label: "Plans Picked" A member picked or switched a plan. What it does: You see who picked what without opening the plans. How it works: Staff with the Manage payment plans permission who have access to the plan's first group get it when a user picks or switches a plan. For a plan for the whole organisation, every staff member with that permission gets it. The text says who picked which plan and in which choice. #### "Permission Changes" notification id: communication.notification-types.permissions-changed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.permissions-changed type: notification · label: "Permission Changes" Your staff permissions or group access changed. What it does: You understand why you see more or less in the school. How it works: The employee gets it when the owner changes their permissions or the groups they can access. You can turn it off in My Profile → Notifications. #### "Shared Notes" notification id: communication.notification-types.note-shared · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.note-shared type: notification · label: "Shared Notes" A staff member shared a note on your profile. What it does: You know the school left a note you can read. How it works: The member a staff member shared a note with gets it. You can turn it off in My Profile → Notifications. #### "Classes Team Replies" notification id: communication.notification-types.support-ticket-replied · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.support-ticket-replied type: notification · label: "Classes Team Replies" The Classes team replied to one of your help desk tickets. What it does: You find out straight away when the Classes team answers your help request. How it works: The owner and every staff member of the school get it when the Classes team replies to one of the school's tickets in Help desk. The text starts with the name of whoever replied, and if the team asks for more information, that is marked. Pressing it in the Notifications panel opens the ticket. #### "Resolved Help Desk Tickets" notification id: communication.notification-types.support-ticket-resolved · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/communication/notification-types#communication.notification-types.support-ticket-resolved type: notification · label: "Resolved Help Desk Tickets" One of your help desk tickets was marked as resolved. What it does: You know the ticket is closed. How it works: The owner and every staff member of the school get it when the Classes team marks one of the school's tickets as resolved. Pressing it in the Notifications panel opens the ticket. Other status changes of a ticket don't send a notification. ## Members & staff id: members-staff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff For: schools Adding members, invite links, join requests, employees, permissions and notes. ### The admin dashboard id: members-staff.admin-dashboard · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard For: schools · In the app: /admin Where a school's calendar, groups, users, finance, attendance and announcements are managed, and who sees each section. What it does: Brings the day-to-day running of your school into one place: the calendar, attendance, groups, the user list and your team, finance, announcements and contact with the Classes team. It is available to the school's owner and to its employees. How it works: At the top of the side menu you pick the organisation you are working in (the organisation picker). Once you pick a school you own or work for, an Admin Actions section appears under it. It holds the dashboard entries: Calendar, Attendance, Groups, Users, Finance, Announcements and Help desk. If you pick an organisation you only attend, you see the menu for attendees instead, with no admin dashboard. Which entries you see depends on your role: the owner sees all of them, an employee only those they have a permission for. Attendance, Users and Help desk are open to every employee. The Users section has two tabs: Users (everyone) and Employees (owner only). The school's settings are not an entry in the dashboard, they open from the organisation picker. Steps: 1. Open the side menu. 2. If you have more than one school, pick it at the top. 3. In the Admin Actions section, press the section you need, for example Users. Notes: - If you don't see the Admin Actions section, either the organisation you picked isn't one you manage, or you are not the owner or an employee of any school. - If you open the address of a section you don't have permission for, the dashboard sends you back to Users. - On a phone there is a bar at the bottom with up to four sections (Calendar, Announcements or Attendance, Groups or Users, Finance); the rest are in the side menu. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see the Employees tab? A: Only the school's owner has it. Employees only see the Users tab. Q: Why can't I open Finance? A: Finance needs the View financials permission. Without it the entry is hidden, and if you open its address the dashboard sends you back to Users. Q: Where are the school settings? A: In the organisation picker at the top of the side menu there is "Organisation settings". It shows for the owner and for employees who may edit the organisation profile or manage events. #### Admin Actions section in the menu id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions type: section · label: "Admin Actions" The side-menu section with the entry points to the admin dashboard. What it does: Gives you quick access to managing the school you picked. How it works: It only appears if the school you picked is yours or you are an employee of it. It has up to seven entries in this order: Calendar, Attendance, Groups, Users, Finance, Announcements and Help desk. Each entry only shows with the permission it needs. ##### Calendar menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.calendar type: link · label: "Calendar" · permissions: Events.Manage Opens the school's calendar in the dashboard. What it does: Takes you to the calendar where you add and change events and sessions. How it works: It only shows with the Manage events and their sessions permission. ##### Users menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.users · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.users type: link · label: "Users" Opens the users and team section. What it does: Takes you to the school's user list, join requests and (for the owner) the team. How it works: Every employee sees it. A number may show next to it, that is how many join requests are waiting in the school you picked. It updates as soon as you approve or decline a request. ##### Finance menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.income · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.income type: link · label: "Finance" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Opens the finance section of the dashboard. What it does: Takes you to the school's charges, payments and payment plans. How it works: It only shows with the View financials permission. An employee without it does not see the entry, and if they open the address of the section they are sent back to Users. ##### Groups menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.groups type: link · label: "Groups" · permissions: Groups.Manage Opens group management in the dashboard. What it does: Takes you to the school's list of groups, where you create and organise them. How it works: It only shows with the Manage groups permission. ##### Attendance menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.attendance type: link · label: "Attendance" Opens the attendance section of the dashboard. What it does: Takes you to marking attendance for sessions. How it works: Every employee sees it. Marking attendance itself needs the Manage attendance permission. ##### Announcements menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.announcements · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.announcements type: link · label: "Announcements" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Opens the school's announcements in the dashboard. What it does: Takes you to where you publish announcements to your users. How it works: It only shows with the Publish announcements permission. ##### Help desk menu entry id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.help · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.admin-actions.help type: link · label: "Help desk" Opens the staff help desk, where you write to the Classes team. What it does: Takes you to your support tickets with the Classes team and to the tips from Classy. How it works: Every employee sees it, it needs no separate permission. A number may show next to it, that is how many replies from the team you haven't opened yet. See the article on the help desk. #### Organisation picker id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.school-selector · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.school-selector type: menu · label: "Organisation picker" The button at the top of the side menu where you choose which school you are working in. What it does: Lets you switch between the schools you own, work for or attend, from any page. How it works: The button shows the name of the picked school and "Switch organisation". The menu has two lists: My organisations (the schools you manage, tagged "Administrator" for the owner or "Staff") and Organisations I attend. Each school is listed once, even if you are both its owner and an employee. Your pick decides what you see below it: for a school you manage, the admin dashboard; for one you attend, the attendee menu. Further down the menu are New organisation and Search organisations, and for the owner and for employees with the right permission also Organisation settings. Your choice is remembered. Switching school resets the search, filters and page of the user list. Notes: - If you have no school at all, the menu says "You have no organisations yet." and the dashboard shows a message that you are not an owner or employee of any organisation. - If you pick a school you don't manage and open a dashboard address, you see a message asking you to pick one you manage. ##### Organisation settings button id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.school-selector.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.school-selector.settings type: menu-item · label: "Organisation settings" · permissions: Organization.Edit, Events.Manage Opens the settings of the picked school. What it does: Takes you to the school's profile, rooms, colours, contract, payments and other settings. How it works: It is in the organisation picker menu, below the lists. It shows for the owner and for employees with the Edit organisation profile or Manage events and their sessions permission. What exactly you can change there depends on your permissions. See the article on school settings. #### Users and Employees tabs id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs type: tab The two tabs on the page with your school's people. What it does: Separate the people who attend the school from the people who work for it. How it works: The tabs sit at the top of the page, but only the owner sees them. Employees just see the user list, with no tab bar. ##### Users tab id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs.members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs.members type: tab · label: "Users" The list of all the school's users and pending join requests. What it does: Shows who attends the school, which groups they are in and when they joined. How it works: The owner and every employee can see it. What an employee can do there depends on their permissions, such as Manage members and View member contact details. ##### Employees tab id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs.employees · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.tabs.employees type: tab · label: "Employees" The school's team, owner only. What it does: Lets the owner invite staff, give them permissions and assign them to groups. How it works: Only the owner of the selected school sees it. If an employee opens its address directly, they are sent back to Users. #### "No groups assigned to you yet" notice id: members-staff.admin-dashboard.no-groups-notice · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/admin-dashboard#members-staff.admin-dashboard.no-groups-notice type: notification · label: "No groups assigned to you yet" A warning for an employee whose access is limited to their own groups but who has none yet. What it does: Explains to the employee why the dashboard lists are empty and what to do about it. How it works: It shows at the top of the dashboard when the owner has limited your access to Only their groups and you are not assigned to any group. Until the owner assigns you to one, you won't see members, sessions or other group-related data. Notes: - The notice goes away once the owner assigns you to a group or gives you access to All groups. ### Roles: owner, employee and member id: members-staff.roles · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/roles For: schools · In the app: /admin What the owner, an employee and a member can each do in a school. What it does: Explains the three roles in a school so you know who sees what and who can change what. How it works: Owner: the person who created the school. They always have every permission for every group, and that can't be restricted. Only the owner can invite employees, change their permissions and reach, and assign them to groups. Employee: someone who joined the team through a staff invite link. They see the admin dashboard and the member list, but can only do what the owner has given them permission for, and only in the groups they can reach. Member: a person (or a parent's child) enrolled in at least one of the school's groups. Members have no access to the admin dashboard. The same account can hold different roles in different schools. Notes: - An employee with no permissions at all still sees the member list, names, groups and join date, but no contact details and no way to change anything. - The app has no button for removing an employee from the team. FAQ: Q: Can an employee invite other employees? A: No. Only the owner can create staff invite links and change the team's permissions. Q: Can I restrict the owner's permissions? A: No. The owner always has full access. #### Owner id: members-staff.roles.owner · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/roles#members-staff.roles.owner type: other The school's creator, with full access. What it does: Runs everything in the school, including the team. How it works: Has every permission, for every group. Only the owner can see the Employees tab, create staff invite links, change employees' permissions and reach, and assign employees to groups or remove them from groups. In the owner's own team profile the switches are replaced by Owner, full access. #### Employee id: members-staff.roles.employee · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/roles#members-staff.roles.employee type: other A team member with permissions chosen by the owner. What it does: Helps run the school within the permissions they have. How it works: Someone becomes an employee by opening an invite link from the owner and pressing Join the team. Their permissions and group access come from the link and the owner can change them at any time. The employee gets a notification whenever their permissions or access change. #### Member id: members-staff.roles.member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/roles#members-staff.roles.member type: other A person or child enrolled in one of the school's groups. What it does: Attends the school's sessions. How it works: Someone becomes a member by being added to a group, joining through a link, or having their join request approved. A member stays in the school while they are in at least one group. The school can also add a member who has no account. ### Member list id: members-staff.members-list · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list For: schools · In the app: /admin Everyone enrolled in the school's groups, with search, group filter and sorting. What it does: Shows who attends the school, which groups they are in and when they joined, and is the way into each member's profile. How it works: The list is on the Users page of the admin dashboard. Every enrolled person has their own row: a parent who attends a group themselves and each enrolled child are separate rows. A parent whose children attend but who is in no group themselves has no row of their own, you reach them through the child's row. Search, filter, sort and page are kept in the page address, so refreshing or pressing back returns you to the same view. A link to a person from elsewhere in the dashboard (for example their name on a group page) lands here, already searched for the name, and opens their profile. An employee limited to their own groups only sees members of those groups. Steps: 1. Open Users from the Admin Actions menu. 2. Pick a group, or type a name, phone number or group in the search box. 3. Press a row to open that member's profile. Notes: - The Contact column is only shown to the owner and to employees with the View member contact details permission. - The Add member and Join Link buttons only appear if the school has at least one group and you have the Manage members permission. On a phone they are two icons at the top of the screen. #### Join Link button id: members-staff.members-list.join-link-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.join-link-button type: button · label: "Join Link" · permissions: Members.Manage Opens the window for creating a link people use to join a group. What it does: The main way to invite people: they join with their own account. How it works: The main (coloured) button at the top of the page, next to Add member. It opens the Group Join Link window. See the separate article on join links. #### Add member button id: members-staff.members-list.add-member-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.add-member-button type: button · label: "Add member" · permissions: Members.Manage Opens the window for adding a member without an account. What it does: For people who attend the school but don't use the app. How it works: Opens the Add a member without an account window. See the separate article on adding a member. #### "Create your organisation's first group" card id: members-staff.members-list.no-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.no-groups type: card · label: "Create your organisation's first group" The message you see while the school has no groups. What it does: Explains why you can't add or invite members yet. How it works: Members are always enrolled into a group, so with no group the Join Link and Add member buttons are hidden. The owner also sees a Create a group button that opens the school's groups page. ##### Create a group button id: members-staff.members-list.no-groups.create-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.no-groups.create-group type: link · label: "Create a group" Opens the school's groups page. What it does: Takes you to where you create the first group. How it works: Only the school's owner sees it. #### Group filter id: members-staff.members-list.group-filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.group-filter type: filter · label: "All Groups" Shows only the members of a chosen group. What it does: Lets you quickly see who is in a given group. How it works: It starts on All Groups. Pick a group to keep only the rows of members in it. Changing the filter takes you back to page one. #### Sort id: members-staff.members-list.sort · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.sort type: select · label: "By Name" Orders the list by name, by parent or by age. What it does: Helps you find someone or see children by age. How it works: Options: By Parent Name: by the parent's (account holder's) last and first name. By Name: by the row's own name (the child or the adult). This is the default. By Age: children first, oldest to youngest, then adults. #### Rows per page id: members-staff.members-list.page-size · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.page-size type: select · label: "Show" Chooses how many members are shown per page. What it does: Lets you see more people at once. How it works: Choose 10, 25 or 50 per page. The default is 10. On a phone the choice is not shown, the list there just scrolls. Changing it takes you back to page one. #### Member search id: members-staff.members-list.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.search type: search · label: "Search members..." Searches by name, parent's name, phone number or group. What it does: Finds a specific person in the list quickly. How it works: Results update shortly after you stop typing. The search ignores upper and lower case and matches the row's name, the parent's name, the phone number and group names. #### Member table id: members-staff.members-list.table · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table type: table The members' rows and their columns. What it does: Shows the key details of each enrolled person on one row. How it works: Pressing a row (or the name and picture) opens the member's profile at the side. On a phone the table becomes a list: each row is compact, with a picture, name, a Kid or Parent tag (an adult with no kids has no tag), the age and the parent's name for a kid or the phone number for an adult (with the contact permission), and up to three groups, with the rest shown as "+N". The groups there are only labels, pressing the row opens the profile. Notes: - If nothing matches your search or filter you see "No members found matching your search." - If the list fails to load you see "Failed to load organization members. Please try again." ##### Member column id: members-staff.members-list.table.member-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.member-column type: column · label: "Member" The member's name, picture and type. What it does: Shows who the row is and whether they are a kid, a parent or an individual. How it works: A label sits next to the name: Kid (with their age, e.g. "(8y)", when it is known), Parent (an adult with children) or Individual (an adult with no children). Below the name is a Copy ID button (wider screens only). ###### "No app account" icon id: members-staff.members-list.table.member-column.managed-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.member-column.managed-badge type: badge · label: "No app account" A small icon next to a member the school added without an account. What it does: Marks the people who don't use the app and get no notifications. How it works: Hover over the icon to see the explanation. On a child's row the icon sits next to the parent's name when the parent has no account. ###### Copy ID button id: members-staff.members-list.table.member-column.copy-id · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.member-column.copy-id type: button · label: "Copy ID" Copies the unique identifier of the member's account. What it does: Useful when you need to point to exactly who someone is, for example when contacting support. How it works: After pressing it the label reads Copied! for 2 seconds. On a child's row it copies the parent's account identifier. ##### Parent column id: members-staff.members-list.table.parent-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.parent-column type: column · label: "Parent" The parent of the child on the row. What it does: Shows whose child it is and takes you to the parent's profile. How it works: On a child's row it shows the parent's name; press it to open the parent's profile. An adult's row shows a dash. The column isn't shown on a phone. ##### Contact column id: members-staff.members-list.table.contact-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.contact-column type: column · label: "Contact" · permissions: Members.ViewContactDetails The member's phone number. What it does: Lets you quickly see how to reach someone. How it works: Shows the account holder's phone number, or a dash if there is none. Without the View member contact details permission the column isn't shown at all and phone numbers aren't sent to your device. ##### Groups column id: members-staff.members-list.table.groups-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.groups-column type: column · label: "Groups" The groups the person on the row is enrolled in. What it does: Shows where the member attends and links to each group's page. How it works: Each group is a chip, press it to open the group. Wider screens show the first three groups as links. A phone also shows the first three, as plain labels, plus "+N" for the rest. The person's profile lists them all. ##### Join Date column id: members-staff.members-list.table.join-date-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.table.join-date-column type: column · label: "Join Date" The date the member joined the school. What it does: Shows how long someone has been with the school. How it works: Only shown on wider screens. #### Pagination id: members-staff.members-list.pagination · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/members-list#members-staff.members-list.pagination type: other · label: "Showing" Moving between pages of the list. What it does: Lets you browse a long list in parts. How it works: Below the table it reads, for example, "Showing 1 to 10 of 42 results". The buttons take you to the first, previous, a specific, next and last page. On a phone there are only arrows and "2 / 5", and with a single page the arrows are hidden. ### Group join link id: members-staff.join-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage How to create a link people use to join a group with their own account, and how to manage the links you've made. What it does: Lets you invite people to a group just by sending them a link by message or email. They join with their own account, themselves, their children, or both at once. How it works: Open it with the Join Link button above the member list. Pick a group, a link type and optionally the number of uses and how long it's valid, then press Generate Link. Every new link is separate, creating one does not revoke the old ones. Opening and confirming a link once counts as one use, however many people (a parent and children) join in that go. Whoever opens the link has to log in (or sign up) before joining. You need the Manage members permission. Steps: 1. Press Join Link above the member list. 2. Pick a group under Group. 3. Choose a Link type: Request or Direct. 4. Optionally open Settings and set Number of uses and Valid for. 5. Press Generate Link. 6. Press Copy (or Share) and send the link. Notes: - If the school has only one group, it is selected for you. - Closing the window resets the settings and hides the finished link, the link itself stays active, and you'll find it under Links for this group. FAQ: Q: What's the difference between Request and Direct? A: With Request, a public group lets the person in straight away, while a private group files a join request you have to approve. Direct lets the person in straight away, even into a private group, with no approval. Q: How do I stop a link I sent by mistake? A: Open the window, pick the group, expand "Links for this group" and press "Revoke" next to the link. #### Group Join Link window id: members-staff.join-link.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal type: modal · label: "Group Join Link" The form for creating a link and the list of the group's existing links. What it does: Keeps creating, copying and revoking a group's links in one place. How it works: At the top it reads "Generate a link that lets someone join a group directly. Share it by message or email." Once you generate a link, the form is replaced by the finished link. ##### Group field id: members-staff.join-link.modal.group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.group type: select · label: "Group" The group the link leads to. What it does: Decides which group people who open the link will join. How it works: Required. Until you pick a group, Generate Link is disabled and reads "Select a group first to generate a link." beneath it. Changing group hides a link you already generated, because it belongs to the previous group. ##### Link type switch id: members-staff.join-link.modal.link-type · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.link-type type: toggle · label: "Link type" Whether people get in with approval or straight away. What it does: Decides whether you want to approve everyone who uses the link. How it works: Request (default): public group, joins immediately; private group, files a join request awaiting your approval. Direct: joins immediately, bypassing approval, even for a private group. A warning says anyone with the link becomes a member straight away; for a private group it points out that the group is private. ##### Settings section id: members-staff.join-link.modal.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.settings type: section · label: "Settings" A collapsed section with the link's number of uses and validity. What it does: Lets you limit how many times and until when the link can be used. How it works: It starts collapsed, and its header shows your current choice, e.g. "Unlimited · No expiry". If a value inside is invalid, the section stays open. ###### Number of uses field id: members-staff.join-link.modal.settings.uses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.settings.uses type: field · label: "Number of uses" How many times the link can be used. What it does: Limits how many families or people can get in with one link. How it works: Choose Unlimited (default), Single use, 5 uses, 10 uses or Custom. Custom reveals a box pre-filled with 25; enter a whole number of at least 1, otherwise you see "Enter a number, at least 1." and can't generate the link. Notes: - One use is one confirmation of the link, even if a parent enrols several children at once. ###### Valid for field id: members-staff.join-link.modal.settings.valid-for · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.settings.valid-for type: field · label: "Valid for" Until when the link works. What it does: Stops the link automatically after a set time. How it works: Choose No expiry (default), 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days or Custom date. The link is valid until the end of the last day. Custom date reveals a date box set 14 days ahead; the date must be today or later, otherwise you see "Pick a date in the future." ##### Generate Link button id: members-staff.join-link.modal.generate · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.generate type: button · label: "Generate Link" Creates the link with the chosen settings. What it does: Creates a new active link for the group. How it works: Disabled until you pick a group, and while the number of uses or the date is invalid. On success the window shows the finished link. ##### "Your link is ready!" view id: members-staff.join-link.modal.result · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.result type: section · label: "Your link is ready!" The finished link with a summary of its settings. What it does: Gives you the link to copy or share and reminds you what it does. How it works: Chips under the heading show the group, the type, the number of uses and the validity (e.g. "unlimited uses", "valid until …"). A hint under the link says "This link works once, generate another for each person or family you invite.", "This link works N times…" or "This link works an unlimited number of times." A direct link repeats the approval warning. ###### Copy button id: members-staff.join-link.modal.result.copy · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.result.copy type: button · label: "Copy" Copies the link to the clipboard. What it does: Lets you paste the link into a message or email. How it works: The label reads Copied! for 2 seconds. If copying isn't allowed, select the link in the box and copy it by hand. ###### Share button id: members-staff.join-link.modal.result.share · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.result.share type: button · label: "Share" Opens your device's share menu. What it does: Sends the link straight through a messaging app, email and so on. How it works: Only shown on devices with built-in sharing (usually phones). ###### Generate another link button id: members-staff.join-link.modal.result.generate-another · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.result.generate-another type: button · label: "Generate another link" Takes you back to the form for one more link. What it does: Handy when inviting several families with separate single-use links. How it works: Hides the link on screen (it stays active) and shows the form again with the same settings. ##### Links for this group list id: members-staff.join-link.modal.existing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.existing type: list · label: "Links for this group" Every link created for the selected group. What it does: Lets you see which links still work, how often they've been used, and stop one. How it works: It appears once you pick a group, collapsed, with the number of links beside the heading; press it to expand. Newest links are on top. Each row shows a state, an icon for the type (a direct link also reads Direct), "Created …", "Expires …" or "Never expires", and the uses ("3 of 10 uses" or "3 uses, unlimited"). With no links it reads "No links generated for this group yet." ###### Link state id: members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.state type: status Whether the link can still be used. What it does: Shows at a glance which links work. How it works: Active: works. Used: has run out of uses. Expired: its date has passed. Revoked: stopped by hand. If several apply, revoked wins over used, and used over expired. ###### Copy button in the list id: members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.copy · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.copy type: button · label: "Copy" Copies an existing link. What it does: Lets you resend an active link without creating a new one. How it works: Only shown for active links. ###### Revoke button id: members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.revoke · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-link#members-staff.join-link.modal.existing.revoke type: button · label: "Revoke" Stops the link for good. What it does: Use it if the link went to the wrong person or you don't want anyone else joining with it. How it works: Only shown for active links. It takes effect immediately, with no confirmation, and can't be undone. People who already joined stay in the group. ### Adding a member without an account id: members-staff.add-member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage How to add someone (and their children) to your school who doesn't use the app. What it does: Lets you keep people in Classes who attend your school but have no account, for example a parent who doesn't want to install the app. You can then track their attendance, charges and payments. How it works: Open it with the Add member button above the member list. Only a first name and at least one group are needed, for the person or for one of their children. Everything else is optional. Each person picks their own groups: often only the child attends and the parent just pays. The new member gets the "No app account" icon in the list and receives no notifications. You can link them to a real account later. You need the Manage members permission. An employee limited to their own groups can only enrol into those. Steps: 1. Press Add member above the member list. 2. Enter a First name (and optionally last name, phone, date of birth, country). 3. If a child attends, press Add child and fill in their details. 4. Under Groups, pick the groups, for the child, the parent, or both. 5. Press Add member. Notes: - If the school has only one group, it is ticked for you. - If something fails, the window stays open with your details so you can fix them and try again. FAQ: Q: Does the parent have to be in a group? A: No. It's enough for one child to be in a group. The parent's groups only appear after "+ Add the parent to groups too". Q: Will the person get notifications? A: No. A member without an account gets no notifications until they're linked to an account. #### Add a member without an account window id: members-staff.add-member.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal type: modal · label: "Add a member without an account" The form with the person's details, their children and groups. What it does: Collects everything needed to create a member without an account. How it works: At the top it reads: "For people who attend your organization but don't use the app. You can enter just a first name, everything else is optional." The form has three parts: Member details, Kids and Groups. Errors appear after your first attempt to save. ##### Member details section id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details type: section · label: "Member details" The adult's personal details. What it does: Decides who the person is in the list. How it works: Holds first name, last name, phone, date of birth and country. ###### First name field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details.first-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details.first-name type: field · label: "First name" The person's first name. Required. What it does: The only required field for the person themselves. How it works: Between 2 and 50 characters. If shorter you see "First name must be at least 2 characters." ###### Last name field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details.last-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details.last-name type: field · label: "Last name" The person's last name. Optional. What it does: Helps tell apart people with the same first name. How it works: Optional. If you fill it in, it must be 2 to 50 characters, otherwise saving is refused. ###### Phone field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details.phone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details.phone type: field · label: "Phone" A contact phone number. Optional. What it does: Gives you a way to reach someone who gets no notifications. How it works: Optional. If filled in, it must be 7 to 20 characters. It shows in the Contact column to people with the View member contact details permission. ###### Date of birth field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details.date-of-birth · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details.date-of-birth type: field · label: "Date of birth" The adult's date of birth. Optional. What it does: Lets the person's age be shown. How it works: Optional. It can't be in the future or before 1 January 1900. ###### Country field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.details.country · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.details.country type: select · label: "Country" The person's country. Bulgaria by default. What it does: Records which country the person is from. How it works: Bulgaria is preselected; you can pick another country. ##### Kids section id: members-staff.add-member.modal.kids · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.kids type: section · label: "Kids" The person's children who attend the school. What it does: Lets you add a parent together with one or more children. How it works: Press Add child to get a Child 1, Child 2… card. The bin icon (Remove child) removes the card. For a child only the first and last name are needed. School / kindergarten and date of birth are optional. If a name is missing or a school is shorter than 2 characters, you see "Fill in the child's first and last name. A school, if given, needs at least 2 characters." ###### Add child button id: members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.add-child · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.add-child type: button · label: "Add child" Adds a card for another child. What it does: Lets you enrol one of the parent's children. How it works: The new child is opened straight away in the Groups section so you can pick their groups. ###### Child's first and last name id: members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.child-name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.child-name type: field The child's first and last name. Required. What it does: Decides how the child appears in the list. How it works: Each field is 2 to 50 characters. ###### School / kindergarten field id: members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.school · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.school type: field · label: "School / kindergarten" The child's school. Optional. What it does: Records where the child studies, if you know. How it works: It can be left empty. If you fill it in, it is between 2 and 100 characters. ###### Child's date of birth id: members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.date-of-birth · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.kids.date-of-birth type: field · label: "Date of birth" The child's date of birth. Optional. What it does: Used to work out the child's age in the list, if entered. How it works: It can be left empty, then the child's age is not shown. If you enter it, the child must be under 18: the date must fall between today and 18 years ago. ##### Groups section id: members-staff.add-member.modal.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.groups type: section · label: "Groups" Which groups the person and their children join. What it does: Enrols each person into their own groups. How it works: With no children it's a plain checklist, with the count beside the heading ("2 selected"). With children it reads "Each person picks their own groups, often only the child attends." and each child has a row that expands to a checklist; the row shows the count or No groups. The parent has no row until you press + Add the parent to groups too. At least one group in total is required. Otherwise you see "Select at least one group." or, with children, "Select at least one group for the parent or a child." ###### "+ Add the parent to groups too" button id: members-staff.add-member.modal.groups.add-parent · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.groups.add-parent type: button · label: "+ Add the parent to groups too" Shows a row for the parent's own groups. What it does: For when the parent attends sessions as well. How it works: Only shown when children have been added and the parent has no groups picked yet. ##### Add member button in the window id: members-staff.add-member.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/add-member#members-staff.add-member.modal.submit type: button · label: "Add member" Creates the member and enrols them in the chosen groups. What it does: Finishes adding. How it works: On success you see "Member added successfully.", the window closes and the list refreshes. Cancel closes the window without saving and clears the form. ### Members without an account: edit, archive and link to an account id: members-staff.managed-members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage What you can do with a member your school added without an account, edit them, archive them, or link them to a real account. What it does: Helps you keep the details of people without the app up to date, and move them onto their own account once they start using it. How it works: The profile of a member without an account (opened at the side by pressing their row) has four buttons: Edit, Archive, Join link and Link to account. They only appear on the adult's own profile, not on their children's. There are two ways to link such a member to an account: send them a Join link; they log in and confirm it's them; pick their account yourself with Link to account. Either way their groups, kids, charges and history move onto the account, and the record without an account is retired. You need the Manage members permission. Notes: - A member without an account gets no notifications. - The name at the top of their profile doesn't link to a profile page, because there isn't one. #### Edit button id: members-staff.managed-members.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.edit type: button · label: "Edit" Opens the window for editing the member's and their children's details. What it does: Lets you fix the name, phone, date of birth, country and the children's details. How it works: Opens the Edit member window, pre-filled. Fields and limits are the same as when adding, but there's no Groups section, groups are changed under Assigned groups in the profile. ##### Edit member window id: members-staff.managed-members.edit.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.edit.modal type: modal · label: "Edit member" The form for changing the details of a member without an account. What it does: Saves the new details of the person and their children. How it works: Press Save changes. On success you see "Details updated." If you remove a child with the bin icon and save, the child is deleted and taken out of all their groups. A new child added here isn't in any group, enrol them afterwards from their profile. Notes: - Check carefully before removing a child, their group enrolments are lost. #### Archive button id: members-staff.managed-members.archive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.archive type: button · label: "Archive" Removes the member without an account from the school. What it does: Use it when the person no longer attends. How it works: Opens an Archive member confirmation: "… will be removed from the members list and their groups. Payment and attendance history is preserved. This can only be undone via support." After Archive you see "Member archived." and the profile closes. Cancel closes the confirmation. Notes: - An archived member can't be given a join link, and a link already sent stops working. #### Join link button in the profile id: members-staff.managed-members.join-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.join-link type: button · label: "Join link" Creates a personal link the person uses to connect their account to this record. What it does: Lets the person take over their own membership once they start using the app. How it works: Creates a new link and tries to copy it straight away ("Join link copied to clipboard."). If copying isn't allowed, you see "Join link generated." The link shows under the buttons with a Copy join link button. Each new link makes the previous one invalid, that's how you stop a link sent by mistake. The link works until the record is linked to an account or archived. ##### What the person opening the link sees id: members-staff.managed-members.join-link.invitee-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.join-link.invitee-page type: page · label: "This is me, join" The page where the person confirms the record is theirs. What it does: Shows the person the details the school holds for them before they connect them to their account. How it works: The person has to log in or sign up. They see "You were invited as" and their name, a warning that the school entered these details and they can correct them, their groups and the kids on the membership. After This is me, join they see "You're in!" and a Go to organisation button. If the link was replaced by a newer one, "This link doesn't work"; if the record is already linked to another account, "Already claimed"; if it was archived, "Membership archived". #### Link to account button id: members-staff.managed-members.link-account · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.link-account type: button · label: "Link to account" Opens the window where you pick the person's account yourself. What it does: For when the person already has an account and you know which one. How it works: Opens the Link member to an account window. ##### Link member to an account window id: members-staff.managed-members.link-account.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/managed-members#members-staff.managed-members.link-account.modal type: modal · label: "Link member to an account" Search for a registered account and permanently move the record onto it. What it does: Moves the groups, kids, charges and history of the member without an account onto the chosen account. How it works: Type at least 4 characters in Search accounts by name…; with fewer you see "Please enter N more character(s)". Results show name and phone. With no matches, "No matching accounts." The warning explains it can't be undone: memberships and history merge into the account, the record is retired, and the account's own profile details are kept. Press Link account. On success you see "Member linked to the account." and the profile closes. Notes: - You can't link to another member without an account, only to a registered account. - Accounts that are already employees of the school don't show up in the search. ### Member profile in the dashboard id: members-staff.member-details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details For: schools · In the app: /admin The side panel with one person's details, groups, kids, contract, notes, attendance and payments. What it does: Gives you everything important about one person in one place: how to reach them, which groups they're in, their kids, whether they've accepted the contract, how they attend sessions and what they owe. It lets you change their groups, write a note, and issue a charge or add a payment. How it works: It opens at the side when you press a row in the user list, or when you follow a link to a person from elsewhere in the dashboard (for example their name on a group page). The panel works in two modes: for an adult (parent or individual) and for a kid. From a parent you can go to each child and back. From top to bottom the panel holds: contact details, the contract, notes, assigned groups, kids, attendance and payments. Group changes aren't saved straight away, you mark them and press Save Changes. If you close the panel with unsaved changes, you're asked to confirm first. What you see depends on your permissions: without Manage members the groups are read-only, without View member contact details there's no phone or email, the notes section needs Author notes, seeing what someone owes and has paid needs View financials, and the charge button needs Manage charges. If your access is limited to certain groups, attendance and payments only include the sessions and charges of those groups. Steps: 1. Press a row in the user list. 2. Review or change the details in the panel. 3. Press Save Changes if you changed groups. Notes: - Close the panel with the X, the Esc key, or by clicking outside it. While the notes panel is open on top, Esc closes only that one. - If you remove a person from all their groups and save, they leave the school entirely. FAQ: Q: How do I remove a person from the school? A: Open their profile, press each group under "Assigned groups" to strike it through, and press "Save Changes". With no groups the person leaves the school. A person without an account can also be archived. Q: Is payment history deleted when someone is removed from a group? A: No. Paid charges aren't affected. Unpaid ones are only cancelled if you choose "Remove and cancel charges". #### Profile header id: members-staff.member-details.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.header type: section The person's picture, name and type. What it does: Shows whose profile it is and links to their full page. How it works: Below the name it reads Kid, Parent (an adult with children) or Individual. Pressing the name opens their profile page, except for a member without an account, who instead has the "No app account" icon by their name. The X button closes the panel. #### Back to parent and Back to child buttons id: members-staff.member-details.back-navigation · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.back-navigation type: link · label: "Back to parent" Take you between the parent's and the child's profile. What it does: Lets you move around one family without closing the panel. How it works: Back to parent appears when you opened a child from the Kids section. Back to child appears when you went from a child to their parent. Switching drops any unsaved group changes. #### Contact info section id: members-staff.member-details.contact-info · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.contact-info type: section · label: "Contact info" · permissions: Members.ViewContactDetails The account holder's phone, email and date of birth. What it does: Gives you a quick way to reach the person. How it works: Press the phone or email to copy it, it reads Copied! for 2 seconds. A missing value shows a dash. If the date of birth is known, it shows with their age. The section only appears with the View member contact details permission, and only on the adult's profile, phone and email belong to the parent, not the child. #### Personal details section id: members-staff.member-details.personal-info · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.personal-info type: section · label: "Personal details" A child's date of birth, age, school and additional information. What it does: Shows the key details of a child (or an adult's date of birth if you can't see their contact info). How it works: On a kid's profile it shows whatever has been filled in: Date of Birth with the age (or "Not provided" if only the age is known), Education Institution and Additional information. Date of birth and school are optional for kids, so they can be missing. Additional information is the text (up to 200 characters) the parent wrote about the child, for example allergies or who picks them up. You can only read it, it can't be changed from here. On an adult's profile the section only appears if you lack the contact permission, their date of birth is then shown here. With no details at all, the section is hidden. #### Contract section id: members-staff.member-details.contract · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.contract type: section · label: "Contract" Whether the member accepted the school's contract, and which version. What it does: Lets you check who hasn't accepted the current contract yet. How it works: Only on the adult's profile, and only if the school has uploaded a contract. It shows the date and time of acceptance and "Accepted version …", or "Not accepted" and "Current version …". The badge is: Up to date: the current version was accepted; Version … pending: an older version was accepted; Missing: never accepted. #### Parent card id: members-staff.member-details.parent · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.parent type: card · label: "Parent" The parent of the open child. What it does: Takes you to the parent's profile, where contact details and the contract are. How it works: Only on a kid's profile. Press the name to switch to the parent. #### Notes section id: members-staff.member-details.notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.notes type: section · label: "Notes" · permissions: Notes.Author The way into the team's notes about the person whose profile is open. What it does: Lets you read and add notes about the person without leaving their profile. How it works: It shows with the Author notes permission. The notes belong to whoever is on screen: the parent or, on a kid's profile, the kid. Press Member notes to open the notes panel. Under the button it says how many notes there already are ("1 note", "3 notes") or "No notes yet". How notes are written and shared is covered in the separate article on member notes. ##### Member notes button id: members-staff.member-details.notes.open · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.notes.open type: button · label: "Member notes" · permissions: Notes.Author Opens the notes panel for this person. What it does: Takes you to all the notes about the person and the box for a new one. How it works: The panel opens on top of the profile. While it's open, Esc closes only the panel, not the profile beneath it. On a kid's profile the notes are the kid's, not the parent's. #### Assigned groups section id: members-staff.member-details.assigned-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.assigned-groups type: section · label: "Assigned groups" · permissions: Members.Manage The person's groups, with the option to remove them. What it does: Lets you take the person out of a group. How it works: Press a group to mark it for removal, it gets struck through; press again to undo. Newly added groups can also be removed by pressing them. The hint reads "Groups marked with a strike-through will be removed upon saving." With no groups there's a dash. Without the Manage members permission the groups are read-only. On saving, the person is notified that they were added to or removed from a group. #### Add to group field id: members-staff.member-details.add-to-group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.add-to-group type: select · label: "Add to group" · permissions: Members.Manage Adds the person to another group. What it does: Enrols the member (or child) into one of the school's groups. How it works: Pick a group from Choose a group…; it appears under Assigned groups and is saved with Save Changes. Groups they're already in aren't listed. If the search finds nothing: "No matching groups". If the person was in that group before, their enrolment is restored. #### Kids section id: members-staff.member-details.kids · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.kids type: list · label: "Kids" All of the parent's children, including those not enrolled. What it does: Shows the family and takes you to each child's profile. How it works: Shown on the profile of an adult who has children. Each child shows their name, age and date of birth (when entered), school and groups (or "No groups assigned"). Press a child to open their profile, from there you can enrol them in a group. Unsaved changes to the parent's groups are dropped. #### Attendance section id: members-staff.member-details.attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.attendance type: section · label: "Attendance" How often the person comes and their latest sessions. What it does: Shows how the person attends sessions, so you can spot who is often absent. How it works: Every staff member can see it, no separate permission. It shows an attendance percentage over all marked sessions ("80% attendance") and how many times they attended and were absent, then Recent classes: up to 8 sessions with title, date, time and an Attended or Absent tag. A small icon shows what the person had answered beforehand: "Had said they would come" or "Had said they wouldn't come". It only includes the sessions of groups you have access to. With no attendance marked yet it says "No attendance marked yet." #### Payments section id: members-staff.member-details.payments-overview · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.payments-overview type: section · label: "Payments" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials What the person owes and has paid, plus the charge and payment buttons. What it does: Shows the money of the person on screen at a glance, without opening Finance. How it works: It sits at the bottom of the panel. With the View financials permission you see, read-only: a tag "Owes …" (with "overdue" if a charge is late) or "Nothing owed"; To pay: up to three unpaid charges with their due date, and "+ N more charges" for the rest; Recent payments: up to five completed payments with date and method. Marking a charge as paid is not done here, but on the charge itself in Finance. Under the overview are the Issue charge and Add payment buttons, and the All charges link opens the charges in Finance, already searched for the person's name. If your access is limited to certain groups, you only see the charges and payments of those groups. Notes: - If you don't see the section, you have neither the View financials permission nor Manage charges (with at least one group for the person). #### For field in payments id: members-staff.member-details.money-for · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.money-for type: select · label: "For" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Who a charge or payment is for: the parent or one of the kids. What it does: Decides who in the family owes the charge or made the payment. How it works: It only shows on the profile of an adult who has kids. It starts on the person whose profile you are viewing. On a kid's profile there is no such field, the buttons are always for that kid. #### Issue charge button id: members-staff.member-details.issue-charge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.issue-charge type: button · label: "Issue charge" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Opens the new-charge form for this person. What it does: Requests payment from the person: they see the charge under their charges and can pay it later. How it works: It shows in the Payments section with the Manage charges permission and when the person is in at least one group. It opens the same new-charge form as in Finance, already aimed at this person: it says "For: …" at the top and you don't pick other users. The fields are described in the article on the new charge. If the family has kids, you choose in the For field above the buttons whether the charge is for the parent or one of the kids; on a kid's profile it is locked to that kid. Notes: - For a payment you have already received, use Add payment, not a new charge. #### Add payment button id: members-staff.member-details.record-payment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.record-payment type: button · label: "Add payment" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges, Billing.RecordPayments Opens the form for recording a payment received in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: Logs a payment made in person or outside the platform. How it works: It shows in the Payments section when the person is in at least one group and you have both Manage charges and Record payments, because recording creates a paid charge. It opens the same form as for a new charge, but with "Already paid" switched on and aimed at this person. The fields are described in the article on adding a payment. If the family has kids, you choose in the For field who paid. #### All charges link id: members-staff.member-details.all-charges · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.all-charges type: link · label: "All charges" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Opens Finance with the charges searched for this person's name. What it does: Takes you to the person's full list of charges. How it works: It shows with the View financials permission. It opens the charges tab with the search already filled in with the name, showing all charges, not just unpaid ones. #### Cancel and Save Changes buttons id: members-staff.member-details.footer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.footer type: section · label: "Save Changes" Save or discard the group changes. What it does: Confirm the changes made in the panel. How it works: Save Changes is only active when there are changes. Cancel closes the panel (or, if you opened a child from the parent, takes you back to the parent). If your changes leave the person in no group at all, a warning appears above the buttons, "Saving with no groups assigned will remove this member from the organisation entirely.": and the button turns orange. ##### "Cancel pending charges too?" prompt id: members-staff.member-details.footer.cancel-charges-prompt · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.footer.cancel-charges-prompt type: modal · label: "Cancel pending charges too?" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Asks what happens to unpaid charges when you remove someone from a group. What it does: Lets you decide whether the person still owes for the group they're leaving. How it works: It appears on Save Changes if you're removing at least one group and have the Manage charges permission. Without that permission changes save straight away and charges stay. Remove and cancel charges: cancels every unpaid charge for those groups. Remove, keep charges: the charges stay owed. Back: returns to the panel without saving. Paid charges are not affected. ##### "Discard unsaved changes?" prompt id: members-staff.member-details.footer.discard-confirm · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-details#members-staff.member-details.footer.discard-confirm type: modal · label: "Discard unsaved changes?" Stops you losing changes by closing the panel. What it does: Prevents closing by accident with unsaved changes. How it works: Appears if you close the panel with the X, Esc or a click outside while there are unsaved changes. Keep editing takes you back; Discard changes closes the panel without saving. ### Join requests id: members-staff.join-requests · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests For: schools · In the app: /admin · permissions: Members.Manage How to approve or decline people who want to join a private group. What it does: Lets you decide who gets into the school's private groups. How it works: A request is created when someone asks to join a private group, or uses a Request link for a private group. Staff who can reach that group get a "new join request" notification, and the number of waiting requests shows next to Users in the menu. The Pending Join Requests section sits above the member list, only when there are requests waiting and you have the Manage members permission. An employee limited to their own groups only sees requests for those. Approve puts the person in the group straight away; Decline closes the request. Either way the person is notified. Steps: 1. Open Users from the menu. 2. Find the person under Pending Join Requests. 3. Press Approve or Decline under their name. Notes: - There's no confirmation, it happens straight away. - Once every request is handled, the section disappears. FAQ: Q: Why can't I see the requests section? A: Either there are no requests waiting, or you don't have the Manage members permission. #### Pending Join Requests table id: members-staff.join-requests.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests#members-staff.join-requests.section type: table · label: "Pending Join Requests" The list of waiting requests, 5 per page. What it does: Shows who's waiting for approval and for which group. How it works: The number of requests is next to the heading. Columns are Member, Groups and Request Date (the last only on wider screens). Pressing the name opens the person's profile page. Above the table there's only a sort dropdown. ##### Request for a child id: members-staff.join-requests.section.kid-request · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests#members-staff.join-requests.section.kid-request type: badge · label: "By" How a request a parent filed for a child looks. What it does: Shows that the child, not the parent, will join the group. How it works: The child's name is on top with a Kid label, and below it reads "By: " and the parent's name. A parent enrolling several children has a separate request for each. ##### Request sorting id: members-staff.join-requests.section.sort · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests#members-staff.join-requests.section.sort type: select · label: "By Parent Name" Orders the requests on the current page. What it does: Helps you find a request among those shown. How it works: It starts on By Parent Name: by the requester's first name. Sorting only affects the requests on the current page. ##### Approve button id: members-staff.join-requests.section.approve · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests#members-staff.join-requests.section.approve type: button · label: "Approve" Lets the person into the group. What it does: Enrols the person (or child) into the group they asked to join. How it works: Takes effect straight away, with no confirmation. While it runs, that request's buttons are disabled. The request disappears, the list returns to page one, the menu counter updates, and the person gets a "request approved" notification. ##### Decline button id: members-staff.join-requests.section.decline · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/join-requests#members-staff.join-requests.section.decline type: button · label: "Decline" Declines the request. What it does: Closes the request without the person joining the group. How it works: Takes effect straight away, with no confirmation. The request disappears, the menu counter updates, and the person gets a "request declined" notification. They can send a new request later. ### Member notes id: members-staff.member-notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Notes.Author How staff write notes about a student and when the parent sees them. What it does: Lets your team record observations about a student's progress, visible to staff only until you decide to share them with the member or parent. How it works: Notes open in two ways: from the Member notes icon next to a person on a session's list in Attendance (the icon is highlighted when the person already has notes), and from the Notes section of the person's profile in the dashboard, with the Member notes button. Either way the same panel opens. Every new note starts as Staff only. Share makes it visible to the member, they (or the parent, if the note is about a child) get a notification and see it on the school's Lessons tab under Shared notes. Sharing can't be undone. Writing, sharing and reading notes needs the Author notes permission. An employee limited to their own groups only works with notes about members of those groups. Steps: 1. Open a session in Attendance, or a person's profile in Users. 2. Press the Member notes icon or button for the person. 3. Write the note and press Add note. 4. If you want the member to see it, press Share on the note. Notes: - A half-written note isn't lost if you click outside the panel, it won't close while the box has text. - Members never see Staff only notes. FAQ: Q: Can the parent see my note? A: Only if you press Share. Until then it's visible to staff only. Q: Can I hide a shared note again? A: No. Sharing only goes one way. #### Member notes panel id: members-staff.member-notes.drawer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes#members-staff.member-notes.drawer type: drawer · label: "Member notes" The side panel with every note about one person. What it does: Shows the notes history and lets you add a new one. How it works: The person's name is under the heading. Notes are newest first. With none: "No notes yet". ##### Note id: members-staff.member-notes.drawer.note · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes#members-staff.member-notes.drawer.note type: card One note with its source, visibility, author and date. What it does: Shows what was written, by whom, and whether the member can see it. How it works: Labels show the source, Lesson (written from a session with a lesson) or Manual: and the visibility, Shared or Staff only. The author's name and date are below. ##### Share button id: members-staff.member-notes.drawer.share · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes#members-staff.member-notes.drawer.share type: button · label: "Share" Makes the note visible to the member. What it does: Shares the observation with the student or parent. How it works: Only on Staff only notes. It takes effect straight away, with no confirmation, and can't be undone. The member gets a notification that a note was shared with them, once per note. ##### New note box id: members-staff.member-notes.drawer.text · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes#members-staff.member-notes.drawer.text type: field · label: "Private by default, share it when you're ready." The text of the new note. What it does: Where you write your observation. How it works: 1 to 5000 characters. Below it reads "Starts as staff only". ##### Add note button id: members-staff.member-notes.drawer.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/member-notes#members-staff.member-notes.drawer.add type: button · label: "Add note" Saves the note. What it does: Adds the note to the person's history. How it works: Disabled while the box is empty. A note added from a session with a lesson gets the Lesson label. The box clears after saving. ### Employee list id: members-staff.employees-list · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list For: schools · In the app: /admin/employees The school's team, who can access the admin dashboard and which groups they manage. What it does: Shows the owner everyone on the team and is the way into each person's permissions and groups. How it works: It's on the Employees tab of the Users page and only the owner can open it. The owner is on the list too. New employees are only added with an Invite Link: the person accepts the role themselves by opening the link. Press a row to open the employee's profile, where you change their permissions, groups and reach. Search, sort and page are kept in the page address. Steps: 1. Open Users from the menu. 2. Choose the Employees tab. 3. Press a row to open an employee, or Invite Link to invite someone new. Notes: - The app has no button for removing an employee from the team. - If nothing matches your search: "No employees found matching your search." #### Invite Link button id: members-staff.employees-list.invite-link-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list#members-staff.employees-list.invite-link-button type: button · label: "Invite Link" Opens the window for inviting an employee. What it does: The only way to add someone to the team. How it works: Opens the Staff Invite Link window. See the separate article on staff invites. #### Sort id: members-staff.employees-list.sort · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list#members-staff.employees-list.sort type: select · label: "By Name" Orders employees by name. What it does: Helps you find someone in a long list. How it works: The only option is By Name. #### Rows per page id: members-staff.employees-list.page-size · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list#members-staff.employees-list.page-size type: select · label: "Show" How many employees are shown per page. What it does: Lets you see more people at once. How it works: Choose 10, 25 or 50 per page; the default is 10. #### Search id: members-staff.employees-list.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list#members-staff.employees-list.search type: search · label: "Search members..." Searches employees by name, phone or group. What it does: Finds a specific team member quickly. How it works: Results update shortly after you stop typing. It matches the name, phone and the names of groups the employee manages. #### Employee table id: members-staff.employees-list.table · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employees-list#members-staff.employees-list.table type: table The team's rows. What it does: Shows each employee's name, contact and groups. How it works: Columns are Member (name and Copy ID), Contact (phone) and Groups (the groups they administer; press one to open it). Pressing a row opens the employee's profile at the side. If the list fails to load, an error message shows. ### Staff invite link id: members-staff.staff-invite-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link For: schools · In the app: /admin/employees How the owner invites a new team member and chooses their permissions and groups up front. What it does: Lets you add an employee by sending them a link. Permissions, groups and access reach are chosen when you create the link, and the person sees and accepts them before joining. How it works: Open it with Invite Link on the Employees tab. Only the owner can create and revoke these links. You choose What they can do, Groups they administer, Access to groups, and optionally the number of uses and how long it's valid, then press Generate Link. A link's settings can't be changed after it's created. You can change the employee's permissions any time from their profile, though. If someone who is already an employee opens the link, their permissions and groups stay as they are, but a use is still counted. Steps: 1. On the Employees tab, press Invite Link. 2. Under What they can do, choose the permissions. 3. Under Groups they administer, tick their groups. 4. Under Access to groups, choose All groups or Only their groups. 5. Optionally open Settings for the number of uses and validity. 6. Press Generate Link and send the link. Notes: - By default the link is single use with no expiry, right for one person. - When the window opens every permission is switched on. Switch off the ones the employee shouldn't have. FAQ: Q: Can I change the permissions on a link I already sent? A: No. Revoke it and create a new one. Once the person has joined, you can change their permissions from their profile. Q: Can an employee invite another employee? A: No. Only the owner creates staff invite links. #### Staff Invite Link window id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal type: modal · label: "Staff Invite Link" The form for a new link and the list of existing links. What it does: Keeps creating, copying and revoking team invites in one place. How it works: Closing it resets the form, and every permission is switched on again next time you open it. ##### What they can do section id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.permissions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.permissions type: section · label: "What they can do" The permissions the new employee starts with. What it does: Decides what the person will be able to do in the school. How it works: Three areas: Classes & members, Payments and Organisation settings, each with a switch and Customise for single permissions. See the permissions article. Switch everything off and the employee starts with no permissions. ##### Groups they administer section id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.groups type: list · label: "Groups they administer" The groups the employee is assigned to when they join. What it does: Decides which groups the new employee will manage. How it works: A checklist of all the school's groups. Optional. While groups load: "Loading groups…"; with no groups: "This organisation has no groups yet." If a group is deleted in the meantime, the employee still joins, just without it. Notes: - If you pick Only their groups under Access to groups and tick no group, the employee won't see anything until you assign them to one. ##### Access to groups switch id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.reach · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.reach type: toggle · label: "Access to groups" Whether the permissions apply to all groups or only the employee's own. What it does: Limits the employee to their own groups when needed. How it works: All groups (default) or Only their groups. With Only their groups the See the whole calendar switch also appears. See the article on group access. ##### Settings section id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.settings type: section · label: "Settings" The link's number of uses and validity. What it does: Limits how many people can use the link and until when. How it works: Number of uses: Single use (default), 5 uses, 10 uses, Unlimited or Custom (a whole number, at least 1). Valid for: No expiry (default), 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days or Custom date (today or later; valid to the end of that day). An invalid value keeps the section open and the button disabled. ##### Generate Link button id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.generate · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.generate type: button · label: "Generate Link" Creates the invite link. What it does: Creates a new active link with the chosen permissions and groups. How it works: On success it shows Your link is ready! with chips: Staff, a permissions summary (Full access, No permissions or the areas granted), the number of uses and validity. Then Copy, Share (on devices that support sharing), a hint about uses, and Generate another link. ##### Links for this organisation list id: members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.existing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/staff-invite-link#members-staff.staff-invite-link.modal.existing type: list · label: "Links for this organisation" Every staff invite created. What it does: Lets you see which invites still work and stop one. How it works: It's collapsed, with the number of links by the heading. Each row shows a state (Active, Used, Expired, Revoked), creation date, validity, uses and the number of permissions ("5 permissions" or "No permissions"). Active links have a copy button and Revoke: which stops the link straight away, with no confirmation. With no links: "No staff links generated yet." ### Joining the team through an invite id: members-staff.joining-as-staff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/joining-as-staff For: schools · In the app: /staff-join/:token What the person who receives a staff invite link sees and does. What it does: Lets the invitee see which school they're joining and what permissions they'll get, and accept with one button. How it works: The person opens the link and logs in (or signs up). They see "You have been invited to join the team of", the school's name and description, As a staff member (employee), and a note that joining gives them access to the admin dashboard. If the link carries permissions, they're listed under "You will be granted:". After Join the team the person becomes an employee with the link's permissions, groups and reach, and gets a "you're on the team" notification. Go to Admin Dashboard takes them there. Steps: 1. Open the link you received. 2. Log in or sign up. 3. Review the school and the permissions. 4. Press Join the team. 5. Press Go to Admin Dashboard. Notes: - A single-use link shows a warning that it works only once; a limited link shows how many uses are left. - If you're already an employee you see "You are already on the team": nothing changes, but the link still counts as used. FAQ: Q: The link says it doesn't work. What do I do? A: Ask the school's owner for a new link. It may be mistyped, expired, used up or revoked. #### "You will be granted:" list id: members-staff.joining-as-staff.permissions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/joining-as-staff#members-staff.joining-as-staff.permissions type: list · label: "You will be granted:" The permissions the invite carries. What it does: Shows the invitee what they're accepting before they join. How it works: Each permission is a chip with its name, e.g. Manage groups. If the link has no permissions, the list isn't shown. #### Join the team button id: members-staff.joining-as-staff.join · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/joining-as-staff#members-staff.joining-as-staff.join type: button · label: "Join the team" Accepts the invite. What it does: Makes you an employee of the school. How it works: Counts one use of the link. On success you see "You're on the team!" and "You are now an employee of …". #### "This invite link doesn't work" message id: members-staff.joining-as-staff.invalid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/joining-as-staff#members-staff.joining-as-staff.invalid type: status · label: "This invite link doesn't work" Shown when the link is wrong or doesn't exist. What it does: Tells you the link can't be used. How it works: It reads "The link may be mistyped or no longer exists. Ask the organisation owner for a new one." The Browse Classes button opens the school search. #### "This invite link is no longer usable" message id: members-staff.joining-as-staff.inactive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/joining-as-staff#members-staff.joining-as-staff.inactive type: status · label: "This invite link is no longer usable" Shown when the link is used up, expired or revoked. What it does: Explains why the link stopped working. How it works: The reason is one of: "This link has already been used. …", "This link has expired. …" or "This link was revoked by the organisation owner." There's no join button. ### Employee profile: permissions, groups and access id: members-staff.employee-details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details For: schools · In the app: /admin/employees How the owner changes what an employee can do, which groups they manage and how far their access reaches. What it does: Keeps all of one team member's settings in one place so you can change them any time. How it works: It opens at the side when you press a row in the Employees list. Below the name it reads Employee. At the top is Contact info (phone and email, with copying). Then come three sections: What they can do, Groups they administer and Access to groups. Changes aren't saved straight away, press Save Changes. On success you see "Group assignments saved successfully.", on failure "Failed to save group assignments. Please try again." The employee is notified when their permissions or access change, and when they're assigned to a group. Steps: 1. On the Employees tab, press the employee's row. 2. Change their permissions, groups or access. 3. Press Save Changes. Notes: - The owner's permissions can't be changed, instead of switches it reads Owner, full access, and there's no Access to groups section. - If you close the panel with unsaved changes, you're asked to confirm first. #### What they can do section id: members-staff.employee-details.what-they-can-do · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details#members-staff.employee-details.what-they-can-do type: section · label: "What they can do" The employee's permissions, by area. What it does: Lets you grant or remove permissions. How it works: The same switches as on the invite: three areas with Customise for single permissions. Saving replaces the whole set of permissions at once. ##### "Owner, full access" card id: members-staff.employee-details.what-they-can-do.owner-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details#members-staff.employee-details.what-they-can-do.owner-card type: card · label: "Owner, full access" Shown instead of switches on the owner's profile. What it does: Reminds you the owner can't be restricted. How it works: It reads "Owners always hold every permission and can't be restricted." #### Groups they administer section id: members-staff.employee-details.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details#members-staff.employee-details.groups type: section · label: "Groups they administer" The groups the employee manages. What it does: Lets you assign the employee to a group or take them off it. How it works: Groups are chips. Press a group to mark it for removal (it's struck through); the hint reads "Click a group badge to mark it for removal." Below, pick a group from Choose a group… to add it. Changes save with Save Changes. With no groups it reads "No groups assigned", and with Only their groups access, "No groups assigned yet, they won't see anything until you add one below." Notes: - If you remove a group's last administrator, the owner automatically becomes its administrator. #### Access to groups section id: members-staff.employee-details.access · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details#members-staff.employee-details.access type: section · label: "Access to groups" Whether the employee's permissions apply to all groups or only their own. What it does: Lets you limit the employee to the groups they manage. How it works: Choose All groups or Only their groups. With Only their groups, See the whole calendar also shows. Not shown on the owner's profile. See the article on group access. #### Save Changes button id: members-staff.employee-details.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/employee-details#members-staff.employee-details.save type: button · label: "Save Changes" Saves changes to permissions, groups and access. What it does: Applies the employee's new settings. How it works: Only active when there are changes. Cancel closes the panel without saving. The employee gets a notification that their permissions or access changed, and for a new group a "you're on the team" notification with its name. ### Employee permissions id: members-staff.permissions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions For: schools · In the app: /admin/employees What each permission allows, how permissions are grouped into three areas, and how to switch them on. What it does: Lets the owner give each employee exactly the access they need, for example a coach who takes attendance but can't see the finances. How it works: Permissions are chosen when creating an invite link and changed on the employee's profile under What they can do. Only the owner can change them; the owner always has every permission. Permissions fall into three areas: Classes & members, Payments and Organisation settings. Each area has: a switch that grants or removes everything in it at once; a status line, Full access, No access or "3 of 9"; Customise / Hide, which shows the single permissions, each with its own switch. Permissions work together with Access to groups: an employee limited to their own groups can only use their permissions there. Steps: 1. Open the employee's profile or the invite window. 2. Switch a whole area on or off with its switch. 3. For partial access, press Customise and flip single permissions. 4. Press Save Changes (or Generate Link for an invite). Notes: - An employee with no permissions still sees the member list, without contact details and without being able to change anything. - Team management (invites, permissions, assigning to groups) can't be granted, it's owner only. - While permissions load it reads "Loading permissions…". FAQ: Q: I only want a coach to take attendance. What do I switch on? A: Under Classes & members press Customise and keep only Manage attendance. Switch off Payments and Organisation settings. Q: Why can't I switch on Manage subscription? A: It's marked Coming soon and can't be granted yet. #### Area switch id: members-staff.permissions.area-switch · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.area-switch type: toggle Grants or removes every permission in one area at once. What it does: The quickest way to give full access to, or cut off, a whole area. How it works: It's on as soon as at least one permission in the area is granted. Switching on grants everything in the area; switching off removes everything, even if only some were granted. Coming soon permissions aren't affected. #### Area status id: members-staff.permissions.area-status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.area-status type: status How many of the area's permissions are granted. What it does: Shows at a glance whether access is full, partial or none. How it works: Full access, No access, or "N of M" for partial access (highlighted). Coming soon permissions aren't counted. #### Customise button id: members-staff.permissions.customise · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.customise type: button · label: "Customise" Expands the single permissions in the area. What it does: Allows partial access, just some of the area's permissions. How it works: Shows each permission with a switch. While expanded the button reads Hide. #### Coming soon label id: members-staff.permissions.coming-soon · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.coming-soon type: badge · label: "Coming soon" Marks a permission that can't be granted yet. What it does: Shows what's on the way without letting you switch it on. How it works: The switch is off and disabled, and the permission isn't counted in the area status. #### Classes & members area id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members type: section · label: "Classes & members" Groups, members, events, attendance, lessons, notes and announcements. What it does: Everything to do with the day-to-day running of groups and the people in them. How it works: It holds nine grantable permissions, plus Manage subscription (Coming soon). ##### Manage groups permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.groups-manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.groups-manage type: toggle · label: "Manage groups" · permissions: Groups.Manage Create, edit and delete groups and categories. What it does: Lets the employee look after the school's groups. How it works: With it the employee can create, edit and delete groups, and create, rename, reorder and delete group categories. Without it they can't change groups. It also opens Groups in the admin dashboard, where the Categories button is. ##### Manage members permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.members-manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.members-manage type: toggle · label: "Manage members" · permissions: Members.Manage Add and remove members, handle join requests and join links. What it does: Lets the employee decide who is in the groups. How it works: With it the employee can: add and remove members from groups; see, approve and decline join requests; create, view and revoke join links; add, edit and archive members without an account, create their join link and link them to an account. Without it the member list is read-only. ##### View member contact details permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.members-view-contact-details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.members-view-contact-details type: toggle · label: "View member contact details" · permissions: Members.ViewContactDetails See members' phone numbers and email addresses. What it does: Lets the employee get in touch with members and parents. How it works: With it the employee sees the Contact column in the member list, phone and email in the profile, and contact details in group member lists. Without it phone numbers aren't even sent to their device. ##### Manage events and their sessions permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.events-manage · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.events-manage type: toggle · label: "Manage events and their sessions" · permissions: Events.Manage Add, edit, cancel and remove events and sessions; rooms. What it does: Lets the employee maintain the schedule. How it works: With it the employee can add, edit and remove events; cancel, reinstate, change and remove single sessions; send session reminders; choose which groups an event is for; and create, rename and delete rooms and the school's event colours. It also opens the Calendar in the admin dashboard and the Rooms and Event colours sections of the school settings. ##### Manage attendance permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.attendance-record · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.attendance-record type: toggle · label: "Manage attendance" · permissions: Attendance.Record Mark, close and reopen attendance. What it does: Lets the employee take attendance for sessions. How it works: With it the employee can mark attendance one by one or in bulk, close and reopen a session's attendance, and change sign-ups for a session. ##### View lessons permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.lessons-view · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.lessons-view type: toggle · label: "View lessons" · permissions: Lessons.View Read lesson content. What it does: Lets the employee see what was taught. How it works: With it the employee sees lesson content and the lesson archive. They can't edit lessons. ##### Author lessons permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.lessons-author · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.lessons-author type: toggle · label: "Author lessons" · permissions: Lessons.Author Write and publish lessons. What it does: Lets the employee prepare lesson content. How it works: With it the employee can edit a lesson's content, add and remove attachments, and publish the lesson. ##### Author notes permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.notes-author · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.notes-author type: toggle · label: "Author notes" · permissions: Notes.Author Write, read and share member notes. What it does: Lets the employee keep notes on students' progress. How it works: With it the employee can read and write notes about members and sessions and share them with the member. Without it they can't even read the team's notes. ##### Publish announcements permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.announcements-publish · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.announcements-publish type: toggle · label: "Publish announcements" · permissions: Announcements.Publish Publish and pin announcements, moderate comments. What it does: Lets the employee keep members informed. How it works: With it the employee can publish announcements, choose which groups they're for, pin and unpin them, and delete comments on them. ##### Manage subscription permission id: members-staff.permissions.classes-members.organization-manage-subscription · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.classes-members.organization-manage-subscription type: toggle · label: "Manage subscription" · permissions: Organization.ManageSubscription Subscribe and unsubscribe the school. Coming soon. What it does: Will let an employee manage the school's subscription. How it works: It shows with a Coming soon label, the switch is disabled and the permission can't be granted from the employee's profile for now. #### Payments area id: members-staff.permissions.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments type: section · label: "Payments" Financials, charges, payments, reminders and payment plans. What it does: Everything to do with the school's money. How it works: It holds five permissions. ##### View financials permission id: members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-view-financials · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-view-financials type: toggle · label: "View financials" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials See charges, payments and financial reports. What it does: Lets the employee keep an eye on the school's finances. How it works: With it the employee can open Finance and see charges, payments, weekly, monthly and yearly statistics, who owes, the payment method breakdown, attendance packs and plan members. Without it the Finance entry is hidden and its address sends them back to Users. ##### Manage charges permission id: members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-manage-charges · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-manage-charges type: toggle · label: "Manage charges" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Issue, edit, cancel, waive and delete charges. What it does: Lets the employee request payment from members. How it works: With it the employee can issue charges (including from a member's profile), edit, cancel, waive and delete them, generate plan and recurring charges, and cancel unpaid charges when removing a member from a group. ##### Record payments permission id: members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-record-payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-record-payments type: toggle · label: "Record payments" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Record cash and bank transfer payments, and reverse payments. What it does: Lets the employee log money received outside the platform. How it works: With it the employee can record cash, bank transfer and other manual payments and reverse payments. Record Payment on a member's profile also needs Manage charges. ##### Send payment reminders permission id: members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-send-reminders · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-send-reminders type: toggle · label: "Send payment reminders" · permissions: Billing.SendReminders Remind members about unpaid charges. What it does: Lets the employee nudge people who owe money. How it works: With it the employee can send charge reminders. ##### Manage payment plans permission id: members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-manage-plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.payments.billing-manage-plans type: toggle · label: "Manage payment plans" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Create and maintain payment plans and their members. What it does: Lets the employee set up recurring fees. How it works: With it the employee can create, edit, activate, archive and delete payment plans; add and remove members; set individual prices and period due dates; and see a member's plans and attendance packs. #### Organisation settings area id: members-staff.permissions.organisation-settings · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.organisation-settings type: section · label: "Organisation settings" Changing the school's profile. What it does: Affects how the school looks to everyone. How it works: It holds one permission. ##### Edit organisation profile permission id: members-staff.permissions.organisation-settings.organization-edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.organisation-settings.organization-edit type: toggle · label: "Edit organisation profile" · permissions: Organization.Edit Change the school's details. What it does: Lets the employee keep the school's profile up to date. How it works: With it the employee can edit the school's profile in the Profile section of the school settings. #### See the whole calendar permission id: members-staff.permissions.see-whole-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/permissions#members-staff.permissions.see-whole-calendar type: toggle · label: "See the whole calendar" · permissions: Visibility.PlannerOrganizationWide Lets an employee limited to their own groups see every event on the calendar. What it does: Handy when a coach needs to see the whole schedule but only manage their own groups. How it works: It isn't in the three areas, it shows under Access to groups, only when Only their groups is selected. The icon next to it explains: "Widens what this employee can see beyond their groups, one area at a time. Editing still follows their groups." With it the employee sees every event and its sign-ups; changes are still limited to their own groups. ### Access to groups: limiting an employee to their own groups id: members-staff.group-reach · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/group-reach For: schools · In the app: /admin/employees How to make an employee see and manage only the groups they're assigned to. What it does: Lets you give a coach or teacher permissions for their own groups only, they don't see the members, charges or sessions of other groups. How it works: Every employee has two settings that work together: What they can do (permissions) and Access to groups (where they apply). All groups: permissions apply across the whole school. This is the default for a new employee. Only their groups: permissions apply only to the groups under Groups they administer. With Only their groups the employee only sees the members, requests, charges, payments, attendance, notes and events of their own groups in the dashboard, and can only change those. They only get new join request notifications for their own groups. The owner always reaches every group. Only the owner can change access; the employee gets a notification that their access changed. Steps: 1. Open the employee's profile under Employees. 2. Under Access to groups, choose Only their groups. 3. Add their groups under Groups they administer. 4. Optionally switch on See the whole calendar. 5. Press Save Changes. Notes: - An employee on Only their groups with no groups sees nothing. Their dashboard shows "No groups assigned to you yet". - If you remove a group's last administrator, the owner automatically becomes its administrator. FAQ: Q: My employee can't see a single member. Why? A: Their access is probably "Only their groups" and they aren't assigned to a group. Add one under "Groups they administer" or switch to "All groups". Q: Can an employee see the whole schedule but only manage their own groups? A: Yes. With "Only their groups", switch on "See the whole calendar". #### Access to groups switch id: members-staff.group-reach.choice · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/group-reach#members-staff.group-reach.choice type: toggle · label: "Access to groups" The choice between All groups and Only their groups. What it does: Decides how far the employee's permissions reach. How it works: It's in the invite window and on the employee's profile (not on the owner's). On the profile the change is saved with Save Changes; on an invite it applies to everyone who joins with the link. ##### All groups option id: members-staff.group-reach.choice.all-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/group-reach#members-staff.group-reach.choice.all-groups type: button · label: "All groups" Permissions apply to the whole school. What it does: For employees who help across the school. How it works: The default. The groups under Groups they administer still show, but don't limit what the employee sees. ##### Only their groups option id: members-staff.group-reach.choice.only-their-groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/group-reach#members-staff.group-reach.choice.only-their-groups type: button · label: "Only their groups" Permissions apply only to the employee's groups. What it does: For coaches and teachers who run specific groups. How it works: The employee only sees and changes data for the groups they're assigned to. The See the whole calendar switch appears. #### See the whole calendar switch id: members-staff.group-reach.visibility · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/group-reach#members-staff.group-reach.visibility type: toggle · label: "See the whole calendar" · permissions: Visibility.PlannerOrganizationWide Widens calendar visibility to all groups. What it does: Lets an employee on Only their groups see the whole schedule. How it works: Only shown with Only their groups. Hover over the About reach icon to see the explanation. Seeing doesn't allow editing, changes stay limited to the employee's groups. ### The staff help desk id: members-staff.help-desk · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk For: schools · In the app: /admin/help Where owners and employees write to the Classes team: a problem, a suggestion or a question, with replies inside the ticket. What it does: Gives you a direct line to the Classes team. When something isn't working, you have an idea for making the app better or you just don't know how to do something, you open a ticket and follow the answer in one place. How it works: It opens from Help desk in the Admin Actions section of the side menu. The school's owner and every employee can see it, no separate permission is needed. Tickets belong to the school, not to one person: everyone on the team sees them and can write in them. At the top there is the Ask Classy first banner. Classy is the Classes AI assistant and answers instantly from the help center. If it can't find the answer, come back here and press New ticket. The list shows tickets with the latest activity first. Each one has a kind (Problem, Suggestion or Question), a status (Pending, In progress or Resolved) and, when there are new replies, a count of unread ones. The status filter is All, Active or Resolved. When the team replies or marks a ticket as resolved, you get a notification, and a number shows next to Help desk in the menu with the replies you haven't opened yet. Steps: 1. Open the side menu and, in Admin Actions, press Help desk. 2. If you're not sure, press Ask Classy first. 3. Press New ticket, choose a kind, write a title and a description and press Send ticket. 4. Follow the replies: open the ticket from the list and write in it. Notes: - If you don't see Help desk in the menu, you haven't picked a school you manage. Pick one in the organisation picker at the top. - There is a daily limit on new tickets. If you reach it, you see a message to try again tomorrow. - Notifications for replies and resolved tickets can be switched on and off in your profile's notification settings, as "Classes Team Replies" and "Resolved Help Desk Tickets". FAQ: Q: How do I contact the Classes team? A: Open "Help desk" in the "Admin Actions" section of the menu and press "New ticket". The team answers inside the ticket and you get a notification. Q: Who can write in the help desk? A: The school's owner and every employee. No special permission is needed, but you must have picked a school you manage. Q: What is Classy? A: The Classes AI assistant. It knows how every button and setting works and answers questions from the help center. You reach it from the banner at the top of "Help desk". #### Ask Classy first banner id: members-staff.help-desk.ask-classy · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.ask-classy type: card · label: "Ask Classy first" The banner at the top of the help desk that sends you to the Classy AI assistant. What it does: Saves you the wait: most "how do I…" questions already have an answer in the help center, and Classy replies in seconds. How it works: The Ask Classy button opens the classes.bg help center in a new tab, in the app's language. Classy answers with links to the articles. If it can't find the answer, come back to Help desk and open a ticket for the team. #### New ticket button id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket type: button · label: "New ticket" Opens the form for a new ticket to the Classes team. What it does: This is how you send the team a problem, a suggestion or a question. How it works: On a phone the button is the "+" at the top of the screen. The form has the kind of ticket, a title, a description and optionally images. After you send it the ticket opens and you see the automatic acknowledgement from Classes. When the team replies, you get a notification. ##### What would you like to share? choice id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.kind · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.kind type: select · label: "What would you like to share?" The kind of ticket: problem, suggestion or question. What it does: Tells the team what the ticket is about and how to route it. How it works: Three cards: Problem (something is not working), Suggestion (an idea for a new feature) and Question (you want to ask something). Problem is selected by default. The examples in the title and description fields change with the kind. ##### Title field id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.title · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.title type: field · label: "Title" A short title for the ticket. Required. What it does: You and the team recognise the ticket in the list by it. How it works: Between 3 and 200 characters. If it is shorter, you see "The title must be at least 3 characters." ##### Description field id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.description type: field · label: "Description" A detailed description of the problem, idea or question. Required. What it does: Gives the team enough context to answer you the first time. How it works: Between 5 and 5000 characters. For a problem, describe what happened, what you expected and how we can reproduce it; device and browser help too. For a suggestion, describe what you would like Classes to do. For a question, add as much context as you can. ##### Images on the ticket id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.images · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.images type: field · label: "Screenshots (optional)" Screenshots that show the problem. Optional. What it does: A screenshot often explains more than a paragraph of text. How it works: Drop images into the field or press it to choose them. Up to 6 images, 15 MB each. Only images are accepted. They are shrunk before sending so they upload faster. If you go over the limit, some files are skipped with a message. ##### Send ticket button id: members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.new-ticket.submit type: button · label: "Send ticket" Sends the ticket to the team. What it does: Creates the ticket and opens it so you can follow the answer. How it works: It shows "Sending..." while it works. On success you see "Your ticket was sent. We will let you know when the team replies." You cannot send a ticket with an empty or too-short title or description. #### Status filter id: members-staff.help-desk.filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.filter type: filter · label: "Filter by status" Shows all tickets, only active ones or only resolved ones. What it does: Helps you find a ticket that is still waiting, or look back at finished ones. How it works: Three choices: All, Active (pending and in progress) and Resolved. Next to the filter it says how many tickets are shown. If no ticket has the chosen status, it says "No tickets with this status". #### Ticket statuses id: members-staff.help-desk.statuses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.statuses type: status · label: "Pending" The tags that show how far a ticket has got. What it does: Show at a glance whether the team is already working on the ticket. How it works: Pending: the team has not picked it up yet. In progress: the team is working on it. Resolved: the team has closed it. If you write in a resolved ticket, it reopens. Extra tags: Awaiting your reply (the team asked you for more information) and "N new replies" for replies you have not opened yet. Opening the ticket marks the replies as read. #### The ticket page id: members-staff.help-desk.ticket · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.ticket type: page The whole conversation with the Classes team on one ticket, and the reply box. What it does: This is where you read the team's replies and write back, like a chat. How it works: Press a ticket in the list. At the top are the kind, the status and the title, and below them the conversation: your messages are on the right, the team's on the left and the automatic ones from Classes in the middle. The first message is the description you started with. A team reply that asks for more information has a "needs more information" tag, and a "The Classes team is waiting for your reply" banner shows at the top. The Reply box takes up to 5000 characters and images (the same rules as for a new ticket), and Send is active when there is text or an image. If the ticket is resolved, it says "This ticket is resolved. Replying will reopen it." The All tickets link takes you back to the list. Notes: - Images in the conversation are shown through temporary links. If one doesn't load, the page refreshes them by itself. - If the ticket doesn't load, it says it may have been removed or you may not have access to it. Another school's tickets are never shown. ##### Reply box id: members-staff.help-desk.ticket.reply · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.ticket.reply type: field · label: "Reply" The box where you write to the team inside the ticket. What it does: This is how you answer a question from the team or add more information. How it works: A counter shows how many of the 5000 characters you have used. The Send button shows "Preparing images..." or "Sending..." while it works. On success you see "Your reply was sent." If sending fails, what you wrote stays in the box. #### Help desk notifications id: members-staff.help-desk.notifications · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/members-staff/help-desk#members-staff.help-desk.notifications type: notification How you find out the team has replied or resolved the ticket. What it does: You don't have to check the list: you get a notification as soon as there is a reply. How it works: When the Classes team replies in a ticket or marks it as resolved, everyone on the school's team (the owner and the employees) gets a notification. It shows in the bell in the menu and, depending on each person's settings, as a push notification or an email. Pressing it opens the ticket. The number next to Help desk in the menu shows the unread replies. The notification types, "Classes Team Replies" and "Resolved Help Desk Tickets", can be switched on and off in the notification settings of the profile. ## Income & billing id: income · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income For: schools Charges, payment plans, attendance packs, manual payments, history and invoices. ### The Finance page id: income.overview · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Where your school tracks what it is owed, what it has collected and the plans it bills members on. What it does: Brings all of your school's money into one place: the charges members owe, the payments that have come in, and the plans charges are generated from. You work in the Charges, Plans and History tabs, and the Charges tab starts with four quick figures. How it works: Open it from Finance in the side menu, in the school admin section. On a phone it usually has its own tab at the bottom of the screen. Only the owner and staff with the View financials permission can see the page, without it, the app sends you back to the school dashboard. Each action needs its own permission: Manage charges (new charges, editing, waiving, cancelling, deleting, generating charges), Record payments (cash and bank payments and undoing them), Send payment reminders and Manage payment plans. Buttons you have no permission for are simply not shown. The main buttons of a tab sit in the page header, on the right of the tabs: Add payment and New charge on Charges. On a phone they become round icon buttons in the bar at the top of the screen. If your access is limited to certain groups, every total, list and chart only covers the charges and payments of those groups and of the members in them. The selected tab is kept in the page address, so a refresh or the back button leaves you where you were. Steps: 1. Open Finance from the side menu. 2. Choose the Charges, Plans or History tab. 3. On Charges, check the four figures at the top. Notes: - If you can't see the page, or it sends you back to the dashboard, ask the school owner for the View financials permission. - All amounts on the page are shown in euro (€). FAQ: Q: Why does my colleague see smaller totals than I do? A: When a staff member's access is limited to certain groups, they only see the charges and payments of those groups and of the members in them, so their figures differ. #### Figures at the top of Charges id: income.overview.kpis · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.kpis type: section Four cards with the key numbers about your school's money. What it does: Show at a glance how much you are owed, how much of it is overdue, how much you collected this month and how many plans are active. How it works: They sit under the tabs and only on the Charges tab; Plans and History don't repeat them. Every card is also a button: Outstanding and Overdue keep you on Charges and apply the Owed or Overdue filter, Collected this period opens History, and Active plans opens Plans. On a computer each card ends with a View link; on a phone the cards sit two by two and show a small arrow instead. While the numbers load, the cards show a grey placeholder instead of 0. ##### Outstanding card id: income.overview.kpis.outstanding · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.kpis.outstanding type: card · label: "Outstanding" The total of every unpaid charge right now. What it does: Shows how much members owe your school as of today. How it works: Adds up every charge with the Pending status, both those not yet due and those overdue. It is not limited to a month or period. The line below the amount says how many charges that is, such as "12 charges". Paid, waived and cancelled charges are not included. Press the card to see these charges: it applies the Owed filter on Charges. ##### Overdue card id: income.overview.kpis.overdue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.kpis.overdue type: card · label: "Overdue" The part of what you are owed whose due date has already passed. What it does: Separates out the money that should already have been paid, the charges you most likely need to chase. How it works: Adds up the unpaid charges whose due date is before today and shows how many there are underneath. The card is red because this is the real problem; Outstanding is amber because it also holds money that isn't due yet. Press the card to see these charges: it applies the Overdue filter on Charges. ##### Collected this period card id: income.overview.kpis.collected · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.kpis.collected type: card · label: "Collected this period" Every successful payment since the start of the current month. What it does: Shows how much money has actually come into the school this month. How it works: Adds up every completed payment dated from the first of the current calendar month until now, online, cash and bank transfer. The line below reads "Since the start of" and the month name. A payment you record by hand counts towards the month of the payment date you entered. An undone or deleted payment drops out of the total. ##### Active plans card id: income.overview.kpis.active-plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.kpis.active-plans type: card · label: "Active plans" How many payment plans are billing members right now. What it does: Shows how many plans are currently running compared with all the plans you have. How it works: The large number counts plans that are enabled and not archived. The line below shows the total number of plans, including disabled and archived ones, such as "7 plans in total". #### Page tabs id: income.overview.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.tabs type: section The switch between Charges, Plans and History. What it does: Splits money work into three parts: individual charges, billing plans and reports. How it works: The Charges tab opens by default. They are underlined text tabs under the top of the page, and on a narrow screen they share the width evenly. ##### Charges tab id: income.overview.tabs.charges · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.tabs.charges type: tab · label: "Charges" The list of every charge in your school. What it does: Where you create charges, record payments, send reminders and correct individual charges. How it works: Shows the four figures, a table of all charges with filters and search, and, in the page header, the Add payment and New charge buttons. See the Charges tab article for details. ##### Plans tab id: income.overview.tabs.plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.tabs.plans type: tab · label: "Plans" The payment plans charges are generated from. What it does: Where you create and manage one-off, recurring and pack plans and their discounts. How it works: Shows your plans as cards or rows, organised in categories, the archived plans and the Discounts section. ##### History tab id: income.overview.tabs.history · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/overview#income.overview.tabs.history type: tab · label: "History" Reports on money received, how old your debts are, and pack balances. What it does: Helps you see how income is moving and which debts have been sitting longest. How it works: Contains the payment-method cards, the Monthly Income chart, Receivables aging, Top debtors and Pack balances. ### What a charge is and its statuses id: income.charge-statuses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Charge statuses, payment methods and waive reasons, what each one means and how it changes. What it does: Explains the life of a charge: from being issued, through payment, to being waived, cancelled or deleted. That way you know what you can do with any charge and what the member sees. How it works: A charge is an amount one member (or a parent's child) owes your school, with a description, a due date and optionally a group. Charges are created by hand with New charge, automatically by payment plans, or when a member buys or picks a plan themselves. Every new charge is Pending. Only a pending charge can be paid, waived, cancelled, or have its amount or due date changed. A charge paid in cash or by bank transfer can be put back to unpaid. A charge paid online cannot be undone or deleted, because a real card transaction stands behind it. The payer is notified when you issue them a charge ("New charge"), when you record a cash or bank payment for them, when their charge is waived, and with up to three automatic overdue notices after the due date. When a charge is paid, the owner and the staff responsible for its group get a "Charge paid" notification. Notes: - Partial payments are not supported: a charge is always paid in full. - A single charge's amount is between €0.01 and €99,999.99. FAQ: Q: What's the difference between waiving and cancelling? A: Both stop the charge being owed. Waiving needs a reason, which is kept, and the member is notified. Cancelling takes no reason and sends no notification, use it for a charge issued by mistake. Q: Can I bring back a cancelled or waived charge? A: No. Both are final. If you still need to collect the amount, create a new charge. #### Charge statuses id: income.charge-statuses.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status type: section The coloured labels in the Status column and in the charge details. What it does: Show at a glance whether a charge is owed, late or settled. How it works: A charge has four real statuses. Overdue is not a separate status but how an unpaid charge is shown once its due date has passed. ##### Pending status id: income.charge-statuses.status.pending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status.pending type: status · label: "Pending" The charge has been issued and is waiting to be paid; its due date hasn't passed. What it does: Tells you the amount is owed but not yet late. How it works: Yellow label. Every new charge starts here. While pending you can mark it paid, send a reminder, change the amount, waive it or cancel it. If the member pays online, it becomes Paid on its own. ##### Overdue status id: income.charge-statuses.status.overdue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status.overdue type: status · label: "Overdue" An unpaid charge whose due date has passed. What it does: Highlights the charges it's time to act on. How it works: Red label. Under the date in the Date column it shows how many days late it is, such as "3d overdue". You can do everything you can with a pending charge. After the due date the payer automatically gets an "Overdue charge" notification each evening, at most three times per charge, and then no more. Once it's paid the label goes, but the column keeps showing "Nd late". ##### Paid status id: income.charge-statuses.status.paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status.paid type: status · label: "Paid" The charge has been paid in full, online, in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: Confirms the money has been received and counts as income. How it works: Green label, shown next to a payment-method label. The Date column now shows the payment date instead of the due date. A charge paid in cash or by bank can be put back to unpaid or deleted; one paid online cannot. If the charge is for a pack, paying it grants the credits. When you record a cash or bank payment by hand, the payer is notified. ##### Waived status id: income.charge-statuses.status.waived · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status.waived type: status · label: "Waived" The school has decided the charge won't be paid and recorded why. What it does: Clears the debt while keeping a record of the reason, such as a sick month or a scholarship. How it works: Blue label. The charge details read "Waived —" followed by the reason. The member gets a "Charge waived" notification. Waiving can't be undone; a waived charge can only be deleted. ##### Cancelled status id: income.charge-statuses.status.cancelled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.status.cancelled type: status · label: "Cancelled" The charge has been voided and can no longer be collected. What it does: For a charge issued by mistake or no longer relevant. How it works: Grey label. Cancelling needs no reason and sends no notification. It can't be undone. A charge is also cancelled on its own when a member who picked a plan takes the choice back before paying. Cancelled charges only appear under the All filter, there is no filter of their own. You can delete them from the charge details. #### Payment methods id: income.charge-statuses.payment-method · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.payment-method type: section The labels that say how a charge was paid. What it does: Show whether the money came online, in cash or by bank transfer. How it works: The label sits next to the Paid status in the list and in the Paid via line of the details. You can filter by it on the Charges tab too. ##### Online label id: income.charge-statuses.payment-method.online · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.payment-method.online type: badge · label: "Online" The member paid by card themselves through the app. What it does: Marks payments that went through the school's online payments. How it works: Only appears when the school has Stripe connected and the member pressed "Pay now". The charge is marked paid automatically. Such a payment can't be undone or deleted in Classes. ##### Cash label id: income.charge-statuses.payment-method.cash · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.payment-method.cash type: badge · label: "Cash" The payment was taken in cash and recorded by a staff member. What it does: Shows the money was received in person. How it works: Set when you use Mark paid, cash or Add payment with Cash. Such a payment can be undone. The payer is notified when it is recorded. ##### Bank transfer label id: income.charge-statuses.payment-method.bank · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.payment-method.bank type: badge · label: "Bank transfer" The payment arrived by bank transfer and was recorded by hand. What it does: Shows the money was transferred to the school's account. How it works: Set when you use Mark paid, bank or Add payment with Bank transfer. Classes doesn't check your bank account, you confirm the transfer arrived. Such a payment can be undone. The payer is notified when it is recorded. #### Preset reasons id: income.charge-statuses.reason-codes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.reason-codes type: section The reasons you pick from when waiving a charge. What it does: Save typing and keep reasons consistent so they read easily in reports. How it works: In the charge details under Waive you choose Sibling discount, Scholarship, Staff family, Sick month (selected by default) or Other…, which lets you type your own reason of up to 500 characters. Reasons for discounts and amount corrections are typed freely; if one matches a preset, it's shown under the preset's name. Payers see the reasons for discounts and amount corrections on their own payments page. ##### Sibling discount reason id: income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.sibling · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.sibling type: badge · label: "Sibling discount" For families with more than one child at the school. What it does: Records that the charge was reduced or waived because of a brother or sister. How it works: Picked when waiving; shown as a label in the details and in Discounts. ##### Scholarship reason id: income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.scholarship · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.scholarship type: badge · label: "Scholarship" For a member studying free or at a reduced rate on a scholarship. What it does: Records that the charge isn't paid because of a scholarship. How it works: Picked when waiving; shown as a label in the details and in Discounts. ##### Staff family reason id: income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.staff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.staff type: badge · label: "Staff family" For relatives of the school's staff. What it does: Records that the charge was waived because the member is a staff member's family. How it works: Picked when waiving; shown as a label in the details and in Discounts. ##### Sick month reason id: income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.sick · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-statuses#income.charge-statuses.reason-codes.sick type: badge · label: "Sick month" For a month the member missed because of illness. What it does: Lets you waive the charge for a missed period without touching attendance. How it works: This is the reason selected by default when waiving in the charge details. ### Charges tab id: income.charges · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials The list of every charge in your school, filters, search, columns and what you can do from here. What it does: Shows every charge issued in your school, whether paid, owed or closed. From here you find a specific charge, open its details, create new charges and record payments. How it works: The table shows 10 charges per page, sorted by due date with the newest at the top. Above it are the status filters, search, and the group and payment-method choices. The Add payment and New charge buttons are in the page header, on the right of the tabs; on a phone they are round icon buttons in the bar at the top of the screen. The four figures of the Finance page sit above the filters. Press a row to open the charge details. The checkboxes at the start of rows are for bulk actions. On a phone the table is shown as cards with the same information. Changing the filter, group or payment method takes you back to page one and clears the selected charges. Steps: 1. Open Finance and the Charges tab. 2. Choose a filter, such as Overdue. 3. If needed, search by name or pick a group. 4. Press a charge's row to see its details and actions. Notes: - If your access is limited to certain groups, you only see the charges of those groups and of the members in them. - The Add payment and New charge buttons only appear if you have the Record payments and Manage charges permissions respectively. - From a user's details panel, the All charges link opens this tab already searched for that user's name. FAQ: Q: Where are cancelled charges? A: They only appear under the **All** filter. There is no filter of their own. Q: Can I search by charge description? A: No. Search finds charges by the name of the member, the child or the paying parent, and by plan name. #### Status filter id: income.charges.status-filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter type: filter · label: "All · Owed · Overdue · Paid · Waived" The five buttons that narrow the list by charge status. What it does: Keeps only the charges you care about right now in the table. How it works: The selected button shows how many charges were found. ##### All filter id: income.charges.status-filter.all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter.all type: filter · label: "All" Shows every charge in every status. What it does: Gives the full picture, including cancelled charges. How it works: Selected by default. It is the only place Cancelled charges appear. ##### Owed filter id: income.charges.status-filter.owed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter.owed type: filter · label: "Owed" Shows every unpaid charge. What it does: Collects the charges you are still waiting for money on. How it works: Includes Pending charges, both those before their due date and overdue ones. ##### Overdue filter id: income.charges.status-filter.overdue · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter.overdue type: filter · label: "Overdue" Shows only unpaid charges past their due date. What it does: The quick way to see who to remind. How it works: Includes pending charges whose due date has passed. Handy for selecting them all and sending one reminder. ##### Paid filter id: income.charges.status-filter.paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter.paid type: filter · label: "Paid" Shows paid charges. What it does: Works as your list of payments received. How it works: You can also pick a payment method with it. The payment-method cards on History open exactly this filter. ##### Waived filter id: income.charges.status-filter.waived · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.status-filter.waived type: filter · label: "Waived" Shows waived charges. What it does: Lets you review who you waived charges for and why. How it works: The reason is visible in each charge's details. #### Search box id: income.charges.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.search type: search · label: "Search payer, member…" Finds charges by a person's or a plan's name. What it does: Quickly finds the charges of a specific member or plan. How it works: Searches the member's, child's and paying parent's names, in both "first last" and "last first" order, and the plan name. Results update shortly after you stop typing. It works together with the selected filter and group. The charge description is not searched. #### Group choice id: income.charges.group-select · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.group-select type: select · label: "All groups" Shows only one group's charges. What it does: Helps when you look after one group or report per group. How it works: Charges without a group only appear under All groups. #### Payment method choice id: income.charges.method-select · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.method-select type: select · label: "All payment methods" Keeps only charges paid online, in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: Helps you, for example, reconcile the cash box with cash payments. How it works: Only appears with the All and Paid filters, since only they contain paid charges. Choose Online, Cash or Bank transfer. With All, unpaid charges drop out because they have no payment method. Notes: - The choice only narrows the charges on the current page: the count next to the filter and the pages still reflect all paid charges. If a page shows no matches, move to the next one. #### Add payment button id: income.charges.add-payment-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.add-payment-button type: button · label: "Add payment" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Records money you have already received in person or by bank. What it does: Opens the Add payment window, where you record a payment with no charge issued beforehand. How it works: Sits in the page header. Only visible with the Record payments permission. It is the New charge window with the Already paid switch already on. On a phone it is a round button with a receipt icon in the bar at the top of the screen. See the manual payment article for details. #### New charge button id: income.charges.new-charge-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.new-charge-button type: button · label: "New charge" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Issues a charge to one or more members. What it does: Opens the New charge window for requesting money for a camp, kit or anything else. How it works: Sits in the page header, to the right of Add payment. Only visible with the Manage charges permission. On a phone it is a round button with a plus icon in the bar at the top of the screen. See the new charge article for details. #### Charges table id: income.charges.table · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table type: table The charge rows and their columns. What it does: Shows the essentials of each charge without opening it. How it works: Press a row to open its details. Pages are below the table, with a note of which charges out of how many you're viewing. ##### Member column id: income.charges.table.member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.member type: column · label: "Member" Who the charge is for. What it does: Shows the member and, for a child, the paying parent. How it works: For a child's charge, "pays:" and the parent's name appear under the child's name. The parent is the one who gets the notifications and pays. ##### Charge column id: income.charges.table.charge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.charge type: column · label: "Charge" What the charge is for and which group. What it does: Tells you what the member is paying for. How it works: Shows the charge description, or the name of the plan it came from if the description is empty. The group name, if any, sits underneath. Charges from recurring plans have a description like "plan name, period". ##### Amount column id: income.charges.table.amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.amount type: column · label: "Amount" How much the charge is. What it does: Shows the amount owed or paid. How it works: It's the current amount, if you corrected it or a discount applies, you see the new value. ##### Date column id: income.charges.table.date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.date type: column · label: "Date" The due date, or the date the charge was paid. What it does: Shows when it must be paid or when it was paid, and how late it is. How it works: For an unpaid charge it shows the due date; hovering shows "Due" and the full date. If overdue, red text underneath reads, for example, "5d overdue". For a paid charge it shows the payment date; hovering reads "Paid … · was due …". If it was paid after the due date, amber text reads, for example, "3d late": this stays even after payment. ##### Status column id: income.charges.table.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.status type: column · label: "Status" Where the charge stands. What it does: Shows the status label and, for a paid charge, how it was paid. How it works: Labels are Pending, Overdue, Paid, Waived and Cancelled. Paid is followed by Online, Cash or Bank transfer. ##### No charges message id: income.charges.table.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.empty type: message · label: "No charges match these filters." Shown when no charge matches your choices. What it does: Tells you the list is empty because of the filters, not an error. How it works: Choose All, All groups or clear the search to see charges again. ##### Loading error id: income.charges.table.error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges#income.charges.table.error type: message · label: "Failed to load charges." Shown when charges can't be loaded. What it does: Separates a connection problem from a genuinely empty list. How it works: Press Try again to reload. ### Bulk actions on charges id: income.charges-bulk-actions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges, Billing.RecordPayments, Billing.SendReminders How to mark many charges paid, remind, waive or cancel them at once. What it does: Saves opening every charge one by one, for example when a whole group paid at training, or you want to remind everyone who is overdue. How it works: On the Charges tab, tick the rows you want to work with. Only unpaid charges (Pending and Overdue) have a checkbox. As soon as one is ticked, a bar appears above the table with the number selected and the action buttons. Mark paid, cash, Mark paid, bank, Waive and Cancel charges ask for confirmation in the same bar. Send reminder acts straight away. Every action skips charges that are no longer unpaid or are outside your access, and reports how many charges were actually handled. One action can cover at most 500 charges. Steps: 1. On the Charges tab, choose a filter such as Overdue. 2. Tick the charges, or the header checkbox for all unpaid charges on the page. 3. Press an action in the bar. 4. If asked, confirm with the button in the bar. Notes: - The bar only appears if you have at least one of Manage charges, Record payments or Send payment reminders; each button needs its own permission. - Changing the filter, group or payment method clears the selection. FAQ: Q: I marked charges as paid by mistake. How do I undo it? A: Right afterwards, a message with an **Undo** button sits where the bar was. Press it and the charges go back to unpaid. If you already dismissed the message, open each charge and press **Undo payment**. #### Select all owed checkbox id: income.charges-bulk-actions.select-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.select-all type: checkbox · label: "Select all owed" The checkbox in the table header. What it does: Selects every unpaid charge on the current page at once. How it works: Only selects charges on the page shown, not across all pages. Pressing again clears the selection. It's inactive when the page has no unpaid charges. There is no such checkbox on a phone, tick cards one by one. #### Row checkbox id: income.charges-bulk-actions.row-checkbox · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.row-checkbox type: checkbox · label: "Select charge" The checkbox at the start of each unpaid row. What it does: Adds the charge to the selection for a bulk action. How it works: Ticking doesn't open the charge details. Paid, waived and cancelled charges have no checkbox. #### Action bar id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar type: section · label: "… charge(s) selected" The bar above the table that appears when charges are selected. What it does: Holds the actions that apply to every selected charge. How it works: The left side says how many charges are selected. The X button on the right clears the selection and closes the bar. ##### Mark paid, cash button id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.mark-paid-cash · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.mark-paid-cash type: button · label: "Mark paid, cash" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Marks the selected charges as paid in cash. What it does: Records that you received the full amount of each selected charge in cash. How it works: Needs the Record payments permission. The bar asks "Record a cash payment for the selected charges? This marks them as paid." Press Yes, mark as paid or Back. Each charge is paid at its own amount, dated today. The payments count towards income straight away, and each payer is notified that a payment was recorded. ##### Mark paid, bank button id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.mark-paid-bank · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.mark-paid-bank type: button · label: "Mark paid, bank" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Marks the selected charges as paid by bank transfer. What it does: Records that the amounts of the selected charges arrived in your bank account. How it works: Needs the Record payments permission. Confirm with Yes, mark as paid after the question "Record a bank-transfer payment for the selected charges?". Otherwise it works like Mark paid, cash, but the method is Bank transfer. ##### Send reminder button id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.send-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.send-reminder type: button · label: "Send reminder" · permissions: Billing.SendReminders Reminds the payers of the selected charges. What it does: Sends each payer a notification that their charge is coming up or overdue. How it works: Needs the Send payment reminders permission. It is sent at once, without confirmation. "Reminder sent to N member(s)." appears and the selection clears. See the reminders article for more. ##### Waive button id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.waive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.waive type: button · label: "Waive" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Waives the selected charges with one shared reason. What it does: Clears the debt on several charges at once while recording why. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. A Waive reason box appears in the bar (up to 500 characters, required). Press Confirm waive or Back. Without a reason you see "Enter a reason." Each payer is notified their charge was waived. It can't be undone. ###### Waive reason field id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.waive.reason · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.waive.reason type: field · label: "Waive reason" Free text on why the charges are waived. What it does: Stores the reason on every waived charge. How it works: Required, up to 500 characters. The hint reads "Why are these charges being waived?". The reason shows in each charge's details as "Waived, …". ##### Cancel charges button id: income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.bar.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel charges" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Voids the selected charges. What it does: Stops the charges being owed, for example when issued by mistake. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. The bar reads "These charges will no longer be collectible. This can't be undone." Press Yes, cancel charges or Back. Payers are not notified. #### Undo message after payment id: income.charges-bulk-actions.undo-bar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charges-bulk-actions#income.charges-bulk-actions.undo-bar type: notification · label: "N charge(s) marked as paid." · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments The message with an Undo button that stays after bulk marking as paid. What it does: Lets you take the payments back if you picked the wrong charges. How it works: Appears where the action bar was. Undo puts the same charges back to unpaid and removes the payments from income; while it runs the button reads "Undoing…". On success you see "N charge(s) put back to unpaid." If undo fails, the message stays so you can retry, and the table shows the real state. The Dismiss (X) button closes the message, after that you can only undo from each charge's details. ### Creating a new charge id: income.new-charge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges How to request payment from one or several members at once, for a camp, kit or event, for example. What it does: Issues a separate charge to each selected member with the same amount, description and due date. Use it for one-off amounts outside payment plans. How it works: Press New charge in the page header of the Charges tab. Pick members, optionally a group, enter the amount each, the due date and a description, then Create charge. A separate Pending charge is created for each selected person. Every payer gets a "New charge" notification with the school name and amount. If the school has Stripe connected, the member can pay online; otherwise they see the amount and due date with instructions to pay in person. If a charge is still unpaid after its due date, the payer gets automatic overdue notices, one a day, up to three. Only members of the school can be charged. If your access is limited to certain groups, pick a group you have access to, or members outside your groups will be skipped. This window is shared with Add payment: the Already paid switch at the top turns it into a payment record. You can also open it from a user's details panel with Issue charge, with that user already chosen. Steps: 1. On the Charges tab, press New charge. 2. Tick members in the Members list. 3. Optionally pick a group in Group (optional). 4. Enter Amount (each). 5. Choose a Due date. 6. Write a Description. 7. Press Create charge. Notes: - If a member, amount, description or due date is missing you see "Please select at least one member, amount, description and due date." and nothing is created. - On failure you see "Failed to create charge. Please try again.": check the description is at least 3 characters. - For money you have already received, use Add payment (or switch on Already paid) rather than a new charge. FAQ: Q: Can I charge a whole group at once? A: Yes, tick every member of the group in the list. For regular monthly fees it's easier to create a payment plan on the **Plans** tab. Q: Can the charges have different amounts? A: Not in one window, the amount is the same for everyone. Create them separately, or correct an amount later from the charge details. #### New charge window id: income.new-charge.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal type: modal · label: "New charge" The form where you describe the charge and who it's for. What it does: Collects everything needed to issue the charges. How it works: Each time it opens from New charge the form is empty and the Already paid switch is off. Nothing is saved until you press Create charge. ##### Already paid switch id: income.new-charge.modal.already-paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.already-paid type: toggle · label: "Already paid" Turns the charge form into a form for a payment you have already received. What it does: Lets you record money you already received without issuing a charge first. How it works: Off with New charge and on with Add payment. When it is on, the title becomes Add payment, the due date disappears, and a payment date and a payment method (Cash or Bank transfer) appear. Saving a paid entry needs the Record payments permission, an unpaid charge needs Manage charges. See the manual payment article for details. ##### Members list id: income.new-charge.modal.members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.members type: list · label: "Members" Who you are charging. Required, at least one. What it does: Decides which members get a charge, one per person. How it works: The list holds every member of the school and, separately, each parent's children; next to a child it says "pays:" and the parent's name. The Search members… box filters by the person's or parent's name. Tick as many people as you like; the number selected appears in brackets next to the title. If search finds nobody it reads "No members match your search." At most 500 people per request. ##### Group (optional) choice id: income.new-charge.modal.group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.group type: select · label: "Group (optional)" The group the charges are linked to. Optional. What it does: Lets the charges be filtered by group and seen by that group's staff. How it works: Defaults to No group. The group must belong to your school. Choosing it doesn't check whether the members are in the group, it only files the charges. If your access is limited to certain groups, pick one you have access to. ##### Amount (each) field id: income.new-charge.modal.amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.amount type: field · label: "Amount (each)" The amount of each individual charge. Required. What it does: Sets how much each selected person will owe. How it works: In euro, with up to two decimal places. Amounts from €0.01 to €99,999.99 are accepted. The amount isn't split between members, each gets a charge for the full amount. ##### Due date field id: income.new-charge.modal.due-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.due-date type: field · label: "Due date" When the charge must be paid by. Required. What it does: After this date the charge shows as overdue and the payer automatically gets overdue notices, one a day, up to three. How it works: Choose Tomorrow, 5 days, 10 days or 30 days from today, or Custom date, which opens a date field. Below the buttons it reads "Due" and the chosen date. The date must be in the future, tomorrow at the earliest; today or a past date isn't accepted. ##### Description field id: income.new-charge.modal.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.description type: field · label: "Description" What the charge is for. Required. What it does: Tells the payer what they are paying for and shows in the Charge column. How it works: The hint reads "What is this charge for?". It must be between 3 and 300 characters. ##### Create charge button id: income.new-charge.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/new-charge#income.new-charge.modal.submit type: button · label: "Create charge" Issues the charges. What it does: Creates one charge for each selected person and notifies the payers. How it works: On success the window closes, "N charge(s) created." appears, and the list and figures refresh. Cancel closes the window without creating anything. ### Adding a payment manually id: income.manual-payment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments How to record money received in cash or by bank when no charge was issued. What it does: Records in Classes a payment that already happened outside the app, for example a parent paid cash at training. Your income stays complete without first issuing a charge and then marking it. How it works: Press Add payment in the page header of the Charges tab. It opens the same window as New charge with the Already paid switch already on, so instead of a due date you set a payment date and how it was paid. For each selected person a new charge is created that is immediately Paid with the chosen method. Its due date is the payment date. The payment counts as income on the date you give, in Collected this period, the payment-method cards and the chart. The payer gets a notification that a payment was recorded for them. For a child, it goes to the parent. If an unpaid charge for the same thing already exists, don't use this window, open that charge and press Mark paid, cash or Mark paid, bank, or the money will be recorded twice. After saving, the window doesn't close but shows a confirmation with an undo option. The same window opens from a user's details panel with the Add payment button there, with that user already chosen. In that panel the button needs both the Manage charges and the Record payments permissions. Steps: 1. On the Charges tab, press Add payment. 2. Tick the payers in the Members list. 3. Optionally pick a group. 4. Enter Amount (each) and, if needed, Payment date (optional). 5. Write a Description. 6. Choose Cash or Bank transfer under Paid via. 7. Press Add payment. 8. Check the confirmation and press Done. Notes: - If a payee, amount or description is missing you see "Please select at least one payee and fill in amount and description." If you switch Already paid off, the window turns back into New charge. - Online payments can't be recorded by hand, they are recorded only when the member pays through the app. FAQ: Q: I picked the wrong member. What do I do? A: In the confirmation, press **Undo**: the created charges are deleted. If you already pressed **Done**, find the charge in the list, open it and use **Delete charge**. Q: The payment was last month. Will it count there? A: Yes, if you fill in **Payment date (optional)**. Without a date the payment is recorded as today. #### Add payment window id: income.manual-payment.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal type: modal · label: "Add payment" The form for recording a received payment by hand. What it does: Collects who paid, how much, when, what for and how. How it works: Each time it opens from Add payment the form is empty, the Already paid switch is on and Paid via is Cash. ##### Members list id: income.manual-payment.modal.payees · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.payees type: list · label: "Members" Who paid. Required, at least one. What it does: A separate payment with the same amount is recorded for each ticked person. How it works: Contains the school's members and each parent's children, with "pays:" and the parent's name next to a child. Search with Search members…. The number selected appears in brackets. If your access is limited to certain groups and you don't pick a group, each person must be in a group you have access to. ##### Group (optional) choice id: income.manual-payment.modal.group · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.group type: select · label: "Group (optional)" The group the payment is for. Optional. What it does: Makes the payment show up under a group filter and in that group's figures. How it works: Defaults to No group. If you pick a group you must be allowed to record payments for it. ##### Amount (each) field id: income.manual-payment.modal.amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.amount type: field · label: "Amount (each)" How much each person paid. Required. What it does: Sets the amount of each recorded payment. How it works: In euro, from €0.01 to €99,999.99. It isn't split between payees. ##### Payment date (optional) field id: income.manual-payment.modal.payment-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.payment-date type: field · label: "Payment date (optional)" When the money was received. Optional. What it does: Counts the payment towards the right day and month in your income. How it works: Left empty it shows Today and means today's date. The date becomes both the payment date and the due date of the created charge. ##### Description field id: income.manual-payment.modal.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.description type: field · label: "Description" What the payment was for. Required. What it does: Shows in the Charge column and says what the money was for. How it works: The hint reads "What was this payment for?". Between 3 and 300 characters. ##### Paid via choice id: income.manual-payment.modal.method · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.method type: toggle · label: "Paid via" How the money was received: **Cash** or **Bank transfer**. What it does: Sets the payment method shown in labels, filters and the History cards. How it works: Defaults to Cash. Press the other button to switch. ##### Add payment button id: income.manual-payment.modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.submit type: button · label: "Add payment" Records the payments. What it does: Creates the paid charges and adds them to income. How it works: On success the window switches to a confirmation. On failure you see "Failed to add payment. Please try again." Cancel closes without saving. ##### Confirmation after saving id: income.manual-payment.modal.confirmation · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/manual-payment#income.manual-payment.modal.confirmation type: section · label: "Payment added for N payee(s)." The screen that stays after saving and lets you take the payment back. What it does: Gives you a last chance to spot a wrong payee while the names are still in front of you. How it works: It reads "Wrong payee? You can still take this back." Undo deletes the charges created in this window, while it runs the button reads "Undoing…", and on success "Payment removed for N payee(s)." appears and the window closes. If undo fails for any charge, the window stays so you can retry. Done, or closing the window, keeps the payment. Notes: - Undo deletes the charges, so it also needs the Manage charges permission. Without it undo ends with "Couldn't undo the payment. Showing the current state instead.": ask a colleague with that permission to delete the charge. ### Charge details id: income.charge-detail · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials The panel that opens when you press a charge: amounts, dates, reminders and every action on it. What it does: Shows the full story of one charge and lets you mark it paid, send a reminder, change the amount, waive or cancel it, undo a payment or delete it. How it works: Press a row on the Charges tab and the panel opens at the side. What you see depends on the status: Unpaid charge: a price breakdown if a discount or correction applies; the number of reminders sent; a note about online payment; the Mark paid, cash, Mark paid, bank, Send reminder, Edit amount, Waive and Cancel charge buttons. Paid, waived or cancelled charge: payment date and method, or the reason; Undo payment (cash or bank payments only) and Delete charge (anything not paid online). Each button only appears if you have its permission. Close the panel with X or by clicking outside it, but not while a form is open (such as a typed reason), so you don't lose what you wrote. Steps: 1. On the Charges tab, press the charge's row. 2. Check the amount, dates and reminders. 3. Press the action you need at the bottom of the panel. 4. If a form opens, fill it in and confirm. FAQ: Q: Why can't I delete a charge paid online? A: A real card transaction stands behind it, which Classes can't reverse. So such a charge can't be deleted and its payment can't be undone. Q: Can I delete an unpaid charge? A: Not directly. Cancel it first with **Cancel charge**: **Delete charge** then appears in the panel. #### Header id: income.charge-detail.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.header type: section The member's name, the payer and the group. What it does: Shows who the charge is for. How it works: For a child it reads "Paid by" and the parent's name, then the group or No group. The Close (X) button closes the panel. #### Amount card id: income.charge-detail.amount-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.amount-card type: card The amount, status, description and price breakdown. What it does: Tells you how much is owed and for what, and why the amount differs from the plan price. How it works: Shows the amount, the status label and the description (or plan name). For an unpaid plan charge with a discount or correction there's a breakdown: Base price: the plan price, struck through; Standing override: this member's own price on the plan, lower or higher, applied to all their charges on it; This charge only: a one-time correction made to this charge alone. The payer sees the reasons you gave for a standing price and for a one-time correction on their own payments page, next to the base price. For a waived charge it reads "Waived —" and the reason. #### Dates card id: income.charge-detail.dates-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.dates-card type: card Due date, issue date, reminders and payment. What it does: Shows when the charge was issued, when it's due and when and how it was paid. How it works: Due date: when it must be paid. Issued: when the charge was created. Reminders sent (unpaid only), for example "2× (last 3 Oct)" or None yet. The count includes manual reminders and the automatic overdue notices (up to three). Paid on (paid only), the payment date; if after the due date, it adds "Was overdue · paid Nd late". Paid via: the Online, Cash or Bank transfer label. #### Online payment note id: income.charge-detail.online-payment-note · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.online-payment-note type: message Says whether the payer can pay this charge online. What it does: Helps you understand what the payer sees and whether to collect the money in person. How it works: Only shown for an unpaid charge. With Stripe connected: "The payer sees a “Pay now” button, a successful online payment marks this charge paid automatically." Without: "No Stripe connected, the payer sees the amount and due date with in-person payment instructions. Everything here still works; only online pay is hidden." #### Mark paid, cash and Mark paid, bank buttons id: income.charge-detail.mark-paid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.mark-paid type: button · label: "Mark paid, cash · Mark paid, bank" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Mark the unpaid charge as paid in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: Record that you received the full amount and add it to income. How it works: Need the Record payments permission. Each one asks first, "Mark … as paid in cash? The payer will be notified." (or by bank transfer), and you choose Yes, mark as paid or Back. The payment is dated today. The amount is always the charge's full amount, partial payment isn't supported. After you confirm, "Charge marked as paid." appears, the panel stays open, and below it reads "Marked as paid. Wrong member? You can still take this back." with Undo and Done. The payer is notified that a payment was recorded (the Recorded Payments notification), and the owner and staff with the View financials permission who reach the charge's group get a "Charge paid" notification. If the charge is for a pack, paying it grants the credits. #### Send reminder button id: income.charge-detail.send-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.send-reminder type: button · label: "Send reminder" · permissions: Billing.SendReminders Reminds the payer about this charge. What it does: Sends a notification with the amount and due date, or how overdue it is. How it works: Needs the Send payment reminders permission. Sent at once; "Reminder sent." appears. The notification is titled "Upcoming charge" before the due date and "Overdue charge" after it. You can remind as often as you like, and it works whatever the automatic notices have already sent. The Reminders sent count goes up. #### Edit amount button id: income.charge-detail.edit-amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.edit-amount type: button · label: "Edit amount" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Changes the amount of the unpaid charge. What it does: Corrects this charge alone, for example when a member missed part of the month. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. Opens a form with New amount and Reason; press Save or Back. Every amount change is kept with its reason and who made it. The payer sees your reason on their own payments page, as "Reason the amount was changed", with the previous amount struck through. Notes: - If you later change the plan price or the member's discount, unpaid charges on that plan are recalculated, the manual correction is lost and the payer no longer sees your reason. ##### New amount field id: income.charge-detail.edit-amount.new-amount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.edit-amount.new-amount type: field · label: "New amount" The charge's new amount. Required. What it does: Replaces the current amount. How it works: The hint shows the current amount. From €0.01 to €99,999.99; zero isn't accepted, to charge nothing, use Waive. ##### Reason field id: income.charge-detail.edit-amount.reason · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.edit-amount.reason type: field · label: "Reason" Why the amount is changing. Required. What it does: Leaves a record of why the amount differs, and tells the payer. How it works: The hint reads "Why is this changing?". Up to 500 characters. The payer sees this text, so write it with them in mind. Without an amount or reason you see "Enter an amount and a reason." #### Waive button id: income.charge-detail.waive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.waive type: button · label: "Waive" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Waives the unpaid charge with a reason. What it does: Clears the debt while keeping the reason. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. Opens Waive reason with the presets Sibling discount, Scholarship, Staff family, Sick month (selected by default) and Other…. Other… reveals a box for your own reason (up to 500 characters). Press Confirm waive or Back. "Charge waived." appears, the panel closes and the payer is notified. It can't be undone. #### Cancel charge button id: income.charge-detail.cancel · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.cancel type: button · label: "Cancel charge" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Voids the unpaid charge. What it does: Stops the charge being owed, with no reason and no notification to the payer. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. It asks "This charge will no longer be collectible. This can't be undone." Press Yes, cancel charge or Back. "Charge cancelled." appears and the panel closes. #### Undo payment button id: income.charge-detail.undo-payment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.undo-payment type: button · label: "Undo payment" · permissions: Billing.RecordPayments Puts a charge paid in cash or by bank back to unpaid. What it does: Fixes a payment recorded by mistake, for example against the wrong member, without losing the charge itself. How it works: Needs the Record payments permission. Shown on a charge paid by Cash or Bank transfer, at any time after payment, with the text "This payment was recorded by hand. Undoing it puts the charge back to unpaid and removes the payment from your totals." Right after Mark paid, cash or Mark paid, bank, the same action is the Undo button. The charge is owed again; "Charge put back to unpaid." appears. On failure you see "Couldn't undo. Showing the current state instead." and can retry. If the charge was for a pack, undoing it also removes the pack: lessons already taken from it become visits owed (Visits owed (no pack) under Pack balances), and are covered at once from another pack the member has, if any. The payer is not sent any notification about the undo. Not available for online payments. #### Delete charge button id: income.charge-detail.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/charge-detail#income.charge-detail.delete type: button · label: "Delete charge" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Removes a manually paid, waived or cancelled charge from the records. What it does: Clears a charge that shouldn't exist at all, for example a manual payment recorded by mistake. How it works: The server requires the Manage charges permission. Shown on a charge that isn't unpaid and wasn't paid online. It asks "This charge will be removed from the records. This can't be undone.", or for a paid charge "This charge and the cash/bank payment recorded against it will be removed from the records, including from your revenue totals." Press Yes, delete charge or Back. "Charge deleted." appears. Notes: - The button shows even without the Manage charges permission, but deleting then ends with "Failed to delete charge." - If the payment was right but the charge is on the wrong member, use Undo payment instead. ### Payment reminders id: income.reminders · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/reminders For: schools · In the app: /admin/income · permissions: Billing.SendReminders When Classes reminds payers on its own and how to send a reminder by hand. What it does: Helps you collect charges on time without calling every parent. There are automatic overdue notices, plus manual reminders you send whenever you choose. How it works: Automatic overdue notices. Every evening Classes looks for unpaid charges whose due date has passed and sends the payer an "Overdue charge" notification with the amount and the date it has been overdue since. A charge gets at most one a day and at most three in total, then the automatic notices stop, however long it stays unpaid. Manual reminder. The Send reminder button, in the bulk action bar or the charge details, sends a notification with the amount and due date, titled "Upcoming charge" before the due date and "Overdue charge" after it. You can repeat it as often as you like, whatever the automatic notices have already sent. Reminders only go for unpaid charges; paid, waived and cancelled ones in a selection are skipped. Reminders go to the person who pays, for a child, that's the parent. Every reminder sent, including the automatic ones, counts in Reminders sent in the charge details. Packs have a separate "Renew your pack" notification when credits run out or the pack expires within 3 days, once per pack. Steps: 1. On the Charges tab, choose the Overdue filter. 2. Tick the charges you want to remind about. 3. Press Send reminder in the bar. Notes: - You need the Send payment reminders permission. - The Remind button under Top debtors on the History tab doesn't work yet, use the Charges tab. - Each payer decides for themselves whether to receive these notifications, in their own notification settings (Charge Due Reminders). FAQ: Q: Will the parent get a notification every day until they pay? A: No. The automatic overdue notice is sent once a day, at most three times per charge. After that, only the reminders you send by hand reach the parent. #### Overdue charge notification id: income.reminders.overdue-notice · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/reminders#income.reminders.overdue-notice type: notification The automatic notification to the payer when a charge becomes overdue. What it does: Tells the payer the due date has passed without you doing anything. How it works: Sent each evening after the due date, at most once a day and three times per charge, with the amount and the date it has been overdue since. It doesn't depend on staff permissions and can't be switched off from the Finance page. Each payer can turn it off for themselves in their own notification settings (Charge Due Reminders). #### Manual charge reminder id: income.reminders.manual-reminder · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/reminders#income.reminders.manual-reminder type: notification · label: "Send reminder" · permissions: Billing.SendReminders The notification the payer gets when you press Send reminder. What it does: Nudges the payer to pay a specific charge. How it works: Contains the amount and "due by" the date, or "overdue since" the date if it has passed. It is titled "Upcoming charge" before the due date and "Overdue charge" after it. Can be sent for one charge from the details or for many at once from the bulk bar. On failure you see "Failed to send reminders. Please try again." #### Payment recorded notification id: income.reminders.payment-recorded · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/reminders#income.reminders.payment-recorded type: notification The notification to the payer when staff mark their charge as paid in cash or by bank transfer. What it does: Tells the payer their payment has been recorded, and gives them a chance to spot a mistake. How it works: Sent with Mark paid, cash and Mark paid, bank (from the charge details or the bulk bar) and with Add payment. It contains the school name, the amount, the charge description and whether it was cash or bank transfer. For a child it goes to the parent. It isn't sent for online payments, because the payer paid themselves. Undoing a payment doesn't send another notification. The payer can turn it off for themselves in their notification settings (Recorded Payments). ### Plans tab id: income.plans · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Your school's payment plans, their categories, archived plans and the discounts on them. What it does: A plan is a template Classes uses to issue charges to the people in one or more groups, or the whole school: once, every period, or as a pack of credits for visits. Here you see all plans, sort them into categories, open their details and create new ones. How it works: Each plan is a card or a line in the list, and Plan layout switches between Cards and List. If you have categories, plans sit under them; plans without one are under Uncategorised. Active plans come first; disabled and archived ones are faded. Press a plan to open its details. The New button opens a menu with three choices: New plan, New plan with variants and New category. At the bottom are two collapsed sections: Discounts (only if someone pays a price different from the plan's) and Archived plans (only if you have any). Creating and changing plans and categories needs the Manage payment plans permission. Steps: 1. Open Finance and the Plans tab. 2. Press New and pick what to create, or press a plan to open an existing one. Notes: - If your access is limited to certain groups, you only see those groups' plans. - Staff without the Manage payment plans permission see the plans, but the New menu and the plan actions aren't shown. - The layout (Cards or List) is remembered only for the current browser session; the default is Cards. FAQ: Q: Which plan should I use for a monthly fee? A: A **Recurring** plan set to repeat every one month. It issues each person on the plan a charge every period. Q: How do I keep my plans tidy? A: Create categories with **New** → **New category**, then pick the **Category** when you create a plan. You can move categories up and down from the menu in their header. #### New menu id: income.plans.new-menu · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.new-menu type: menu · label: "New" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans The menu for creating a plan, a plan with variants or a category. What it does: Puts everything you can create on the Plans tab in one place. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. On a phone the same three choices open from the "+" button in the top bar. #### New plan item id: income.plans.new-plan · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.new-plan type: menu-item · label: "New plan" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Opens the window for creating a plan. Its hint reads "A fee for a group or for people". What it does: Starts creating a new payment plan. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. Opens the two-step New plan window (Type and Details), see the article on creating a plan. #### New plan with variants item id: income.plans.new-choice · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.new-choice type: menu-item · label: "New plan with variants" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Opens the window for a plan where people pick a variant themselves. Its hint reads "People pick a variant themselves". What it does: Suits the weeks of a summer camp or the levels of a course: you offer several variants and each person picks for themselves. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. Opens the three-step New plan with variants window, see the article on plans with variants. #### New category item id: income.plans.new-category · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.new-category type: menu-item · label: "New category" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Creates a category, a folder for keeping plans tidy. What it does: Lets you group related plans under one name, for example "Summer camp". How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. Opens the New category window: type a name (at least 2 characters) and press Create. You see "Category added." If the name can't be used you see "That didn't work. The name may already be in use." The same window has a Plan with variants switch: with it on, the category becomes one that people pick from themselves. See the article on plans with variants. Steps: 1. Press New and choose New category. 2. Type the Category name. 3. Press Create. Notes: - You can also create a category from the Category field when creating a plan, with + New category…. #### Plan layout switch id: income.plans.layout · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.layout type: toggle · label: "Plan layout" Switches plans between cards and a list. What it does: Lets you choose between roomier cards and a more compact list. How it works: Two icon buttons: Cards and List. In Cards each plan shows its description, price, schedule and group; in List each plan is one line. The choice is kept only for the current browser session, and the default is Cards. On a phone, one button in the top bar switches to the other layout. #### Search plans box id: income.plans.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.search type: search · label: "Search plans" Filters plans by name. What it does: Helps you find a plan in a long list. How it works: Only shown when you have more than 5 non-archived plans. It searches plan names. While searching, categories with no match are hidden. If nothing matches it reads "No plans match your search." #### Plan card or line id: income.plans.plan-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card type: card The summary of one plan in the list. What it does: Shows the essentials of a plan without opening it. How it works: In the Cards layout: Category above the name, if the plan is in one. Name, a type label (One-off, Recurring or Pack) and, when it is in a category, a label saying whether it is offered to people. Description, if any. Price with "/ month", "/ N months", "/ week", "/ day" or "one-off". Schedule: for recurring and pack plans "Every N month(s) · due on the D" (the due day only for a monthly interval) or "Every N day(s)/week(s)"; for a pack also "N credits per period"; for a one-off "Due" and the date. N active members. Group: a chip with the group name, "N groups" or Whole organisation. At the bottom: "N price overrides" or "No overrides", and the status Active, Disabled or Archived. In the List layout one line shows a type icon, the name, labels only for what is unusual (Archived, Disabled, Hidden from members, Members join themselves, "N discounts"), the group, a one-off's due date, a pack's number of classes, the price and the number of members. ##### One-off label id: income.plans.plan-card.type-oneoff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card.type-oneoff type: badge · label: "One-off" A plan with a single charge, camp, equipment, event fee. What it does: Issues each person on the plan one charge with the set due date. How it works: Charges are issued when the plan is created to everyone already on it, and to anyone who joins the plan later. Generate charges now can issue it again to those who have already paid. ##### Recurring label id: income.plans.plan-card.type-recurring · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card.type-recurring type: badge · label: "Recurring" A flat fee charged every period. What it does: Automatically issues each person on the plan a charge for every period, day, week or month. How it works: A period's charge is issued once its due date is 10 days away or less. See the article on how plans bill. ##### Pack label id: income.plans.plan-card.type-pack · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card.type-pack type: badge · label: "Pack" Billed every period like a recurring plan, with each charge buying credits that attendance counts down. What it does: The person pays a charge for each period and gets a set number of credits for visits. How it works: A pack has a schedule like a recurring plan: a new charge for every period. Paying the charge grants the credits, and each counted attendance uses one credit. The credits are valid until the next period is due. See the packs article. ##### Plan status id: income.plans.plan-card.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card.status type: status · label: "Active · Disabled · Archived" Whether the plan is currently billing. What it does: Tells you whether charges are being issued from the plan. How it works: Active (green), the plan runs and its members can see it. Disabled: paused: no new charges are issued and members don't see it. Turn it back on with Enable plan. Archived: a retired plan kept for its payment history. Hidden from members and generates no charges. ##### Offered label and its relatives id: income.plans.plan-card.offered · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.plan-card.offered type: badge · label: "Offered" Shows whether people can pick the plan themselves. What it does: Explains why a plan is or isn't available for self-selection. How it works: Shown in the Cards layout and means: Offered: people can pick the plan now (a plan open to self-selection, in a category or outside one). The next three only appear on plans that are in a category: Hidden from the choice: the category is a plan with variants and takes picks, but this plan isn't open to people. Not offered: choice closed: the category isn't a plan with variants (or is closed), so nothing in it is picked by people themselves. Not offered: choice ended: the category has a deadline that has passed. A disabled or archived plan has no such label, its status says it. #### Category section id: income.plans.category-section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.category-section type: section A category and the plans in it. What it does: Groups related plans under one heading so they're easier to find. How it works: The header shows the category's name and how many plans it holds ("N plans" or "No plans yet"). Press it to fold or unfold the plans; every section starts unfolded, and the folded ones are kept in the page address, so the browser's Back button undoes a fold. The "More actions" menu on the right (for staff with the Manage payment plans permission) has Edit category, Move up, Move down and Delete category. The Uncategorised section appears only while it holds plans and can't be moved or deleted. A category that is a plan with variants has extra things in its header, see the article on plans with variants. Delete category asks "Delete "name"? Its plans stay, without a category." After you confirm you see "Category removed. Its plans are now uncategorised." #### No plans yet message id: income.plans.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.empty type: message · label: "No plans yet." Shown when there isn't a single non-archived plan or any category. What it does: Tells you to create your first plan. How it works: Below it reads "Use "New" to add a plan, a plan with variants, or a category." Press New. If plans can't be loaded, you see "Failed to load plans." with a Try again button instead. #### Archived plans section id: income.plans.archived-section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.archived-section type: section · label: "Archived plans" The collapsed section holding retired plans. What it does: Keeps old plans out of the way without losing their history. How it works: Only shown if you have archived plans; their count sits next to the title. Press it to expand. Inside it reads "Retired plans, kept for their payment history. Open one to restore it." Open a plan and press Restore to bring it back to the main list. #### Discounts section id: income.plans.discounts-given · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plans#income.plans.discounts-given type: section · label: "Discounts" Every person paying a price different from their plan's base price. What it does: Shows in one place who you gave a discount to, on which plan, why, and how much the price differs. How it works: The collapsed section is shown only if there is at least one such person; their count sits next to the title. Inside it reads "Who pays something other than the base price, and why." Each row shows the person, the plan, a reason label, the struck-through base price, their price and the difference (for example "−€10.00"). Only standing prices set with Set discount are listed; one-time adjustments and waived charges are not. Archived plans aren't counted. ### Plans with variants id: income.choices · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans How to offer several variants that each person picks for themselves, see who has chosen, remind those who haven't, and choose on someone's behalf. What it does: A plan with variants is one offer with several options, for example the weeks of a summer camp or the levels of a course. Each person picks their own variant, and the charge for it is issued at the moment they pick. How it works: Creating. On the Plans tab press New → New plan with variants. The window has three steps: Basics, Variants and Review. It creates a category marked as a plan with variants and one plan per variant, all for the groups you choose (or the whole school, if your access covers the whole school). Until someone picks a variant nobody is on it and nobody is charged. Everyone the choice is offered to gets one notification that a choice is waiting. What people see. On the school's Payments tab, under Your choices, a person sees the variants, picks one (or more, if you allowed it) and confirms. The charge is issued then and appears under To pay; paying is a separate step. For a child, the parent picks and pays. A pick is final. Once confirmed, the person can't change or remove it themselves; only the school can, from the Who has chosen list. For a plan outside such a category that is open to self-selection, the person can leave it themselves while it is open. How many variants. You decide whether each person can pick One or Several. An older choice may have an upper limit above one set on it, and that is kept. In the plans list. A plan with variants has its own header showing an Open label, how many variants it has and whether people pick "one per person" or "several per person", a bar "N of M chosen" with "K not yet", and the Responses and Remind buttons. Its menu has Edit plan with variants. Adding a variant later. Create a new plan with Members choose it and pick this plan in the Category field. Notifications. Staff with the Manage payment plans permission (and access to the plan's group) get a notification when a person picks a variant. Steps: 1. On the Plans tab press New → New plan with variants. 2. In Basics enter a name, choose who it is for and how many variants each person can pick, then Next. 3. In Variants add a name, price and way to pay for each variant, then Next. 4. In Review check how people will see it and press Create plan. Notes: - People's picks are final for them. If someone gets it wrong, you change their variant from Who has chosen. - A class-pack variant can only be created if lessons are enabled for the school. - The app no longer sets a deadline for choosing. If an older plan with variants has a deadline and it has passed, the label becomes Closed, people can't pick and Remind isn't available. FAQ: Q: When is the charge issued in a plan with variants? A: At the moment the person confirms their pick, or when you choose a variant for them. A one-off variant is due on the day of the pick; a repeating or pack variant follows the variant's schedule. Q: Someone picked the wrong variant. What do I do? A: They can't change it themselves. Open **Who has chosen**, press **Change** next to their name, choose which pick to replace and the new variant, and press **Save**. Unpaid charges for the old variant are cancelled and a charge is issued for the new one. #### New plan with variants window id: income.choices.offer-modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal type: modal · label: "New plan with variants" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Three steps where you set the name, who it is for and the variants, and see how it will look to people. What it does: Creates the plan with variants and each of its variants in one go. How it works: The bar at the top shows the steps Basics, Variants and Review; you can press steps you've already passed to go back. Errors show when you try to continue with Next; Back goes one step back, and on the first step the button is Cancel. Everything is saved or nothing is: if something goes wrong you see "Something went wrong. Please try again." and nothing is created. On success you see "Plan created with N variants. People are being notified.", the window closes and the Who has chosen list opens for the new plan. ##### Basics step id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics type: section · label: "Basics" The name, who it is for and how many variants each person can pick. What it does: Sets what is common to all the variants. How it works: At the top is a short explanation that this is one plan with a few variants people pick themselves, and that the charge is issued when they pick a variant. ###### Plan name field id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.name type: field · label: "Plan name" The name of the plan with variants. Required. What it does: Shown as the heading in the plans list and to people under "Your choices". How it works: Between 2 and 100 characters; the hint reads "e.g. Summer camp 2026". A shorter name gives "Give the plan a name (at least 2 characters)." ###### Who is it for? choice id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.who · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.who type: select · label: "Who is it for?" The groups the choice is offered to, or everyone in the school. What it does: Decides who can pick from the variants. How it works: A row of buttons: one per group and, only if your access covers the whole school, Everyone in the organisation. You can pick several groups. It is offered to the people in those groups; children appear under their own names and the parent pays. With nothing chosen you see "Pick at least one group, or everyone." ###### How many variants can each person pick? choice id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.pick-count · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-basics.pick-count type: select · label: "How many variants can each person pick?" One variant or several per person. What it does: Decides whether the variants exclude each other. How it works: Two buttons: One (hint "They can switch it later.", but once confirmed a pick is final for the person, see the article) and Several ("As many as they like."). The default is One, because that is how camp weeks or course levels work. ##### Variants step id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants type: section · label: "Variants" The list of variants: a name, a price and a way to pay. What it does: Describes what a person can pick and what it costs. How it works: It reads "Each variant has a name, a price and a way to pay." It starts with two empty rows; you can add up to 20 variants with Add variant and remove a row with the bin (at least one stays). A new row is paid like the last, because "Week 1", "Week 2" are usually billed alike. Each variant has a name (between 2 and 100 characters; hint "e.g. Week 1") and a price above zero. Errors show next to the field concerned when you try to continue. ###### Payment choice id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.payment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.payment type: select · label: "Payment" How the variant is paid: once, repeating or a class pack. What it does: Decides which charges picking this variant issues. How it works: Three buttons: One-off, Repeating and Class pack. One-off: one charge, due on the day of the pick. Repeating: a charge for every period. Under the buttons appear Period ("Every" a number and days/weeks/months) and, for a monthly period, Due on (Day 1, Day 5, Day 10 or Day 15). Class pack: like repeating, plus Classes per period; it reads "Each period buys that many classes; attendance counts them down." Requires lessons to be enabled for the school. ###### + Description button id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.add-description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.add-description type: button · label: "+ Description" Opens an optional description for the variant. What it does: Lets you explain what the variant includes. How it works: A field appears with the hint "What this variant includes (optional)", up to 500 characters. The description is shown to people. ###### Add variant button id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.add-variant · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-variants.add-variant type: button · label: "Add variant" Adds another variant row. What it does: Lets you offer more than two variants. How it works: Disabled at 20 variants. ##### Review step id: income.choices.offer-modal.step-review · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.offer-modal.step-review type: section · label: "Review" A summary and an exact picture of what people will see. What it does: Lets you check everything before creating the plan. How it works: Shows For (the groups or everyone) and Variants per person (one or several). Under What people will see sits an inactive sample, exactly as on their Payments tab before anyone has picked. On this step the button is Create plan. #### Plan with variants header in the list id: income.choices.section-header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.section-header type: section The state, how many have chosen, and the buttons for responses and reminders. What it does: Shows at a glance how far the choice has got. How it works: Under the name sits "Plan with variants · N variants" and "one per person" or "several per person". The bar says "N of M chosen" and "K not yet". While the figures are being counted it reads "Counting responses…". On the right are the Responses and Remind buttons. ##### Open label id: income.choices.section-header.state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.section-header.state type: badge · label: "Open" The choice is taking picks now. What it does: Tells you that people can pick. How it works: A green label next to the name. If the category has a deadline and it has passed, the label is grey and reads Closed: people can no longer pick and Remind is unavailable. A category that isn't a plan with variants has no such label. ##### Responses button id: income.choices.section-header.responses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.section-header.responses type: button · label: "Responses" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Opens the list of who has chosen. What it does: Shows everyone the choice is offered to and what they picked. How it works: Opens the Who has chosen panel, see the next element. ##### Remind button id: income.choices.section-header.remind · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.section-header.remind type: button · label: "Remind" · permissions: Billing.SendReminders Reminds everyone who hasn't picked a variant yet. What it does: Nudges the undecided to make their choice. How it works: Needs the Send payment reminders permission. The hint reads "Notifies everyone who hasn't picked a variant yet. One reminder every 12 hours." The payer (the parent, for a child) of everyone marked "Not yet" within your access is notified, according to their notification settings. You see "Reminder sent to N people." and the button becomes "Reminded N". It doesn't work if the choice is closed, if there's nobody to remind, or if a reminder went out in the last 12 hours (the app then shows a message saying so). ##### Edit plan with variants item id: income.choices.section-header.edit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.section-header.edit type: menu-item · label: "Edit plan with variants" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Opens the window with the plan with variants' settings. What it does: Lets you change the name, how many variants each person can pick, or switch the choice off. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. The Edit plan with variants window has the Plan name, a Plan with variants switch and How many variants can each person pick?; you save with Save ("Category updated."). If you switch it off, people can no longer pick, but nobody is removed from their variant and the plans' settings stay. If you switch it on again for a regular category, all its plans become available for picking and everyone the choice is offered to is notified. #### Who has chosen panel id: income.choices.responses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.responses type: drawer · label: "Who has chosen" · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Everyone the choice is offered to, with their status and chosen variant. What it does: Answers who hasn't chosen yet and lets you choose on their behalf. How it works: At the top are four numbers: Eligible, Chosen, Not yet and Locked. If the school has more than one group there is a Filter by group select (All groups) and the numbers follow the filter. The table has the columns Member (with their groups), Status and Variant (the variants picked, "Unpaid" if they still owe a charge, and the date of the pick). Only people in groups you have access to are shown. If nobody can pick yet it reads "Nobody can pick from this plan yet." At the bottom is a "Remind N who haven't chosen" button (needs Send payment reminders), with a note "Notifies the payer of everyone marked "Not yet". One reminder every 12 hours." ##### Chosen status id: income.choices.responses.status-chosen · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.responses.status-chosen type: status · label: "Chosen" The person is on at least one of the variants. What it does: Shows that a choice has been made, by the person, by the school or through their group. How it works: A green label. The Variant column shows the name of the variant picked. ##### Not yet status id: income.choices.responses.status-not-yet · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.responses.status-not-yet type: status · label: "Not yet" The person is on none of the variants. What it does: Shows who you should nudge or choose for. How it works: An amber label. These are the people who get the reminder from Remind. ##### Set by the school status id: income.choices.responses.status-locked · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.responses.status-locked type: status · label: "Set by the school" The person was put on a variant by the school or by their group, and it isn't one that can be picked. What it does: Shows a choice the person can't make or change themselves. How it works: A grey label; the figure at the top is called Locked. It happens when the variant is hidden from people, disabled or archived, or when the choice no longer takes picks. ##### Choose and Change buttons id: income.choices.responses.choose · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.responses.choose type: button · label: "Choose" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Choose or switch a variant on the person's behalf. What it does: Lets the school pick, change or remove a person's variant. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission and access to the person's group. Under the row of someone marked "Not yet" is Choose, and for everyone else, Change. A form opens: If the person already has a variant, you first pick which pick to Replace "name", or Add another option (only if the limit allows it). Then you pick the new variant from the list (with prices; variants they are already on aren't offered) or Remove variant. Under the choice it says what will happen: "Unpaid charges for "name" are cancelled. Paid charges are not refunded." and "A charge for "name" is issued and the payer is notified." Save confirms ("Variant saved for name." or "Variant removed for name."); Cancel closes the form. The school isn't held to the choice's limit and can also pick a hidden variant or one in a closed choice, but not a disabled or archived one. #### Choice notifications id: income.choices.notifications · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/choices#income.choices.notifications type: notification Who gets notified about a plan with variants, and when. What it does: Keeps people and the team in the loop. How it works: To people: when you create a plan with variants (or switch a category's choice on), everyone it is offered to gets a "choose an option" notification with a link to the Payments tab. Remind sends the same notification again. For a child, the parent gets it. To the team: when a person picks a variant, staff with the Manage payment plans permission (and access to the plan's group) get a notification that a new pick was made. After a pick the person also gets the usual notification for an issued charge. ### How plans issue charges id: income.plan-billing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-billing For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans When, with what amount and due date, charges are created from one-off, recurring and pack plans. What it does: Explains the rules behind plans so you know who gets a charge when, and why, when a plan is created, when someone joins the group, and every period. How it works: A plan can be for one or several groups, and a plan that people pick themselves can also be for the whole school. A person who is in several of the plan's groups is billed once. Who is on the plan depends on your choice when creating it: everyone in the chosen groups, only hand-picked people, or nobody to begin with (when people pick the plan themselves), and whether people who join later are added automatically. Each person pays the base price or their standing discount. A person's charge is tied to the first of the plan's groups that they attend. One-off plans. On creation everyone already on the plan gets a charge named after the plan with the chosen due date. Anyone who joins the plan later (added by you, through the group, or because they picked it themselves) gets a charge straight away, due on the plan's date if it hasn't passed, otherwise today. If the plan started with nobody and has no charges yet, the charge is due on the day they join. A person who already has an unpaid charge from the plan doesn't get a second one. Recurring and pack plans. A pack is billed by period exactly like a recurring plan: the same interval, due day and end. The difference is that a paid period's charge grants credits that last until the next period is due (see the packs article). Periods follow the interval, every N days, weeks or months. On a monthly plan the due date is the chosen day of the period (for example the 5th). A monthly plan starts on the first of the current month, or on the first of next month if this month's due day has passed. With a day or week interval the charge is due on the period's first day. A period's charge is issued automatically once its due date is 10 days away or less; its description is "plan name, period". If Ends (optional) is set, periods after that date aren't billed. No proration. A member who joins mid-period owes the whole period. Periods that ended before they joined aren't billed. A new member gets the current period's charge straight away, due on the period's due date, or today if that has passed. Disabled and archived plans issue no new charges in any of these ways. Price changes. When you change the base price or a member's discount, every still-unpaid charge from the plan is recalculated at the new price. Paid charges don't change. Notes: - Removing a member from a plan doesn't cancel charges already issued to them, cancel or waive those from the Charges tab. - When prices are recalculated, manual corrections to unpaid charges on the plan are replaced by the new price. - Charge descriptions from recurring plans contain the period in English, such as "August 2026". - A period whose due date has already passed isn't billed retroactively. If needed, change its due date under Upcoming due dates and press Generate charges now. FAQ: Q: I created a monthly plan due on the 5th, and today is the 20th. Why does nobody have a charge? A: This month's due day has passed, so the plan starts next month. The charge is issued once the 5th of next month is 10 days away. To issue it now, press **Generate charges now** in the plan details. Q: A new member joined the group on the 20th. Do they pay the whole month? A: Yes. There's no proration, they get the current period's charge straight away, for the full amount. ### Creating and editing a plan id: income.plan-modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Every field in the New plan and Edit plan windows, how people get on a plan and how that affects charges. What it does: Sets what the plan charges, how much, how often and to whom. On creation, Classes also issues the first charges to the people already on the plan. How it works: New plan has two steps: Type and Details. On Type you choose the kind of plan and how people get on it; as soon as you've picked both, the window moves on to Details by itself. Details holds the name, price, description, category and billing fields, then the collapsible Who's on it section and a summary sentence. Edit plan has only the Details screen: the type can't be changed, and who is on the plan can no longer be changed from here (see the Who's on it section). The step bar at the top lets you go back to a step you've passed. Errors show under the field concerned when you try to continue with Next or to save. Back returns to the previous step; on the first step the button is Cancel. On the last step press Create plan or Save changes. On success you see "Plan created." with a View plan link, or "Plan updated."; on failure, "Something went wrong. Please try again." Steps: 1. On the Plans tab, press New → New plan. 2. Pick the kind of plan and how people get on it; the window moves to Details. 3. Fill in Name, Price and, if you like, Description and Category, then the type's billing fields. 4. Open Who's on it and choose the groups and which people are on the plan. 5. Read the summary and press Create plan. Notes: - A pack plan can only be created if lessons are enabled for the school; otherwise you see "Something went wrong. Please try again." - Creating a one-off or pack plan, or a recurring plan whose period has already started, issues charges straight away to the people on the plan and they are notified. If the plan starts with nobody on it, there are no charges until someone joins. - You can only pick groups you have access to. Plans for the whole school can only be created by staff with access to the whole school. FAQ: Q: Can I change a plan's type after creating it? A: No. Create a new plan with the right type and disable or archive the old one. Q: Can I change the groups or who is on the plan when editing? A: No, that is switched off for now. The groups, how people get on the plan and the automatic adding of new people stay as they are. Add and remove people on a plan separately from its details, with **Add member** and **Remove from plan**. Q: If I change the price, will charges already issued change? A: Unpaid charges on the plan are recalculated at the new price. Paid ones stay as they are. #### Type step id: income.plan-modal.step-type · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type type: section · label: "Type" The choice of how the plan bills and how people get on it. Creation only. What it does: Decides whether the plan issues one charge, a charge every period, or a pack of credits, and whether you add the people or they pick it themselves. How it works: Nothing is preselected. Pick one of the three type cards and one of the two ways of getting on. As soon as you've picked both, the window moves on to Details; if you come back and change one, it moves on again by itself. Without a choice, Next shows "Pick a plan type to continue." or "Choose how people get on this plan." ##### One-off card id: income.plan-modal.step-type.oneoff · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.oneoff type: button · label: "One-off" A single charge, camp, equipment, event fee. What it does: Everyone on the plan gets one charge. How it works: Details will ask for a Due date. ##### Recurring card id: income.plan-modal.step-type.recurring · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.recurring type: button · label: "Recurring" A flat fee that generates a charge every period. What it does: Everyone on the plan gets a charge for each period. How it works: Details will ask for Repeats, the due day and an optional end. ##### Pack card id: income.plan-modal.step-type.pack · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.pack type: button · label: "Pack" Billed every period like a recurring plan, but each charge buys credits that attendance counts down. What it does: Everyone on the plan gets a charge for each period; paying it grants that period's credits. How it works: Details will ask for Repeats, the due day, an optional end and Credits per period. Requires lessons to be enabled for the school. ##### How do people get on it? question id: income.plan-modal.step-type.access · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.access type: section · label: "How do people get on it?" Whether you add the people or they pick the plan themselves. What it does: Decides what the Who's on it section offers. How it works: Two cards: You assign members: you pick the groups or people; they are on the plan and billed straight away. Members choose it: members see it on their Payments tab and pick it themselves; a charge is issued when they do. Such a plan can start with nobody on it. When editing, the question is shown inside Who's on it but is locked. ###### You assign members card id: income.plan-modal.step-type.access.assign · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.access.assign type: button · label: "You assign members" You pick the groups or people; they are on the plan and billed straight away. What it does: Suits plans the school imposes: a monthly fee for a group, a camp for certain children. How it works: The plan needs at least one group and at least one person in it. People don't see it as something they can pick. ###### Members choose it card id: income.plan-modal.step-type.access.choose · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-type.access.choose type: button · label: "Members choose it" Members see it on their Payments tab and pick it themselves; a charge is issued when they do. What it does: Suits optional activities and fees that each person decides on. How it works: The plan is offered to the people in the chosen groups, or the whole school. It can start with nobody and fill up as people pick it. Anyone who picks it gets a charge straight away. If the plan is in a category that is a plan with variants, a pick is final for the person (see the article on plans with variants); otherwise the person can drop it themselves, which cancels their unpaid charge while anything paid stays paid. #### Details step id: income.plan-modal.step-details · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details type: section · label: "Details" The plan's name, price, description, category and schedule. What it does: Sets what people will pay for and how much. How it works: The billing fields depend on the plan type and sit in a grey box under the category. When editing, this is the only screen. ##### Name field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.name · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.name type: field · label: "Name" The plan's name. Required. What it does: Shown on the card, in charges and to members. How it works: Between 2 and 100 characters; the hint gives an example name. A shorter name shows "Name must be at least 2 characters." Charges from the plan carry this name in their description. ##### Price field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.base-price · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.base-price type: field · label: "Price" The price every person pays without a discount. Required. What it does: Sets the amount of each charge from the plan, per period, once, or per pack. How it works: Entered in euro, must be above 0 (up to 999,999.99). Without a price you see "Enter a base price." People with a standing discount pay their own price. Changing it when editing recalculates every unpaid charge on the plan. ##### Description field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.description · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.description type: field · label: "Description" What the plan includes. Optional. What it does: Shown to members when they view the plan. How it works: Up to 500 characters. It isn't required; the hint reads "Optional — shown to members when they view this plan." ##### Category choice id: income.plan-modal.step-details.category · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.category type: select · label: "Category" Which category the plan sits in. Optional. What it does: Sorts the plan in the list and, if the category is a plan with variants, makes it one of the variants. How it works: The options are Uncategorised, your categories and + New category…. The last one opens a small form: a name (for example a summer camp; at least 2 characters, otherwise "Give the category a name (at least 2 characters)."), a Plan with variants switch, a choice of One or Several, and Create category and Cancel buttons; you see "Category added." and the new category is selected for you. When editing you can change the plan's category. ##### Repeats field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.repeats · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.repeats type: field · label: "Repeats" How often a charge is issued. Recurring and pack plans; required. What it does: Sets the length of one period. How it works: Reads "Every [number] [days/weeks/months]". The number (Repeat interval) is 1 to 365, default 1; the unit (Interval unit) is days, weeks or months, default months. Without a number you see "Choose how often this plan repeats."; above 365, "The interval can be at most 365." ##### Charges are due on choice id: income.plan-modal.step-details.due-day · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.due-day type: select · label: "Charges are due on" Which day of the period is the due date. Recurring and pack plans with a monthly interval. What it does: Sets the due date of every monthly charge. How it works: Choose Day 1, 5, 10 or 15 of the period; default is day 5. Only shown when the unit is months; with days or weeks the charge is due on the period's first day. If the day has already passed this month, the plan starts next month. You can re-date individual periods from the plan details. ##### Ends (optional) field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.ends · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.ends type: field · label: "Ends (optional)" A date after which the plan stops billing. Optional; recurring and pack plans. What it does: Useful for a season or school year, no new periods are billed after the end. How it works: Leaving it empty means no end. The date must be after the plan's start. ##### Due date field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.due-date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.due-date type: field · label: "Due date" The charges' due date. One-off plans. What it does: The plan's charges are issued with this date. How it works: Required when creating; without it you see "Pick a due date — the plan's charges are issued with it." When editing it's filled with the current date; changing it moves every unpaid charge on the plan to the new date. Once the date has passed, charges issued later are due on the day they're issued. If the plan starts with nobody on it, no charges are issued and the date isn't kept: the charge of anyone who joins later is due on the day they join. ##### Credits per period field id: income.plan-modal.step-details.credits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-details.credits type: field · label: "Credits per period" How many visits one period's charge buys. Packs only; required. What it does: Sets how many credits the person gets when they pay for the period. How it works: From 1 to 1000, default 8. Without a value you see "Enter a credit count." Under the field it reads "Valid until the next period is due." There is no separate validity period to choose any more: the credits last until the next period is due. A change applies to charges paid after it. #### Who's on it section id: income.plan-modal.step-audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience type: section · label: "Who's on it" The groups, the people and adding newcomers automatically. What it does: Decides who the charges are issued to. How it works: A collapsible section in the Details step; its header has a summary (for example the group names and "everyone (N people)", "N picked" or "nobody, they pick it themselves"). If there's no group it reads "Pick a group" and the section opens by itself when you try to continue. Inside are the groups, the question about the starting roster and, where relevant, the checkbox for newcomers. When editing, the section is read-only and under its header it reads "Changing who is on an existing plan is currently disabled." ##### Applies to groups choice id: income.plan-modal.step-audience.groups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience.groups type: select · label: "Applies to groups" The group or groups the plan is for. Required, unless the plan is for the whole school. What it does: One plan can cover several groups; each person is billed on it once. How it works: Chosen groups appear as cards with a remove button. Below them are quick buttons under My groups and a dropdown "Pick a group" / "Add another group" with My groups and Other groups. You can pick up to 50 groups. It reads "N groups selected, one plan, each person billed once.": a person in two chosen groups gets one charge, not two. Their charge is tied to the first of the plan's groups that they attend. Without a group you see "Select a group." You can only pick groups you have access to. ##### Everyone in the organisation card id: income.plan-modal.step-audience.everyone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience.everyone type: button · label: "Everyone in the organisation" Offers the plan to every person in the school, with no groups. What it does: Allows a plan for the whole school that anyone can see and pick. How it works: Only shown with Members choose it and only to staff whose access covers the whole school. The hint reads "No groups — every member can see it and pick it. Nobody is on it until they do." Choosing it means the plan has no groups: the group list below it becomes "Or only some groups". The plan starts with nobody on it, and a charge is issued to anyone who picks it; its details say Whole organisation. ##### Who is on this plan to begin with? question id: income.plan-modal.step-audience.members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience.members type: select · label: "Who is on this plan to begin with?" Whether everyone in the groups pays, hand-picked people, or nobody at first. Creation only. What it does: Lets a plan cover only part of the groups or start empty. How it works: Shown once you've picked at least one group. Three choices: Everyone in these groups (default): everyone in the groups is on the plan and billed. This also holds the Also add people who join later checkbox. Only people I pick: "Tick people in the groups above; only they are on the plan." Each chosen group shows its people with checkboxes, a "N selected" count, Select all and a search box when there are more than 6 people. Children are picked by name; the parent pays. People joining the groups later are not added. With nobody picked you see "Select at least one member for this plan." "Nobody — members choose it themselves": only with Members choose it. "Members of these groups see it and join when they choose. Nobody is billed until then." When a group has nobody in it, it reads "This group has no members yet." When editing this choice can't be changed; the people on the plan are managed from its details. ##### Also add people who join later checkbox id: income.plan-modal.step-audience.auto-enroll · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience.auto-enroll type: checkbox · label: "Also add people who join later" Whether new group members join the plan automatically. What it does: Decides whether the plan grows with the groups or keeps its current roster. How it works: Shown with Everyone in these groups and ticked by default. When ticked, every new person in the groups joins the plan and gets a charge straight away. When unticked it reads "Only the people on the plan now are billed. New joiners are not added.", and the plan details say "Manually managed roster". With Only people I pick, newcomers are never added. It can't be changed when editing. ##### Summary id: income.plan-modal.step-audience.preview · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.step-audience.preview type: message The sentence describing what the plan will charge. What it does: Lets you check the number of people, price and schedule before saving. How it works: Shown at the bottom of Details. For a recurring plan it shows the person count, price, interval and due day; for example "12 member(s) × €30.00, charged once." for a one-off or "… — 8 credits per period, one per attendance." for a pack. A person in several chosen groups is counted once. If the plan starts with nobody on it, it reads "Offered to 2 groups — nobody is on it yet." or "Offered to everyone in the organisation — nobody is on it yet." #### Create plan and Save changes buttons id: income.plan-modal.submit · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-modal#income.plan-modal.submit type: button · label: "Create plan" Save the plan. What it does: Create the plan (and its first charges) or save your changes. How it works: They replace Next on the last step: Create plan for a new plan and Save changes when editing. If any step has an error it's shown and nothing is saved. ### Plan details id: income.plan-detail · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans A plan's panel: price and schedule, its people, upcoming due dates and the actions on the plan. What it does: Lets you see and manage a plan, re-date a due date, issue charges, edit, disable, archive or delete the plan. How it works: Press a plan on the Plans tab; the panel opens at the side. At the top are the name, a type label, a Disabled or Archived label (if it is one) and the description (when it differs from the name). Then come the card with the price, the due date and who the plan is for, Members on this plan, a note about discounts or packs and, for recurring and pack plans, Upcoming due dates. At the bottom is a main button (Edit plan, or Restore for an archived plan) and the More actions menu with the rest: Generate charges now, Disable plan or Enable plan, and Delete or Archive. Without the Manage payment plans permission you can see the plan and its people, but plan actions aren't shown. Generate charges now needs the Manage charges permission. Steps: 1. On the Plans tab, press the plan. 2. Check the price, the schedule and the people. 3. Use the buttons at the bottom and the More actions menu for plan actions. FAQ: Q: Why don't I see a Delete button? A: A plan that has already taken payments can't be deleted, so **Archive** is shown in the menu instead of **Delete**. An archived plan keeps its payment history but doesn't bill and is hidden from members. Q: What's the difference between disabling and archiving? A: Disabling is a temporary pause, the plan stays in the main list and turns back on with one button. Archiving retires it to the **Archived plans** section. Either way no new charges are issued and members don't see the plan. #### Price and schedule card id: income.plan-detail.summary-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.summary-card type: card The price, the due date and who the plan is for. What it does: Sums up how the plan bills and who it covers. How it works: Shows the base price with "/ month", "/ N months", "/ week", "/ day" or "one-off" (for a pack also the number of classes). Below it: Due: for a monthly recurring or pack plan "Day D of each period", for a one-off the plan's date. For: the names of the plan's groups, Whole organisation for a plan with no groups, or No groups if the groups aren't visible to you. If new people in the groups aren't added automatically, it reads "Manually managed roster — people joining this group later are not added." For a pack: "N credits per period · one credit per attendance · valid until the next period is due". For an archived plan a note at the top reads "This plan is archived: members don't see it and no charges are generated. Its payment history is kept." #### Upcoming due dates section id: income.plan-detail.periods · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.periods type: section · label: "Upcoming due dates" A recurring or pack plan's current period and the next two, with each one's due date. What it does: Lets you change the due date of one specific period, for example push back a holiday month, without touching the others. How it works: Shown for recurring and pack plans. Next to the title it says "next" and the date of the nearest due date. Below it: "The due date each period will be billed on. Change one without affecting the others." Each row has the period name, a date field with the due date that will be used and, if you've changed it, a Back to the default due date button. Pick a new date and it saves at once ("Due date updated."). The new due date can't be before the period starts; otherwise you see "That date could not be used. It must not fall before the period starts." If charges were already issued for the period, the name is followed by "Charges already issued — changing this moves them": unpaid charges for that period move to the new date; paid ones stay. Changing a due date never bills anyone twice. For a pack, the next period's due date also decides how long the current period's credits last. ##### Back to the default due date button id: income.plan-detail.periods.reset · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.periods.reset type: button · label: "Back to the default due date" Returns the period's due date to the day set on the plan. What it does: Undoes the manual due-date change for that period. How it works: Only shown for a period whose due date was changed. Unpaid charges already issued for the period move back to the default date. "Back to the default due date." appears. #### Discounts note id: income.plan-detail.override-note · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.override-note type: message · label: "N member(s) pay below the base price." A reminder of how many people on the plan have a discount. What it does: Points you to the full list of discounts. How it works: Shown under the people on a one-off or recurring plan with at least one discount: "… See "Discounts" at the bottom of Plans." #### Generate charges now action id: income.plan-detail.generate-charges · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.generate-charges type: menu-item · label: "Generate charges now" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Immediately issues the charges plan members are missing. What it does: Makes sure everyone on the plan has something to pay, without waiting for automatic billing. How it works: It's in the More actions menu, with the hint "Bill everyone on the plan who has no unpaid charge." Needs the Manage charges permission and is only shown for an active, non-archived plan. Opens the Generate charges window with an explanation for the plan type; press Generate now or Cancel. It's safe to press more than once, nobody gets two unpaid charges for the same thing. On success you see "N charge(s) generated." or "Everyone on this plan already has their charge — nothing to generate." ##### Generate charges window id: income.plan-detail.generate-charges.modal · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.generate-charges.modal type: modal · label: "Generate charges" The confirmation explaining exactly what will be issued. What it does: Tells you who will be charged before you confirm. How it works: Recurring plan: issues charges only for the current period (the first under Upcoming due dates) to anyone without a charge for it yet. Later periods are billed once they start. One-off plan: issues the plan's charge to everyone on it who doesn't currently owe one: people who joined after creation, and those who already paid and are being charged again. Pack: billed by period like a recurring plan, so it issues the current period's charge to everyone who doesn't have one yet. Paying it grants the period's credits. (The wording in the window for a pack is older and describes billing everyone who owes nothing.) In every case, people with an unpaid charge from the plan are skipped. Everyone who gets a charge is notified. #### Edit plan button id: income.plan-detail.edit-plan · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.edit-plan type: button · label: "Edit plan" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Opens the window for editing the plan. What it does: Lets you change the name, price, description, category, schedule and due date. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. It's the main button at the bottom (for an archived plan it's in the More actions menu). Closes the panel and opens Edit plan: see the article on creating and editing a plan. The plan's groups and who is on it can't be changed from there; manage the people on the plan from Members on this plan. #### Disable plan and Enable plan actions id: income.plan-detail.toggle-active · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.toggle-active type: menu-item · label: "Disable plan · Enable plan" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Pause the plan or start it again. What it does: Lets you pause billing, for example over the summer, without losing the plan. How it works: They are in the More actions menu and need the Manage payment plans permission; the hint when disabling is "Stops new charges. Members and history stay." A disabled plan issues no new charges (automatically, for new members, or with Generate charges now) and is hidden from members. Charges already issued remain. You see "Plan disabled." or "Plan enabled." #### Archive and Restore actions id: income.plan-detail.archive · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.archive type: menu-item · label: "Archive · Restore" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Retire a plan with payments, or bring it back. What it does: Lets you clear an old plan from the list when it can't be deleted because it has payments. How it works: They need the Manage payment plans permission. Archive is in the More actions menu instead of Delete once the plan has taken payments; its hint reads "It has payments, so it can’t be deleted." An archived plan moves to Archived plans, is hidden from members and issues no charges; its payment history is kept. You see "Plan archived. Find it under "Archived plans" at the bottom of the list." Restore (the main button on an archived plan) brings it back exactly as it was, including whether it was enabled or disabled ("Plan restored.") #### Delete action id: income.plan-detail.delete · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-detail#income.plan-detail.delete type: menu-item · label: "Delete" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Deletes a plan that has no payments yet. What it does: Removes a plan created by mistake or never used. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission, is in the More actions menu and is only shown if the plan has no paid charges. Opens the Delete plan window asking "Delete this plan? This can't be undone."; press Delete or Cancel. "Plan deleted." appears and the panel closes. Notes: - Unpaid charges already issued from the plan aren't cancelled automatically, cancel them from the Charges tab if they shouldn't be paid. ### Plan members and discounts id: income.plan-members · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=plans · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans, Billing.ManageCharges How to add and remove people from a plan, give discounts, adjust or waive the next charge, and change a pack's credits. What it does: Manages who pays on the plan and at what price, with exceptions for individual members, each with a reason. How it works: The Members on this plan section in the plan details lists every member with the price they pay. If it differs from the base price, the base price is struck through and a reason label sits beside it. Under the name is a label showing how the person got on the plan (Via group, Added by staff or Self-picked) and labels with the plan's groups they attend; on a plan with several groups this shows why they are on it. For a pack, each row shows remaining credits out of the total, the expiry date and the pack status. The subtitle reads "Tap a member for price actions, every exception needs a reason.", or for a pack "Each member's remaining credits and expiry." Press a row to see the actions for that member. Which actions you see depends on your permissions: adding, removing and discounts need Manage payment plans, while adjusting or waiving the next charge needs Manage charges. With neither, rows don't open. Steps: 1. Open the plan from the Plans tab. 2. In Members on this plan, press the member's row. 3. Choose an action, such as Set discount. 4. Fill in the fields and press Save. FAQ: Q: What's the difference between Set discount and One-time adjustment? A: **Set discount** changes the price the member pays on the plan from now on, for all future charges and for currently unpaid ones. **One-time adjustment** changes only the nearest unpaid charge. Q: I removed a member from a plan. Is their charge cancelled? A: No. Charges already issued stay. If they shouldn't be paid, cancel or waive them from the **Charges** tab. #### Add member button id: income.plan-members.add-member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.add-member type: button · label: "Add member" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Adds someone to the plan, even if they're not in its group. What it does: Puts a member or child on the plan so they're billed under it. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. Opens a panel with a Search members… box and a list of every member and child in the school not yet on the plan; a child shows "pays:" and the parent. Pick one person and press Add, name. People are added one at a time; the panel stays open for the next. The button reads Cancel while the panel is open. If the plan is active and not archived, the person added gets a charge straight away: on a recurring or pack plan, for the current period if it has started; on a one-off plan, unless they already owe an unpaid charge from it. The person added gets an Added by staff label. You see "Member added to plan." Notes: - If everyone is already on the plan it reads "Everyone is already on this plan."; if search finds nobody, "No members match your search." #### Member row id: income.plan-members.member-row · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row type: list The member, their price and the actions that open when pressed. What it does: Shows each member's price and gives access to their exceptions. How it works: If nobody is on the plan it reads "No members on this plan yet." Press a row to show its buttons; the chosen action opens a small form in the row. Cancel closes the form without changes. ##### How they got on the plan label id: income.plan-members.member-row.source · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.source type: badge · label: "Via group · Added by staff · Self-picked" Shows how the person got on the plan. What it does: Helps you see why someone is on the plan and whether you added them. How it works: Via group: they're on the plan because they are in one of its groups. Added by staff: added by staff, with Add member, when the plan was created, or by choosing for the person. Self-picked: the person picked the plan themselves. Next to it are the plan's groups that the person attends. ##### Set discount button id: income.plan-members.member-row.set-discount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.set-discount type: button · label: "Set discount" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Sets a standing price for this member on the plan. What it does: The member pays this price instead of the base price on every later charge from the plan. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. Fill in New standing price: the actual price the member will pay, not the size of the discount (0 to 999,999.99; 0 means free), and Reason (required, up to 500 characters), then Save. Without an amount or reason you see "Enter an amount and a reason." The member's unpaid charges on the plan are recalculated at the new price. The discount shows in the row's label, in the plan's discount count and in the Discounts section. "Discount saved." appears. The reason you write isn't only for you: the person (or the parent) sees it next to their price as "Reason for the price change". Word it so it is fine for the family to read. ##### One-time adjustment button id: income.plan-members.member-row.one-time-adjustment · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.one-time-adjustment type: button · label: "One-time adjustment" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Changes only the amount of the member's next unpaid charge on the plan. What it does: Suits a single case, such as half a month missed. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission; not shown on pack plans. It affects the plan's unpaid charge with the earliest due date. Fill in New amount (0.01 to 99,999.99) and Reason (required, up to 500 characters) and press Save. If the member has no unpaid charge from the plan it reads "No upcoming charge to adjust." "Charge adjusted." appears; in the charge details the amount shows as This charge only. The reason is also shown to the person on their charge as "Reason the amount was changed". Notes: - If the base price or the member's discount changes later, the adjustment is replaced by the new price. ##### Waive next charge button id: income.plan-members.member-row.waive-next-charge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.waive-next-charge type: button · label: "Waive next charge" · permissions: Billing.ManageCharges Waives the member's unpaid charge on the plan with the earliest due date. What it does: A quick way to let a member off one period, for example when ill. How it works: Needs the Manage charges permission. It asks "Waive the €… charge that's next due?"; press Confirm waive. It doesn't ask for a reason, the charge is recorded with the reason "other". The member is notified. If there is no unpaid charge it reads "No upcoming charge to adjust." "Next charge waived." appears. Notes: - For a specific reason such as Sick month, waive the charge from its details on the Charges tab. ##### Adjust credits button id: income.plan-members.member-row.adjust-credits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.adjust-credits type: button · label: "Adjust credits" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Deducts or gives back credits on the member's pack. What it does: Corrects the balance, for example for a missed attendance mark or a visit that shouldn't count. How it works: Only shown on a pack plan, for a paid pack that hasn't expired, and needs the Manage payment plans permission. The number shows remaining credits out of the total. − (Deduct one credit) lowers it, + (Give back one credit) raises it, you can't deduct more than remain or give back more than were used. The pack's total credits never change. Type a reason and press the button that says what will happen, such as Deduct 2 credits or Give back 1 credit. With no change or no reason you see "Choose how many credits to deduct or give back, and add a reason." "Credits updated." appears. ##### Remove discount button id: income.plan-members.member-row.remove-discount · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.remove-discount type: button · label: "Remove discount" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Returns the member to the plan's base price. What it does: Ends the standing discount. How it works: Only shown for a member with a discount and needs the Manage payment plans permission. It asks "Remove this member's discount and bill them the standard price?"; press Yes, remove discount. The member's unpaid charges on the plan are recalculated at the base price. "Discount removed." appears. ##### Remove from plan button id: income.plan-members.member-row.remove-from-plan · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/plan-members#income.plan-members.member-row.remove-from-plan type: button · label: "Remove from plan" · permissions: Billing.ManagePlans Stops billing the member on this plan. What it does: Takes the member off the plan without removing them from the group. How it works: Needs the Manage payment plans permission. It asks "Remove this member from the plan?"; press Yes, remove. The member stays in the group but is no longer billed on the plan, even if the plan adds group members automatically. Charges already issued to them aren't cancelled. "Member removed from plan." appears. ### Credit packs id: income.packs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/packs For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=history · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials How packs work: when credits are granted, used and expire, and what happens on a visit without a pack. What it does: A pack is a prepaid number of visits for a period, for example 8 classes a month. The person pays the period's charge, and each counted attendance lowers their credits. How it works: Billing. A pack plan is billed by period like a recurring plan: a new charge for every period, with the same interval and due day. The next period's charge is issued automatically once its due date is 10 days away or less. Granting. The period's credits are granted when its charge is paid, online, in cash or by bank. They last until the next period is due (if that due date was re-dated by hand, the limit moves with it), and in the plan's last period, until its end. There is no separate validity in days any more. Using. One credit per attendance, only on classes that count towards packs. According to the app's note, credits are used when the lesson is closed; if you un-mark attendance, the credit goes back to the same pack. The credit comes from the pack for the class's group; if that group sells no pack, a pack from another group can be used. Visit without a pack. If the member attends without a valid pack, the visit still counts and their balance goes below zero, the Visits owed (no pack) row. When they pay for the next pack, the owed visits are taken out of the new credits. Undoing a payment. If you undo a cash or bank payment on a pack's charge, the pack is removed because it was never paid for. Classes already taken from it stay recorded as visits owed and, if the person has another usable pack, are taken out of it; otherwise they wait for the next paid pack. If you pay the same charge again, a fresh pack is issued and takes over the owed visits. A card payment can't be undone. Expiry and renewal. Every day, packs past their date become Expired. The member gets one "Renew your pack" notification when their credits run out or the pack expires within 3 days. Renewal is the next period's charge: once the person pays it, they get the new credits. If that charge hasn't been issued yet, you can issue it with Generate charges now. Notes: - School-wide pack balances are under History → Pack balances; for one plan, in its details. - Pack plans can only be created if lessons are enabled for the school. FAQ: Q: A member came after their credits ran out. Do we lose the visit? A: No. The visit is recorded as owed and their balance goes negative. When they pay for a new pack, the owed visits are deducted from it. Q: Do unused credits carry over? A: No. Once the next period is due, the pack becomes **Expired** and remaining credits can't be used. #### Active status id: income.packs.status-active · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/packs#income.packs.status-active type: status · label: "Active" A paid pack with credits left that hasn't expired. What it does: Shows the member can attend on the pack. How it works: Green label. Becomes Exhausted when credits run out, or Expired when the period ends. #### Exhausted status id: income.packs.status-exhausted · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/packs#income.packs.status-exhausted type: status · label: "Exhausted" Every credit in the pack has been used. What it does: A sign the member needs to pay for a new pack. How it works: Yellow label. If you un-mark an attendance or give back a credit, the pack becomes Active again as long as it hasn't expired. The Visits owed (no pack) row always has this status too. #### Expired status id: income.packs.status-expired · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/packs#income.packs.status-expired type: status · label: "Expired" The pack's validity period has passed. What it does: Shows remaining credits can no longer be used. How it works: Grey label. An expired pack's credits can't be adjusted. #### Visits owed (no pack) row id: income.packs.overdraft · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/packs#income.packs.overdraft type: other · label: "Visits owed (no pack)" A member's visits counted without a valid pack. What it does: Keeps track of visits not yet covered by a paid pack. How it works: Shown in Pack balances in place of the plan name. Credits are negative or zero. The debt is covered automatically by the next paid pack, as far as its credits go. Credits on this row can't be adjusted by hand. ### History tab id: income.history · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history For: schools · In the app: /admin/income?tab=history · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Income by payment method, the revenue chart, how old your debts are, top debtors and pack balances. What it does: Gives you the reports for following your school's money: where it comes from, how it moves over time, and which debts have been sitting longest. How it works: At the top are three cards with this month's payments by method. Next is the Monthly Income chart with a week, month or year choice. Then Receivables aging with debts grouped by days late, and Top debtors. The Pack balances table is at the bottom. All figures only include completed payments and unpaid charges you have access to. An undone or deleted payment isn't counted. Steps: 1. Open Finance and the History tab. 2. Press a payment-method card to see those payments on Charges. 3. In the chart, choose Week, Month or Year and a date. FAQ: Q: What counts as income in the chart? A: Every completed payment, online, cash or bank, on its payment date. Unpaid and waived charges aren't income. #### Payment method cards id: income.history.method-cards · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.method-cards type: section · label: "Paid online · Paid in cash · Paid by bank transfer" How much was collected this month online, in cash and by bank transfer. What it does: Shows how members pay you and helps reconcile the cash box and bank account. How it works: Each card shows the total of completed payments by that method since the start of the current calendar month, and a line such as "45% of October revenue · 12 payments". A card with no payments shows €0.00. Press a card to go to Charges with the Paid filter and that payment method selected. #### Monthly Income chart id: income.history.revenue-chart · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.revenue-chart type: chart · label: "Monthly Income" A chart of payments received by day or month. What it does: Shows how income moves over time. How it works: Adds up completed payments by payment date. The subtitle reads "Income trends for current year" whatever period is selected. Hovering a point shows the amount for that day or month. ##### Week, Month, Year buttons id: income.history.revenue-chart.period · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.revenue-chart.period type: toggle · label: "Week · Month · Year" The chart's period choice. What it does: Decides whether you see days of a week, days of a month or months of a year. How it works: Week (default) shows the seven days, Monday to Sunday, of the week containing the chosen date. Month shows every day of the chosen month. Year shows the twelve months of the chosen year. ##### Chart date field id: income.history.revenue-chart.date · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.revenue-chart.date type: field · label: "Select Week · Select Month · Select Year" Which week, month or year the chart shows. What it does: Lets you look at past periods. How it works: Defaults to today. With Week pick a day (DD/MM/YYYY), with Month a month (MM/YYYY), with Year a year (YYYY). #### Receivables aging section id: income.history.aging · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.aging type: section · label: "Receivables aging" How much of what's owed is late, and by how many days. What it does: Shows which debts have been sitting longest, "old debt is the debt you lose". How it works: The subtitle gives the total amount outstanding. Unpaid charges are split into four bars: Not due yet, 1–7 days, 8–30 days and 30+ days overdue. Each bar shows the amount and number of charges; its length is relative to the largest amount. #### Top debtors list id: income.history.top-debtors · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.top-debtors type: list · label: "Top debtors" The five payers with the largest total unpaid amount. What it does: Shows who to focus on first. How it works: Groups unpaid charges by payer (for children, the parent) and shows the five with the largest amount. Under the name it reads "N charge(s) · D days late", where D is the longest delay among their charges. Only shown when there are unpaid charges. ##### Remind button id: income.history.top-debtors.remind · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.top-debtors.remind type: button · label: "Remind" A button for reminding the debtor, not active yet. What it does: Does nothing for now. How it works: The button is grey and inactive; hovering shows "Needs a backend endpoint, tracked as a fast-follow". To remind someone, go to Charges, select their charges and press Send reminder. #### Pack balances table id: income.history.pack-balances · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/history#income.history.pack-balances type: table · label: "Pack balances" The credits on every pack in the school. What it does: Shows who has how many visits, when their pack expires and who owes visits. How it works: The subtitle reads "Credits count down when attendance is finalized, a visit without a pack goes below zero until the next pack is bought." Columns are Member, Plan (or Visits owed (no pack)), Credits as "remaining/total", Expires and Status. On a phone each pack is a card. With no packs it reads "No active pack balances for this organization."; on error, "Failed to load pack balances." with Try again. Notes: - For the Visits owed (no pack) row, the Expires column shows "31 Dec" even though that row never expires. ### Invoices and the payments list id: income.invoices · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/income/invoices For: schools · In the app: /admin/invoices · permissions: Billing.ViewFinancials Where the Invoices and Payments pages went, today everything is on the Finance page. What it does: Helps you find familiar actions: creating an invoice, changing its status and reviewing payments all happen on the Finance page now. How it works: Invoices are now charges. The old invoices page address takes you to Finance automatically. New invoice → the New charge button on the Charges tab. Set status to paid → Mark paid, cash or Mark paid, bank in the charge details or the bulk bar. Online payments are recorded on their own. Cancelled invoice → Cancel charge; to let someone off with a reason, Waive. Delete → Delete charge (not for online payments). Payments list → the Paid filter on Charges, optionally with a payment method; totals and the chart are on History. Adding payments manually → the Add payment button, on Charges or in a user's details panel. Members see their unpaid charges and pay them on the school's Payments tab. FAQ: Q: Can parents request an invoice from the school? A: Classes has no such request on the parent side. The school issues charges and parents pay them. Q: Did my old invoices disappear? A: No. They were turned into charges and appear on the **Charges** tab with the matching status. ## Attendance id: attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance For: schools Marking attendance for today, per session and in the grid, closing sessions and notes. ### The Attendance page id: attendance.attendance-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance The place in the admin dashboard where staff see sessions and sign-ups and record who actually attended. What it does: Brings everything about attendance together: who signed up for a session, who actually came, notes about members and the lesson for each session. From here you record attendance for one session or for a whole month at once. How it works: Open it from Attendance in the admin dashboard sidebar. At the top there are three views: Sessions, Sign-ups and Grid. Unless you pick another, the page opens on Sessions. The chosen view is kept in the page address, so refreshing or going back keeps you where you were. Clicking a session opens the attendance panel on the right. The session itself (time, audience, recurrence, cancelling) is managed in the calendar, which is why there is an Open in calendar button throughout. Every staff member of the school can view attendance. To record, finalize or reopen attendance you need the Manage attendance permission. Without it the buttons are shown but disabled. The school owner has every permission. Steps: 1. In the admin dashboard sidebar, press Attendance. 2. Choose a view: Sessions, Sign-ups or Grid. 3. Click a session to open the attendance panel. Notes: - If the marking buttons are grey and hovering shows “You don't have permission to record attendance”, ask the school owner for the Manage attendance permission. - If your access is limited to your own groups, you only see and mark sessions and members from those groups. FAQ: Q: Who can record attendance? A: The school owner and staff with the **Manage attendance** permission. Every other staff member can only view it. Q: Do parents see the attendance I record? A: No. Recorded attendance isn't shown to members or parents and doesn't send them a notification. They only see its effects, such as pack credits used or notes shared with them. #### Attendance link in the sidebar id: attendance.attendance-page.sidebar-link · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.sidebar-link type: link · label: "Attendance" Opens the attendance page from the sidebar. What it does: Takes you straight to attendance for the selected school. How it works: It sits under Admin Actions in the sidebar, after Calendar (if you see it) and before Groups. It is shown to school owners and to every staff member. The page opens for the school selected in the admin dashboard. #### View switcher id: attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher type: section The three tabs at the top that change the page view. What it does: Lets you look at attendance three ways: as a list of sessions, by sign-ups for the coming days, or as a monthly grid. How it works: The tabs are, in order, Sessions, Sign-ups and Grid. The chosen view is remembered in the page address. Sessions is the default view and the only one with nothing extra in the address. ##### Sessions view id: attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.sessions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.sessions type: tab · label: "Sessions" A list of upcoming or past sessions, with search and a group filter. What it does: Helps you find a specific session, today's, a future one or a past one, and record its attendance. How it works: This is the default view and the first tab. Sessions are grouped by date and split into pages. Clicking a row opens the attendance panel. ##### Sign-ups view id: attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.signups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.signups type: tab · label: "Sign-ups" Today's and the next sessions as cards showing who signed up. What it does: Shows at a glance who is coming, who can't make it and who hasn't replied for today's and upcoming sessions. How it works: Each session is a card with three columns. From here you can send a reminder to everyone who hasn't replied. See the Sign-ups view article for details. ##### Grid view id: attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.grid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.view-switcher.grid type: tab · label: "Grid" A whole-month table: members in rows, sessions in columns. What it does: Gives you each member's attendance for the month and lets you mark quickly by clicking a cell. How it works: Choose a group and a month. Each cell shows present, absent or not marked yet. See the Attendance grid article for details. #### Mark attendance button in the calendar id: attendance.attendance-page.calendar-shortcut · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.calendar-shortcut type: link · label: "Mark attendance" A shortcut from a session in the calendar to its attendance panel. What it does: Saves you finding the session in the list: you record attendance straight from the calendar without leaving it. How it works: The button is in the session preview in the school calendar and only staff see it. It opens the attendance panel for that session and date on top of the calendar, so you don't change page. It isn't shown for cancelled sessions. To see the session on the Attendance page, press View on attendance page at the top of the panel. #### View on attendance page button id: attendance.attendance-page.highlighted-session · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.highlighted-session type: link · label: "View on attendance page" From the panel in the calendar it takes you to the same session in the sessions list. What it does: Shows where the session sits on the Attendance page, when you want to carry on with other sessions in the list. How it works: The button is at the top of the attendance panel when you opened it from the calendar. The Attendance page opens on the Sessions view, switches to Upcoming or Past depending on the session's date, shows all groups, finds the page the session is on, scrolls to it and highlights it for about two seconds. The panel does not open again. If the session is no longer in the list, you stay on the first page. #### Attendance-related permissions id: attendance.attendance-page.permissions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.permissions type: other · permissions: Attendance.Record, Lessons.View, Lessons.Author, Notes.Author, Events.Manage Which staff permissions unlock which actions on the page. What it does: Explains why some buttons are disabled or missing for a given staff member. How it works: Manage attendance: marking here / not here, Mark everyone attended, Finalize attendance and Reopen attendance. View lessons: shows the Lesson tab in the session panel. Author lessons: writing, attaching files and publishing a lesson. Author notes: viewing, adding and sharing notes about members. Manage events and their sessions: sending a reminder with Remind all in the Sign-ups view. The school owner grants permissions in the employee's settings. The owner has every permission. #### Staff limited to their own groups id: attendance.attendance-page.group-reach · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/attendance-page#attendance.attendance-page.group-reach type: other What staff whose access is limited to their groups see on the page. What it does: Keeps data of other groups private while still letting the staff member run attendance for their own. How it works: When Access to groups for an employee is set to Only their groups, they only see sessions and members from the groups they are assigned to. They can only mark attendance for members of those groups. If they aren't assigned to any group yet, there is nothing to see. ### Sessions view id: attendance.sessions · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance The list of upcoming and past sessions from which you open attendance marking. What it does: Helps you find any session, today's, a future one or a past one, see how many people signed up or attended, and open its attendance with one click. How it works: At the top there is an Upcoming / Past switch, a search box and a group picker. In Upcoming, page one starts with today's sessions under a date marked Today, then a Later divider and the future sessions. Past lists sessions before today, newest first. Sessions are grouped by date, 10 per page. The counts column changes its heading: in Upcoming it is Sign-ups (who said they're coming or not), in Past it is Attendance (who was marked here or not here). Clicking anywhere on a row opens the attendance panel. The calendar icon at the end of the row opens the session itself in the calendar. Steps: 1. Open Attendance and choose the Sessions view. 2. Pick Upcoming or Past. 3. Optionally search by name or choose a group. 4. Click the session's row to record attendance. Notes: - Choosing a group only filters the sessions on the page already loaded, the number of pages doesn't change. If a page looks empty, go to the next one. - Today's sessions only appear on page one of Upcoming, not in Past. - When you arrive from the calendar with View on attendance page, the session's row is briefly highlighted and scrolled into view. - On a phone the table is shown as cards, see Session card on a phone. FAQ: Q: Why don't the Upcoming counts match attendance? A: In **Upcoming** the column shows **Sign-ups**: who said they would come. Actual attendance is shown in **Past** or in the session panel. Q: How do I change the time or cancel a session? A: Press the **Open in calendar** icon on the row. Time, audience, recurrence and cancelling are managed in the calendar. #### Session search box id: attendance.sessions.search · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.search type: search · label: "Search sessions..." Searches sessions by name. What it does: Narrows the list to sessions whose name contains what you type. How it works: It ignores upper and lower case and runs shortly after you stop typing. It takes you back to page one and also applies to today's sessions in Upcoming. #### Group picker id: attendance.sessions.group-filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.group-filter type: select · label: "All groups" Shows only one group's sessions. What it does: Helps you focus on a particular group's sessions. How it works: It defaults to All groups. When you pick a group, the sessions aimed at it remain, including sessions shared by several groups. Changing the group takes you back to page one. The filter works on the page already loaded, so the page count stays the same. #### Upcoming / Past switch id: attendance.sessions.period · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.period type: section Chooses whether you see future or past sessions. What it does: Separates today's and future work from attendance history. How it works: Switching takes you back to page one. It starts on Upcoming. ##### Upcoming tab id: attendance.sessions.period.upcoming · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.period.upcoming type: tab · label: "Upcoming" Today's and future sessions. What it does: Shows the sessions you still have to record attendance for. How it works: Page one starts with today's sessions, then a divider and the future sessions, in date and time order. The counts column shows Sign-ups. ##### Past tab id: attendance.sessions.period.past · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.period.past type: tab · label: "Past" Sessions before today. What it does: Lets you review or correct attendance for sessions that have already happened. How it works: They are ordered newest to oldest. The counts column shows Attendance: how many were marked here and not here. #### Sessions table id: attendance.sessions.table · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table type: table Sessions grouped under date headings. What it does: Shows everything important about a session on one row and opens its attendance with a click. How it works: Each date is a heading row with that day's sessions below it. Clicking a row opens the attendance panel. Cancelled sessions are faded with the name struck through. ##### Date heading row id: attendance.sessions.table.date-heading · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.date-heading type: other The weekday and date above that day's sessions. What it does: Saves repeating the date on every row. How it works: The date is written in the app language. If it is today's date, a Today label sits next to it. ###### Today label id: attendance.sessions.table.date-heading.today-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.date-heading.today-badge type: badge · label: "Today" Marks the date of today's sessions. What it does: Helps you spot straight away the sessions you are most likely marking now. How it works: It only appears in Upcoming, next to today's date heading. ##### Later divider id: attendance.sessions.table.later-divider · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.later-divider type: other · label: "Later" The line between today's and future sessions. What it does: Visibly separates today's sessions from the following days. How it works: It appears on page one of Upcoming, right after today's sessions. ##### Session column id: attendance.sessions.table.session-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.session-column type: column · label: "Session" The session's name, group and description. What it does: Shows which session it is and which group it belongs to. How it works: Below the name there is a coloured dot with the group name and, on a computer, the first line of the description. Cancelled and Lesson labels can appear next to the name. ###### Cancelled label id: attendance.sessions.table.session-column.cancelled-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.session-column.cancelled-badge type: badge · label: "Cancelled" Shows the session on this date is cancelled. What it does: Warns you this session won't take place. How it works: The row is faded and the name struck through. Sessions are cancelled and reinstated from the calendar. ###### Lesson label id: attendance.sessions.table.session-column.lesson-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.session-column.lesson-badge type: badge · label: "Lesson" Shows the session already has a lesson. What it does: Helps you see which sessions already have a lesson written. How it works: It appears when the session has a lesson, draft or published. Open it from the Lesson tab in the session panel. ##### Time column id: attendance.sessions.table.time-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.time-column type: column · label: "Time" The session's start and end time. What it does: Shows when the session is during the day. How it works: If the time for this date was changed in the calendar, the changed time is shown. ##### Sign-ups / Attendance column id: attendance.sessions.table.counts-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.counts-column type: column · label: "Attendance" Two counts, one with a green tick, one with a red cross. What it does: Shows at a glance how many people are coming or came. How it works: In Upcoming the heading is Sign-ups: the green count is how many said they're coming, the red one how many said they aren't. In Past the heading is Attendance: the green count is how many were marked here, the red one how many were marked not here. Unmarked people aren't counted. ##### Employee column id: attendance.sessions.table.employee-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.employee-column type: column · label: "Employee" The staff assigned to the session's groups. What it does: Shows who on the team is responsible for the session. How it works: The first employee's name is shown, with a +N label for the rest. Hover the label to see their names. A dash means no staff are assigned to the groups. The column is only shown on a computer. ##### Actions column id: attendance.sessions.table.actions-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.actions-column type: column · label: "Actions" Holds the button that opens the session in the calendar. What it does: Gives you a way to the session's own settings. How it works: It only holds the Open in calendar icon. Everything else is in the panel you open by clicking the row. ###### Open in calendar icon id: attendance.sessions.table.actions-column.open-in-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.table.actions-column.open-in-calendar type: link · label: "Open in calendar" Opens the session in the school calendar. What it does: Takes you where the session's time, audience, recurrence, cancelling and deleting are changed. How it works: Pressing it doesn't open the attendance panel, it opens the calendar on the session's date. #### Session card on a phone id: attendance.sessions.mobile-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.mobile-card type: card What a table row looks like on a narrow screen. What it does: Lays out the session's details so they read comfortably on a phone. How it works: Instead of columns each session is a card with the name, labels, group, time, counts and the Open in calendar icon. The Employee column and the description aren't shown, but the card has a label for pending replies. Tapping the card opens the attendance panel. ##### Pending replies label id: attendance.sessions.mobile-card.pending-badge · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.mobile-card.pending-badge type: badge · label: "{{count}} pending" How many members haven't said yet whether they're coming. What it does: Tells you whether it's worth reminding people about the session. How it works: A yellow N pending label means that many members have neither confirmed nor declined. A green All responded label means everyone has replied. A dash is shown for a cancelled session or a session without a group. #### Pages id: attendance.sessions.pagination · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.pagination type: other · label: "Showing" Moving between pages of sessions. What it does: Lets you go through all sessions, 10 per page. How it works: Below the table it says which results you are seeing out of how many, for example 'Showing 1 to 10 of 42 results'. Today's sessions on page one of Upcoming come on top of those 10. #### No sessions found message id: attendance.sessions.empty-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.empty-state type: message · label: "No sessions found" Shown when no sessions match your choices. What it does: Tells you the list is empty, not that something broke. How it works: It appears when there are no sessions in the chosen tab, for the search, or on this page after picking a group. Try the other tab, clear the search or pick All groups. #### Loading error message id: attendance.sessions.error-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/sessions#attendance.sessions.error-state type: message · label: "Error loading attendance data" Shown when sessions can't be loaded. What it does: Tells you the data didn't load and the list isn't current. How it works: Refresh the page in a moment. If the error stays, check your internet connection. ### Sign-ups view id: attendance.signups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance?view=today Cards for today's and upcoming sessions showing who signed up, who can't make it and who hasn't replied. What it does: Gives you a quick look before sessions: how many people to expect and whom to remind because they haven't replied. How it works: The view shows today's sessions and the next 25 upcoming ones, grouped by day. Under each day it says how many sessions there are, how many people signed up and how many haven't replied. Each session is a card with three columns: Signed up, Can't make it and Hasn't signed up. It only shows sign-ups (what members said), not actual attendance. Clicking the top of a card opens the attendance panel. Cards with people who haven't replied have a yellow border. Steps: 1. Open Attendance and choose Sign-ups. 2. Look through each session's columns. 3. If anyone hasn't replied, press Remind all. 4. Click the card's title to record attendance. Notes: - For sessions further ahead or in the past, use the Sessions view. - If the owner has switched off members marking their own attendance (Organisation settings › Attendance answers), members don't see the Attending and Not Attending buttons, so everyone stays in the Hasn't signed up column. The owner can also set how long before the session members can still change their answer. - Children are listed once per child on the roster, marked (Child). FAQ: Q: What's the difference between a sign-up and attendance? A: A sign-up is what the member said beforehand, that they will or won't come. Attendance is what staff record in the session panel about who actually came. #### Day heading id: attendance.signups.day-heading · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.day-heading type: section The day, the date and a summary of sign-ups for it. What it does: Shows briefly what's ahead of you that day. How it works: The heading is the weekday and date, with a Today label for today. Below it reads, for example, '3 sessions · 24 signed up · 5 haven't replied', totals for all sessions that day. ##### Day summary id: attendance.signups.day-heading.summary · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.day-heading.summary type: other · label: "{{count}} sessions · {{going}} signed up · {{pending}} haven't replied" Number of sessions, sign-ups and non-replies for the day. What it does: Gives you the day's figures without adding up the cards. How it works: Sign-ups and non-replies are added across all the day's sessions, so someone signed up for two sessions counts twice. #### Session card id: attendance.signups.session-card · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card type: card One session with its time, name, group and three sign-up columns. What it does: Shows in one place who's coming to the session and opens its attendance. How it works: The top shows the time, name and group. Clicking it (or pressing Enter) opens the attendance panel. A yellow border means someone hasn't replied yet. On a phone the columns stack under each other. ##### Full and Cancelled labels id: attendance.signups.session-card.status-pill · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.status-pill type: badge · label: "Full" Shows whether the session is full or cancelled. What it does: Warns you there are no spots left or the session won't take place. How it works: Full is shown when the session has an attendance limit and sign-ups have reached it. Cancelled is shown for a cancelled session. If neither applies, there is no label. ##### Signed up column id: attendance.signups.session-card.going-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.going-column type: list · label: "Signed up" Members who confirmed they're coming. What it does: Shows whom to expect at the session. How it works: The count is next to the heading. Each person has initials and a name. An empty column reads Nobody. Long lists scroll inside the column. ##### Can't make it column id: attendance.signups.session-card.not-going-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.not-going-column type: list · label: "Can't make it" Members who said they won't come. What it does: Shows who declined the session in advance. How it works: It works like the Signed up column. Declining isn't a recorded absence, attendance is recorded separately in the session panel. ##### Hasn't signed up column id: attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column type: list · label: "Hasn't signed up" Members on the session's roster who neither confirmed nor declined. What it does: Shows whom to remind to reply. How it works: The column is shaded yellow. It lists everyone on the session's roster without a reply. The Remind all button sits below the list. ###### Remind all button id: attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column.remind-all · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column.remind-all type: button · label: "Remind all {{count}}" · permissions: Events.Manage Sends a notification about the session to everyone who hasn't replied. What it does: Nudges members who haven't said whether they're coming about the upcoming session. How it works: It only appears when the column has people in it. The notification includes the session name and when it starts. It goes to accounts that have neither confirmed nor declined, a parent with two children gets one notification. It is sent even to people who turned off automatic class reminders. On success you see 'Reminded N people'; on failure 'Couldn't send the reminder. Try again.' You need the Manage events and their sessions permission. ###### Remind button for one person id: attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column.remind-person · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.session-card.pending-column.remind-person type: button · label: "Remind" A reminder to a single person, not available yet. What it does: Will let you remind just one member. How it works: It appears when you hover a name in the column, but it is disabled and shows 'Reminders aren't available yet'. For now use Remind all. #### No sessions found message id: attendance.signups.empty-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.empty-state type: message · label: "No sessions found" Shown when there are no sessions today or ahead. What it does: Tells you there are no upcoming sessions to show. How it works: Sessions are created in the school calendar. If you expect some, check they aren't limited to groups you don't have access to. #### Loading error message id: attendance.signups.error-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/signups#attendance.signups.error-state type: message · label: "Error loading attendance data" Shown when sessions can't be loaded. What it does: Tells you the cards didn't load. How it works: Refresh the page in a moment. ### Attendance grid id: attendance.grid · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance?view=grid A monthly table of all members and sessions where you mark attendance by clicking a cell. What it does: Shows each member's attendance for the whole month and lets you fill in or correct many marks quickly, without opening every session. How it works: Choose a group and a month. Each row is a member (or a member's child) and each column is a session on a given date. Cells show: green tick, attended; red cross, absent; empty dashed box, not marked yet; grey dash, the member isn't part of that session; red column, the session is cancelled. Clicking a cell saves straight away. On the right there is a Rate column for each member, and at the bottom a Present / roster row for each session. Steps: 1. Open Attendance and choose Grid. 2. Choose a group or leave All groups. 3. Use the arrows to pick the month. 4. Click a cell to mark present; click again to change it to absent. Notes: - Once marked, a cell can't go back to empty, it only switches between present and absent. - The grid lets you mark future dates in the month too. Take care: on sessions that count toward packs, a present mark uses a credit. - Pack credits and notes aren't shown in the grid, open the session from the Sessions view for those. - Without the Manage attendance permission the cells are grey and can't be clicked. FAQ: Q: How do I remove a mark made by mistake? A: In the grid a cell can't go back to empty. Click again to change it to absent if the member wasn't there. Q: Why do some cells show a grey dash? A: The member isn't part of that session, for example it is for another group or only for selected members. Those cells don't count toward the rate. #### Group picker id: attendance.grid.group-filter · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.group-filter type: select · label: "All groups" Chooses whose sessions are shown. What it does: Narrows the grid to one group so it's easier to read. How it works: With All groups every session shows, including those for the whole school, for several groups or for selected members. When you pick a group, the sessions aimed at it and their members remain. #### Month picker id: attendance.grid.month-nav · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.month-nav type: filter · label: "Month" Arrows for the previous and next month and the selected month's name. What it does: Lets you look at attendance for any month. How it works: The grid opens on the current month. The left arrow goes back a month, the right one forward. Every date in the month with a session is shown. #### The table id: attendance.grid.table · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table type: table Members in rows, sessions in columns. What it does: Puts the whole month's marks on one screen. How it works: Rows are sorted by surname. Columns are sorted by date and, within a day, by session name. On a phone the table scrolls sideways while the names column and the Rate column stay in place. ##### Session column id: attendance.grid.table.session-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table.session-column type: column One session on one date. What it does: Shows everyone's attendance for that session. How it works: The heading is the day of the month with a dot in the session's colour. Hover the heading to see the session name. A cancelled session's column is red, its cells can't be clicked and don't count. ##### Attendance cell id: attendance.grid.table.cell · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table.cell type: button · permissions: Attendance.Record One member's mark for one session. What it does: Clicking it marks or changes the member's attendance. How it works: An empty cell becomes attended (✓). A ✓ cell becomes absent (✕), and an ✕ cell becomes ✓ again. The change shows at once and is saved. If saving fails, the cell goes back to how it was and 'Couldn't save the attendance mark. Try again.' is shown. Cells of cancelled sessions and grey cells can't be clicked. ###### Not part of this event cell id: attendance.grid.table.cell.not-in-audience · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table.cell.not-in-audience type: status · label: "Not part of this event" The member isn't on this session's roster. What it does: Tells 'not marked' apart from 'not invited at all'. How it works: It shows as a grey dash when the session is for another group or other members. It can't be clicked and doesn't count in Rate or Present / roster. ##### Rate column id: attendance.grid.table.rate-column · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table.rate-column type: column · label: "Rate" How many of their sessions this month the member attended. What it does: Helps you spot quickly who misses sessions regularly. How it works: It is shown as a fraction, for example 6/8: attended out of all non-cancelled sessions the member is part of that month. Green at 80% or more, yellow from 50% to 80%, red below 50%. Unmarked cells, including future dates in the month, count as not attended. ##### Present / roster row id: attendance.grid.table.present-of-roster · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.table.present-of-roster type: other · label: "Present / roster" How many attended each session out of its roster. What it does: Shows how full each session was. How it works: Under each column it reads, for example, 12/15. Only members who are part of the session count. A cancelled session shows a dash. #### Incomplete grid warning id: attendance.grid.partial-error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.partial-error type: message · label: "Some events couldn't be loaded, so this grid may be incomplete." Shown above the grid when some sessions failed to load. What it does: Warns you some columns may be missing. How it works: The sessions that loaded are shown normally. Refresh the page to try again. #### No sessions this month message id: attendance.grid.empty-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.empty-state type: message · label: "No sessions this month" Shown when the chosen month and group have no sessions. What it does: Tells you there's nothing to mark for that period. How it works: Below the title it reads 'No events have sessions in . Try another month or group.' #### Couldn't load the attendance grid message id: attendance.grid.error-state · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/grid#attendance.grid.error-state type: message · label: "Couldn't load the attendance grid" Shown when no session could be loaded. What it does: Tells you the grid isn't available right now. How it works: Refresh the page in a moment. ### Attendance panel id: attendance.check-in-drawer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance The panel on the right where you see a session's sign-ups and record who attended. What it does: This is where you keep the official record of who actually came to the session, add notes about members and write the session's lesson. How it works: It opens when you click a session in Sessions or Sign-ups, or with the Mark attendance button in the calendar (there it opens on top of the calendar, so you don't leave it). At the top are the session name, date and time, the Open in calendar button (when the panel was opened from the calendar, View on attendance page takes its place) and, if you have the View lessons permission, the Attendance and Lesson tabs. On the Attendance tab, right at the top and only for a session with an attendance limit, is a line with the spots filled. Below it is the official record: counters and a list of everyone on the session, each with here and not-here buttons. Next to the buttons of a member who replied to the session invite there is a small icon with their reply. It is for information only and doesn't record attendance. Every mark saves immediately, there is no Save button. Close the panel with the X button, Escape or by clicking outside it. Steps: 1. Click a session in the Sessions or Sign-ups view. 2. In the list, press ✓ Here next to everyone who came and ✕ Not here next to everyone who didn't. 3. Close the panel, the marks are already saved. Notes: - The list holds the active members of the session's groups (or only the chosen members if the session is for specific people). If the session has no group, the list is the whole school. - If your access is limited to your groups, you only see members from them. - While the Lesson tab has unsaved text, clicking outside doesn't close the panel. FAQ: Q: Do I need to press Save after marking? A: No. Each mark is saved the moment you press the button. Q: Why is a member with the "Said they're coming" icon marked as absent? A: The icon only shows what the member said beforehand. Attendance is what you record with ✓ and ✕. They often differ: someone signs up and doesn't come, someone else comes without signing up. #### Panel header id: attendance.check-in-drawer.header · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.header type: section The session's name, date and time, a close button and a link to the calendar. What it does: Shows which session you're marking and gives you a way to the calendar. How it works: The date and time are for this particular session. If the time was changed in the calendar, the changed time is shown. ##### Close button (X) id: attendance.check-in-drawer.header.close · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.header.close type: button · label: "Close Editing" Closes the panel. What it does: Returns you to the view you opened the session from. How it works: Attendance marks are already saved, so nothing is lost. Unsaved lesson text, however, is lost. The Escape key does the same. ##### Open in calendar button id: attendance.check-in-drawer.header.open-in-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.header.open-in-calendar type: link · label: "Open in calendar" Opens the session in the school calendar. What it does: Takes you where the session itself is managed. How it works: The session's time, audience, recurrence, cancelling and deleting are changed in the calendar, not in this panel. It is shown when the panel was opened from the Attendance page. ##### View on attendance page button id: attendance.check-in-drawer.header.open-in-attendance-page · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.header.open-in-attendance-page type: link · label: "View on attendance page" Shown instead of Open in calendar when the panel was opened from the calendar. What it does: Takes you to the same session in the sessions list on the Attendance page. How it works: The page opens on the Sessions view, and the session is found, scrolled into view and briefly highlighted. The panel does not open again. #### Attendance and Lesson tabs id: attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs type: section · permissions: Lessons.View Switch between recording attendance and the session's lesson. What it does: Keeps a session's attendance and lesson in one panel. How it works: The tabs only show if you have the View lessons permission; without it you only see attendance. Each time you open a different session the panel starts on Attendance. ##### Attendance tab id: attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs.attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs.attendance type: tab · label: "Attendance" Sign-ups and attendance marking. What it does: Where you record who came. How it works: It opens by default. ##### Lesson tab id: attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs.lesson · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.tabs.lesson type: tab · label: "Lesson" The session's write-up and materials. What it does: Lets you write and publish what you covered in the session. How it works: A dot next to the name shows there is a lesson: green, published, grey, draft. See Session lesson. #### Spots filled id: attendance.check-in-drawer.signups · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.signups type: section The line at the top of the Attendance tab showing how many spots are taken. What it does: Gives you a reference for how many spots are left before you record actual attendance. How it works: The spots line only appears for sessions with an attendance limit. There are no overall reply totals in this panel: each member's reply is shown next to their name in the list, see the "Said they're coming" and "Said they're not coming" icons. The overall picture of replies is the Sign-ups view of the page. This is for information only, it can't be edited here and isn't recorded attendance. ##### Spots filled id: attendance.check-in-drawer.signups.capacity · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.signups.capacity type: other · label: "{{going}} of {{capacity}} spots filled" How many of the session's spots are taken. What it does: Shows whether there are spots left. How it works: It only appears for sessions with an attendance limit. Next to it reads Full if sign-ups have reached the limit, or how many spots are left. #### Attendance section id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance type: section · label: "Attendance" The official record of who actually attended. What it does: Where you mark each session member's attendance. How it works: From top to bottom: the Finalize attendance button (only for sessions that count toward packs), the counters, the Mark everyone attended button and the member list. ##### Here, Not here and Unmarked counters id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.counters · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.counters type: other · label: "Unmarked" Three coloured boxes with the number present, absent and not yet marked. What it does: Show you how many are left to mark. How it works: Green is Here, red Not here, grey Unmarked. They update after every mark. ##### Member list id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster type: list Everyone on the session, one per row. What it does: Where you mark individually who came. How it works: Members are sorted by first name. Children are marked (Child). If the session has an attendance limit, members who didn't confirm are tucked under N haven't confirmed. ###### ✓ Here button id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.here · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.here type: button · label: "Here" · permissions: Attendance.Record Marks the member as attended. What it does: Records that the member was at the session. How it works: The button turns green when the member is marked here. A spinner shows while it saves. On a session that counts toward packs, the mark uses a credit. See Marking one member. ###### ✕ Not here button id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.not-here · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.not-here type: button · label: "Not here" · permissions: Attendance.Record Marks the member as absent. What it does: Records that the member wasn't at the session. How it works: The button turns red when the member is marked not here. If they were marked here before on a session that counts toward packs, their credit is given back. ###### Member notes button id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.notes type: button · label: "Member notes" · permissions: Notes.Author Opens the notes about this member. What it does: Lets you read or add a note about the member without leaving the session. How it works: The sticky-note button is coloured with a dot when the member already has notes. It opens the Member notes panel. See Member notes. ###### (Child) label id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.child-label · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.child-label type: badge · label: "Child" Shows the row is for a member's child. What it does: Tells the child apart from the parent's account. How it works: Each child in the group has their own row and is marked separately. ###### N haven't confirmed toggle id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.unconfirmed-toggle · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.unconfirmed-toggle type: toggle · label: "{{count}} haven't confirmed" Shows or hides members who didn't confirm they're coming. What it does: Keeps the list short when the session has limited spots. How it works: It only appears for sessions with an attendance limit. It holds members who declined or didn't reply. Press it to show them, you can mark them like everyone else. ###### Green Said they're coming icon id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.rsvp-going · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.rsvp-going type: badge · label: "Said they're coming" Shows the member answered Attending to the session invite. What it does: Reminds you whom you expected while you record who actually came. How it works: The calendar-with-a-tick icon sits before the ✓ and ✕ buttons. The text appears on hover, keyboard focus or touch. For information only: it doesn't record attendance and doesn't change ✓ and ✕. ###### Red Said they're not coming icon id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.rsvp-not-going · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.roster.rsvp-not-going type: badge · label: "Said they're not coming" Shows the member answered Not Attending to the session invite. What it does: Reminds you the member said beforehand that they wouldn't come. How it works: The calendar-with-a-cross icon sits before the ✓ and ✕ buttons. For information only: if the member came after all, mark them with ✓. Members who haven't replied have no icon. ##### Empty list message id: attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/check-in-drawer#attendance.check-in-drawer.attendance.empty type: message · label: "No members in this organization" Shown when the session has no members to mark. What it does: Tells you there's nobody to mark. How it works: Despite the wording, it refers to this session: its groups have no active members or you don't have access to them. Add members to the group or check the session's audience in the calendar. ### Marking one member's attendance id: attendance.mark-member · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-member For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Attendance.Record How to mark a member as here or not here, and how to fix a wrong mark. What it does: Records who was actually at the session. This record drives pack credits, the Attendance column for past sessions and the rate in the attendance grid. How it works: You can mark from the session panel (the ✓ Here and ✕ Not here buttons) or from the Grid (click a cell). It saves straight away. You can change a mark at any time, including for past sessions, just press the other button. A mark can't be removed completely: once marked, a member stays here or not here. Marking doesn't send a notification to the member or parent. On a session that counts toward packs, a Here mark uses a credit and changing it to Not here gives it back. You need the Manage attendance permission. If your access is limited to your groups, you can only mark members from them. Steps: 1. Open the session from the Sessions or Sign-ups view. 2. Find the member in the Attendance section. 3. Press ✓ Here or ✕ Not here. 4. To correct it, press the other button. Notes: - There's no 'excused absence' status. Mark Not here and add a note with the reason. - If the buttons are grey: 'You don't have permission to record attendance' means you lack Manage attendance; 'Attendance is finalized, reopen it to make changes' means press Reopen attendance. - If 'Couldn't save the attendance mark. Try again.' appears, the mark wasn't saved, press the button again. FAQ: Q: Can I mark attendance for a past session? A: Yes. Open it from **Sessions** → **Past** or from the **Grid** and mark as usual. Q: How do I set a member back to unmarked? A: That isn't possible. If you marked **Here** by mistake, change it to **Not here**. Q: Does the parent find out their child was marked absent? A: No. Marking sends no notification and parents don't see the record. #### Couldn't save the attendance mark message id: attendance.mark-member.mark-error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-member#attendance.mark-member.mark-error type: notification · label: "Couldn't save the attendance mark. Try again." A pop-up message when a mark wasn't saved. What it does: Warns you the mark wasn't kept. How it works: It appears on failure in both the panel and the grid. In the grid the cell goes back to its previous state. Try again; if it keeps failing, check the member belongs to one of your groups. #### You don't have permission to record attendance hint id: attendance.mark-member.no-permission-hint · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-member#attendance.mark-member.no-permission-hint type: message · label: "You don't have permission to record attendance" · permissions: Attendance.Record Appears when you hover a grey marking button. What it does: Explains why you can't mark. How it works: It shows when you don't have the Manage attendance permission. You can view attendance but not change it. Ask the school owner for the permission. ### Marking everyone attended id: attendance.mark-everyone · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-everyone For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Attendance.Record How to mark the whole session roster as here with one button. What it does: Saves pressing ✓ for every member when almost everyone came. Afterwards you only change the absent ones. How it works: The Mark everyone attended button is in the panel's Attendance section, above the list. It marks everyone on the session roster as here, including those tucked under N haven't confirmed and including anyone already marked not here. Everything is saved at once. On a session that counts toward packs, everyone marked uses a credit. The button is disabled when everyone is already here, while saving, when attendance is finalized, or when you lack the Manage attendance permission. Steps: 1. Open the session. 2. Press Mark everyone attended. 3. Wait for 'Everyone marked as attended.' 4. Press ✕ Not here next to members who didn't come. Notes: - The button also overwrites absences you already marked. Press it first, then mark the absent members. - On failure 'Couldn't mark everyone as attended. Try again.' appears and nothing changes. - Up to 500 people can be marked at once. FAQ: Q: Is there a 'mark everyone absent' button? A: No. Absences are marked one by one with ✕ **Not here** or in the **Grid**. #### Mark everyone attended button id: attendance.mark-everyone.button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-everyone#attendance.mark-everyone.button type: button · label: "Mark everyone attended" · permissions: Attendance.Record Marks the whole session roster as here. What it does: Fills in everyone's attendance in one go. How it works: The icon spins while it saves. It also overwrites absences already marked. It is disabled if everyone is already here, if attendance is finalized, or if you lack the Manage attendance permission. ##### Everyone marked as attended message id: attendance.mark-everyone.button.success · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-everyone#attendance.mark-everyone.button.success type: notification · label: "Everyone marked as attended." Confirmation that the marks are saved. What it does: Tells you all marks are stored. How it works: The counters and list refresh right after the message. ##### Couldn't mark everyone message id: attendance.mark-everyone.button.error · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/mark-everyone#attendance.mark-everyone.button.error type: notification · label: "Couldn't mark everyone as attended. Try again." Shown when bulk marking wasn't saved. What it does: Warns you the marks didn't change. How it works: Nothing was saved. Try again in a moment. ### Attendance and sign-up statuses id: attendance.statuses · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance What each status means, here, not here, unmarked, plus sign-up and session statuses, and what it affects. What it does: Helps you tell actual attendance (which you record) apart from sign-ups (what members say), and know what happens after each mark. How it works: Attendance: recorded by staff, with only two values: Here: the member was at the session. Not here: the member wasn't. Until someone marks the member, they are Unmarked: not a value, just no mark yet. There is no third status such as 'excused': for a sick child mark Not here and add a note. Sign-up: what the member said beforehand: coming, not coming, or no reply yet. Staff only view it here. Session status: Cancelled or Full. Notes: - Sign-ups and attendance are independent: declining doesn't mark an absence and confirming doesn't mark attendance. - Members can only sign up if the school allows it and up to a set time before the session (the owner sets this in Organisation settings › Attendance answers). FAQ: Q: How do I record an excused absence? A: Mark **Not here** and add a note with the reason from the **Member notes** button. There is no separate 'excused' status. #### Here status id: attendance.statuses.here · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.here type: status · label: "Here" The member was at the session. What it does: Counts the member's visit. How it works: Shown with a green tick. Effects: on a session that counts toward packs, it uses one credit (or counts as a visit owed if the member has no pack); it counts in the Attendance column in Past, and in Rate and Present / roster in the grid; the member gets a notification when the session's lesson is published. #### Not here status id: attendance.statuses.not-here · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.not-here type: status · label: "Not here" The member wasn't at the session. What it does: Records the absence explicitly, so it's clear the member was checked. How it works: Shown with a red cross. It doesn't use a credit; if the member was Here before, the credit goes back to the same pack. It counts as absent in Past and lowers Rate in the grid. The member also gets a notification when the session's lesson is published. #### Unmarked id: attendance.statuses.unmarked · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.unmarked type: status · label: "Unmarked" The member has no mark yet. What it does: Shows whom you haven't checked yet. How it works: In the grid it's an empty dashed box; in the panel it's the grey Unmarked counter. It uses no credit and isn't counted in the Attendance column, but in the grid's Rate it counts as not attended. Once you mark a member, you can't set them back to unmarked. #### Signed up id: attendance.statuses.signup-going · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.signup-going type: status · label: "Signed up" The member confirmed they're coming. What it does: Shows whom to expect. How it works: Set by the member in the calendar. It counts toward spots on a session with a limit (the Full label). In the session panel it's the green "Said they're coming" icon next to the member's name. In the Sign-ups view it is in the Signed up column. It doesn't record attendance. #### Can't make it id: attendance.statuses.signup-not-going · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.signup-not-going type: status · label: "Can't make it" The member said they won't come. What it does: Shows who declined in advance. How it works: In the session panel it's the red "Said they're not coming" icon next to the member's name. In the Sign-ups view it is in the Can't make it column. It doesn't record an absence, mark Not here yourself if needed. #### Hasn't signed up id: attendance.statuses.signup-pending · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.signup-pending type: status · label: "Hasn't signed up" The member has neither confirmed nor declined. What it does: Shows whom to remind. How it works: In the session panel such members have no icon. In the Sign-ups view they are in the Hasn't signed up column, and on the phone card in Sessions it is the N pending label. These members get the reminder from Remind all. #### Cancelled session status id: attendance.statuses.session-cancelled · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.session-cancelled type: badge · label: "Cancelled" The session on this date was cancelled in the calendar. What it does: Warns the session won't take place. How it works: In Sessions the row is faded; in the grid the column is red, can't be marked and doesn't count toward Rate. Cancelling and reinstating happen in the calendar. #### Full session status id: attendance.statuses.session-full · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/statuses#attendance.statuses.session-full type: badge · label: "Full" Sign-ups have reached the attendance limit. What it does: Shows there are no spots left. How it works: It only shows for sessions with a limit. It compares the number signed up, not the number marked here. ### Finalizing and reopening attendance id: attendance.finalize · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/finalize For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Attendance.Record How to finalize attendance for a session that counts toward packs, what it locks, and how to reopen it. What it does: Finalizing marks a session's attendance as final: it locks the marks in the panel and makes sure everyone marked here has had a credit used. Reopen attendance removes the lock so you can fix something. How it works: The Finalize attendance button only shows for sessions with Counts toward packs turned on. Other sessions have no finalizing and their marks can always be changed. After finalizing: the button becomes Reopen attendance with a padlock, with Closed below it; the ✓ and ✕ buttons and Mark everyone attended in the panel turn grey with the hint 'Attendance is finalized, reopen it to make changes'; anyone marked here whose credit hadn't been used yet has a credit used. Reopen attendance only unlocks the marks, it doesn't give back or use credits. Credits only change when you change a mark. Both actions need the Manage attendance permission. Pressing again changes nothing. Steps: 1. Mark everyone's attendance for the session. 2. Press Finalize attendance. 3. To fix something later, press Reopen attendance, change the mark and finalize again. Notes: - Finalizing can be undone, no need to be wary of pressing it. - The lock applies to the session panel. Marks are also made separately from the Grid. FAQ: Q: Why don't I see a Finalize attendance button? A: The button is only for sessions that count toward packs. Check that **Counts toward packs** is on for the session in the calendar. Q: Are credits returned if I reopen attendance? A: No. A credit is only returned if you change the member's mark from **Here** to **Not here**. #### Finalize attendance button id: attendance.finalize.close-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/finalize#attendance.finalize.close-button type: button · label: "Finalize attendance" · permissions: Attendance.Record Finalizes and locks the session's attendance. What it does: Confirms the marks are final. How it works: It sits at the top of the Attendance section. Below it reads 'Finalizing uses one pack credit for each member marked attended.' On success you see 'Attendance finalized.'; on failure 'Couldn't finalize attendance. Try again.' #### Reopen attendance button id: attendance.finalize.reopen-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/finalize#attendance.finalize.reopen-button type: button · label: "Reopen attendance" · permissions: Attendance.Record Unlocks finalized attendance. What it does: Lets you fix marks after finalizing. How it works: It shows with a padlock in place of Finalize attendance. On success you see 'Attendance reopened.'; on failure 'Couldn't reopen attendance. Try again.' #### Closed caption id: attendance.finalize.closed-caption · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/finalize#attendance.finalize.closed-caption type: status · label: "Closed {{date}}" When attendance was finalized. What it does: Shows the session is finalized and since when. How it works: It appears below Reopen attendance. The date is from the first finalizing since the last reopen. #### Attendance is finalized hint id: attendance.finalize.locked-hint · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/finalize#attendance.finalize.locked-hint type: message · label: "Attendance is finalized, reopen it to make changes" Appears when you hover a grey ✓ or ✕ button on a finalized session. What it does: Explains why you can't change the mark. How it works: Press Reopen attendance at the top of the Attendance section to edit. ### How attendance uses pack credits id: attendance.pack-credits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/pack-credits For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance When an attendance mark uses a credit from the member's pack, which pack it comes from, and what happens if the member has none. What it does: Connects attendance with billing: on sessions sold as attendance packs, each recorded visit lowers the member's remaining credits without you doing it by hand. How it works: Credits are only used on sessions with Counts toward packs turned on (set when creating the session in the calendar). When you mark a member Here, one credit is used straight away. The credit comes first from a pack for one of the session's groups, then from a whole-school pack, whichever expires soonest. A pack for a different group is only used if the session's groups don't sell a pack of their own. If the member has no suitable active pack, the visit is counted as owed and taken from the next pack they buy. If you change the mark to Not here, the credit goes back to the same pack it came from. Finalize attendance uses a credit for anyone marked here who hasn't had one used yet. A member never pays twice for the same session. In the session panel, each member's name has a coloured icon showing their pack status. Notes: - The caption under Finalize attendance and the tooltips say a credit is used on finalizing. In practice it is already used at the Here mark; finalizing only catches anyone missed. - Marks from the Grid and Mark everyone attended use credits too. FAQ: Q: I marked a member here by mistake. Do they lose a credit? A: Change the mark to **Not here**: the credit goes back to the same pack. If attendance is finalized, press **Reopen attendance** first. Q: What happens if a child comes without a pack? A: The visit is counted as owed. **Owes N visits** shows next to their name, and the owed visits are taken automatically from the next pack bought. #### Green N credits left icon id: attendance.pack-credits.credits-left · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/pack-credits#attendance.pack-credits.credits-left type: badge · label: "{{count}} credits left" The member has an active pack with credits left. What it does: Shows how many visits the member still has. How it works: The number is the total credits left across all the member's active packs. Hover or tap the icon to see 'One credit is used when attendance is finalized.' #### Red Owes N visits icon id: attendance.pack-credits.owes-visits · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/pack-credits#attendance.pack-credits.owes-visits type: badge · label: "Owes {{count}} visits" The member attended sessions without an active pack. What it does: Shows you the member's debt before you mark them again. How it works: It shows when the member has no active pack but has owed visits. The tooltip reads 'Taken from the next pack they buy.' #### Yellow No active pack icon id: attendance.pack-credits.no-active-pack · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/pack-credits#attendance.pack-credits.no-active-pack type: badge · label: "No active pack" The member has no active pack and no owed visits. What it does: Warns you a Here mark will count as a visit owed. How it works: The tooltip reads 'Attending is counted as a visit owed once attendance is finalized.' You may want to remind the member to buy a pack. ### Member notes id: attendance.member-notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Notes.Author How to write notes about a member from a session and share them with the member or parent. What it does: Keeps the team's observations about each member, progress, reason for an absence, something to watch out for. When you choose, you can share a note with the member or parent. How it works: Press the Member notes button next to a member's name in the session panel. The same button is in a user's details when you open them from the users list: in the Notes section you see how many notes there are and the Member notes button (for a parent and separately for each child). The Member notes panel opens on the right with all notes about that member, newest first. Every new note starts as Staff only: only staff can see it. Share makes it visible to the member: it appears in the school's Lessons tab under Shared notes, and the member (the parent, for a child) gets a notification. Notes belong to the member, not the session, you see the same notes whichever session you open them from. If the session has a lesson, a new note is linked to it and labelled Lesson; otherwise Manual. You need the Author notes permission, to view, add and share. Steps: 1. Open the session and press the Member notes button next to the member's name. 2. Type the note in the box at the bottom. 3. Press Add note. 4. If you want the member to see it, press Share below it. Notes: - Sharing can't be undone, and notes can't be edited or deleted here. Check the text before sharing. - A note can be up to 5000 characters. - While the box has text in it, clicking outside doesn't close the panel. - Without the Author notes permission notes don't load and the list looks empty. - Staff notes are different from Additional information for a child: that is a short text (up to 200 characters) a parent can optionally enter in their child's profile, and staff see it read-only in the child's details. FAQ: Q: Does the parent see my notes? A: Only if you press **Share**. Until then the note is **Staff only**. Q: Does the member get a notification every time? A: A notification is sent once, when the note becomes shared. #### Member notes (has notes) button id: attendance.member-notes.open-button · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.open-button type: button · label: "Member notes (has notes)" The coloured version of the button when the member has notes. What it does: Lets you see at a glance who already has notes. How it works: The sticky-note icon is coloured with a dot in the corner. Without notes the button is grey. #### Member notes panel id: attendance.member-notes.drawer · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer type: drawer · label: "Member notes" The side panel with one member's notes. What it does: Shows every note about the member and lets you add new ones. How it works: At the top is the member's name and a Close button. In the middle is the list of notes, at the bottom the box for a new note. ##### Close button id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.close · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.close type: button · label: "Close" Closes the notes panel. What it does: Returns you to the session panel. How it works: Unsaved text in the box is cleared on close. ##### Note id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note type: card One note with labels, text, author and date. What it does: Shows what was written, by whom and when, and whether the member can see it. How it works: At the top are two labels: origin and visibility. At the bottom are the name of the staff member who wrote it and the date. ###### Lesson label id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.source-lesson · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.source-lesson type: badge · label: "Lesson" The note was written from a session that has a lesson. What it does: Shows the note is linked to a particular lesson. How it works: Set automatically if the session already had a lesson when the note was added. ###### Manual label id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.source-manual · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.source-manual type: badge · label: "Manual" The note isn't linked to a lesson. What it does: Tells standalone notes apart from lesson notes. How it works: Set when the session had no lesson at the time the note was added. ###### Staff only label id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.staff-only · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.staff-only type: badge · label: "Staff only" Only staff can see the note. What it does: Confirms the member and parent can't see it. How it works: Every new note has this label until you press Share. ###### Shared label id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.shared · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.shared type: badge · label: "Shared" The note is visible to the member. What it does: Shows the member (or parent) can read it. How it works: The member sees it in the school's Lessons tab under Shared notes. It can't go back to Staff only. ###### Share button id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.share · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.note.share type: button · label: "Share" · permissions: Notes.Author Makes the note visible to the member. What it does: Lets you pass your observation to the member or parent. How it works: It only shows on Staff only notes. After pressing it the note becomes Shared and the member gets a notification that a note was shared with them. It can't be undone. ##### No notes yet message id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.empty type: message · label: "No notes yet" Shown when the member has no notes. What it does: Tells you you can start the first note. How it works: Write a note in the box at the bottom. If you're sure there are notes, check you have the Author notes permission. ##### New note box id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.new-note · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.new-note type: field · label: "Private by default, share it when you're ready." The box where you type a new note. What it does: Holds the note text before adding it. How it works: Below the box it reads Starts as staff only. The text can be up to 5000 characters. While there's text in it, clicking outside doesn't close the panel. ###### Add note button id: attendance.member-notes.drawer.new-note.add · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-notes#attendance.member-notes.drawer.new-note.add type: button · label: "Add note" · permissions: Notes.Author Saves the new note. What it does: Adds the note to the member as staff only. How it works: It is disabled while the box is empty. After adding, the box is cleared and the note appears at the top of the list. ### Session lesson id: attendance.session-lesson · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson For: schools · In the app: /admin/attendance · permissions: Lessons.View, Lessons.Author How to write, attach materials to and publish a lesson for a session from the attendance panel. What it does: Lets you record what you covered in the session and share it with members along with materials, photos, documents, video. How it works: In the session panel open the Lesson tab. At the top a label shows the state: No lesson yet, Draft or Published . Write the text under Content and press Create lesson (the first time) or Save. Under Attachments you can upload materials, a lesson can be files only; uploading the first file creates the lesson automatically. While the lesson is a draft, members can't see it. Publish makes it visible in the school's Lessons tab and sends a 'new lesson' notification to everyone who confirmed their sign-up for the session or has an attendance mark for it. The tab is shown with the View lessons permission. To write, upload and publish you need Author lessons: without it the lesson is read-only. Steps: 1. Open the session and choose the Lesson tab. 2. Write what you covered and press Create lesson. 3. Optionally press Click to upload a file and choose a material. 4. Press Publish so members can see it. Notes: - Files must be images, video, audio, documents, spreadsheets, presentations or archives, up to 10MB each and at most 10 per lesson. - Publishing can't be undone here. You can keep editing the text and files after publishing, no second notification is sent. - The notification also reaches members marked not here. - While there is unsaved text, clicking outside doesn't close the session panel. FAQ: Q: Who gets notified when I publish? A: Everyone who confirmed their sign-up for the session, and everyone with an attendance mark, here or not here. Q: Why can't I see the Lesson tab? A: You don't have the **View lessons** permission. Ask the school owner for it. #### Lesson state label id: attendance.session-lesson.status · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.status type: status · label: "Draft" Shows whether the lesson is missing, a draft or published. What it does: Tells you whether members can already see the lesson. How it works: No lesson yet: nothing saved. Draft: saved but not published. Published : members can see it. #### Content section id: attendance.session-lesson.content · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.content type: section · label: "Content" The lesson text. What it does: Where you describe what you did in the session. How it works: With the Author lessons permission you see a text box. Without it you only see the text, or 'No lesson has been written for this session.' if there is none. Below the content it shows when the lesson was created and last updated. ##### Lesson text box id: attendance.session-lesson.content.text · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.content.text type: field · label: "What did you cover today?" · permissions: Lessons.Author The box where you write the lesson. What it does: Holds the text before saving. How it works: Changes aren't saved automatically, press Save or Create lesson. ##### Create lesson and Save buttons id: attendance.session-lesson.content.save · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.content.save type: button · label: "Save" · permissions: Lessons.Author Creates the lesson or saves changes to it. What it does: Stores the text as a draft or updates a published lesson. How it works: While there is no lesson the button reads Create lesson and is disabled when the box is empty. After that it reads Save and can save empty text if the lesson is files only. Saving doesn't publish or send notifications. #### Attachments section id: attendance.session-lesson.attachments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.attachments type: section · label: "Attachments" The lesson's materials. What it does: Lets you add photos, documents, video and other files. How it works: Clicking a file name opens it in a new tab. With no files it reads No materials yet. ##### Click to upload a file area id: attendance.session-lesson.attachments.upload · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.attachments.upload type: button · label: "Click to upload a file" · permissions: Lessons.Author Uploads a file to the lesson. What it does: Adds material members will see with the lesson. How it works: One file is uploaded at a time. If there is no lesson yet, one is created automatically. Spaces in the file name are replaced with underscores. For an unsuitable file the reason appears below: unsupported type, over 10MB, or already 10 files. ##### Remove attachment button id: attendance.session-lesson.attachments.remove · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.attachments.remove type: button · label: "Remove attachment" · permissions: Lessons.Author Removes a file from the lesson. What it does: Takes off material uploaded by mistake or out of date. How it works: The X button next to the file removes it at once, without a confirmation. #### Publish button id: attendance.session-lesson.publish · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.publish type: button · label: "Publish" · permissions: Lessons.Author Makes the lesson visible to members and notifies them. What it does: Shares the lesson with the session's people. How it works: It only shows for a saved, unpublished lesson, next to 'Notifies everyone confirmed or attending'. Everyone with a confirmed sign-up and everyone with an attendance mark (including those not here) is notified. Publishing again sends no new notification. #### Authored by line id: attendance.session-lesson.author · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/session-lesson#attendance.session-lesson.author type: other · label: "Authored by {{name}}" Which staff member created the lesson. What it does: Shows who is responsible for the content. How it works: It appears at the bottom once the lesson exists. ### What parents and members see about attendance id: attendance.for-parents · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/for-parents For: parents Where a parent or member sees the effects of attendance recorded by the school. What it does: Explains the difference between your sign-up for a session and the attendance the school records, and where to check your pack credits and the coach's notes. How it works: Attendance is recorded by school staff. The record itself, here or not here on a given date, isn't shown to members or parents, and no notification is sent when it's marked. Here's what you do see: Sign-up: when you choose in the calendar whether you'll attend, that's your intention. It isn't recorded attendance. The school can switch this off or set how long before the session you can change your answer. Pack credits: on sessions that count toward packs, each visit the school records lowers your remaining credits. Check them under My packs on the group page or in the session preview in the calendar. Shared notes: if the coach shares a note with you, you get a notification and see it in the school's Lessons tab under Shared notes. Lessons: when the school publishes a lesson for a session you confirmed or were marked for, you get a new lesson notification. Notes: - If you have several children, choose the child in the Lessons tab to see their lessons and notes. - If you think a credit was used for a visit your child didn't make, contact the school, staff can correct the mark and the credit is returned. FAQ: Q: Can I see which sessions my child attended? A: Not directly. The school keeps attendance internally. You see how many pack credits were used and how many visits are owed, plus notes the coach shared with you. Q: What does Visits owed mean? A: Your child attended sessions recorded by the school without an active pack. Those visits are taken automatically from the next pack you buy. #### Shared notes section id: attendance.for-parents.shared-notes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/for-parents#attendance.for-parents.shared-notes type: section · label: "Shared notes" Notes the school team has shared with you. What it does: Shows the coaches' observations they chose to show you. How it works: It is in the school's Lessons tab. Each note has its text and Shared by staff with a date. Notes the team keeps to itself aren't shown. With none shared it reads 'No notes have been shared with you yet.' #### Visits owed card id: attendance.for-parents.visits-owed · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/for-parents#attendance.for-parents.visits-owed type: card · label: "Visits owed" Visits recorded by the school while there was no active pack. What it does: Shows how many visits will be taken from the next pack. How it works: It appears under My packs on the group page, for example '2 visits attended without a pack', with 'These are deducted automatically from the next pack you buy.' #### Credits left in the session preview id: attendance.for-parents.credits-in-calendar · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/for-parents#attendance.for-parents.credits-in-calendar type: other · label: "You have {{count}} pack credits left" How many credits you have left, shown on a session in the calendar. What it does: Lets you check your balance before the session. How it works: It shows in the preview of sessions that count toward packs. With no active pack it reads 'You have no active pack, classes you attend are counted as visits owed and deducted from your next pack'. ### A member's attendance history id: attendance.member-history · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-history For: schools · In the app: /admin How often a member or child comes and which sessions they were last at, in their details in the users list. What it does: Gives you a quick view of how the member actually attends sessions, without digging through the monthly grid for each month. How it works: Open a user from the users list in the admin dashboard. In their details, in the Attendance section, you see the attendance rate, the number attended and absent, and under Recent classes up to the eight latest sessions they were marked at. Each row has the title, date and time and an Attended or Absent badge. If the member answered the session invite beforehand, there is a small icon next to the badge: Had said they would come or Had said they wouldn't come. The rate and counts cover every session with a recorded mark, not only the ones shown. When a child is selected you see the child's attendance, and when the parent is selected, the parent's own. Every staff member can see it, but only for the sessions of groups they have access to (the tooltip on the heading says so). Notes: - If no attendance has been recorded yet, it says No attendance marked yet. - Sessions where attendance was not marked count neither as attended nor as absent. FAQ: Q: Why do I see fewer sessions than a colleague? A: The history only shows sessions of groups you have access to. A staff member limited to their own groups doesn't see the member's attendance in other groups. #### Attendance section in a user's details id: attendance.member-history.section · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-history#attendance.member-history.section type: section · label: "Attendance" The block with the attendance rate and the recent sessions. What it does: Shows the member's or child's actual attendance. How it works: It is in the user's details in the users list. At the top is the rate with a bar, green for attended and red for absent, and below it the recent sessions. ##### Attendance rate id: attendance.member-history.section.rate · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-history#attendance.member-history.section.rate type: other · label: "{{rate}}% attendance" The share of sessions the member was marked as attended. What it does: Gives one number for how regularly the member comes. How it works: Worked out from every session with a recorded mark: those attended divided by those attended and absent. On the right are the attended and absent counts. ##### Recent classes id: attendance.member-history.section.recent · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-history#attendance.member-history.section.recent type: list · label: "Recent classes" Up to the eight latest sessions with a recorded mark. What it does: Shows what the member most recently attended or missed. How it works: The newest are at the top. Each row has a title, date and time and an Attended or Absent badge. A calendar icon shows the member's earlier answer: green Had said they would come, red Had said they wouldn't come. With no answer there is no icon. ##### No attendance marked yet message id: attendance.member-history.section.empty · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/attendance/member-history#attendance.member-history.section.empty type: message · label: "No attendance marked yet." Shown when the member has no marked sessions. What it does: Tells you the history is empty. How it works: Attendance is recorded in the session panel, see Attendance panel. If you know sessions were marked, you may not have access to their groups. ## About Classes id: about · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about For: schools, parents What Classes is, what it can do, how pricing works, frequently asked questions and how to reach the team. ### What Classes is id: about.what-is-classes · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/what-is-classes For: schools, parents A platform for running extracurricular schools, and for the parents and students who attend them. What it does: Classes brings everything a school does every day into one place: groups and schedule, enrolment, attendance, charges and payments, messages and notifications. Parents and students see their lessons, pay and get notified from one app. How it works: Classes is built for extracurricular schools: dance and sports schools, music and language schools, art studios, coding clubs and any other activity outside regular school. The school gets an admin account where it organises groups, rooms and teachers, approves enrolments, records attendance and follows its finances. Parents and students have a free account: they find a school, enrol in a group, see the schedule, pay charges online or on site and get a notification for every change. Classes runs in the browser and as a mobile app for iOS and Android, fully in Bulgarian and English. Data is stored on Microsoft Azure servers in line with GDPR. Classes was created in 2025 in Sofia, Bulgaria, by the Devids team, after helping a friends' dance school out of its admin chaos. FAQ: Q: Which schools is Classes for? A: Any school with groups and regular lessons: dance, sports, music, languages, art, coding, kids' centres. If you have students, a schedule and fees, Classes is for you. Q: Do parents pay for the app? A: No. Classes is completely free for parents and students. Only the school pays, according to its plan. Q: Is there a mobile app? A: Yes. Classes runs in the browser and has an iOS and Android app for admins, teachers, parents and students. ### What Classes can do id: about.features · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features For: schools, parents An overview of Classes' features by area: groups and schedule, payments, communication, accounts and support. What it does: Gives a quick picture of what Classes covers before you go into the details of each screen in the other areas of the help center. How it works: Every plan includes every feature; nothing is paid for separately. The full list is on the Features page. Each feature has its own help topic with the exact screens and buttons. FAQ: Q: Can I use Classes without online payments? A: Yes. Online payments through Stripe are optional. You can record cash and bank payments manually and still see your whole income. Q: Are any features paid extra? A: No. Every plan includes the whole platform. The only add-on is optional extra training for your team. #### Core platform id: about.features.core · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features#about.features.core type: section Group and lesson management. What it does: Group and lesson management, student enrolment and approval, attendance and an interactive schedule where parents mark absences themselves. How it works: Groups have rooms, levels and teachers; the schedule updates itself when a parent marks an absence. Details: the Groups, Calendar and Attendance areas of the help center. #### Payments and finance id: about.features.payments · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features#about.features.payments type: section Charges. What it does: Charges, online card payments through Stripe (optional), manual recording of cash and bank payments, a financial dashboard, reports and payment history. How it works: The school issues charges and users pay online or on site; everything lands on the financial dashboard. Details: the Income and payments area. The school can also offer a choice between plan options, and the user picks and pays in one place. #### Communication id: about.features.communication · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features#about.features.communication type: section A mobile app for every role. What it does: A mobile app for every role, push notifications on every change, absences managed by the users themselves, and bulk messages to the whole school or to single groups. How it works: Every change to the schedule, a charge or a message reaches the people affected as a push notification and an email. Details: the Communication area. #### Accounts and access id: about.features.accounts · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features#about.features.accounts type: section Accounts for admins. What it does: Accounts for admins, teachers, parents and students, with roles and permissions that decide who sees what. How it works: The owner invites staff and gives them permissions; parents and students sign up themselves and enrol in groups. Details: the Users and staff and Account areas. #### Support id: about.features.support · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/features#about.features.support type: section Onboarding help. What it does: Onboarding help, owner training, chat and phone support in Bulgarian. For larger schools: priority support and a personal account manager. How it works: The Classes team sets the school up at the start and stays available by chat and phone. Details: the Demo, consultation and contacting the team topic. School staff can also write to the team from inside the app, in Help desk in the admin area, and get the replies there and as notifications. ### How pricing works id: about.pricing · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/pricing For: schools, parents Free for parents; the school pays a plan based on its number of users, for 3 or 12 months, with every feature included. What it does: Explains what decides the price for a school, so you can tell which plan you need. The current amounts are always on the pricing page. How it works: Classes is free for parents and students. Only the school pays. A school's price depends on two things: The number of users (students and parents) in the school. There are six plans: Start for the smallest schools, Up to 50, Up to 100, Up to 150, Up to 300 and Unlimited. Each plan also includes a number of teacher accounts. The billing period. You pay up front for 3 months (list price) or for 12 months at 20% off. Every plan includes every feature, updates, setup and onboarding help. The price is per organisation; franchise networks with several centres get a separate partner offer. Optional extra hands-on training for your team can be added (a one-time 2 or 4 hour session). To get started you book a free consultation from the pricing page; after it, the Classes team sets your school up. Steps: 1. Open the pricing page. 2. Pick the period: 3 months or 12 months. 3. Pick your school's number of users; you see the monthly price and the total for the period. 4. Press Get started and book a free consultation. Notes: - Not sure which plan you need? Start from the number of students attending today; you change plan as you grow. - Prices on the page are in euro. FAQ: Q: How much does Classes cost? A: It depends on the number of users in your school and whether you pay for 3 or 12 months. The current amount for each plan is on the pricing page: classes.bg/en/prices. For parents it is free. Q: Is there a free trial? A: There is a free demo and a free consultation where we show Classes with examples from your school. Contact us or book a slot from the pricing page. Q: What if I outgrow my plan's user limit? A: You move to the next plan. Contact the Classes team and we will arrange it. Current prices (pricing page: https://www.classes.bg/en/prices). Prices are in euro, per organisation (school). Classes is free for parents and students. Only the school pays. The plan is chosen by the number of users (students and parents) in the school. Every plan includes every feature. It is paid up front for 3 or for 12 months; 12 months is 20% off. - "Start" (up to 30 users, 1 teacher): 52 €/month on 3 months; 42 €/month on 12 months (499 € for the year) - "Up to 50" (up to 50 users, 2 teachers): 70 €/month on 3 months; 56 €/month on 12 months (672 € for the year) - "Up to 100" (up to 100 users, 5 teachers): 115 €/month on 3 months; 92 €/month on 12 months (1104 € for the year) - "Up to 150" (up to 150 users, 10 teachers): 155 €/month on 3 months; 124 €/month on 12 months (1488 € for the year) - "Up to 300" (up to 300 users, 15 teachers): 195 €/month on 3 months; 156 €/month on 12 months (1872 € for the year) - "Unlimited" (unlimited users and teachers): 295 €/month on 3 months; 236 €/month on 12 months (2832 € for the year) Optional one-time team training: 2 hours for 49 €, 4 hours for 89 €. Setup and onboarding help are included in every plan. Franchise networks get a separate offer. To start: a free consultation at https://www.classes.bg/en/start/konsultatsiya. ### Frequently asked questions about Classes id: about.faq · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/faq For: schools, parents Data and security, onboarding, Bulgarian support, trying before committing, and parents without the app. What it does: Answers the questions schools ask before choosing Classes. How it works: See the questions below. If yours isn't there, write to the Classes team. FAQ: Q: What happens to my data? A: Your students' data, enrolled children and the school's internal information are confidential and visible only to you as organisers. The system runs on Microsoft Azure servers in line with GDPR. You can export or delete your data at any time. Q: How long does onboarding take? A: The Classes team does the whole onboarding. You share your school's information and we set everything up. We stay available afterwards. Q: Is there support in Bulgarian? A: Yes. Classes is fully in Bulgarian: both the interface and the support. The team is available by chat and phone. Q: Can I try it before committing? A: Yes. There is a demo with real data and a free consultation. Contact us for access. Q: What if parents don't want to use an app? A: Most parents quickly see the convenience once the schedule, payments and notifications are in one place. The Classes team helps parents through the whole process. ### Demo, consultation and contacting the team id: about.demo-and-support · url: https://www.classes.bg/en/help/about/demo-and-support For: schools, parents How to see Classes in action, book a free consultation and reach support. What it does: Shows the path from first interest to a working school in Classes: a demo video, a 30-minute live call and setup by the team. How it works: Demo: the demo page has a short video of Classes handling a real day at a school: schedule, groups, attendance and charges. Consultation: 30 minutes live with someone from the team, free and with no commitment. We show Classes with examples from your school. Book it from the Book a demo and Get started buttons on the site. Setup: after the call, the Classes team creates the school, groups and accounts for you. Support: by chat and phone, in Bulgarian and English, for every school with a plan. You can also write to the email at the bottom of the site. Steps: 1. Watch the demo video on the demo page. 2. Press Book a 30-minute demo and pick a time. 3. After the call, choose a plan on the pricing page; the team sets your school up. FAQ: Q: How do I contact Classes? A: Book a free consultation from the site or write to the contact email at the bottom of every page. Schools with a plan have chat and phone support.